fJOLIS 


GiM-N  <&;  Company 


GIFT   OF 
Milton  Ne-wmark 


iX^> 


Digitized  by  the  Internet  Archive 

in  2007  with  funding  from 

IVIicrosoft  Corporation 


http://www.archive.org/details/firstbookinoldenOOcookrich 


FIRST  BOOK  IN  OLD  ENGLISH 


GRAMMAR,    READER,   NOTES,    AND 
VOCABULARY 


BY 


ALBERT   S.   COOK 

PROFESSOR   OF   THE   ENGLISH    LANGUAGE   AND    LITERATURE 
IN    YALE    UNIVERSITY 


SECOND  EDITION,  REVISED  AND  ENLARGED 


BOSTON,  U.S.A. 

GINN   &   COMPANY,   PUBLISHERS 

1895 


PEEFAOE. 


The  present  volume  is  an  attempt  to  be  of  service 
to  those  who  are  beginning  the  study  of  our  language, 
or  who  desire  to  acquaint  themselves  with  a  few  speci- 
mens of  our  earliest  literature.  It  has  seemed  to  the 
author  that  there  were  two  extremes  to  be  avoided 
in  its  compilation  —  the  treatment  of  Old  English  as 
though  it  consisted  of  wholly  isolated  phenomena,  and 
the  procedure  upon  a  virtual  assumption  that  the  student 
was  already  acquainted  with  the  cognate  Germanic  tongues 
and  with  the  problems  and  methods  of  comparative  phi- 
lology. The  former  treatment  robs  the  study  of  its 
significance  and  value,  which,  like  that  of  most  other 
subjects,  is  found  in  its  relations;  the  latter  repels  and 
confounds  the  student  at  a  stage  when  he  is  most  in 
need  of  encouragement  and  attraction. 

How  well  the  author  has  succeeded  must  be  left  to 
the  judgment  of  others  —  the  masters  whom  he  follows 
at  a  distance,  and  the  students  whose  interests  he  has 
constantly  borne  in  mind.  Of  one  thing,  however,  he 
can  assure  such  as  may  care  to  inspect  his  book  —  that 
he  has  spared  no  pains  in  treading  the  path  which 
seemed  to  be  thus  marked  out  for  him  in  advance.  Errors 
there  doubtless  are,  —  errors  of  judgment,  and  errors  of 
fact;   but  for  both  he  must  plead  the  best  excuse  ever 


Vi  PREFACE. 

offered  for  similar  imperfections,  that  of  King  Alfred 
in  the  last  sentence  on  page  162  of  this  volume. 

The  selections  have  been  made  with  reference  to  giving 
a  fairly  just,  though  necessarily  incomplete,  view  of  the 
surroundings,  occupations,  problems,  ideals,  and  senti- 
ments of  our  English  ancestors.  The  earlier  pieces  of 
both  prose  and  poetry  are  short;  the  longer  ones  that 
follow  either  have  more  sustained  interest,  or  are  sup- 
ported by  their  reference  to  preceding  ones;  but  they, 
too,  fall  into  natural  subdivisions,  partially  indicated  in 
the  printing,  so  that  they  may  be  read  as  successions 
of  short  extracts. 

It  may  be  objected  that  Latin  and  Greek  have  been 
too  freely  used  for  illustration.  The  reply  to  such  an 
objection  is  twofold:  that  the  book  is  likely  to  fall 
into  the  hands  of  some  who  possess  at  least  an  elemen- 
tary acquaintance  with  one  or  both  of  these  languages, 
and  that  to  these  the  disclosure  of  the  relations  involved 
in  a  comparison  with  the  ancient  tongues  will  materially 
increase  their  pleasure  and  their  gain ;  and,  secondly,  that 
the  book  may  be  intelligently  read,  from  cover  to  cover, 
without  the  slightest  knowledge  of  either  Greek  or  Latin. 

The  passages  from  Bede  have  been  taken  from  Miller's 
edition ;  the  portion  of  ^If ric's  Colloquy  from  the  Wright- 
Wiilker  Vocabularies ;  the  extracts  from  Wulfstan  from 
Napier's  edition;  the  selections  from  Beowulf  and  Andreas 
are  based  upon  the  Grein-Wiilker  edition  of  the  Bibliothek 
der  angelsachsischen  Poesie ;  that  from  the  Judith  upon  my 
own  edition.  The  originals  of  the  others  are  either  indi- 
cated, or  will  be  patent  to  scholars. 


PREFACE.  Vll 

The  normalization  of  the  texts  to  an  Early  West  Saxon 
basis  —  Cosijn's  Altwestsachsische  Grammatik  being  the 
chief  authority  for  norms  —  will  doubtless  be  criticised 
by  some  scholars  whose  judgment  is  entitled  to  respect; 
but  here  again  the  author  has  had  in  mind  the  beginner, 
for  whose  especial  use  the  book  is  intended.  If  he  wel- 
comes this  introduction  on  account  of  its  greater  ease, 
and  is  yet  not  led  astray  by  it;  if  he  becomes  solidly 
grounded  in  the  elements,  so  that  further  progress  is 
facilitated,  while  yet  he  has  nothing  to  unlearn  in  the 
future;  the  author  will  be  consoled  by  his  approbation 
for  the  censure  of  those  who  entertain  a  different  opinion 
on  this  head. 

To  the  normalization  of  the  texts  exception  has  been 
made  in  the  case  of  the  poetry.  For  this  there  are  two 
reasons.  In  spite  of  the  greater  difficulty  of  the  poetry, 
the  student  should  have  had  sufficient  practice  in  reading, 
and  particularly  in  parsing  —  the  importance  of  which 
cannot  be  too  much  insisted  upon  —  to  proceed  in  the 
poetry  without  great  obstruction  from  the  retention  of 
manuscript  forms,  especially  as  the  cross-references  of  the 
Vocabulary  will  furnish  him  with  the  necessary  assist- 
ance; and,  secondly,  the  normalization  of  the  poetry  ayouM 
sometimes  have  been  attended  with  considerable  uncer- 
tainty, an  uncertainty  which  is  decidedly  less  in  the  case 
of  the  prose.  Besides,  such  profit  as  accrues  to  the 
student  from  the  inspection  of  the  irregular  orthography 
of  the  manuscripts  may,  by  the  literal  reproduction  of 
the  orthography,  be  gained  from  this  part. 

The  device  noted  on  page  202  is  presented  with  some 


Viii  PREFACE. 

persuasion  of  its  utility,  though  frankly  as  an  experi- 
ment on  which  the  author  would  gladly  take,  after 
sufficient  trial,  the  judgment  of  his  colleagues. 

The  Grammar  is  the  merest  outline.  Its  condensation 
has  been  largely  effected  by  confining  the  treatment 
almost  entirely  to  Old  English  itself,  excluding  all  refer- 
ences to  the  theoretical  Primitive  Germanic.  This  method 
is  accompanied  with  some  loss;  but,  again,  it  is  the 
beginner  whom  the  author  has  had  in  view.  More  doubt- 
ful, perhaps,  is  the  expediency  of  an  empirical  classi- 
fication of  nouns,  instead  of  the  scientific  arrangement 
according  to  stems;  many  of  us  have  unquestionably 
found,  however,  that  the  more  purely  scholarly  classi- 
fication occasions  not  a  little  trouble  in  practice,  and  that 
its  theoretical  advantages  are  dearly  purchased  at  this 
stage,  before  there  is  any  adequate  conception  of  com- 
parative philology  and  its  postulates.  The  author  is  not 
so  clear  with  regard  to  the  probable  utility  of  paragraphs 
12-14,  on  original  and  derivative  vowels;  criticism  on  this 
point  will  be  especially  welcome. 

The  Appendixes  include  illustrative  matter  for  which 
there  was  no  natural  place  elsewhere,  or  materials  and 
hints  for  those  who  would  prosecute  their  researches  a 
little  further.  The  first  three  of  them  carry  their  mean- 
ing on  their  face ;  the  last  is  provided  in  order  to  facilitate 
the  beginning  of  dialectic  study.  It — Appendix  IV. — 
has  cost  more  thought  than  is  likely  to  appear  on  the 
surface.  The  dialects  have  as  yet  been  but  imperfectly 
discriminated ;  it  is  easier  to  say  what  is  non-West  Saxon 
than  what  is  Mercian  or  Kentish ;  the  residuum  of  demon- 


PREFACE.  IX 

strably  pure  Nortliuinbrian  forms  in  Csedmon's  Hymrij  for 
example,  turns  out  to  be  surprisingly  small. 

Care  has  been  devoted  to  the  unification  of  the  book  — 
to  making  its  parts  mutually  coherent;  the  illustrations 
of  syntax  are  therefore  taken  from  the  texts  printed  in 
the  Eeader,  and  the  Vocabulary  contains  copious  refer- 
ences to  the  Grammar.  It  is  hoped  that  this  plan  will 
prevent  distraction  on  the  part  of  the  student,  and  con- 
duce to  a  nearly  absolute  mastery  of  the  matter  here  pre- 
sented. The  book  ought  to  occupy  at  least  a  semester, 
and  could  readily  be  used  for  a  longer  time.  The  author 
believes  that  the  history  of  the  English  language  may 
most  profitably  begin  with  such  a  manual,  studied  under 
a  competent  teacher  and  with  access  to  a  few  good  refer- 
ence books.  Thus  used,  it  might  advantageously  be  intro- 
duced into  the  earlier  part  of  College  courses,  and  perhaps 
into  the  better  sort  of  High  Schools  and  Academies. 

In  conclusion,  it  is  a  pleasure  to  the  author  to  acknowl- 
edge his  indebtedness  to  Miss  Elizabeth  Deering  Hanscom, 
graduate  student  of  Yale  University  and  American  Fellow 
of  the  Association  of  Collegiate  Alumnse,  who  has  rendered 
material  assistance  in  the  preparation  of  the  Vocabulary. 

Yale  University,  December  11,  1893. 


PREFACE   TO    THE    SECOND   EDITION. 


The  favorable  reception  accorded  to  the  first  edition 
has  encouraged  the  author,  besides  correcting  several 
small  errors,  to  amplify  Appendix  L,  and  to  add  a  new 
Appendix,  numbered  V.  The  provision  of  a  brief  bibli- 
ography has  been  so  generally  welcomed  that  it  has 
seemed  desirable  to  append  a  list  of  books  of  a  more 
advanced  character,  while  retaining  the  former  one  essen- 
tially unchanged.  No  attempt  at  completeness  has  been 
made,  but  perhaps  not  many  books  of  primary  value  have 
been  omitted.  The  illustration  of  umlaut  from  Gothic, 
suggested  by  a  reviewer,  now  constitutes  Appendix  V. 

Certain  teachers  having  expressed  a  wish  that  the 
Vocabulary  should  give  the  gender  of  nouns,  the  author 
thinks  it  proper  to  state  the  principle  upon  which  the 
designation  of  gender  was  omitted.  This  principle  was 
that  the  Grammar  should  be  in  constant  use.  The  car- 
dinal use  of  a  knowledge  of  the  gender  is  with  reference 
to  declension;  given  the  declension,  and  the  gender  fol- 
lows. Now  the  references  to  the  Grammar  under  nouns 
primarily  indicate  the  declensions.  If,  then,  the  student 
recognizes  the  meaning  of  such  references  as  43,  47,  etc., 
it  is  a  proof  that  he  is  sufficiently  acquainted  with  the 
paradigms  they  indicate;  if  not,  it  is  a  clear  sign  that 
he  ought  to  refer  to  them,  and  that   a   mere   knowledge 


XU  PREFACE   TO   THE    SECOND    EDITION. 

of  the  gender  would  not  suffice.  This  is  the  author's 
opinion,  but  he  holds  himself  prepared  to  defer  to  the 
expressed  wish  of  his  colleagues,  when  he  can  believe 
that  that  wdsh  is  at  all  general  among  those  who  have 
given  the  book  a  fair  trial. 

The  author  hopes  soon  to  issue  a  small  companion 
volume  of  exercises  in  Old  English,  designed  chiefly  to 
facilitate  drill  on  inflections.  These  exercises  will  con- 
sist of  brief  sentences  for  translation  into  Old  English, 
based  upon  the  successive  prose  selections  of  the  Eeader, 
together  Avith  an  Englisli-Old  English  Vocabulary. 

A  final  Avord  to  tliose  who  use  this  book,  —  a  word 
based  upon  experience  with  it :  Look  up  carefully  every 
foot-note,  and  constantly  refer  from  the  Vocabulary  to  the 
Grammar,  icith  reference  to  the  sjwedy  'mastery  of  the  latter, 
supplementing  this  2^''ocess  by  the  committal  to  memory  of 
jmradigins. 

Yale  University,  December  .'^1,  1<S94. 


CONTEE^TS. 


PAGE 

GRAMMAR 1 

Introduction 3 

Dialects  and  Teriods 3 

Phonology  6 

Letters  and  Sounds 5 

Effects  and  Relations  of  Sounds 10 

Consonantal  Loss  and  Change 21 

Inflection 26 

Declension  of  Nouns 26 

Declension  of  Adjectives 38 

Comparison  of  Adjectives 42 

Formation  and  Comparison  of  Adverbs 44 

Numerals 46 

Pronouns 48 

Verbs 53 

Formation  or  Words 81 

Syntax • 88 

Nouns 88 

Adjectives 99 

Adverbs 100 

Pronouns 100 

Verbs 101 

Prepositions 106 

Conjunctions 107 

Prosody 108 

READER 121 

I.   The  Creation  of  the  World 122 

II.    Trades  and  Occupations 129 

III.  The  Day  of  Judgment *    .     .     .     .  134 

IV.  Bede's  Description  of  Britain  ...     c     ...     .  137 
V.   ^thelwald  calms  the  Sea    .........  141 


XIV  CONTENTS. 

PAGE 

VI.    The  Invasion  of  Britain  by  the  Picts  and  Scots  .  144 

VII.    Thk  Passing  of  Chad 160 

VIII.    The  Dangers  of  Greatness 156 

IX.    Duties  of  the  Rich  toward  the  Poor 159 

X.   Alfred's  Preface  to  Boethius 162 

XI.   A  Prayer  of  King  Alfred 163 

XII.    Apollonius  of  Tyre 164 

The  Shipwreck 165 

Apollonius  and  the  Fisherman 166 

The  Incidents  in  the  Gymnasium 168 

Apollonius  at  the  Feast 170 

Entry  of  the  Princess 172 

A  Lesson  in  Music 174 

Apollonius  as  Teacher 177 

The  Three  Suitors 178 

The  Princess  chooses 180 

Apollonius  relates  his  Adventures 184 

The  Recognition 185 

The  Fisherman's  Reward 186 

The  End 187 

XIII.  The  Six  Days'  Work  of  Creation 189 

XIV.  The  Song  of  the  Gleeman 200 

XV.   The  Rout  of  the  Assyrians 202 

XVI.   Selections  from  the  Andreas 210 

Conversation  between  Andrew  and  the  Sea-Captain  211 

The  Voyage.  —  Storm  at  Sea 218 

Andrew  relates  Christ's  Stilling  of  the  Tempest .     .  222 

Andrew  desires  Instruction  in  Seamanship     .     .     .  225 

The  Pilot  recognizes  God's  Presence  with  Andrew  .  227 

Andrew  is  carried  to  the  City 228 

Andrew's  Disciples  relate  their  Adventure     .     .     .  230 

APPENDIXES 233 

Appendix  I.   Some  Useful  Books  for  the  Study  of  Old  English  235 
Appendix  II.   Correspondences  of  Old  English  and  Modern 

German  Vowels 245 

Appendix  III.  Andrew's  Negotiations  with  the  Steersman  .  247 

Appendix  ly.   Specimens  of  the  Dialects 250 

Appendix  V.  I-umlaut  illustrated  from  Gothic 268 

VOCABULARY 271 


GRAMMAR 


IJSTTEODUOTION. 


Dialects  and  Periods. 


1.  Old  English  (sometimes  called  Anglo-Saxon)  is 
the  name  of  the  Germanic  language  spoken  in  Eng- 
land between  the  middle  of  the  fifth  and  the  middle 
of  the  twelfth  century.  Its  literature  extends  from 
the  eighth  to  the  twelfth  century,  and  there  are  no 
Old  English  words  found  in  documents  earlier  than 
the  seventh  century.  The  principal  prose  texts  date 
from  the  period  of  King  Alfred  (871-901  A.D.),  or 
from  that  of  Abbot  JElfric  (pronounced  Alfric),  who 
flourished  about  the  year  1000  a.d.  The  poetical 
pieces  are  mostly  of  uncertain  dates,  ranging  from 
the  eighth  to  the  tenth  or  eleventh  century. 

There  are  four  dialects  of  Old  English,  the  Nor- 
thumbrian, Mercian,  Kentish,  and  West  Saxon;  of 
these  the  Mercian  is  intermediate  in  its  characteris- 
tics between  the  Northumbrian  and  West  Saxon.  The 
Northumbrian  dialect  formed  the  basis  of  modern 
Scotch  and  Northern  English,  the  Mercian  of  stand- 
ard literary  English.  The  literature  of  Old  English 
is   chiefly  extant   in  West   Saxon,  though   the  poetry, 


4  INTRODUCTION. 

and  some  of  the  prose,  contains  forms  from  other  dia- 
lects, chiefly  from  the  Northumbrian. 

Since  the  remains  of  the  other  dialects  are  compara- 
tively small.  West  Saxon  is  the  principal  existing 
representative  of  Old  English,  and  hence  the  two 
terms  are  often  used  interchangeably.  West  Saxon 
is  divided  into  Early  West  Saxon  (EWS.)  and  Late 
West  Saxon  (LWS.).  The  former  is  the  language  as 
written  in  King  Alfred's  time,  the  latter  as  in  that 
of  Abbot  ^Ifric  and  his  successors.  A  hundred  years 
made  some  changes  in  the  language,  but  rather  with 
respect  to  syntax,  euphony,  and  style  in  general  than 
to  the  forms  of  words,  though  these  also  underwent 
some  modification. 

In  this  work,  the  forms  are  those  of  Early  West 
Saxon,  which  is  assumed  as  the  standard,  even  when 
the  selections  are  from  Late  West  Saxon. 


PHONOLOGY. 


Letters  and  Sounds. 


2.  Alphabet.  —  The  Old  English  alphabet  has  the  let- 
ters of  Modern  English,  with  the  exception  of  /,  k^  q^ 
t;,  and  2,  and  with  the  addition  of  tS  and  J?,  both  of 
which  represent  the  modern  th.  Of  these,  j  and  v 
are  never  used,  being  represented  by  g  (or  i)  and  f, 
respectively;  ^,  g,  and  z  but  rarely,  k  being  commonly 
represented  by  c,  ks(^cs)  by  x,  q(u)  by  c(w),  and 
z  by  ts.  The  two  unfamiliar  characters  tS  and  }?  are 
pronounced  eth  (eth  in  brethren)  and  thorn^  respec- 
tively; they  are  used  interchangeably  in  the  manu- 
scripts ;  in  this  book  3"  will,  in  general,  stand  for  both. 

3.  Vowels  and  diphthongs.  —  The  vowel-letters  are 
those  of  Modern  English,  with  the  addition  of  ae,  ^, 
and  9.  The  two  latter  denote  respectively  an  e  and 
o  which  sprang  from  an  original  a  (but  ^  occasionally 
from  o;  17,  25).  The  vowels  may  be  either  short  or 
long. 

The  diphthongs  are  represented  by  ea,  eo,  and  ie, 
both  short  and  long.  The  second  vowel  sound  in 
each  diphthong  is  scarcely  heard  in  pronunciation,  the 
first  element  being  the  one  which  receives  the  stress. 


6  PHONOLOGY. 

The  vowel  of  every  syllable  is  to  he  pronounced^  hut  in 
an  unstressed  syllable  the  sound  is  less  distinct  (23). 

4.  Quantity.  —  Long  vowels  and  diphthongs  must  be 
carefully  distinguished  from  short  ones.  In  normal- 
ized texts,  length  is  indicated  by  the  acute  accent  (') 
or  the  macron  ("),  placed  over  a  vowel  or  the  first 
element  of  a  diphthong.  For  instance,  OE.  god  is 
Mod.  Eng.  god^  but  OE.  gcSd  or  god  is  Mod.  Eng. 
good ;  so  for,  /or,  but  for,  we7it ;  baer,  hare^  but  bger, 
bier;  ac,  hut^  but  ac,  oak;  geat,  gate^  but  geat, 
poured ;  is,  z's,  but  is,  ice  ;  man,  waw,  but  man,  crime  ; 
tol,  toll^  but  tol,  tool ;  w<jnde,  went^  but  wende,  weened. 
Beginners  should  never  fail  to  note  whether  the  radi- 
cal vowel  of  each  word  is  long  or  short,  and  should 
no  more  confound  a  with  a  than  a  with  y. 

The  length  of  a  syllable  must  be  distinguished  from 
that  of  a  vowel.  Every  syllable  containing  a  long 
vowel  is  itself  long,  but  so  is  also  one  which  con- 
tains a  short  vowel  followed  by  any  two  consonants 
or  a  double  consonant.  In  the  latter  case,  the  syllable 
is  said  to  be  long  by  position ;  in  the  former,  by  nature. 

5.  Pronunciation  of  vowels  and  diphthongs.  —  The  pro- 
nunciation of  the  vowels  and  diphthongs  can  only  be 
mastered  by  ignoring  their  pronunciation  in  Modern 
English.  Any  modern  language,  or  Latin  or  Greek  as 
pronounced  by  the  Continental  method,  would  be  a 
safer  guide. 


LETTERS    AND   SOUNDS. 


The  exact  pronunciation  of  the  Old  English  vowels 
and  diphthongs  can  be  but  imperfectly  represented. 
The  learner  will  not  be  far  astray  if  he  follows  the 
pronunciation  indicated  in  this  table :  — 


a 

as  in      last  (not 

a  in  man) 

habban 

a 

far 

an 

ae 

"          man 

set 

86 

' '          care 

air 

e,  ^ 

"          men 

help,  m^nn 

e 

they 

he 

i 

fin 

In 

1 

"          machine 

win 

O,  Q 

' '          broad  (but  shorter) 

god 

o 

"          tone 

god 

u 

full 

full 

u 

"         rune 

dun 

y 

fdiinn  (Germ.) 

I  din  (less  accurate) 

dynn 

y 

rgriin  (Germ.) 

1  green  (less  accurate) 

hyd 

ea 

=        se  +  uh 

eall 

ea 

=         e  +ah 

neah 

eo 

=        e  +  0 

eom 

eo 

=         e  +0 

freond 

ie 

i  +eh 

fierd 

ie 

=         i  +  eh 

nied 

Note.  —  The  true  sounds  of  y  and  y  are  most  readily  produced 
by  placing  the  lips  in  the  position  for  pronouncing  long  oo^  and, 
while  retaining  the  lips  in  this  position,  pronouncing  respectively 
the  i  in  zY,  and  the  ee  in  deem. 

6.    Consonants.  —  The  consonants  are  divided  into  — 
labials.,  w,  m,  p,  b,  f. 


dentals^  r,  1,  n,  t,  d,  9", 

gutturals  (sometimes  jt?cSSHI^,^jjg'), 


ym^ftf^. 


c,  ff,  h, 


\A 


y   ( 


-  .-.a. . 


8  PHONOLOGY. 

7.  Pronunciation  of  consonants.  —  w  was  pronounced 
as  in  Mod.  Eng.,  also  distinctly  in  the  combinations 
wr,  wl ;  m,  p,  and  b  as  in  Mod.  Eng. ;  f  as  /  and  as 
.(2). 

r  and  1  were  pronounced  nearly  as  in  Mod.  Eng.  (but 
see  21) ;  n,  t,  d,  as  in  Mod.  Eng. ;  9"  as  ^A  in  thin  and 
in  the  ;  s  as  s  and  as  z. 

ng"  was  pronounced  like  Mod.  Eng.  ng  in  finger; 
when  palatal  (10)  it  resembled  ng  in  singe,  c  was  pro- 
nounced like  Mod.  Eng.  A:,  or,  when  palatal,  like  English 
ch  in  child.,  and  was  distinctly  heard  as  k  in  the  com- 
bination en ;  eg-  like  dg  in  Mod.  Eng.  bridge  (see  11). 
g  was  pronounced  as  g  (but  see  9)  and  as  y  (10).  h 
was  pronounced  as  in  English,  even  in  the  combinations 
hi,  liii,  lir,  liw ;  when  final,  and  in  the  combinations  ht, 
lid",  and  hli,  it  had  the  sound  of  German  ch.,  as  in  ach 
or  in  ich.     lis  was  pronounced  like  Mod.  Eng.  x  (cf.  2). 

When  c  was  pronounced  as  ^,  g  as  g.,  and  h  as  Ger- 
man ch  in  ach^  these  letters  are  to  be  regarded  as  gut- 
turals ;  when  as  ch  in  child.,  y.,  and  ch  in  ich  respectively, 
as  palatals  (10). 

8.  Surds  and  sonants.  —  The  consonants  p,  t,  c,  to- 
gether with  f,  s,  3"  when  pronounced  like  Mod.  Eng. 
/,  s,  th  in  thin.,  are  called  surds.  All  the  other  con- 
sonants, and  all  the  vowels  and  diphthongs,  are  called 
sonants. 

f,  s,  and  tS  are  surds  when  beginning  a  syllable,  or 
following  a  surd  at  the  end   of  a   syllable ;   they  are 


LETTERS   AND   SOUNDS.  9 

sonants,  that  is,  are  pronounced  like  v,  2,  and  th  in 
the^  when  they  occur  between  two  sonants,  or  follow 
a  sonant  at  the  end  of  a  syllable.  To  the  foregoing 
rule  there  may  be  some  exceptions  ;  in  case  of  doubt, 
the  analogy  of  Modern  English  may  be  followed. 

9.  Spirants  and  stops.  —  Spirants  are  consonantal 
sounds  producible  by  a  continuous  emission  of  breath. 
Stops  are  momentary  or  explosive.  The  spirants  are 
f,  s,  S",  and  h  (properly  also  g)  ;  to  f  and  tS  correspond 
the  surd  stops  p  and  t,  and  the  sonant  stops  b  and  d. 

10.  Gutturals  and  palatals.  —  The  consonants  c,  g",  h, 
are  gutturals  when  occurring  before  consonants  or  the 
vowels  a,  a,  e,  o,  <?,  o,  u,  u,  y,  and  y  (and  sometimes 
se).  They  are  palatals  when  occurring  before  the  pal- 
atal vowels  se,  e,  ^,  i,  1,  ea,  ea,  eo,  eo,  ie,  ie  (and  some- 
times se);  c  and  g  medially  (that  is,  in  the  middle 
of  a  word),  when  they  are  or  may  be  followed  by  e 
or  i ;  c  likewise  in  the  combination  sc  (pronounced 
almost  like  sh)  ;  g  in  the  medial  combination  eg ;  and 
c(cc,  nc),  g(ng)  often  medially  and  finally  after  a  pal- 
atal vowel,  but  at  least  ng  not  always :  e.g.^  ^ngel, 
Englisc  have  not  j\^  =  7ij.  For  the  pronunciation  of 
these  consonants  as  palatals  see  7. 

11.  Double  consonants.  —  Double  consonants  must  not 
be  pronounced  as  in  Mod.  Eng.,  except  at  the  end  of 
a    syllable.      When    medial,    each   consonant    is    pro- 


10  PHONOLOGY. 

nounced  separately :  suniium  as  sun-num^  the   w's   as 
in  Mod.  Eng.  penknife. 

Double  f,  when  sonant,  is  always  represented  by  bb, 
and  double  g  is  usually  written  cgr.  The  only  con- 
sonant never  doubled  is  w. 

Effects  and  Relations  of  Sounds. 

12.  Original  and  derivative  vowels.  —  Of  the  vowels 
and  diphthongs  of  Old  English,  some  are  original,  in 
the  sense  of  being  more  directly  an  inheritance  from 
the  Parent  Germanic  tongue,  while  others  are  deriva- 
tive, or  result  from  modifications  of  those  that  we  call 
original. 

The  original  vowels  and  diphthongs  are  the  fol- 
lowing :  — 

a,  ii,  ae,  ai  (sometimes),  e,  e  (rarely),  i  (sometimes), 
i,  o,  o,  u  (regularly),  u,  ea,  eo  (sometimes). 

The  derivative  vowels  and  diphthongs  are  :  — 

ae  (sometimes),  ai  (sometimes),  ^,  e  (usually),  i 
(sometimes),  <?,  u  (occasionally),  y,  y,  ea,  eo,  eo  (some- 
times), ie,  ie.  Though  ea,  eo,  ie  when  short  are  all 
derivatives,  ie  may  be  called  a  derivative  of  the  sec- 
ond order,  since  it  arises  from  one  of  the  two  others. 

13.  Relation  of  original  to  derivative  vowels.  —  The 
relations  between  original  and  derivative  vowels  may 
thus  be  shown  (see  17,  18,  20,  21,  25):  — 


EFFECTS    AND    RELATIONS   OF   SOUNDS.  11 


Original. 

Derivative. 

a 

ae,  ?, 

Q,  ea. 

le 

a 

^ 

e 

i,  eo, 

le,  o 

i 

eo,  u 

Q 

? 

o 

^,  eo 

o 

e,  eo 

u 

y 

ii 

y 

ea 

ie 

eo 

le 

14.   Relation  of  derivative  to  original  vowels.  —  Revers- 
ing the  order  of  the  last  table,  we  obtain  :  — 


;VAT 

IV 

E. 

Original. 

ae 

a 

se 

a 

« 

a,  Q,  o 

e 

o 

i 

e 

Q 

a 

y 

u 

y 

u 

ea 

a  (ae) 

ea 

(rarely) 

ae 

eo 

e,  i,  o 

eo 

o 

ie 

a(ea),  ^, 

e  (eo). 

i(eo) 

ie 

ea,  eo 

Occasionally  (28,  29,  30)  se  is  derived  from  ae,  e  from 
e,  i  from  i,  o  from  o  or  a,  u  from  u,  y  from  y, 
ea  from  ea,  and  eo  from  eo.  Rarely  are  o  and  u 
derived  from  e  and  i  (26). 


12  PHONOLOGY. 

It  must  he  observed  that  not  every  vowel  standing  in 
the  column  of  derivatives  belongs  exclusively  there.  Thus 
i,  for  example^  is  sometimes  original  (12). 

15.  Umlaut.  —  Umlaut  is  a  change  effected  in  the 
vowel  of  a  stressed  syllable  by  the  vowel  of  a  following, 
usually  the  next  following,  syllable. 

There  are  two  chief  kinds  of  umlaut,  the  i-umlaut 
(pron.  ih'-oom'-lowt}^  and  the  u-  or  o-umlaut  (oo-  or  oh-'). 

16.  The  i-umlaut.  —  i-umlaut  is  a  change  effected  in 
a  vowel  or  diphthong  by  palatalization,  such  palatal- 
ization consisting  in  an  approximation  of  the  umlauted 
vowel  or  diphthong  to  the  sound  of  i  (ih).  The  cause 
of  i-umlaut  was  in  all  cases  an  i  or  a  j  (pronounced  like 
Mod.  Eng.  y)  of  a  following  syllable,  but  the  i  or  j 
usually  disappeared  before  the  period  of  historic  Old 
English,  or  was  turned  into  e.  When  the  word  umlaut 
is  used  without  qualification,  i-umlaut  is  to  be  under- 
stood.    See  Appendix  V. 

17.  Illustrations  of  i-umlaut.  —  The  effect  of  i-umlaut 
will  be  shown  by  the  following  table  :  — 


Original  Vowbl. 

Umlaut  Vowbl. 

a 

«(») 

a 

SR 

e 

i 

Q 

« 

o 

? 

o 

e 

u 

y 

EFFECTS    AND   RELATIONS    OF    SOUNDS.  13 


iiGiNAL  Vowel. 

Umlaut  Vowel. 

n 

y 

ea  (from  a) 

ie 

ea 

ie 

eo  (from  e) 

ie 

eo 

ie 

Examples  are :  mann  (man)^  m^nn  (men) ;  lar 
(lore)^  Iseran  (teach') ;  helpan  (help),  hilptf  (helps) ; 
nKjnn  (man),  m^iin  (men)  ;  oxa  (ox),  ^xeii  (oxen) ; 
dom  (doom),  deman  (judge) ;  wulle  (wool),  wyllen 
(ivoollen) ;  brucan  (use),  brycST  (uses) ;  eald  (old), 
ieldu  (age^  ;  heali  (high),  liielira  (higher)  ;  weorpan 
(throw),  wierpcT  (throws) ;  lireowan  (rue),  liriewS" 
(rues). 

Sometimes  two  words  are  so  related  that  y  seems 
to  be  i-umlaut  of  o,  like  gold  (gold),  gylden  (golden)  ; 
but  in  such  cases  the  o  came  from  an  earlier  u. 

The  umlaut  of  a  is  generally  ^,  but  in  some  words 
86  is  found. 

Strictly  speaking,  i  is  not  the  umlaut  of  e,  but  the 
phenomenon,  though  resulting  from  a  somewhat  dif- 
ferent cause,  is  virtually  the  same. 

18.  Palatal  influence.  —  Initial  g,  c,  and  sc,  change 
8e  (from  a)  to  ea,  se  to  ea,  and  ^,  e  to  ie ;  and  sc 
sometimes  changes  a  to  ea,  a  to  ea,  o  to  eo,  and  o 
to  eo.  Examples:  gaef  (gave),  geaf;  gsefon  (gave, 
plur.),  geafon ;  sc^ppan  (create),  scieppan ;  gefan 
(give),    giefan  ;     scacan     (shake),    sceacan  ;    scadan 


14  PHONOLOGY. 

(separate)^  sceadan ;  scop  (^poet)^  sceop ;  scoh  (shoe)^ 
sceoh.     Even  eo  from  u :  sceor,  from  scur,  shower. 

In  the  following  words,  the  ge  represents  original  j 
(pron.  ^)  :  geoc,  yoke  (orig.  joe) ;  g-eond,  through 
(orig.  jond)  ;  geong,  young  (orig.  jung)  ;  geoguS", 
youth  (orig.  juguKT) ;  geoinor,  grief  (orig.  jomor) ; 
gea,  yea  (origc  ja)  ;  gear,  year  (orig.  jar) ;  ge,  ye 
(orig.  je)« 

The  i  found  in  the  present  stem  of  some  weak  verbs 
(116)  stands  for  original  j  (pron.  ^),  and,  as  g  repre- 
sents this  j  in  the  words  just  instanced,  so  it  often 
appears  in  the  endings  of  these  weak  verbs,  sometimes 
alone,  sometimes  followed  by  e,  sometimes  in  one  of 
these  two  forms  preceded  by  i.  Thus  n^rian,  save, 
occurs  also  as  n<^rgaii,  n<;^rigan,  n^rigeaii,  etc.  ;  the 
ind.  pres.  1st  sing,  ii^rie  as  n<^rge,  ii^rige,  etc. 

Wherever  in  or  just  preceding  the  inflectional  end- 
ing of  a  word,  e  or  g-  is  followed  by  e  before  another 
vowel,  the  e  must  be  understood  to  indicate  an 
original  j  (pron.  ?/),  and  an  alternative  form  without 
e  also  exists.  Thus  seeean  and  seean,  seek;  ni^nigeo 
and  m^iiigo,  multitude.  Similarly,  the  i  and  g  in  the 
inflectional  endings  of  nouns  like  li^re,  army  (44.  2) 
represent  original  j  (pron.  y). 

19.  y  and  y  for  ie  and  ie.  —  y  and  y  properly  repre- 
sent the  i-umlaut  of  u  and  u,  but  are  also  frequently 
found   for   ie   and   Te.      Sometimes,   again,    the   latter 


EFFECTS   AND  RELATIONS   OF   SOUNDS  15 

are  represented  by  i  and  i.  Hence,  in  looking  for 
words  containing  these  letters,  it  is  never  safe  to  con- 
fine the  search  to  any  one  of  the  three.  From  eald, 
old^  is  formed  by  means  of  i-umlaut  the  noun  ieldu, 
age  (17) ;  but  the  latter  might  occur  in  a  text  or 
glossary  as  yldii.  Contrariwise,  on  finding  yldu  in  a 
text  or  glossary,  it  would  not  be  safe  to  conclude  that 
the  y  represented  the  i-umlaut  of  u,  since,  as  we  have 
just  seen,  it  really  goes  back  to  ea  and  a.  Again, 
were  the  word  to  be  found  as  ildu,  it  should  not  be 
inferred  that  the  i  is  either  original  or  derived  from 
e  (17),  for  the  reason  just  adduced. 

Remember  that  y  or  i,  ^liort  or  long^  may  stand  for 
ie,  short  or  long. 

20.  The  u-  or  o-umlaut.  —  This  umlaut  is  a  change 
effected  in  the  vowels  a,  e,  or  i  by  a  u  or  o  of  the 
following  syllable.  By  it  a  is  converted  to  ea,  and 
e  or  i  to  eo  (sometimes  i  to  io).  Examples :  caru, 
care^  becomes  cearu ;  weruld,  worlds  becomes  weoruld ; 
miluc,  milk^  becomes  meoloc  or  mioloc.  The  change 
of  vowel  is,  however,  not  invariable  in  these  circum- 
stances, and,  on  the  whole,  may  be  regarded  as  excep- 
tional. 

The  explanation  of  this  phenomenon  is  that  the 
vowel  sound  of  the  following  syllable  is  anticipated, 
as  it  were.  The  vocal  organs,  while  pronouncing  the 
a  (properly  ae)  of  caru   (caeru),  are   already  shaping 


16  PHONOLOGY. 

themselves  to  pronounce  the  u;  hence  the  result  is 
cseuru,  very  nearly,  which  is  further  modified  into 
cearu.  For  weoruld  the  explanation  is  similar,  but 
easier. 

21.  Breakings.  —  Before  r  +  consonant,  1  +  conso- 
nant, and  li  +  consonant  or  h  final,  a  is  regularly  con- 
verted into  ea,  and  e  or  i  frequently  into  eo.  This 
change  is  called  breaking,  because  the  one  vowel  is, 
as  it  were,  broken  into  two.     Examples :  — 

a)  a  to  ea :  arm  (arm)^  earm ;  aid  (old')^  eald ; 
ahta  (^eighf),  eahta. 

b}  e  or  i  to  eo  (io  sometimes  from  i):  ertfe  (^eartK)^ 
eortfe ;  elli  (elk)^  eolh ;  fehtan  (^jighf)^  feohtan ;  Piht 
(^Pict),  Piolit,  Peoht. 

It  must  be  remembered  that  the  sound  of  e  in  ea 
differs  materially  from  that  of  the  same  letter  in  eo 
(5 ;  cf.  20). 

The  explanation  of  breaking  lies  in  the  fact  that 
the  vowels  which  experienced  breaking  were  formed 
with  a  position  of  the  vocal  organs  quite  different 
from  that  concerned  in  the  production  of  r,  1,  and  h, 
as  pronounced  in  Old  English.  These  consonants,  at 
the  time  when  they  caused  breaking,  were  gutturals ; 
the  vowels  that  underwent  breaking  were  palatals 
(strictly  speaking,  when  we  say  that  a  was  broken, 
we  should  rather  say  that  it  was  se).  In  the  produc- 
tion of  these  consonants,  the  back  part  of  the  mouth 


EFFECTS   AND    RELATIONS    OF    SOUNDS.  17 

was  chiefly  concerned;  in  that  of  the  vowels  it  was 
the  forward  part.  Hence,  in  passing  from  the  vowel 
position  to  that  of  the  consonant,  an  intermediate  vowel 
sound  or  glide  was  produced,  akin  in  position  and 
sound  to  the  consonant  which  it  preceded.  Although 
these  consonants  have  at  present  a  pronunciation  which 
cannot  be  called  guttural,  yet  it  is  possible  to  pro- 
nounce a  sentence  like  '  What  ails  you  ? '  in  so 
drawling  a  manner,  especially  as  regards  'ails,'  that 
this  word  shall  have  nearly  the  sound  of  d-uls.  The 
obscure  wA-sound  thus  developed  may  be  compared 
to  the  second  element  of  the  diphthong  in  ea  and  eo. 
Here  may  be  adduced  Shakespearian  lines  such  as  — 

Strikes  his  breast  hard  (hah-iird),  and  anon  he  casts. 

—  Hen.  VIII.  3.  2.  117. 

Look  how  he  makes  to  Caesar,  mark  (mah-urk)  him. 

—  Jul.  C^s.  3.  2.  18. 

My  lord  (law-urd),  will  it  please  you  pass  along. 

—  Rich.  III.  3.  1.  136. 

In  all  these,  meter  seems  to  demand  that  the  itali- 
cized words  shall  be  pronounced  as  disyllabic  (Abbott's 
Shakespearian  G-rammar,  §  485). 

22.  Ablaut.  —  Ablaut  (pron.  ahp'-lowf)  is  a  prehistoric 
relation  existing  between  the  vowels  of  different  tense- 
stems  derived  from  the  same  verbal  root.  Thus  the 
relation  of  i^  a,  and  w,  in  the  Mod.  Eng.  sing^  sang^ 
sung^  is  an  ablaut  relation,  and   so   is   the  relation  oi 


18  PHONOLOGY. 

e,  0,  ^  in  the  Mod.  Eng.  drive^  drove^  driven.  In  Old 
English  the  tense-stems  of  these  verbs  would  be  sing-, 
sang,  sung-,  sung-  (104);  drif-,  draf,  drif-,  drif-  (102). 
In  the  former,  i,  a,  u,  u  stand  in  an  ablaut  relation ; 
in  the  latter,  i,  a,  i,  i. 

It  must  be  observed  that  the  verbal  stems  concerned 
sometimes  appear  in  nouns  and  adjectives,  as  well  as 
in  verbs.  Thus  the  vowel  of  the  Mod.  Eng.  noun 
song  stands  in  an  ablaut  relation  with  those  of  the  tense- 
stems  sing  and  sung.  Again,  in  Old  English,  the  i 
of  the  noun  bite,  bite^  stands  in  an  ablaut  relation 
with  the  other  vowels  of  the  tense-stems  of  bitan, 
bite.  The  latter  are  bit-,  bat,  bit-,  bit-  (102),  and 
hence  the  radical  vowel  of  the  noun  is  identical  with 
that  of  the  third  and  fourth  stems. 

Ablaut  is  not  to  be  confounded  with  umlaut.  Um- 
laut admits  of  explanation;  ablaut  must,  so  far  as  Old 
English  is  concerned,  be  merely  accepted  as  a  fact. 

23.   Stress,  and  the  vowels   of  unstressed  syllables. — 

The  stressed  syllable  is  the  principal  one,  and  usually 
the  first  one  of  the  word,  except  in  compounded  verbs, 
and  nouns  or  adjectives  with  the  prefixes  be-,  ge-,  and 
sometimes  for-;  these  stress  the  root  syllable.  The 
laws  relating  to  vowels  hold  only  of  stressed  syllables. 
In  unstressed  syllables,  especially  in  the  second  sylla- 
ble of  trisyllabic  words,  the  vowel  is  liable  to  pass  into 
a  neutral  sound,  often  represented  by  e,  or  to  disappear 


EFFECTS  AND  RELATIONS  OF  SOUNDS.       19 

altogether.  "When  the  vowel  disappears,  the  trisylla- 
bic word  of  course  becomes  disyllabic:  ^ng-el,  angel^ 
gen.  angles  (instead  of  <^ngeles)  ;  heafod,  head^  gen. 
heafdes  (instead  of  heafodes).  Syncope,  as  such  dis- 
appearance is  termed,  is  most  apt  to  occur  after  a  long 
syllable  (4). 

24.  Representation  of  Old  English  vowels  in  Modern 
English.  —  The  same  Old  English  vowel  letter  is  not 
always  represented  by  the  same  Mod.  Eng.  letter,  nor 
its  sound  by  the  same  Mod.  Eng.  sound ;  yet  there  is 
a  certain  uniformity,  differing  in  degree  with  different 
vowels,  in  the  representation  of  both  sound  and  letter. 
Some  of  the  more  regular  correspondences  are  given 
in  the  subjoined  table,  though  it  must  be  understood 
that  exceptions  are  numerous.  The  Mod.  Eng.  sound 
or  letter  that  is  first  given  is  the  commonest ;  the 
second  is  often  comparatively  rare.  The  figuration 
of  the  Mod.  Eng.  vowel  sounds  is  that  of  Webster's 
Dictionary.  For  details,  see  Mayhew's  Synopsis  of  Old 
English  Phonology. 

Mod.  k. 

Illustrations. 

S()U>'DS. 

a,  a  nama,  name  ;  land,  land 

But      ag         aw  a  haga,  haw 

o;  6  before  r ham,  home  ;  ar,  oar 

a,  a  glsed,  glad ;  faeder,  father 

But      8Bg        ai,  ay  a  braegn,  brain ;  daeg,  day 

e,  e  dsel,  deal ;  seed,  seed  ;  flsesc, 

flesh 


OE. 

Mod.  E. 

Letters. 

Letters. 

a 

a 

,       ag 

aw 

a 

0,  oa 

SB 

a 

8Bg 

ai,  ay 

se 

ea,  ee,  e 

20 


PHONOLOGY. 


OE.  Mod.  E. 

Letters.  Letters. 

e,  ^  e,  ea 

But     eg  ai,  ay,  a 


But 

ig 

i 

1 

i 

i 

i,  i 

O,  Q 

0,  oa 

6,  6 ;  6  1 
fore  r 

o 

00,  0 

6o,  11,  do 

But 

ow 

ow 

0 

u 

u,  o 

u,  oo 

But 

und 

ound 

ound 

a 

ou,  ow,  u 

ou,  u 

1,  U,  0 


y 

1 

i,  1 

ea 

a 

a,  a,  a 

But 

eald 

old 

old 

(strictly  a 

Id) 

ea 

ea 

e,  e 

But 

eaw 

ew 

u 

eo 

ea,  e,  u 

e,  u 

But 

eor 

ar,  ear. 

ar 

eo 

ee,  ie,  e 

e,  e 

But 

eow 

ew 

u 

ie 

e,  ie 

e,  e 

ie 

See  e 

Mod.  E. 

Sounds.  Illustrations. 

e,  e  feiaCer,  feather;  tw^lf,  twelve ; 

spere,  spear 
a  regn,  rain  ;  weg,  way  ;  tSegn, 

thane 
e  (seldom  e)    cwen,  queen ;  her,  here ; 

(bletsian,  bless) 
i  ;  1  before      fisc,  fish  ;  miht,  might ; 
ht,  nd,  Id       blind,  blind  ;  cild,  child 
nigon,  nine 

rim,  rime  ;  wisdom,  wisdom 
6,  6  ;  6  be-    bodig,  body  ;  iQng,  long  ; 

bolla,  bowl ;  hord,  hoard 
hrof,  roof  ;  offer,  other ;  boc, 

book 
blowan,  blow 
lufu,  love  ;  wulf,  wolf 
hund, hound 
hlad,  loud  ;  bur,  bower  ; 

butan,  but 
cyniiig,  king  ;   byrffen,  bur- 
then ;  wyrm,  worm 
bryd,  bride  ;  fyst,  fist 
weaxan,  wax ;  heard,  hard ; 

call,  all 
beald,  bold 

beacen,  beacon  ;  dead,  dead 

deaw,  dew 

eorffe,  earth  ;    beorg,  berg ; 

ceorl,  churl 
heorot,  hart ;  heorte,  heart 
deep,  deep ;  feond,  fiend ; 

deofol,  devil 
bleow,  blew 
hierde,  herd ;  gieldan,  yield 


1,  u 


CONSONANTAL   LOSS   AND   CHANGE.  21 

25.  Influence  of  nasals.  —  The  nasals  m  and  n  change 
a  preceding  a  to  q.  Usage  is  not  uniform ;  some 
texts  have  a  in  this  position,  and  others  9. 

When  a  word  cannot  be  found  under  a,  look  for  it 
under  9,  and  conversely/. 

26.  Influence  of  w.  —  In  cases  where  e  or  i  has  be- 
come eo  or  io  (20, 21),  a  preceding  w  is  apt  to  change  eo 
to  o  or  u,  and  io  to  u.  For  example,  weruld  (world^ 
becomes  weoruld  through  the  influence  of  u-umlaut 
(20),  and  this  may  then  become  woruld.  Simi- 
larly, widuwe  (widow')  becomes  wioduwe,  and  then 
wuduwe.  For  the  o  and  u  thus  produced,  y  is  some- 
times found. 

When  o,  u,  or  y  immediately  follows  w,  it  may  he 
suspected^  though  it  must  not  he  assumed.,  that  the  vowel 
was  once  eo  or  io,  originally  e  or  i. 

Consonantal  Loss  and  Change. 

27.  Loss  or  vocalization  of  w.  —  Some  words  ending 
in  a  long  vowel  or  diphthong  originally  ended  in  w, 
and  the  w  is  still  found  in  the  oblique  cases  of  these 
words.  Thus,  nom.  ciieo  (knee),  gen.  cneowes,  etc., 
and  occasionally  in  the  nominative,  cneow  (47.  3). 

At  the  end  of  a  word,  and  following  a  short  syllable 
which  ends  in  a  consonant,  u  often  stands  for  original 
w,  the  latter  having  undergone  vocalization  in  that 
position.      When    an    inflectional    syllable    is    added 


22  PHONOLOGY. 

beginning    with    a    vowel,    the  w    reappears.      Thus, 
nom.  gearii  (ready) ^  gen.  gearwes,  etc.  (57.  5). 

There  is  frequent  loss  of  initial  w  in  the  negative 
forms  of  the  verbs  wesan,  he^  witan,  kyiow^  willan, 
will:  nses,  was  not,  nat,  knoivs  not,  nolde,  ivoulcl  not, 
etc.  It  also  disappears  in  na(u)lit  for  ntiwiht,  naught, 
cue  for  cwic,  alive,  and  a  few  other  words. 

28.  Loss  or  replacement  of  g.  —  Before  d  and  n  (and 
before  tS  in  the  word  tiarian,  grant),  g  is  often  lost, 
the  preceding  vowel  being  lengthened  by  way  of 
compensation :  msegden  and  ingeden,  maiden ;  acegn 
and  aren,  thane.  Properly  speaking,  the  palatal  g, 
already  in  such  cases  pronounced  almost  like  a  vowel, 
becomes  indistinguishable  from  i  or  y  in  pronunciation, 
and  by  this  time  its  effect  is  simply  to  lengthen  the 
vowel  which  precedes.  In  a  similar  manner,  ig  may 
be  contracted  into  i,  sometimes  shortened  to  i:  hun- 
grig  and  hungri,  hungry;  ligeST  and  liST,  lies  (from 
licgau) ;  stigrap  and  stirap,  stirrup.  The  above  losses 
are  regular  only  after  palatal  vowels  (10). 

After  a  guttural  vowel  (10),  after  r,  or  (especially 
in  LWS.)  before  -st  and  -tS,  endings  respectively  of 
the  2d  and  3d  sing.  pres.  ind.,  g  frequently  becomes 
h,  occasionally  gli :  genog  and  genoh,  enough;  burg 
and  burh,  city ;   stigiSf  and  stihar,  climbs. 

29.  Loss  of  h.  —  Certain  words  ending  in  h  lose  the 
h  before  an  inflectional  ending  beginning  with  a  vowel, 


CONSONANTAL   LOSS   AND   CHANGE.  23 

at  the  same  time  lengthening  the  vowel  of  the  stem, 
if  short :  feorh,  life^  gen.  f cores ;  feoh,  property^  gen. 
feos.  There  are  besides  a  number  of  contract  verbs 
(101)  in  which  an  original  h  has  been  lost  before 
vowels  (100);    gefeon,  rejoice^  orig.  gefehan. 

The  initial  h  of  certain  indefinite  pronouns,  and  of 
the  various  forms  of  habban,  have^  is  frequently  lost 
after  ne,  not:  naw9'er,  na9'er  (27)  for  ne  ahwsearer, 
neither;   naefde,  had  not. 

30.  Loss  of  m  and  n.  —  Before  the  spirants  f,  s,  and 
9"  there  has  been  in  some  words  the  loss  of  an  original 
m  or  n,  with  a  lengthening  of  the  preceding  vowel : 
osle,  ousel^  orig.  amsala ;  us,  us^  orig.  uns.  When  the 
resulting  vowel  is  6,  or  its  umlaut  e  (17),  the  origi- 
nal vowel  was  a  (9  before  nasal,  25) :  gos,  goose, 
orig.  gans  ;    est,  favor,  orig.  ansti. 

31.  Metathesis  of  r.  —  In  some  words  in  which  a 
vowel  was  originally  preceded  by  r,  the  r  has  changed 
places  with  the  vowel.  Thus  burna,  fountain,  brook 
(cf.  Scottish  burn),  was  originally  brun(n)a  (cf. 
Germ.  Brunnen) ;  hors,  horse,  orig.  hros  (cf.  Germ. 
Ross). 

32.  Metathesis  of  sc.  —  After  a  vowel,  sc  frequently 
becomes  cs,  often  represented  by  hs  or  x  (2).  Thus 
ascian,  ash  (cf.  Germ.  (Ji)eischen)  becomes  acsian, 
ahsian,  axian  (dial.  Mod.  Eng.  axe). 


24  PHONOLOGY. 

33.  Change  of  d  to  t. — When  d  either  precedes  or  fol- 
lows a  surd  (8)  in  the  same  word,  it  regularly  becomes 
t.  Thus  from  bindan,  hind^  the  ind.  pres.  2d  sing,  is 
formed  by  adding  -st  (though  sometimes  -est),  thus, 
bindst ;  but,  in  accordance  with  this  principle,  bindst 
becomes  biiitst.  So  from  iecan,  increase^  the  ind.  pret. 
3d  sing,  is  formed  by  adding  -de,  thus,  lecde ;  but  iecde 
becomes  iecte. 

34.  Changes  of  9"  in  conjunction  with  other  dentals. — 
Whenever  d  or  t  comes  to  stand  immediately  before 
9",  the  combination  becomes  tt,  which  is  sometimes 
simplified  to  t  (35).  Thus  bindeiS',  ind.  pres.  3d 
sing,  of  bindan,  becomes  bindS"  by  ehsion  of  the  e 
in  an  unstressed  syllable  (23);  but  binder  invariably 
appears  as  bint ;  bidcT  and  bitS",  respectively  from 
bidan,  aivait^  and  bitan,  hite^  both  become  bitt  or  bit. 

By  a  somewhat  similar  change,  89"  often  becomes  st. 
For  (Ts  is  usually  found  ss,  which  may  be  simplified 
to  s  (35). 

Suspect  that  t  near  the  end  of  a  verb  may  stand  for 
d  or  9",  or  he  the  result  of  contraction. 

35.  Gemination  simplified.  —  Double  consonants  are 
of  frequent  occurrence,  especially  before  an  inflec- 
tional syllable  beginning  with  a  vowel.  Thus  swim- 
man,  swim,  b^dde,  to  a  bed,  etc.  But  gemination 
is  frequently  simplified,  or,   in   other   words,   the   sec- 


CONSONANTAL    LOSS    AND    CHANGE.  25 

ond  consonant  is  dropped,  (a)  at  the  end  of  a  word, 
(5)  before  another  consonant,  ((?)  in  certain  other 
situations.     Thus :  — 

(a)  mannes,  gen.  sing.,  but  inann  or  man,  man^ 
nom.  sing. ;  (5)  ealles,  gen.  sing,  of  eal(l),  all^  but 
ealne,  ace.  sing.  masc. ;  (c)  oSTer,  other^  with  gen. 
plur.  ending  oiSTerra,  but  usually  oSfera,  oSTra. 

36.  Gemination  pointing  to  original  j.  —  In  many 
words  which  contain  a  double  consonant,  especially 
those  whose  stem  vowel  is  ^,  the  stem  was  originally 
followed  by  j  (pron.  ^),  and  the  consonant  was  not 
geminated,  but  single :  s^llan,  give^  orig.  saljan.  This 
was  always  the  case  with  words  containing  eg",  which, 
it  will  be  remembered,  is  the  representative  of  g-g  (11)  : 
s^cgan,  say^  orig.  sagjan ;  hrycg,  hack^  orig.  hrug-jo-. 

37.  Grammatical  change.  —  As  between  certain  re- 
lated words,  there  is  an  interchange  of  9"  and  d,  s  and 
r:  inf.  ceosan,  choose,  past  part,  coren;  inf.  cwecTan, 
say,  past  part,  cweden  (cf.  the  noun  cwide,  discourse}. 
This  is  technically  known  as  grammatical  change. 
Under  similar  circumstances,  there  is  a  like  change 
between  h  and  g-,  and  li  and  w,  but  owing  to  a  partial 
disappearance  of  the  li  (cf .  100)  this  is  less  noticeable  : 
sliehi3r,  strikes  (inf.  slean),  slog,  struck;  siehS",  sees 
(inf.  seon),  sawon  (they)  saw. 


II^FLECTIOISr. 


Declension  of  Nouns. 

38.  Gender  of  nouns.  —  Nouns  are  either  masculine, 
feminine,  or  neuter.  Names  of  males  are  masculine, 
and  those  of  females  feminine,  except  maegden,  mseden 
(28),  girl^  wif,  ivife^  and  beam,  cild,  child^  which  are 
neuter.  The  gender  of  most  nouns  must  be  learned 
from  the  dictionary ;  but  all  nouns  ending  in  -a  are 
masculine,  and  belong  to  the  weak  declension  (53); 
all  ending  in  -dom,  -els,  -ere,  -liiid,  and  -scipe,  and  most 
in  -end,  with  names  of  persons  in  -iiijjr  and  -ling-,  are 
strong  masculines ;  those  ending  in  -estre,  -nes,  -rseden, 
-(5'(u)  (-(To),  -ung,  most  in  -u,  and  a  few  abstracts  in 
-ing-,  are  strong  feminines. 

Compound  nouns  take  the  gender  of  their  last  com- 
ponent ;  thus  wifman,  woman,  is  masculine,  because 
man(n)  is  masculine. 

39.  Strong  and  weak  nouns.  —  According  to  their 
declension,  all  nouns  are  either  strong  or  weak.  The 
nominative  of  weak  nouns  always  ends  in  a  vowel, 
either  -a  or  -e,  but  not  all  nouns  ending  in  -e  are 
weak. 

26 


DECLENSIOK  OF  NOUKS.  27 

40.  Cases  of  nouns  and  adjectives.  —  Old  English  has 
six  cases,  though  in  general  only  four  are  distinguished. 
These  four  are  the  nominative,  genitive,  dative,  and 
accusative ;  the  two  additional  are  the  vocative,  the 
case  of  direct  address,  and  the  instrumental,  which  is 
virtually  indistinguishable  from  the  dative,  except  in 
adjectives. 

The  nominative  is  used  as  in  English.  The  genitive 
is  the  case  denoting  possessor,  source,  or  cause ;  its 
sign  is  of.  The  dative  denotes  the  indirect  object  of 
an  action;  its  sign  is  to  01: for.  The  accusative  denotes 
the  direct  object ;  it  has  no  sign.  The  instrumental 
denotes  the  means  by  which  an  action  is  performed; 
its  sign  is  hy. 

The  instrumental  of  nouns  is  included  in  the  declen- 
sions under  the  dative. 

41.  Uniform  case  endings.  — All  nouns,  whatever  their 
declension,  end  in  -um  in  the  dative  plural.  The  gen- 
itive plural  always  ends  in  -a,  either  appended  directly 
to  the  stem,  or  with  -en-  (rarely  -r-)  interposed  (43.  6) ; 
accordingly  the  genitive  plural,  to  speak  more  strictly, 
always  ends  in  -a  or  -ena  (very  rarely  -ra). 

Instead  of  -um  is  occasionally  found  -un,  -011,  or  -an, 
and  in  later  Old  English  these 'endings  grow  common. 

42.  Strong  masculine  endings.  —  All  strong  masculines, 
except  umlaut  masculines  (46)  and  those  in  -u  (45), 
take  the  following  as  regular  endings  (for  exceptions 


28  INFLECTION. 

see  43.  5-9;  44.  4),  where  —  represents  the  form  of 
the  nominative  singular :  — 


Singular. 

Plural. 

N.V.A.    — 

-as 

G.   -es 

-a 

D.    -e 

-um 

43.  Masculines  ending  in  a  consonant.  —  The  greater 
number  of  strong  masculines  are  declined  like  fisc, 
fish :  — 


Singular. 

Plural. 

.V.A.    fisc 

fiscas 

G.    fisces 

fisca 

D.    fisce 

fiscum 

1.  A  very  few  words  ending  in  -eg  may  insert  -e- 
before  the  endings  of  the  plural:   s^cg-eas,  etc.  (18). 

2.  If  the  radical  vowel  of  the  nominative  is  ae  before 
a  single  consonant,  this  is  changed  in  the  plural  to  a : 
dsegr,  day,  but  plur.  dag-as,  daga,  dagum. 

3.  Nouns  ending  in  h  lose  this  consonant  before  a 
case  ending,  and  in  so  doing  lengthen  the  radical 
vowel  or  diphthong.  Thus  fearli,  swine,  but  feares, 
etc.  (29).  If  the  h  is  preceded  by  a  vowel,  the  vowel 
of  the  ending  is  lost:  scoli,  shoe,  but  nom.  plur.  scos, 
not  scoas. 

4.  Disyllabic  nouns  generally  lose  the  vowel  of  the 
second  syllable  before  all  endings,  when  the  stem  is 
long  by  nature  or  position  (4,  23),  if  the  second  syllable 
is  not  long  by  position.     Otherwise  the  vowel  of  the 


DECLENSION    OF   NOUNS.  29 

second  syllable  is  regularly  preserved.  Examples  are 
as  follows  :  — 

a.  Stem  long  by  nature,  and  second  syllable  short: 
eiarel,  country^  gen.  eSries,  not  ecTeles. 

h.  Stem  long  by  position,  and  second  syllable  long 
by  position :  h^ng^est,  stallion^  dat.  h^ngeste,  not 
h^ngste. 

c.  Stem  long  by  position  (vowel  before  two  conso- 
nants), and  second  syllable  short:  dryhten,  lord^  gen. 
dryhtnes,  not  drylitenes. 

d.  Stem  short  by  nature,  and  second  syllable  short : 
heofon,   heaven^   dat.  heofone,  not  heofne. 

Occasional  exceptions  are  found:  drylitenes,  heofne. 
The  retention  or  loss  of  the  vowel  is  in  part  dependent 
upon  the  date  of  the  particular  text. 

5.  In  a  few  words  there  is  an  occasional  gen.  and 
dat.  sing,  and  nom.  plur.  in  -a :  feld,  fields  ford,  ford^ 
winter,  winter^  sumer,  summer^  and  a  few  others  of 
rare  occurrence. 

6.  Nouns  in  -end,  originally  present  participles  (143), 
take  the  gen.  plur.  in  -ra,  instead  of  -a,  and  the  plur. 
nom.  voc.  ace.  in  -e,  or  without  ending,  as  well  as  in 
-as,  the  latter  being  rare.  Thus  nom.  plur.  liselend, 
hselende,  as  well  as  hgelendas;   gen.  hselendra. 

7.  A  single  word,  beam,  grove^  has  the  nom. 
sing,  in  -u,  and  takes  w  instead  of  the  -u  before  all 
inflectional  endings:  nom.  sing.  Ibearu,  gen.  bearwes, 
etc.  (27). 


30  INFLECTION. 

8.  The  noun  f seder,  father^  frequently  omits  the  ter- 
minations of  the  sing.  gen.  and  dat. 

9.  Hgelear,  hero,  and  nionaSf,  month,  sometimes  omit 
the  termination  of  the  nom.  ace.  plur. 

44.  Masculines  in  -e.  —  The  declension  of  strong  mas- 
culines in  -e  is  almost  identical  with  that  of  fisc.  The 
sing.  nom.  ace.  voc.  takes  -e;  other  exceptions  will  be 
noted  below.     Ende,  end,  is  thus  declined  :  — 


Singular. 

Plural. 

N.V.A.    ^ncle 

^ndas 

G.    ^ndes 

^ncla 

T>.    Qnde 

^ndum 

1.  Here  belong  important  classes  of  nouns  ending 
in  -ere  (143)  and  -scipe,  besides  some  others.  They 
are  much  less  numerous,  however,  than  those  of  the 
preceding  declension. 

2.  The  noun  li^re,  army,  sometimes  takes  -g-  or  -ig- 
before  the  endings  of  the  singular,  and  the  same,  or 
-ige-,  before  the  endings  of  the  plural:  h^r(i)ges,  etc. 
Two  words  sometimes  have  the  gen.  plur.  in  -ig(e)a, 
-ia :  wine,  friend,  D^ne,  Danes,  gen.  plur.  winigea, 
D^niga,  D^nia  (18). 

3.  Nouns  ending  in  -ce  may  retain  the  -e  before 
the  endings  of  the  plural :  Isece,  physician,  nom.  plur. 
Igeceas,  as  well  as  Isecas  (18). 

4.  A  few  masculine  nouns  in  -e  occasionally  take 
the    nom.    ace.    plur.    in    -e,   instead   of  -as :    wine,  or 


DECLENSION  OF   NOUNS.  31 

winas^  friend.  The  following  are  found  in  the  plural 
only:  leode  (also  leoda),  people,  ielde,  men,  ielfe,  elves, 
and  the  proper  nouns  Engle,  Angles,  Seaxe,  Saxons, 
Mierce,  Mercians, 

45.  Masculines  in  -u.  —  Here  belong  the  words  sunu, 
son,  wudu,  wood,  me(o)dii,  mead,  mag-u,  hog,  bre(o)g-o, 
prince,  heorii,  sword,  lagu,  lake,  si(o)du,  custom,  spitu, 

spit.     Suuu  is  thus  declined  :  — 


Singular. 

Plubal. 

.V.A.    sunu 

suna 

G.    suua 

suna 

D.   suna 

sunum 

1.  The  ending  of  the  nom.  sing,  -u  (sometimes  -o) 
is  liable  to  intrude  everywhere  except  in  the  dat.  plur. 
and  gen.  sing,  and  plur. 

2.  Besides  sunu  and  wudu,  the  nouns  above  given 
are  scarcely  found  except  in  the  nom.  ace.  sing. 

3.  In  later  Old  English  these  words  begin  to 
assume  the  endings  of  fisc  (43) :  gen.  sunes,  nom. 
plur.  sunas,  etc. 

46.  Umlaut  masculines.  —  Here  belong  fot,  foot,  toST, 
tooth;  man(n),  man;  feond,  enemy,  freond,  friend, 
(142) ;  broSFor,  brother.  These  take  umlaut  of  the 
radical  vowel  (17)  in  the  dat.  sing,  and  nom.  voc. 
ace.  plur.,  and  have  no  ending  in  those  cases.  Fot 
is  thus  declined :  — 


32 


INFLECTION. 

Singular. 

Plural. 

W.A.   fot 

fet 

G.   fotes 

fota 

D.   fet  (fote) 

fotum 

1.  Broaror  is  irregular,  forming  its  nom.  voc.  ace. 
plur.  as  broaror  or  broarru,  instead  of  brearer. 

2.  Occasionally  there  is  found  a  plur.  fotas,  toSTas, 
instead  of  fet,  ted". 

3.  Feond  and  freond  usually  have  dat.  sing. 
feonde,  freonde,  sometimes  plur.  feond,  freond,  or 
even  feondas,  freondas. 

47.  Strong  neuters.  —  In  general,  the  chief  distinction 
between  the  declension  of  masculines  and  that  of  neu- 
ters is  in  the  plur.  nom.  ace.  Where  the  masculine 
has  -as,  the  neuter,  if  its  radical  syllable  be  short,  has 
-u,  or  sometimes  -o  ;  if  long^  has  no  ending  whatever 
(cf.  23,  and  especially  its  final  sentence).  When  the 
radical  syllable  is  shorty  the  paradigm  accordingly  is 
(hof,  dwelling^:  — 


Singular. 

Plural. 

N.A.   hof 

hofu 

G.  hofes 

hofa 

D.  hofe 

hofum 

With  a  long  radical  syllahle   (4),  the   paradigm  is 
(word,  word) :  — 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.A.  word  word 

G.   wordes  worda 

D.   worde  wordum 


DECLENSION   OF   NOUNS.  33 

1.  Disyllables  are  sometimes  without  ending  in  the 
nom.  ace.  plur.,  and  sometimes  take  -u :  w5ep(e)n 
and  wsepnu,  weapons;  but  usually  msegenu,  forces, 
nietenu,  cattle,  earfoSTu,  labors,  wajt(e)ru,  waters, 
heafdu,  heads,  wundor,  wonders. 

2.  Occasionally  the  nom.  ace.  plur.  takes  -o  or  -a 
instead  of  -u. 

3.  Treo,  tree,  and  cneo,  knee,  take  -w  before  all 
case  endings,  and  sometimes  in  the  nom.  sing.  : 
treowes,  etc.  (27).     Nom.  ace.  plur.  treowu,  ciieowu. 

4.  For  a  change  in  the  radical  vowel  of  the  plural, 
see  43.  2 :    faet,  vessel,  but  fatu,  fata,  fatum. 

5.  For  the  loss  of  final  h,  see  43.  3:  feoh,  money, 
fee,  gen.  feos. 

6.  For  the  loss  (syncopation)  of  the  vowel .  of  the 
second  syllable,  see  43.  4:  heafod,  head,  nom.  plur. 
heafdu,  not  (usually)  heafodu;  tung-ol,  star,  nom. 
plur.  tunglu,  not  tungolu ;  waeter,  water,  gen.  wae- 
teres,  not  (regularly)  wsetres.  Syncopation  is,  how- 
ever, less  constant  in  the  nom.  ace.  plur.  of  neuters, 
in  cases  corresponding  to  43.  4.  a. 

7.  Neuters  ending  in  -en  and  -et  sometimes  double 
the  final  consonant  before  a  case  ending:  sefen,  even 
(jing),  gen.  sefenes  or  sefennes,  etc.  These  nouns 
retain  the  -e  of  the  second  syllable. 

48.  Neuters  in  -e.  —  These  are  declined  like  word, 
except  that   the   sing.  nom.  voc.  ace.  has  -e,  and  the 


34  INFLECTION. 

plur.   nom.  voc.   ace.  has  -u.       Paradigm   (wite,   pun- 
ishment) :  — 

Singular.  Plural. 

N.V.A.    wite  witu 

G.    wites  wita 

D.    wite  witum 

1.  If  the  -e  of  the  nom.  sing,  is  preceded  by  c  or  g-, 
the  endings  of  the  plural  may  be  preceded  by  i  (or  e)  : 
ricu  or  riciu,  rica  or  ricia,  etc.  (18). 

49.  Neuters  in  -u.  —  These  are  declined  like  bearu 
(43.  7),  except  that  they  take  -u  in  the  plur.  nom. 
ace,  instead  of  -as.  There  are  only  half  a  dozen 
in  all,  and  these  are  not  of  common  occurrence  : 
bealu,  evil^  gen.  bealwes,  etc. 

50.  Irregular  neuters.  —  The  three  words  lamb,  lamh, 
cealf,  calf^  segr,  egg^  and  sometimes  cild,  cJdld^  are  de- 
clined regularly  in  the  singular,  but  take  r  in  the  plural 
before  the  endings  -u,  -a,  -um :  lamb,  gen.  lambes,  but 
nom.  plur.  lambru. 

In  LWS.  the  regular  forms,  without  r,  occur. 

51.  Strong  feminines.  —  Feminine  disyllables  ending 
in  -u,  and  having  a  short  radical  syllable,  belong 
here ;  monosyllables  with  a  long  radical  syllable, 
and  most  disyllables,  discard  the  -u  of  the  nom. 
sing.     Abstracts,  though  long,  follow  a. 


DECLENSION    OF   NOUNS.  35 

a)  Paradigm  of  the  short  stems,  giefii,  gift:  — 


Singular. 

Plural. 

N.V.    giefu,  -o 

giefa,  -e 

G.   giefe 

giefa  (-ena) 

D.    giefe 

giefum 

A.   giefe 

giefa,  -e 

Occasionally  the  ending  -u  or  -o  is  found  in  the 
oblique  cases  of  the  singular  and  in  the  nom.  ace. 
plural.  Duru,  door^  has  -a  in  the  gen.  dat.  sing.,  and 
in  the  whole  plural  except  the  dative.  Two  or  three 
nouns  in  -u  take  -w  before  the  ending  in  the  oblique 
cases:   beadu,  battle^  gen.  beadwe,  etc. 

5)  Paradigm  of  the  long  stems  and  polysyllables, 
glof,  glove :  — 


Singular. 

Plural. 

.V.    glof 

glofa,  -e 

G.  glofe 

glofa 

D.    glofe 

glof urn 

A.    glofe 

glofa,  -e 

1.  A  few  nouns  discard  the  -e  of  the  ace.  sing. : 
deed,  deed^  tid,  time^  woruld   (20,  26),  world. 

2.  Only  rarely  does  the  gen.  plur.  of  long  stems  take 
-(e)na. 

3.  Disyllables  in  -ung  often  have  -a  instead  of  e  in 
the  dat.  sing.,  and  sometimes  in  the  gen.  ace.  sing.  : 
leornung-,  learning^  dat.  leornunga.  The  words  hand, 
hand^  flor,  floor^  and  woruld,  world.,  occasionally  make 
the  same  change. 

4.  Disyllables   syncopate   the   vowel   of   the   second 


36  INFLECTION. 

syllable   according  to  43.  4:    sawol,   soul,  gen.  sawle, 
etc. 

5.  Polysyllables  in  -nes,  -en,  -el,  and  -et  double  the 
final  consonant  in  the  oblique  cases,  and  retain  the  pre- 
ceding -e:  gen.  dat.  ace.  sing.  eaiS'modnesse,  humility^ 
byrtfenne,  burden^  etc. 

52.  Umlaut  feminines.  —  These  modify  the  root  vowel 
by  umlaut  in  the  dat.  sing,  and  nom.  voc.  ace.  plur., 
and  often  in  the  gen.  sing.,  that  is,  change  a  to  se, 
o  to  ^,  o  to  e,  u  to  y,  and  u  to  y.  The  gen.  sing.,  and 
occasionally  the  dat.  sing.,  is  sometimes  formed  regu- 
larly, without  umlaut,  and  with  the  ending  -e.  Para- 
digm, (gros. 


Singular. 

Plural. 

N.V.A.   gos 

ges 

G.    ges,  gose 

gosa 

D.   ges 

gosum 

The  principal  nouns  which  belong  here  are  :  ac,  oah, 
gat,  goat;  boc,  hook,  broc,  trousers,  gos,  goose,  wloh, 
fringe ;  burg,  castle,  city,  furh,  furrow,  sulh,  plough, 
turf,  turf ;  cu,  cow,  grut,  grout,  grits,  lus,  louse,  mus, 
mouse,  tSruh,  trough;  ea,  river;  niht,  night. 

1.  The  dat.  (gen.)  sing,  of  burg  is  usually  byrig, 
not  byrg. 

2.  Modor,  mother,  and  dohtor,  daughter,  are  declined 
like  brocTor  (46. 1),  except  that  modor  has  only  the  nom. 
ace.  plur.  modru,  -a,  and  both  may  have  an  umlaut  gen. 
sing,  in  LWS.  (but  usually  modor,  dohtor). 


DECLENSION    OF   NOUNS.  37 

3.  Sweostor,  sister^  is  without  umlaut  in  any  case ; 
it  remains  sweostor  in  every  case  except  the  gen.  plur. 
sweostra  and  dat.  plur.  sweostrum. 

53.  Weak  nouns.  —  Masculines  end  in  -a,  feminines 
and  neuters  in  -e ;  but  the  neuters  may  be  conveniently 
disregarded,  only  cage,  ei/e^  and  eare,  ear,  belonging 
to  this  declension.  Paradigms  (moua,  moon,  tunge, 
tongue^  :  — 


Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Sing.  N.V.    inona 

tunge 

G.. 

D.  l-monan 

tungan 

A.-* 

Plur.  N.V. A.    nionan 

tungan 

G.    monena 

tungena 

I),    monum 

tunguiii 

1.  The  number  of  feminines  thus  declined  is  com- 
paratively small.  The  commonest  are  perhaps  eorare, 
earth,  heorte,  heart,  lufe,  love,  cirice,  church,  tunge, 
tongue,  liearpe,  harp,  sunne,  sun,  nsedre,  viper,  and 
selmesse,  alms.  The  masculines  are,  on  the  contrary, 
very  numerous. 

2.  The  declension  of  the  neuters  eage  and  eare 
differs  from  that  of  the  feminines  only  in  the  ace. 
sing.,  which  is  like  the  nom.  Their  gen.  plur.  is 
often  eagna,  earna. 

3.  The  weak  feminine  heofone,  heaven,  should  be  dis- 
tinguished from  the  strong  masculine  heofon.  Besides 
the  weak  lufe,  there  is  also  a  strong  lufu,  love  (51.  a)* 


38  INFLECTION. 

54.  Proper  names.  —  Native  names  are  declined  like 
common  nouns,  except  that  feminines  ending  in  -burg 
take  the  dative  in  -e  and  are  without  umlaut.  Foreign 
names  are  sometimes  naturalized,  and  sometimes  take 
their  original  case  endings,  but  not  always  with  entire 
consistency.  The  words  C^nt,  C^rt,  I,  T^net,  and 
Wiht  are  indeclinable,  except  that  Wiht  has  the  gen. 
Wihte. 

Declension  of  Adjectives. 

55.  Weak  and  strong  adjectives.  —  Adjectives  are  de- 
clined weak  when  in  the  comparative,  and  usually  when 
in  the  superlative ;  when  ordinals  (except  safer,  second, 
78,  80) ;  when  preceded  by  a  demonstrative ;  when  used 
as  masculine  or  feminine  nouns ;  in  direct  address ; 
sometimes  when  preceded  by  a  possessive  pronoun ; 
and  exceptionally  in  poetry  in  place  of  the  strong 
adjective.  Otherwise  adjectives  are  always  used  in 
the  strong  form. 

56.  Strong  declension  of  adjectives.  —  Here  it  is  neces- 
sary to  distinguish  between  long  monosyllables  on  the 
one  hand,  and  short  monosyllables  (comparatively  few) 
and  disyllables  on  the  other. 

57.  Disyllables  and  short  monosyllables.  —  Paradigm, 
glaed,  glad :  — 

Masculine.  Neuter.  Feminine. 

Sing.  N.V.    glsed  glaed  gladu 

G.  glades  glcedre 


DECLENSION   OF   ADJECTIVES.  39 


Masculine. 

Neutek. 

Feminine, 

D.                    gladum 

gloedre 

A.    glcedne 

glsed 

glade 

I.                    glade 

Phir.  N.V.A.    glade 

gladu,  -e 

glada,  - 

G. 

glcedra 

D. 

gladum 

1.  Italicized  words  indicate  differences  from  the  noun 
declension;  cf.  these  with  the  pronominal  declensions 
(81,  84,  85). 

2.  When  the  radical  vowel  is  ae,  it  is  changed  as  in 
the  paradigm.     Otherwise  it  remains  unchanged. 

3.  Disyllables  take  the  same  endings  as  in  the  para- 
digm, but  frequently  syncopate  the  vowel  of  the  second 
syllable  before  an  ending  beginning  with  a  vowel,  as  in 
eadig,  blessed,  gen.  eadges  (23 ;  cf.  43.  4),  and  some- 
times conform  the  nom.  sing.  fern,  to  the  masc.  and 
neut.,  and  the  neut.  plur.  nom.  voc.  ace.  to  the  sing. : 
haligT)  holi/,  not  hal(i)gu. 

4.  For  the  ending  -u  sometimes  occurs  -o,  and  for 
-um  the  LWS.  -on,  -an  (cf.  41). 

5.  Adjectives  ending  in  -u  (-o)  change  the  u  to  w 
before  vowels  (27)  :  gearu,  ready,  gen.  g-earwes,  etc. 

58.  Long  monosyllables.  —  The  only  difference  be- 
tween the  declension  of  the  long  and  that  of  the  short 
monosyllables  is  that  the  ending  -u  of  the  latter  is 
dropped,  and  that  the  radical  vowel  always  remains 
unchanged.     Paradigm,  g-od,  good:  — 


40 


INFLECTION. 

Masculine. 

Neuter. 

Feminine. 

Sing.  N.    god 

god 

god 

Plur.  N.   gode 

god 

gode,  -a 

1.  Adjectives  ending  in  h  drop  the  h  in  disyllabic 
forms,  and  lengthen  the  radical  vowel  or  diphthong 
(29) :  iSTweorh,  transverse^  gen.  STweores ;  but  heah, 
high,  often  assimilates  the  final  h  to  a  following  con- 
sonant :  heaniie,  liearra,  etc.  In  LWS.  the  li  is  often 
changed  to  g  before  a  vowel :  heagiiiii,  etc. 

2.  Words  ending  in  a  double  consonant  usually  re- 
tain this  only  before  a  vowel  (35). 

59.  Adjectives  in  -e.  —  These  are  quite  numerous. 
They  are  declined  like  the  short  monosyllables,  except 
that  the?/  always  retain  their  -e  when  no  other  ending  is 
provided,  hut  lose  it  before  an  endi7ig.  Paradigm,  grene, 
green  : — 


Masculine. 

Neuter. 

Feminine. 

Sing.  N.V.    grene 

grene 

grenu 

G.                   grenes 

grenre 

Plur.  N.V. A.    grene 

grenu,  -e 

grena,  -e 

From  an  ace.  masc.  sing.,  like  grenne,  bliarne,  for  ex- 
ample, it  is  therefore  not  safe  to  infer  a  dictionary  form 
gren,  bli^". 

In  consulting  the  lexicon,  care  should  he  taken  to  distin- 
guish adjectives  in  -e  from  such  as  end  in  a  consonant. 

60.   Weak  declension  of  adjectives.  —  This  is  the  same 
as  that  of  nouns,  except  that  the  gen.  plur.  is  regularly 


DECLENSION   OF  ADJECTIVES.  41 

formed  in   -ra   (only  exceptionally  -a   or  the    regular 
weak  ending  -ena).     Paradigm,  ?2roda,  the  good:  — 


Masculine. 

Feminine. 

Neuter. 

Sing.  N.V.    goda 

gode 

gode 

G. 

godan 

D. 

godan 

A.    godan 

godan 

gode 

ur.  N.V.A. 

godan 

G. 

godra 

D. 

godum 

1.  In  LWS.  -um  frequently  becomes  -an. 

2.  When,  in  consequence  of  contraction,  too  many 
r's  or  n's  are  brought  together,  one  of  them  is  rejected. 
Thus  gearu,  ready ^  forms  a  comparative  gearura.  This 
comparative,  in  turn,  would  form  a  gen.  plur.  gearu- 
rara.  By  contraction  this  would  reduce  to  gear(u)- 
r(a)ra ;  but  the  three  r's  are  simplified  to  two,  and  the 
resulting  gen.  plur.  stands  as  gearra. 

61.  The  present  participle.  —  The  present  participle  in 
-ende  is  not  to  be  confounded  with  the  noun  in  -end 
(for  which  see  43.  6).  It  is  declined  like  grene  (59). 
When  used  in  the  predicate  as  nom.  or  ace.  it  is  gener- 
ally uninflected.  The  present  participle,  like  the  adjec- 
tive, is  also  declined  weak. 

62.  The  past  participle.  —  The  past  participle  has  the 
double  declension  of  the  adjective,  both  strong  and 
weak.  When  used  in  the  predicate  it  is  generally 
indeclinable,  or  ends  like  the  strong  masculine. 


42 


INFLECTION. 


Comparison  of  Adjectives. 
63.  Regular  comparison.  —  The  comparative  is  formed 
by  adding  -ra  to  the  stem  of  the  positive,  and  the  super- 
lative by  adding  -osta  (-esta) ;  with  the  latter  cf .  Greek 
-Laro^.  The  final  -a  represents  the  masculine  termina- 
tion of  the  weak  adjective  (60),  and  undergoes  all  the 
replacements  of  the  weak  declension.  More  rarely  the 
superlative  is  found  in  -ost  (-est),  which  is  then  re- 
garded as  strong.  A  final  -e  of  the  positive  is  dropped 
in  comparison  (^e.g.  eajye,  easy^  comp.  ieacra,  not  letTera) 
and  a  radical  ae  becomes  a  in  the  superlative  (^e-g-  smael, 
small,  superl.  smalost,  not  smaelost ;  cf.  43.  2). 


64.   Comparison  without  umlaut. 

mode  :  —  ^^     --^  '• 


This  is  the   usual 


Positive. 

Comparative, 

Superlative, 

heard,  hard 

heardra 

heardosta 

leof,  dear 

leofra 

leof  osta 

rice,  powerful 

ricra 

ricost 

smael,  small 

smselra 

smalost 

65.  Comparison  with  umlaut. — This  is  followed  by  a  few 
adjectives.     The  superlative  generally  ends  in  -esta :  — ■ 


Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

eald,  old 

ieldra 

ieldesta 

lang,  long 

l^ngra 

l^ngesta 

geong,  yotuig 

giengra 

giengesta 

sceort,  sJioi't 

sciertra 

sciertesta 

heah,  high 

hiehra  (hierra) 

hieh(e)sta 

great,  great 

grietra 

grietesta 

eaiSe,  easy 

ieiSra 

ieffesta 

/  - 


COMPARISON    OF    ADJECTIVES.  43 

1.  For  some  of  these,  unumlauted  forms  are  also 
found:  heahra,  heahsta,  etc. 

2.  Syncope  of  e  in  the  superlative  occurs  in  LWS.  : 
l^ngsta,  etc. ;  in  hielista  this  is  also  EWS. 

3.  For  -ost  may  occur  -ust. 

66.  Different  stems  in  comparison.  —  In  the  following 
the  comparative  and  superlative  are  not  formed  from 
the  same  stem  as  the  positive  :  — 


POSITIVK. 

Comparative. 

Superlative. 

god,  good 

rb^t(e)ra 
I  sella,  selra 

b^tst(a) 
selest(a) 

yfel,  had 

wiersa 

wier(re)st(a) 

micel,  great 

mara 

m£est(a) 

lytel,  small 

Isessa 

liest(a) 

67.  Comparison  defective.  —  In  four  cases  the  positive 
is  wanting  as  an  adjective,  but  may  be  supplied  as  an 
adverb  or  preposition :  — 


Positive. 

Comparative. 

Superlative, 

(feor,  far) 

fierra 

fierrest(a) 

(neah,  near') 

nearra 

nTelist(a) 

(ser,  earlier) 

aerra 

merest  (a) 

(fore,  before) 

furSfra 

fyrst(a) 

68.  Superlatives  in  -ma.  —  Besides  the  superlative  in 
-est,  there  is  one  in  -ma  (cf.  Lat.  ^Y\-mus).  Two  exam- 
ples are  found:  forma,  the  first;  hindema,  the  hindmost. 

69.  Superlatives  in  -ma  -j-  -esta  =  -mest(a).  —  These 
double  superlatives,  as  they  may  be  called,  are  chiefly 


44 


INFLECTION. 


formed  from  adverbs  and  prepositions.  The  compara- 
tive is  peculiar  in  being  generally  formed  in  -erra, 
instead  of  -ra  :  — - 


Positive. 
(siiy,  late) 
(laet,  late) 
(inne,  within) 
(fite,  without) 
(ufan,  above) 
(niffan,  below) 
(fore,  before) 
(sefter,  after) 
(mid,  mid) 
(norlSf,  northward) 
(suiar,  southward) 
(east,  eastward) 
(west,  westward) 


COMPAKATIVE. 

siffra 
laetra 
innerra 
uterra,  yterra 
uferra,  yferra 
nilgrerra 
furffra 
aefterra 

norlJerra,  nyrfferra 
suiaTerra,  syS'erra 
easterra 
westerra 


Superlative. 
siS'einest 
laetemest 
innemest 
utemest,  ytemest 
ufemest,  yfemest 
uit5'emest 
fyrmest 
geftemest 
inidinest 
norffmest 
sutS'inest 
eastmest 
westmest 


Formation  and  Comparison  of  Adverbs. 

70.  Adverbs  formed  from  adjectives.  —  Adverbs  are 
formed  from  adjectives  by  the  addition  of  -e,  -lice,  and 
-unga  or  -inga.  Examples  are :  wid,  wide^  Avide,  tvidely  ; 
swiST,  strong^  swiSTe,  very ;  soar,  true^  soariice,  truly ; 
eall,  all^  eallunga,  ealling^a,  entirely.  Occasionally 
-unga,  -inj^a  is  employed  to  form  adverbs  from  other 
parts  of  speech. 

71.  Adjectives  in  the  genitive  as  adverbs.  —  The  ending 
-es  of  the  gen.  sing.  neut.  is  employed  to  form  a  few 
adverbs  from  adjectives :  ealles,  altogether ;  i^rweores 
(58.  1),  perversely^  etc. 


FORMATION  AND   COMPARISON   OF   ADVERBS.        45 

72.  Adjectives  in  the  dative  plural  as  adverbs.  —  Exam- 
ples are :  iiiicluin,  very;  lytlum,  little. 

73.  Adjectives  in  the  accusative  as  adverbs.  —  Exam- 
ples are  :  full,  fully ;  genog,  enough. 

74.  Adverbs  from  nouns.  —  From  the  genitive :  dseges, 
by  day ;  niecles,  needs ;  etc.  From  the  instrumental : 
sare,  sore.,  etc.  From  the  dative  plural :  dropmselum, 
dro^  hy  drop^  etc. 

75.  Adverbs  of  place.  —  These  are  of  three  classes,  ac- 
cording as  they  answer  the  question,  Where?  Whither? 
or  Whence  ?     Examples  are :  — 


kVHERE  ? 

Whither  ? 

Whence  ? 

afaer 

afider 

g^Qnan 

hwaer 

liwider 

hwQnan 

her 

hider 

heonan 

76.  Comparison  of  adverbs.  —  Adverbs  from  adjectival 
stems  are  regularly  compared  by  adding  -or  for  the 
comparative  and  -ost  for  the  superlative.  Example : 
strangor,  more  strongly.,  straiigost,  most  strongly  (cf. 
65). 

77.  Irregular  comparison  of  adverbs.  —  A  few  adverbs 
have  no  termination  in  the  comparative.  They  are 
always  monosyllabic,  and  have  usually  undergone  um- 
laut.     Such   are    b^t,   better;    ma,   mse,   more;    near, 

nearer :  etc. 


46 


INFLECT  ro:N'. 


Numerals. 


78.   Niimerals.  —  The  numerals  are 

as  follows :  — 

Cardinal. 

Ordinal. 

1  . 

.   an 

forma,  fceresta 

2  .  . 

.  twegen,  twa  (tfi) 

oiarer,  sefterra 

3  . 

.  fSrie,  (Sreo 

SPridda 

4  . 

.  feoAver 

feorafa 

5  . 

.  fif 

fifta 

6  . 

.  siex 

siexta 

7  . 

.  seofon 

seofoiJa 

8  . 

.  eahta 

eahtoiS'a 

9  . 

.  iiigon 

nigO(5'a 

10  . 

.  tien 

teoiafa 

11  . 

.  endlefan 

endlefta 

12  . 

.  tw^lf 

tw^lfta 

13  . 

.  ffreotiene 

ffreoteoiara 

14  . 

.  feowertiene 

feowerteoSfa 

15  . 

.  fiftiene 

fifteoiafa 

16  . 

.  siextiene 

siexteoara 

17  . 

.  seofontiene 

seofonteoiya 

18  . 

.  eahtatiene 

eahtateoiffa 

19  . 

.  nigontiene 

nigonteoaCa 

20  . 

.   tvventig 

twentigoafa 

21  . 

.  an  and  twentig 

an  and  twentigoija 

30  . 

.  !5ritig 

aPritigoafa 

40  . 

.  feowertig 

feowertigosafa 

50  . 

.  fiftig 

fiftigoiafa 

60  . 

.  siextig 

siextigoffa 

70  . 

.  hundseofontig 

hundseofontlgoffa 

80  . 

.  (hund)eahtatig 

hundeahtigod'a 

90  . 

.  hundnigontig 

hundnigontigod'a 

100  . 

.  hund,  hundred,  hundteontlg 

110  . 

.  hundendlefantig 

hundendleftigoija 

120  . 

.  hundtw^lftig 

hundtw§lftigol5a 

200  . 

.  twa  hund,  to  hund 

1000  . 

.  S^asend 

NUMERALS.  47 

1.  Other  ordinals  for  1  are  fyresta,  fyrmesta. 

2.  Another  form  of  ordinal  for  21  is  an  eac  twen- 
tigura. 

3.  Endlefan  and  tw^lf  probably  stand  for  anlif  and 
twalif  (representing  twalif).  The  -lif  may  mean  left. 
After  counting  on  the  fingers  up  to  10,  one  left  (anlif) 
would  be  11 ;  two  left  (twalif),  12.  The  final  -an  (-on) 
of  endlefan  may  have  been  added  after  the  analogy  of 
seofon,  nigon,  etc. 

4.  Fractions  are  usually  formed  by  the  help  of  dsel, 
part:  iffridda  dgel,  one-third ;  seofoiara  d^l,  one-seventh. 
For  one  and  a  half  occurs  oarer  healf  (cf.  Germ,  andert- 
halb} ;  so  STridde  liealf,  two  and  a  half;  in  other  words, 
the  OE.  ordinal  indicates  the  cardinal  from  which  ^ 
must  be  subtracted. 

5.  Interesting  forms,  which  actually  occur,  are:  19, 
an  Ises  twentig ;  39,  an  Iges  feowertig ;  59,  anes  wana 
siextig  (cf.  Greek  ez^o?  Seoz^re?  eUoai)  ;  450,  fiftig"  and 
feower  hund,  fifte  healf  hund;  482,  feower  liuiid 
and  twa  and  hundeahtatig ;  100,000,  an  hund  tSu.- 
senda;  1,500,000,  fiftiene  hund  afusend.  Note  also 
fiftiena  sum,  one  of  fifteen^  i.e.  ivith  fourteen  com- 
panions. 

79.  Declension  of  cardinals.  —  An  is  declined  like 
god  (58),  but  with  ace.  sometimes  aenne,  inst.  sene. 
When  declined  weak,  ana,  it  signifies  alone.  Twegen 
is  declined  thus  :  — 


48  INFLECTION. 

Masculine,  Neuter.  Feminine. 

N.A.  twegen  twa,  tu  twa 

G.  tweg(r)a 

D.  tw£em,  twain 

So   also   is  declined  begen,   both.      Drie,   tSreo  is    de- 
clined :  — 


Masculine. 

Neuter. 

Feminine, 

r.A.    ffrie 

a-reo 

aPreo 

G. 

aCreora 

D. 

fSrlnx 

The  cardinals  between  3  and  20  are  usually  inde- 
clinable. Those  ending  in  -tig-  are  sometimes  treated 
as  neuter  nouns  (in  which  case  they  are  followed  by 
a  partitive  genitive),  sometimes  as  adjectives,  and 
are  sometimes  uninflected.  Hund  and  (Tusend  are 
sometimes  undeclined,  but  there  is  also  a  plural  of 
hund,  nom.  hiiiide,  dat.  hiindum ;  and  of  cTusend, 
nom.  laruseiidu,  gen.  -da,  -dra,  dat.  -dum.  These  nu- 
merals are  always  followed  by  the  genitive. 

80.  Declension  of  ordinals.  —  All  are  declined  like 
weak  adjectives  (60),  except  ocTer,  second^  which  is 
strong. 

Pronouns. 

81.  Personal  pronouns.  — 


First  Person. 

Second  Person, 

Sing.  N.   Ic 

ffu 

G.    min 

9in 

D.    me 

ffe 

A.    me 

safe 

PRONOUNS. 

First  Person. 

Second  Person. 

DualN.    wit 

git 

G.    uncer 

incer 

D.    unc 

inc 

A.    unc 

inc 

Plur.  N.    we 

ge 

G.    ure 

eower 

D.    us 

eow^ 

A.    us 

eow^ 

Third  Person. 

Masculine. 

Neuter. 

Feminine. 

Sing.  N. 

*^? 

hit 

heo 

G. 

his 

hi(e)re 

D. 

him 

hi(e)re 

A. 

hi(e)ne 

hit 

hi(e) 

'lur.  N.A. 

hl(e) 

G. 

hi(e)ra, 

heora 

D. 

him 

49 


1.  Less  common  forms  are :  in  the  accusative,  mec, 
arec,  usic,  eowic ;  lii(e)  for  heo,  and  conversely.  Hio 
is  frequent,  parallel  with  heo,  and  user  is  found  for  tire. 

82.  Reflexive  pronouns.  —  In  place  of  the  reflexive, 
which  does  not  exist  as  an  independent  form,  is  used 
the  personal  pronoun  (81). 


83.  Possessive  pronouns.  —  Two  sorts  of  possessives 
must  be  distinguished,  the  declinable  and  the  inde- 
clinable. All  of  these  are  identical  in  form  with  the 
genitive  of  the  personal  pronoun,  except  sin,  which 
is  formed  from  a  lost  reflexive.     The  declinable  pos- 


50  INFLECTION. 

sessives  are  min,  my^  STin,  tliy^  ure,  our^  eower,  your^ 
sin,  liis^  and  the  seldom  used  uncer,  of  us  two,  and 
incer,  of  you  two.  These  follow  the  strong  declen- 
sion of  adjectives  (57,  58).  The  indeelinahles  are  his, 
his,  hi(e)re,  her,  and  hi(e)ra,  their,  the  genitives  of 
the  third  personal  pronoun. 

84.  The  demonstrative  '  that.'  —  The  pronoun  se,  seo, 
araet,  is  at  once  the  equivalent  of  Mod.  Eng.  that 
and  of  the  article.  Like  that,  it  is  employed  in  a 
relative  as  well  as  a  demonstrative  sense,  and  fre- 
quently does  duty  for  the  third  personal  pronoun. 
The  demonstrative  pronouns  have  an  instrumental 
case,  as  does  the  neuter  of  the  interrogative  hwset. 


Masculine 

Neuter. 

Feminine. 

Sing.  N. 

se  (emphatic  se) 

ffaet 

seo 

G. 

ffaes 

afiere 

D. 

ffsem  (ffam) 

aCaere 

A. 

aPone 

ffset 

afa 

I. 

I5y,  iSon 

Plur.  N.A. 

aPa 

G. 

afara 

(afaera) 

D. 

ar^m 

(aCam) 

1.  The  conjunction  (Tset,  and  the  adverb  cTa  (=  there, 
then,  etc.),  must  not  be  confounded  with  the  pronoun. 

2.  Parallel  with  se,  seo,  is  a   rare    <Te,   Q'eo,  which 
eventually  supplants  the  former. 

3.  ©gem,    (Tam   becomes    STan,    tSon    in   such   words 
as  siS^cTan,  since  (=  sid"  aram). 


PRONOUNS. 


51 


4.    The  forms   of  this  pronoun  should  be   carefully 
distinguished  from  those  of  the  next. 

85.    The  demonstrative  'this.'  —  Mod.  Eng.  this  is  rep- 
resented by  the  demonstrative  S'es,  STeos,  STis. 


Masculine. 

Neuter. 

Feminine, 

Sing.  N. 

afes 

I5is 

ffeos 

G. 

8?is(s)es 

gfisse 

D. 

9'is(s)uin 

ffisse 

A. 

l^isne 

afis 

ffas 

I. 

iSys 

Plur.  N.A. 

afas 

G. 

iS'issa 

D. 

i5is(s)um 

1 .  Alternative  or  occasional  forms  are  nsf .  9'Tos ; 
gsf.  dsf.  9'is(se)re;    dat.  iSriosum  (20). 

86.  Minor  demonstratives.  —  Less  important  demon- 
stratives are  ilea,  same^  which  is  declined  weak,  and 
self,  self^  which  takes  both  declensions. 

87.  Relative  pronouns.  —  The  office  of  the  relative 
is  assumed : 

a)  by  the  demonstrative  se,  seo,  Q'set,  the  reference 
being  rendered  explicit  by  the  case  form. 

5)  by  the  demonstrative  se,  seo,  laraet,  with  the  parti- 
cle STe  appended. 

c)  by  the  indeclinable  iSTe,  the  reference  being  ren- 
dered explicit  by  an  appended  personal  pronoun  in 
the  proper  case  form. 


52  INFLECTION. 

d)  by  the  particle  STe  alone,  representing  all  num- 
bers, genders,  and  cases,  the  reference  being  much 
less  explicit. 

Illustrations  of  each  of  these  modes  would  be :  — 

a)  Se  stan,  iS'one         iJa  Avyrhtan  awurpon. 

{The  stone,  which  the      builders        rejected.) 

b)  Se  Stan,  iaPone  ffe  fSsi  wyrhtan  awurpon, 

c)  Se  Stan,  9'e  hine  fSsi  wyrhtan  awurpon. 

d)  Se  stall,  9'e  ffa  wyrhtan  aw^urpon. 

88.  Interrogative  pronouns.  —  The  most  important  is 
hwa,  who  9  of  both  genders,  with  its  neuter  hwaet, 
ivhat?  what  sort  of  a? 


Masc.     Fem. 

Neuter. 

N. 

hwa 

hwaet 

G. 
D. 

hwaes 

hwiem  (hwam) 

A. 

hwone 

hwaet 

I. 

hwy,  hwon 

Hwilc,  which?  hwaeSTer,  ivhich  of  two?  and  hlilic,  of 

what  sort?  are  declined  like  strong  adjectives  (57,  58). 

89.   Indefinite  pronouns.  —  The  indefinites  are  :  — 
a)  an,  sum,  a,   a  certain^   senij?,   any^   nan,   ngenigr, 
7io,  no7ie^  selc,  gehwilc,  each^  seg-cTer,  ahwaeSTer,  either^ 
naliwaearer,   neither^  oarer,   other^  swilc,    such^   are    de- 
clined like  strong  adjectives. 

5)  awiht,  oht,  anything^  and  nawilit,  noht,  nothing^ 
with  the  compounds  of  -liwega  (hwaethweg-a,  any- 
thing^ etc.)  are  indeclinable. 


VERBS.  53 

c)  hwa,  an?/  one  (and  its  compounds)  is  declined 
like  the  interrogative. 

d}  Indefinite  relatives  are  formed  from  the  inter- 
rogatives  by  swa-swa:   swa-hwa-swa,  whoever,  etc. 

e)  man  (originally  niann),  one  (cf.  French  on, 
Ger.  man^,  is  used  only  in  the  nom.  sing. 

Verbs. 

90.  Classification  of  verbs.  —  Verbs  are  either  strong 
(92)  or  weak  (96) ;  besides  which  there  are  two  small 
classes  of  important  verbs,  called  respectively  preteri- 
tive  presents  (124  ff.)  and  anomalous  (137  ff.).  Weak 
verbs  are  in  general  derivative ;  and  the  stem  can 
usually  be  detected  as  existing  in  some  other  inde- 
pendent word,  often  a  noun  or  adjective,  or  the  pret. 
sing,  tense-stem  of  a  strong  verb. 

91.  The  present  stem.  —  The  present  stem  of  a  verb 
is  what  remains  after  cutting  off  the  infinitive  ending 
-an  or  -ian  (in  contract  verbs,  -n).  The  radical  vowel 
is  the  vowel  of  this  stem ;  and  the  consonant  or  con- 
sonants which  terminate  the  stem  are,  when  such 
exist,  called  stem-finals.  The  stem  as  obtained  above 
is  one  of  the  four  tense-stems  of  strong  verbs,  or  of 
the  three  tense-stems  of  weak  verbs. 

92.  Tense-stems  of  strong  verbs. — Strong  verbs  change 
the  radical  vowel  to  form  the  different  tense-stems,  like 


54  INFLECTION. 

the  verbs  called  irregular  in  Modern  English.  As  in 
Modern  English  the  verb  drive  has  the  preterit  drove 
and  past  participle  driven^  so  in  Old  English  the  same 
verb  has  the  pret.  sing,  draf  and  past  participle  drifen. 
However,  instead  of  the  three  tense-stems  of  Modern 
English,  there  are  four  in  Old  English  for  strong 
verbs,  the  preterit  being  subdivided  into  preterit  sin- 
gular and  preterit  plural. 

The  four  stems  of  drifan,  drive^  are :  — 

Present.  Pret.  Sing.  Pret.  Plur.  Past  Part. 

drif-  draf  drif-  drif- 

93.  Forms  derived  from  each  stem.  —  From  the  present 
stem  are  formed  the  whole  of  the  present  indicative  and 
optative,  the  imperative  singular  and  plural,  the  infini- 
tive, the  gerund,  and  the  present  participle  —  in  all 
seventeen  forms. 

From  the  pret.  sing,  stem  are  formed  only  the  1st 
and  3d  persons  singular  —  two  forms. 

From  the  pret.  plur.  stem  are  formed  the  whole  pret. 
plur.  of  indicative  and  optative,  the  whole  pret.  sing, 
of  the  optative,  and  the  2d  person  singular  indicative 
—  ten  forms. 

From  the  past  participial  stem  is  formed  only  the 
past  participle  —  one  form. 

94.  Commonest  forms  of  the  verb.  —  From  the  present 
stem  the  form  in  commonest  use  is  the  ind.  pres.  3d 
sing. ;  from  the  pret.  sing,  stem,  the  ind.  pret.  3d  sing. ;, 


VERBS.  55 

from  the  pret.  plur.  stem,  the  ind.  pret.  3d  plur. 
Umlaut  (17)  and  contraction  (34)  are  apt  to  obscure 
the  origin  of  the  first  of  these,  but  not  of  the  other 
two.  Thus  from  standan,  stand  —  whose  principal 
parts  are  standan,  stod,  stodon,  standen  —  the  ind. 
pret.  3d  sing,  is  stod,  the  ind.  pret.  3d  plur.  stodon, 
but  the  ind.  pres.  3d  sing,  st^nt  (instead  of  standeST). 

95.  Conjugation  of  a  strong  verb. — Types  are:  bindan, 
hind;  (for  contracts)  fon,  seize:  — 

Indicative.  Optative. 

Pres.  Sing.  1.  binde;  fo  blnde;  fo 

2.  bind(e)st,  bintst;  fehst  binde;  fo 

3.  bind  (e)  'iS,  bint ;  f ehST  binde ;  f o 
Plur.  bindaiar,  binde ;  f off  binden;  fon 

Pret.  Sing.  1.  band;  feng  bunde;  fenge 

2.  bunde;  fenge  bunde;  fenge 

3.  band;  feng  bunde;  fenge 
Plur.  bundon ;  f engon  bunden ;  f engen 

Imper.  Sing,  bind;  foil  Infin.  bindan ;  fon 

Plur.  bindaiar, binde;  foff     Gerund  to  bindanne;  to  fonne 
Pres.  Part,  bindende;  fonde     Past  Part,  (ge)bunden;  (ge)fangeii 

The  2d  sing.  pres.  ind.  is  sometimes  formed  in  -sar. 
The  tS  is  derived  from  the  STu  of  the  personal  pronoun, 
the  old  ending  having  been  s.  This  s,  followed  by  the 
personal  pronoun,  became  sQ",  which  should  regularly 
become  st  (34),  but  does  not  always. 

Note.  —  The  ind.  and  imper.  (sometimes  opt.)  plur.  binde  is  used 
when  the  verb  is  immediately  followed  by  a  pronoun  as  subject:  binde 
we,  not  bindaff  "we,  we  hind,  let  us  hind;  binde  ge,  not  bindaff  g6, 
hind  ye. 


56  INFLECTION. 

96.  Conjugation  of  the  weak  verb.  —  Weak  verbs  form 
the  preterit  by  the  addition  to  the  present  stem  of  -de 
for  the  singular  (ind.  pret.  2d  sing,  -dest),  and  -don 
(-den)  for  the  plural.  A  few  verbs  take  -e  before 
the  -de,  and  many  take  -o.  The  vowel  of  the  present 
stem  is  never  changed  before  -ede  and  -ode,  but  in 
some  verbs  is  changed  before  -de;  a  list  of  the  latter 
is  given  in  114. 

The  past  participle  of  weak  verbs  is  formed  by  the 
addition  of  -ed  (-od, -d). 

The  -d  of  the  endings  -de,  etc.,  and  -ed,  is  changed 
to  -t  after  certain  stem-finals  (33),  and  is  lost  in  other 
situations ;  for  details  see  113  and  114.  Certain  stem- 
finals  also  undergo  change  before  the  same  endings; 
for  details  see  114. 

97.  Classes  of  strong  verbs.  —  Under  strong  verbs  are 
included  two  principal  divisions,  according  as  their 
tense-stems  were  originally  formed  in  one  manner  or 
another.  Strong  verbs  are  accordingly  divided  into 
Ablaut  Verbs  and  Reduplicating  Verbs.  This  dis- 
tinction is  mainly  historical,  and  for  practical  pur- 
poses need  not  be  insisted  on  at  the  outset. 

98.  Ablaut  verbs.  —  Of  these  there  are  six  principal 
classes,  for  which  see  102-107. 

99.  Vowels  of  the  present  stem.  —  To  facilitate  the 
assignment  of  verbs  to  their  proper  classes,  the  follow- 


VERBS. 


57 


ing  table  may  be  useful,  in  conjunction  with  101-110. 
The  Ablaut  Classes  are  distinguished  by  the  Roman 
numerals,  and  the  Reduplicating  Verbs  by  Red. 


Short  Radical  Vowel. 

Class. 

a 

VI,  Red. 

8B 

VI 

« 

VI 

e  +  r  or  1 

IV 

e  +  any  single  cons,  but  r  or  1 

V 

e  +  two  cons. 

III 

i  followed  by  nasal 

III 

i  followed  by  non-nasal 

III,  IV,  V 

Q,  see  a 

u  in  cuman 

IV 

u  in  other  verbs 

III 

ea 

VI,  Red. 

eo 

Ill 

le 

III,  V,  VI 

Long  Radical  Vowel. 

Class. 

a 

Red. 

86 

Red. 

e 

Red. 

1 

I 

o 

Red. 

il 

II 

ea 

VI,  Red. 

eo  in  contract  verbs 

I,  II,  V 

eo  in  other  verbs 

II 

100.  Contract  verbs.  —  Contract  verbs  are  strong  verbs 
whose  stem-final  was  originally  h.  This  h  was  lost 
before  vowels  (29),  and  the  preceding  vowel  was  then 


58  INFLECTION. 

amalgamated  with  the  following.  The  resultant  diph- 
thong (or  vowel)  is  eo  in  the  case  of  ten  verbs,  ea  in 
that  of  four,  and  o  in  that  of  two.  The  o-verbs  belong 
to  the  Reduplicating  Class,  the  ea-verbs  to  the  Sixth 
Ablaut  Class,  and  the  eo-verbs  to  the  First,  Second, 
and  Fifth  Ablaut  Classes. 

101.  Contract  verbs  according  to  classes.  —  Distributed 
according  to  classes,  the  contract  verbs  are  as  follows :  — 

I.   leon  (orig.   lihan),   lend;  seon,  sift;  teon,   censure;  ffeon, 
thrive;  wreon,  cover. 

II.    fleon  (orig.  fleohan),  flee;  teon,  draio. 

V.   gefeon  (orig.  gefehan),  rejoice;  pleon,  venture;  seon,  see. 

VI.    flean    (orig.    flahan),    flay;    lean,    blame;    sleaii,    strike; 
igfvvean,  icash. 

Red.   fon  (orig.  fanhan  >  fohan),  seize ;  hon,  hang. 

Of  these  the  most  important  are  teon,  censure^  lareon, 
thrive^  wreon,  cover;  fleon,  flee^  teon,  draw;  gefeon, 
rejoice,  seon,  see ;  slean,  strike,  cTwean,  wash ;  fon, 
seize,  and  lion,  hang, 

Teon,  draw  (II),  should  be  carefully  distinguished 
from  teon,  censure  (I);  and  likewise  seon,  see  (V), 
from  seon,  sift  (I).  The  principal  parts  of  teon, 
draw,  are :  — 

teon  teah  tugon  (ge)togen 

of  teon,  censure,  are  :  — 

teon  tah  tigon  (ge)tigen 


VERBS.  59 

But  there  is  a  tendency  on  the  part  of  contract  verbs 
like  the  latter  of  these  (I)  to  assume  throughout  the 
forms  of  the  former  (II). 

Deon,  thrive  (102),  has  past  part.  iSTig-en  and  ScTungen. 

The  imp.  sing,  always  ends  in  h,  and  has  a  long 
vowel  in  verbs  of  the  First,  Second,  and  Redupli- 
cating Classes,  a  short  vowel  in  the  Fifth  and  Sixth. 
Examples:  (I)  teon,  censure^  imp.  tih;  (II)  teon, 
draw^  imp.  teoh ;  (V)  seon,  see^  imp.  seoh ;  (VI)  slean, 
strike^  imp.  sleah ;   (Red.)  fon,  seize^  imp.  foh. 

102.   Strong  verbs  of  the  First  Ablaut  Class.  — 

Stem  vowels  (normally)  i,  a,  i,  i 

Typical  verb      drifan,  drive 

Four  stems        drifan      draf      drifon      drifen 

Like  drifan  are  conjugated  all  strong  verbs  with  i  in 
the  present  stem.  Here  belongs  any  strong  verb  with  a 
in  the  first  preterit  stem,  i  in  the  second  preterit  stem,  or 
i  in  the  past  participial  stem.  Among  the  more  common 
are:  bidan,  remain;  bitan,  hite;  ridan,  ride;  (a)risan, 
arise;  scTnan,  shine;  slitan,  tear ;  stigan,  ascend;  swi- 
can,  abandon;  (ge)witan,  go ;  writan,  write. 

Umlaut  does  not  affect  the  vowel  of  the  present 
stem  (94). 

The  2d  and  3d  sing.  pres.  ind.  are  thus  formed 
(33,34):  — 

d-stems  bidan  bitst,  bit(t) 

t-stems  bitan  bitst,  bit(t) 


60 


INFLECTION. 

8-stems                        risan 

rist,  rist  (risff) 

ly-stems                        sniiafan 

snist,  sni9'(9') 

Contracts  (101)           wreon 

wrihst,  wrihaf 

Others  are  normal     drifan 

drifst,  drifts 

The  second  preterit  and  past  participial  stems  of  the 
verbs  sniafan,  cut^  liSTan,  go,  and  scriacan,  proceed,  take 
d  instead  of  Tf  (37) :  snidon,  sniden,  etc.  Other  verbs 
in  9"  retain  the  tf, 

103.   Strong  verbs  of  the  Second  Ablaut  Class. — 

Stem  vowels      eo  or  u,  ea,  u,  o 
Typical  verbs    beodan,  offer;  brucan,  enjoy 
Four  stems        beodan  bead  budon  boden 

brucan  breac  brucon  brocen 

Like  beodan  are  conjugated  all  strong  verbs  having 
eo  in  the  present  stem,  except  some  contracts,  and 
like  brucan  all  having  u.  Here  belongs  any  strong 
verb  having  ea  in  the  first  preterit  stem.  Among 
the  more  common  are :  ceosan,  choose ;  dreogan, 
endure;  lireosan,  fall ;  (for)leosan,  lose;  teon,  draw; 
bugan,  how. 

Stems  in  s,  D",  and  contract  vowel  (37) :  — 

ceosau  ceas  curon  coren 

seoS'an  seals'  sudou  soden 

teon  (101)       teah  tugon  togeu 

Like  ceosan  are  formed  stems  in  s ;  like  seoSTan, 
abreocTan,  frustrate  ;  like  teon,  fleon,  flee. 

Umlaut  changes  the  eo  of  the  present  to  ie  (or  i), 


VERBS. 


61 


and  u  of  the  present  to  y,  in  the    2d   and   3d   sing, 
pres.  ind. :    forliest,  brycSF. 

The    2d   and   3d   sing.   pres.   ind.    are   thus   formed 
(33,  34):  — 


d-stems 

beodan 

bietst,  biet(t) 

t-stems 

geotan 

gietst,  giet(t) 

s-stems 

forleosan 

forliest,  forliest  (-sff) 

g-stems  (28) 

dreogan 

driegst  (-hst),  driegff  (-hS") 

Contracts  (101) 

teon 

tiehst,  tiehfS 

Others  are  normal 

creopan 

criepst,  criep9' 

104.   Strong  verbs  of  the  Third  Ablaut  Class. — 

Stem  vowels  various,  but  all  short 

Typical  verbs   bindan,  bind;  helpan, help;  gieldan, yield;  weorpan, 
throw  ;  berstan,  hurst 


stems 

bindan 

band 

bundon 

bunden 

helpan 

bealp 

hulpon 

holpen 

gieldan 

geald 

guidon 

golden 

weorpan 

wearp 

wurpon 

worpen 

berstan 

baerst 

burston 

borsten 

Like  bindan  are  conjugated  all  strong  verbs  in  in 
or  im  +  consonant,  besides  iernan,  run^  beornan, 
hurn^  originally  rinnan,  brinnan. 

Like  helpan  are  conjugated  all  in  el  +  consonant, 
besides  feolan,  reach^  which  is  irregular. 

Like  g-ieldan  are  conjugated  all  in  iel  +  consonant. 

Like  weorpan  are  conjugated  all  in  eor  or  eoh  + 
consonant  (21.  5). 

Like  berstan  are  conjugated  arerscan,  thresh;  bregd- 
an,   brandish;    stregdan,   strew;    besides   frignan,    in- 


62 


INFLECTION. 


quire^  which  resembles  it  in  all  except  the  vowel  of 
the  present. 

The  stems  of  weoraran,  become^  are  (37) :  — 


weorS'an 


wearff 


wurdon 


worden 


Bregdan  and  frignan  may  drop  g,  and  lengthen 
the  preceding  vowel  (28):   breed,  frinan. 

Findan,  find^  likewise  forms  its  3d  sing.  pret.  ind. 
as  funde,  which  is  indeed  the  usual  form. 

Among  the  more  common  verbs  are :  drincan, 
drink;  findan,  find;  (on)ginnan,  begin;  winnan, 
strive;  limpan,  happen;  belgan,  be  angry;  liweorfan, 
turn;  feohtan,  fight. 

Umlaut  changes  the  eo  of  the  present  to  ie  in  the 
2d  and  3d  sing.  pres.  ind. :  wierpS".  A  similar  change, 
though  not  due  to  precisely  the  same  cause  (17),  is 
found  in  presents  in  e,  which  is  converted  to  i  or  ie: 
hilpst,  bierst. 

The  2d  and  3d  sing.  pres.  ind.  are  thus  formed 
(33,  34):  — 


d-stems 

bindan 

bintst,  bint 

t-stems 

feohtan 

flehtst,  fieht 

st-stems 

berstan 

bierst,  bierst 

ff-stems 

weorffan 

wier(9')st,  wierlj 

nn-stems 

winnan 

winst,  winl5  (35,  6) 

Others  are 

normal 

singan 

singst,  singSf 

The  stems  of  feolan,  reach^  are :  — 
feolan  fealh  fulgon  (faelon) 


folen 


VERBS.  63 

Exceptional  forms  are  the  3d  sing.  pres.  ind.  of 
bregdan  and  stregdaii:    britt,  stret(t). 

105.  Strong  verbs  of  the  Fourth  Ablaut  Class. — 

Stem  vowels     e  ae        se        o 

i  (u)      o  o  u 

Typical  verb     beran,  hear 
Eour  stems       beran,  bser,  b^ron,  boren 

Like  beran  are  conjugated  teran,  tear;  scieran  (18), 
shear ;  cwelan,  die ;  helaii,  conceal ;  stelan,  steal ; 
hwelan,  roar ;   brecan,  break. 

The  two  irregular  verbs  of  this  class  are  among 
the  most  important  in  the  language :  niman,  take^ 
and  cuman,  come.     Their  stems  are  :  — 

niman  nom  nonion  numen 

cuman  c(w)om  c(w)omon  cumen  (cymen) 

Umlaut  changes  the  u  of  cuman  to  y  in  the  2d 
and  3d  sing.  pres.  ind. :  cymst,  cymO".  A  similar 
change,  though  not  due  to  precisely  the  same  cause 
(17),  is  found  in  the  presents  in  e,  which  is  changed 
to  i  or  ie:   bi(e)rst,  stilSF. 

106.  Strong  verbs  of  the  Fifth  Ablaut  Class. — 

Stem  vowels  (normally)  e,  se,  ge,  e 

Typical  verbs   sprecan,  speaA; ;  cweSfan,  say  ;  giefan,  gfive  ;  biddan, 
request ;  gef eon,  rejoice 

Four  stems       sprecan  spraec  sprsecon  sprecen 

cweSan  cwaeSF  cwsedon  (37)       cweden 

giefan  (18)        geaf  geafon  giefen 


64  INFLECTION. 

Four  stems       biddan  baed  bsedon  beden 

gefeon  (101)        gefeah         gefiegon 

.  Like  sprecan  are  conjugated  etan,  eat;  tredan, 
tread;  metan,  measure;  wrecan,  pursue;  and  a  few 
others. 

Like  cweacan  is  conjugated  no  other  verb. 

Like  g-iefan  is  conjugated  gietan,  get  (18). 

Like  biddan  are  conjugated  licgan,  lie;  sittan,  sit. 

Like  gefeon  is  conjugated  seon,  see,  except  that  its 
pret.  plur.  is  sawon,  and  past  participle  sewen,  segen. 

Umlaut,  or  a  change  analogous  to  it  (17),  converts 
the  e  of  the  present  to  i  in  the  2d  and  3d  sing.  pres. 
ind.:  cwiiSr;  in  contracts  we  have  ie,  not  ie,  since  the 
vowel  of  the  present  was  originally  short:  siehar. 

The  2d  and  3d  sing.  pres.  ind.  are  thus  formed 
(33,  34):  — 


d- stems 

tredan 

tritst,  trit(t) 

t-stems 

gietan 

gietst,  glet(t) 

S'-stems 

cweffan 

cwist,  cwiaf 

g-stems  (28) 

licgan 

ligst  (list),  ligU  (IVS) 

Contracts  (101) 

seon 

siehst,  siehij 

Others  are  normal 

sprecan 

spriest,  sprieff 

The  vowel  of  the  pret.  sing,  is  sometimes  long  in 
verbs  in  et:    set,  mset.      Imp.  sing,  bide  (cf.  107). 

107.   Strong  verbs  of  the  Sixth  Ablaut  Class. — 

Stem  vowels  (normally)  a,  o,  o,  a 

Typical  verbs   faran,  go;  slean,  strike;  standan,  stand;  h^bban, 
raise 


VERBS. 


66 


Four  stems     faran 

for 

foron 

faren 

slean  (101) 

slog 

slogon  (37) 

slaegen  (sl^gen) 

standan 

stod 

stodon 

standen 

h^bban  (11) 

hof 

hofon 

hafen 

Like  faran  are  conjugated  sacan,  dispute^  wacan, 
wake^  tosc(e)acan,  depart^  and  one  or  two  others. 

Like  slean  are  conjugated  lean,  hlame^  Sfwean,  wash. 

Like  standan  is  conjugated  no  other  verb. 

In  the  main  like  hi^bban  are  conjugated  the  fol- 
lowing :  — 


hliehhan  (36) ,  laugh  hloh 

scieppan  (18),  create  scop  (sceop) 

staeppan,  step  stop 

sw^rian,  swear  swor 


hlogon  (37) 

scopon  (sceopon)  sceapeii 

stopon  stapen 

sworon  sworen 


Umlaut  changes  the  a  of  the  present  to  ^  (se),  and 
the  ea  of  the  present  (see  101)  to  ie  (not  ie),  in  the 
2d  and  3d  sing.  pres.  ind. :   st^nt,  fserst,  sliehtT. 

The  2d  and  3d  sing.  pres.  ind.  are  thus  formed 
(34):- 


d-stems  standan 

b-stems  h^bban 

Contracts  (101)  slean 

Others  are  normal  faran 


st^ntst,  st^nt 

h^fst,  h^f  iar 

sliehst,  sliehS^ 
faerst,  faera* 


The  verbs  like  h^bban  are  peculiar  in  having 
umlaut  in  the  present  stem,  which  causes  them,  in 
so  far,  to  resemble  the  Weak  Verbs  of  the  First 
Class  (111).  Like  s^llan,  etc.,  they  have  the  imp.  sing. 
in  -e:  h^fe,  sw^re,  etc.  (cf.  117).  The  umlaut  is  due 
to  the  fact  that  the  stem  of  this  group,  unlike  that  of 


66 


INFLECTION. 


most  strong  verbs,  was  followed  by  a  j  (16).  Thus 
the  inf.  stseppaii  stands  for  original  stapjan;  were  it 
not  for  the  umlaut-causing  -j-,  the  infinitive  would 
have  been  stapan;  and  so  in  the  other  four  verbs. 

108.  Reduplicating  verbs.  —  Stem  vowels  various. 

A  peculiarity  of  this  class  —  shared,  however,  by  a 
very  few  verbs  of  the  Sixth  Ablaut  Class  (107)  —  is 
that  the  vowels  of  the  first  and  fourth  stems  are 
identical  (with  two  or  three  exceptions  noted  below), 
and  that  those  of  the  second  and  third  stems  are 
likewise  identical.  The  vowel  (diphthong)  of  the 
preterit  is  sometimes  eo,  less  frequently  e. 

109.  Reduplicating  preterits  in  eo.  —  The  present 
stem  has  ea  (rarely  a),  a,  ea,  o,  or  e. 

Typical  verbs   feallan,  fall;    bannan,   summon;    cnawan,    know; 
heawan,  heio ;  flowan,  floiv  ;  wepan,  weep 


Four  stems 

feallan 

feoll 

feollon 

feallen 

bannan 

beonn 

beonnon 

bannen 

cnawan 

cneow^ 

cneow^on 

cnawen 

heawan 

heow 

heowon 

heawen 

flow^an 

fleow 

fleowon 

flowen 

wepan 

w^eop 

weopon 

w^open 

Like  feallan  are  conjugated  verbs  in  eal  +  conso- 
nant, besides  weaxan,  grow  (originally  of  the  Sixth 
Ablaut  Class,  107) :  healdan,  hold ;  wealdan,  gov- 
ern^ etc. 

Like  bannan  (very  rare)  is  conjugated  gangan,  go 
(but  usually  as  gan,  141). 


VERBS.  67 

Like  cnawan  are  conjugated  verbs  in  aw,  besides 
swapan,  sweep  :  —  bliiwaii,  blow  ;  sawan,  sow,  etc. 

Like  heawaii  are  conjugated  verbs  in  ea :  beatan, 
beat;  hleapan,  leap. 

Like  flowan  are  conjugated  verbs  in  o:  blowan, 
bloom  (not  to  be  confounded  with  blawan,  blow} ; 
growan,  grow;   spowaii,  thrive;   rowan,  row. 

Like  wepan  is  conjugated  no  other  common  verb; 
in  wepan  the  stem  vowel  of  the  present  is  derived 
by  umlaut  from  6,  the  latter  reappearing  in  the  past 
participle. — Umlaut  as  in  94. 

110.  Reduplicating  preterits  in  e.  —  The  present  stem 
has  a,  se,  or  5.     Umlaut  as  in  94. 

Typical  verbs  laetan,  let;  hatan,  call;  fon,  seize 

Four  stems       Isetan  let  leton  Iseten 

batan  het  heton  haten 

fon  (101)         feng  fengon  fangen 

Like  Isetan  are  conjugated  drsedan,  dread;  rsedan, 
consult,  read  (usually  weak) ;   slsepan,  sleep. 

Like  hatan  is  conjugated  lacan,  Jump;  scadan, 
sceadan  (18),  separate. 

Like  fon  is  conjugated  hon,  hang  (3d  sing.  fehSr, 
hehar). 

111.  Weak  verbs  of  the  First  Class.  —  The  stem  vowel 
of  the  present  always  has  umlaut  (except  that  eo  some- 
times persists,  i.e.,  does  not  become  ie).  The  infinitive 
ends  in  -an  or  -ian,  the  latter  being  infrequent. 


b8  INFLECTION. 

112.  Weak  infinitives  in  -an.  —  These  take  the  pret- 
erit either  (113,  114)  in  -de  (-te)  or  (115)  in  -ede,  the 
past  participle  in  -ed  or  in  -d  (-t). 

113.  Weak  preterits  in  -de  (-te),  with  retention  of  the 
stem  vowel.  —  Here  belong  verbs  whose  stem  vowel  is 
long  by  nature  (4),  and  a  number  in  which  the  stem 
syllable  is  long  by  position  as  a  result  of  gemination 
(36).  The  past  participle  is  formed  in  -ed,  contraction 
taking  place  in  t-  and  d-  stems.  The  infinitive  always 
ends  in  -an.     Simplified  gemination  by  35. 


stems      hieran,  hear 

hierde 

(ge)hiered 

fyllan,  fill 

fylde  (35) 

(ge)fyUed 

cyssan,  kiss 

cyste  (33,  35) 

(ge)cyssed 

s^ttan,  set 

s^tte  (33) 

(ge)s^tt 

s^ndan,  send 

s^nde 

(ge)s^nd(ed) 

I^dan,  lead 

ISdde 

(ge)15ed(ed) 

iecan,  increase 

iecte  (33) 

(ge)Ieced 

ehtan,  persecute 

ehte 

(ge)eht 

metan,  find 

mette 

(ge)met(t) 

gierwan,  prepare 

gierede 

(ge)gier(w)ed 

Like  hieran  are  conjugated  all  verbs  not  belonging 
to  any  of  the  following  divisions. 

Like  fyllan  are  conjugated  stems  ending  in  a  double 
consonant,  excepting  those  like  cyssan  and  s^ttan,  and 
under  114  and  115. 

Like  cyssan  are  conjugated  stems  ending  in  ff,  pp, 
and  ss. 

Like  s^ttan  are  conjugated  stems  ending  in  tt  (imp. 
sing.  s^te). 


VERBS.  69 

Like  s^ndan  are  conjugated  stems  ending  in  a  con- 
sonant +  d. 

Like  Isedan  are  conjugated  stems  ending  in  a 
vowel  +  d. 

Like  iecan  are  conjugated  stems  ending  in  c,  p, 
and  X. 

Like  elitan  are  conjugated  stems  ending  in  a  con- 
sonant +  t. 

Like  metan  are  conjugated  stems  ending  in  a 
vowel  4-  t. 

Like  gierwan  are  conjugated  stems  ending  in  rw 
and  Iw.  The  forms  of  the  present  sometimes  retain 
the  w,  sometimes  not. 

114.   Irregular  preterits  and  past  participles.  —  Certain 

verbs,  in  other  respects  like  those  of  the  last  para- 
graph, and  whose  stems  end  in  11,  cc,  c  (nc,  re),  or 
g  (eg,  ng-),  form  their  preterits  and  past  participles 
from  a  stem  without  umlaut.  In  the  case  of  the  11-, 
ce-,  and  simple  e-verhs,  to  determine,  from  the  pi'es- 
ent  stem,  what  form  the  past  stem  will  assume, 
find  the  original  vowel  corresponding  to  the  umlaut 
vowel  of  the  present,  and  consider  what  changes,  if 
any,  will  be  caused  by  breaking  (21).  The  1-verbs 
take  -de  and  -d,  the  e-  and  g-verbs  -te  and  -t.  The 
c-  and  g-verbs  often  insert  -e-  before  the  infinitive 
ending  (18).  Stems  ending  in  e  and  g  change  these 
consonants  to  h  before  the  t  of  the  ending. 


70 

INFLECTION. 

The  list  is  as  follows:  — 

ll-verbs 

cw^Uan,  kill 
dw^llan,  deceive 
s^Uan,  give 
st^llan,  place 
t^llan,  count 

cwealde 

(g«)cweald 

cc-verbs 

cw^cc(e)an,  shake 
dr^cc(e)aii,  vex 
l^cc(e)an,  moisten 
r^cc(e)an,  expound 
8tr^cc(e)an,  stretch 
ff^cc(e)an,  cover 
w(r)^cc(e)aii,  wake 

cweahte 

(ge)cweaht 

laecc(e)an,  seize 

laehte 

(ge)l8eht 

c-verbs 

raec(e)an,  reach 

raehte 

(ge)rgeht 

taec(e)an,  teach 

tfcehte 

(ge)tseht 

rec(e)aii,  recc(e;an,  reck 

rohte 

(ge)roht 

sec  (e)  an,  seek 

sohte 

(ge)soht 

nc-verbs 

»^ne(e)an,  think 

ffohte 

(ge)afoht 

ffync(e)an,  seem 

ffuhte 

(ge)l9'nht 

rc-verb 

wyrc(e)an,  work 

■worhte 

(ge)worht 

eg- verb 

bj^cg(e)an,  buy 

bohte 

(ge)boht 

ng-verb 

bringan,  bring 

brohte 

(ge)broht 

The  preterit  and  past  participle  of  raec(e)an  and 
tsec(e)an  should  properly  have  a:  rahte,  etc.  This 
does,  indeed,  sometimes  occur,  but  is  much  less  com- 
mon than  the  se. 

115.   Infinitives  in  -an,  with  preterit  in  -ede.  —  Here 

belong  two  groups  of  verbs  whose  infinitives  end   in 
-an  (exceptionally  -ian). 

(a)  The  first  group  comprises  the  following  verbs 
with   stems   ending   in    a   double    consonant  (cf.  11) ; 


VERBS.  71 

fr^mman,  perform;  gr^mmaii,  provoke;  trymman, 
confirm;  ST^nnan,  extend;  w^niian,  accustom;  dynnan, 
hlynnan,  resound;  cnyssan,  heat;  sc^araran,  injure 
(sometimes     strong) ;     sw^bban,     quiet ;     w^cg'(e)an, 

agitate;  9'icg(e)an,  receive  (sometimes  strong).  Occa- 
sionally these  verbs  take  an  infinitive  in  -ian  (116). 

(J)  The  second  group  comprises  stems  ending  in 
a  consonant  +  either  1,  n,  or  r.  This  group  is  some- 
what irregular,  occasionally  having  preterits  like 
hyngerde,  instead  of  the  more  regular  hyngrede, 
n^mde  for  n^inn(e)de,  named,  and  ^fnde  for  ^fnede, 
performed. 

Typical  verbs    (a)  fr^mman,  perform      fr^mede  (ge)fr^med 

(6)  hyngran,  hunger         hyngrede       (ge)hyngred 

Note.  —  Ii^cg(e)an,  lay,  is  irregular  in  the  preterit  and  past  part.: 
l^gde  (lede),  (ge)l^gd  (-led),  instead  of  l^gede,  (ge)l^ged. 

116.  Infinitives  in  -ian  with  preterit  in  -ede.  —  Here 
belong  a  few  weak  verbs  of  the  First  Class.  They 
have  a  short  stem  ending  in  r,  or  occasionally  in  1, 
m,  n,  or  one  of  the  spirants.  The  vowel  of  the  stem 
is  usually  ^  (ie)  or  y.  Examples  are :  n^rian,  save ; 
h^rian,  praise ;  byrian,  pertain ;  h^lian,  conceal ; 
trymian,  confirm  (see  115.  «). 

Three  stems      n^rian  n^rede  (ge)n^red 

117.  Paradigms  of  the  First  Class.  —  For  the  conju- 
gation   of    weak   verbs    of    the    First    Class    we    may 


72 


INFLECTION. 


choose :    hieran,    hear    (113) ;    s^llan,   give    (114,   36) ; 
fr^mman,  perform  (115);   n^rian,  save  (116). 


Present. 

Indicative. 

Sing.  1. 

Mere 

s^Ue               fr^mme 

n^rie 

2. 

hierst  (23) 

s^l(e)st         fr^mest 

n^rest 

3. 

hierac 

8^1  (e)  9          fr^meSf 

nereis 

^  Plur. 

hieraaf 

s^Ila(5             fr^mmaS" 

Optative. 

n^rialJ 

Sing. 

hiere 

s^Ue               fr^inme 

n^rie 

Plur. 

hieren 

sullen             fr^mmen 

Imperative. 

n^rien 

Sing. 

hier  (23) 

s^le                fr^me 

n^re 

Plur. 

hiera($ 

s^llaaf             fr^inma)5 

Infinitive. 

n^riaff 

hieran 

s^llan             fr^mman 

Participle. 

n^rian 

hierende 

s^liende        fr^mmende 

Preterit. 
Indicative. 

n^riende 

Sing.  1. 

hierde 

sealde            fr^mede 

n^rede 

2. 

hierdest 

sealdest         fr^medest 

n^redest 

3. 

hierde 

sealde            fr^inede 

ii^rede 

Plur. 

hierdon 

sealdon         fr^medon 

Optative, 

n^redon 

Sing. 

hierde 

sealde            fr^mede 

n^rede 

Plur. 

hierden 

sealden         fr^nieden 

Participle. 

n^reden 

Sing. 

hiered 

seald              framed 

n^red 

Plur. 

hier(e)de 

sealde           fr^mede 

n^rede 

VERBS.  73 

118.  Weak  verbs  of  the  Second  Class.  —  These  are 
very  numerous.  Many  are  formed  from  nouns  and 
adjectives  (cf.  90).  The  infinitive  always  ends  in 
-ian,  or  its  equivalent  -ig(e)an  (18).  Though  the 
i  of  an  ending  usually  causes  umlaut,  it  does  not  in 
these  verbs,  because  of  its  comparatively  late  origin, 
the  older  termination  having  been  -ojon  (that  is, 
-o-yoii),  which  was  incapable  of  causing  umlaut,  since 
it  was  -6-,  rather  than  -j-  (that  is,  -y-),  which  imme- 
diately followed  the  stem. 

Hence  it  is  easy  to  distinguish  verbs  of  this  Class 
from  verbs  in  -ian  of  the  First  Class  (116):  — 

1.  Of  those  verbs  there  are  but  few;  of  these,  many. 

2.  Of  those  the  vowels  are  always  umlauted  (usually 
^  or  y) ;  of  these,  rarely,  and  only  when  the  verb  was 
formed  from  a  noun  or  adjective  whose  vowel  was 
already  umlauted. 

3.  Of  those  the  stem  usually  ends  in  r;  of  these, 
in  any  consonant  or  consonant  combination. 

119.  Paradigm  of  the  Second  Class.  —  As  a  typical 
verb  we  may  select  lufian,  love. 

\  Present. 

Indicative.  Optative.  Imperative. 

Sing.  1.   lufie    ^  Sing,   lufa 

2.  lufast  I  lufie  Plur.    lufiaS' 

3.  lufaSr  J 

Plur.    lufiaar  lufien 

Infin.   lufian  Part,   lufiende 


74 


INFLECTION. 
Preterit. 


Indicative. 
Sing.  1.    lufode     ^ 

2.  lufodest  I 

3.  lufode     J 
Plur.    lufedon,  -odon 


Optative. 
lufode 
lufoden,  -eden 


Part,    (ge)lilfod 


In  the  endings,  ig(e)  or  g-  is  frequently  found  for 
i  (18). 

Sometimes,  instead  of  -ode,  the  ending  is  -ade, 
-ude,  or  even  -ede;   but  -ode  is  normal. 

120.  Weak  verbs  of  the  Third  Class.  —  These  com- 
prise liabban,  have ;  libban  (lifian),  live ;  s^cg(e)an, 
8ay ;  hycg"(e)an,  think.  These  are  conjugated  partly 
according  to  the  First  Class  (117),  and  partly  accord- 
ing to  the  Second  (119). 


121.    Conjugation  of  habban,  have.  —  Habban,  have; 
nabban,  have  not  (29). 


Indicative. 
Pres.  Sing.  1.   haebbe 

2.  haefst  (hafast) 

3.  hsefff  (hafaaP) 
Plur.    habbaff  (haBbbaff) 

Pret.  Sing,   haefde,  etc. 
Plur.   haefdon 

Imper.  Sing,   hafa 

Plur.    habbaST 

Pres.  Part,   haebbende 


Optative. 
haebbe 
haebbe 
haebbe 

haebben 

haefde 
haefden 

Infin.    habban 

Past  Part.   (ge)haBfd 


VERBS. 


75 


Indicative. 

Pres.  Sing.  1.  nsebbe 

2.  naefst  (nafast) 

3.  nsefO"  (nafaff) 
Plur.  nabbaS" 

Pret.  Sing,  naefde,  etc. 

Plur.  naefdon 

Imper.  Sing,  nafa 

Plur.  nabbaS? 

Pres.  Part,  naebbende 


Optative. 

naebbe 

naebbe 

naebbe 

nsebben 

nsefde 

naefden 

Infin.    nab  ban 

Past  Part.   (ge)n8efd 


122.    Conjugation  of  libban,  live. — 


Indicative. 

Pres.  Sing.  1.  libbe 

2.  leofast  (20) 

3.  leofaiy 

Plur.  libbaa?,  lifiaff 

Pret.  Sing,  lifde,  etc. 

Plur.  lifdon 

Imper.  Sing,  leofa  (20) 

Plur.  libbaiar,  lifia» 

Pres.  Part,  libbende,  lifiende 


Optative. 

libbe,  lifie,  etc. 

libben,  llfien 

lifde 

Ufden 

Infin. 

libban,  lifian 

Past  Part. 

(ge)lifd 

123.   Conjugation  of  s^cg(e)an,  sai/. — 


Indicative. 

Pres.  Sing.  1.  s^cge 

2.  saegst,  s^gst,  sagast 

3.  ssegiar,  s^gS",  sagalSF 
Plur.  s^cg(e)aiy 

Pret.  Sing,  saegde,  ssede  (28),  etc. 

Plur.  saegdon,  seedon 

Imper.  Sing,  saga,  s^ge 

Plur.  s^cg(e)aS' 


Optative. 
s^cge,  etc. 


s^cgen 
saegde,  s^ede 
saegden,  saeden 


Infin.   s^cg(e)an 


Pres.  Part,    s^cgende 


Past  Part,    (ge)saegd,  (ge)s8ed 


76  INFLECTION. 

124.    Conjugation  of  hycg(e)an,  thinh. — 

Indicative.  Optative. 

Pres.  Sing.  1.    hycge  hycge,  etc. 

2.  hygst,  hogast 

3.  hygS",  hogaiy 

Plur.    hycg(e)aiy  hycgen 

Pret.  Sing.    hog(o)de,  etc.  hog(o)de 

Plur.    hog(o)don  hog(o)den 


Infin.    hycg(e)aii 


Imper.  Sing,    hoga 

Plur.    hycg(e)al5 
Pres.  Part,    hycgende  Past  Part.    (ge)hog(o)d 


PRETERITIVE   PRESENTS. 

125.  Preteritive  presents.  —  A  small  group  of  verbs 
have  strong  preterits  with  present  meaning  (the  old 
presents  being  lost),  and  form  new  weak  preterits 
from  these.  They  are :  witan,  know ;  agan,  own ; 
du^an,  avail;  unnan,  grant;  ciinnan,  knoiv ;  (Turf an, 
need;  durraii  (?),  dare;  sculaii,  shall;  inunan,  intend; 
inugan(?),  can;  nugan(?),  suffice;  inotan(?),  mai/. 

126.  Conjugation  of  witan,  know.  —  Ind.  pres.  sing. 
1.  3.  wat,  2.  wast ;  plur.  wi(e)ton ;  pret.  wiste 
(wisse),  etc.  Opt.  pres.  wi(e)te,  etc. ;  pret.  wiste 
(wisse),  etc.  Imper.  wite.  Infin.  wi(e)tan.  Pres. 
part,  witende;   past  part,  (ge)witen. 

For  wi(e)tan,  etc.,  is  found  wiotan,  etc. 

Like  witan  is  conjugated  nytan,  not  to  know : 
nat,  etc.  Wherever,  in  the  forms  of  witan,  i  (ie,  io) 
occurs,  y  is  here  to  be  substituted. 


VERBS.  77 

127.  Conjugation  of  agran,  possess.  —  Ind.  pres.  sing. 
1.  3.  ah,  2.  ahst ;  plur.  agon ;  pret.  alite,  etc.  Opt. 
pres.  age,  etc.;  pret.  ahte.  Imper.  age.  Infin.  agan. 
Pres.  part,  agencle;   past  part,  agen,  own  (^adjS). 

So  nagan,  not  to 


128.  Conjugation  of  dugan,  avail.  —  Ind.  pres.  sing. 
1.  3.  deali ;  plur.  dugoii ;  pret.  dohte,  etc.  Opt. 
pres.  dyge,  duge,  etc.  Infin.  dugan.  Pres.  part. 
dugende. 

129.  Conjugation  of  unnan,  grant.  —  Ind.  pres.  sing. 
1.  3.  an(u);  plur.  unnon ;  pret.  uiSTe.  Opt.  pres. 
unne,  etc. ;  pret.  uKTe,  etc.  Imper.  unne.  Infin. 
unnan.      Pres.  part,  unnende;   past  part,  (ge)unnen. 

130.  Conjugation  of  cunnan,  know.  —  Ind.  pres.  sing. 
1.  3.  ean(n),  canst ;  plur.  cunnon ;  pret.  cuSTe,  etc. 
Opt.  pres.  cunne,  etc. ;  pret.  cuSTe,  cyafe,  etc.  Infin. 
cunnan.     Past  part,  (ge)cunnen,  and  cuS"  (adj.^. 

131.  Conjugation  of  cTurfan,  need.  —  Ind.  pres.  sing. 
1.  3.  arearf,  2.  cTearft ;  plur.  arurfon ;  pret.  STorfte, 
etc.  Opt.  pres.  STyrfe,  STurfe,  etc. ;  pret.  iSForfte,  etc. 
Infin.  cTurfan.      Pres.  part,  iarearfende. 

132.  Conjugation  of  durran,  dare.  —  Ind.  pres.  sing. 
1.  3.  dearr,  2.  dearst ;  plur.  durron ;  pret.  dorste, 
etc.      Opt.  pres.  dyrre,  durre,  etc. 


78  INFLECTION. 

133.  Conjugation  of  sculan,  shall.  —  Ind.  pres.  sing. 
1.  3.  sceal,  2.  scealt ;  plur.  sculon  ;  pret.  sc(e)olde, 
etc.      Opt.  pres.  scyle,  scule,  etc.      Infin.  sculan. 

134.  Conjugation  of  munan,  intend.  —  Ind.  pres.  sing. 
1.  3.  man,  2.  nianst ;  plur.  munon  (muna^T) ;  pret. 
munde.  Opt.  pres.  myne,  mune,  etc.  Iniper.  sing. 
mun ;  plur.  munaaf.  Infin.  munan.  Pres.  part. 
munende ;   past  part,  (ge)munen. 

135.  Conjugation  of  mugan,  can.  —  Ind.  pres.  sing. 
1.  3.  mseg,  2.  meaht ;  plur.  magon ;  pret.  meahte, 
etc.      Opt.  pres.  maege,  etc. 

136.  Conjugation  of  nugan,  suffice.  —  Ind.  pres.  sing. 
3.  neah  ;  plur.  nugon ;  pret.  nohte,  etc.  Opt.  pres. 
nuge,  etc. 

137.  Conjugation  of  motan,  may.  —  Ind.  pres.  sing. 
1.  3.  mot,  2.  most ;  plur.  moton ;  pret.  moste,  etc. 
Opt.  pres.  mote,  etc. 

ANOMALOUS   VERBS. 

138.  Conjugation  of  wesan,  beon,  he. — 

Indicative.  Optativb. 

Pres.  Sing.  1.  eom  ;  beo  sie ;  beo,  etc. 

2.  eart;  bist 

3.  is  ;  biff  ;  neg.  nis 

Plur.  sind,  -t ;  sindon  ;  beoff  sien ;  beon 


VERBS. 


79 


Indicative. 
Pret.  Sing.  1.  waes ;  neg.  naes 

wSre ;  neg.  naere 
waes;  neg.  naes 
waeron. ;  neg.  naeron 

Iinper.  Sing,  wes ;  beo 

Plur.  wesa9' ;  heofS 


Optative. 
wsere;  neg.  nSre 
wSre;  neg.  nSre 
wSre;  neg.  naere 
waeren ;  neg.  naeren 

Infin.  wesan ;  beon 
Pres.  Part,  wesende ;  beonde 


139.    Conjugation  of  willan,  will. — 

Indicative. 


Optative. 


Pres.  Sing.  1.  wil(l)e;  neg.  ne(l)le,  ny(l)le 

2.  wilt;  neg.  nelt,  nylt 

3.  wil(l)e;  neg.  nel(l)e,  nyl(l)e 

Plur.  willaar ;  neg.  nellaaC,  nyllaiff 


J  w^ille,  etc. ;  neg.  nelle, 
I       nylle,  etc. 

willen  ;    neg.    nellen, 
nyllen 

Pret.  Sing,  w^olde,  etc.  ;  neg.  nolde,  etc.       w^olde;  neg.  nolde 
Plur.  Tv^oldon  ;  neg.  noldon  w^olden ;  neg.  nolden 

Imper.  Plur.  neg.  nellaS',  nyllaac  Infin.  willan 

Pres.  Part,  willende 


140.    Conjugation  of  don,  do, — 


Indicative, 
Pres.  Sing.  1.  do 

2.  dest 

3.  deiSf 

Plur.  doff 

Pret.  Sing,  dyde,  etc. 
Plur.  dydon 

Imper.  Sing,  do 
Plur.  doff 

Pres.  Part,  donde 


Optative. 
do,  etc. 


don 

dyde 
dyden 


Infin.  don 
Past  Part,  (ge)don 


80 


INFLECTION. 


141.    Conjugation  of  gan,  go. 

Indicative. 
Pres.  Sing.  1.  ga 

2.  g^st 

3.  gfcear 

Plur.  gaff 

Pret.  Sing,  code,  etc. 
Plur.  eodon 

Imper.  Sing,  ga 
Plur.  gaff 

Pres.  Part,  gande 


Optative. 
ga,  etc. 


gan 

code 
eoden 


Infin.  gan 
Past  Part,  (ge)gan 


FOEMATIOISr    OF   WOBDS. 


142.  Prefixes.  —  Many  Old  English  prefixes  are  self- 
explanatory.  Others,  with  their  meanings,  are  as 
follows :  — 

a-     (1)  =  'up,'  'out'  (Ger.  er-):  sifjUan,  fill  up,  asceot- 
an,  shoot  out. 

(2)  representing  on :  awegr  =  on  weg,  awai/. 

(3)  =  '  any  ' :  aliwser,  anywhere. 

(4)  practically  meaningless  :  abidan,  await, 
aef-,  see  of-. 

aeg-  =  '  any,'  '  each '  :  seghwa,  any  one. 

get-  (1)  =  '  at,'  '  to '  (Lat.  ad-) :   aetwitan,  twit,  setgsed- 

ere,  together. 
(2)  =  '  from,'  '  away  ' :  setwindan,  escape  from. 
and-,  Qnd-  is  found  as  the  prefix  of  a  few  nouns ;  for 

its  meaning  see  on-, 
be-  (Ger.  be-) : 

(1)  =  '  about ' :  besorgian,  he  anxious  about. 

(2)  makes  an  intransitive  verb  transitive :  behycgan, 

think  about,  consider. 

(3)  privative:  beninian,  take  from,  t^e^nz^e,  beheafd- 

ian,  behead. 

81 


82  FOKMATION   OF   WORDS. 

(4)  practically    meaningless  :     bebeodan,    com- 
mand. 
ed-        (1)  =  '  counter-,'  '  re-'  (Lat.  re-) :  edlean,  recom- 
pense. 
(2)  occasionally  for  aet- :  edwitan,  twit. 
for-  (Ger.  ver-,  fiir-,  vor-)  : 

(1)  =  '  away,'   '  up,'    '  utterly,'    '  very,'    denoting 

destruction  effected  by  the  action  of  the 
simple  verb:  fordon,  destroy. 

(2)  negative  :  forbeodan,  forbid. 

(3)  =  '  falsely ' :  forsw^rian,  forswear. 

(4)  =  '  down  upon ' :  forseon,  despise. 

(5)  =  '  in  behalf  of ' :  f orstandan,  stand  up  for. 

(6)  =  '  fore-' :  forsceawian,  foresee. 

fore-  =  'fore-'  (Lat.  prse-):  fore^eon.^  foresee^  provide. 
ge-  (Ger.  ge-,  Lat.  con-)  : 

(1)  =  '  together ' :  g-ef era,  companion. 

(2)  =  '  attain  by '  the  action  of  the  simple  verb : 

thus,  winnan,  fight.,  but  gewinnan,  gain 
by  fighting^  conquer. 

(3)  usual  sign  of  past  participle,  when  the  verb 

lacks  any  other  prefix  :  gegan,  gone. 

(4)  practically  meaningless  :  gebed,  prayer. 
mis-  =  '  mis-' :  misw^ndaii,  pervert. 

n-  (for  ne-)  =  '  not ' :  na  (  =  ne  +  a,  not  ever).,  not  at  all; 

nis,  is  not. 
of-        (1)  =  '  off,'  '  from '  (Lat.  de-,  ab-,  pro-,  ex-)  :  of- 

spring,  offspring. 


FORMATION   OF   WORDS.  83 

(2)  =  'upon':  ofsittan,  sit  upon^  oppress. 

(3)  denoting   offence,  injury,  death  (Lat.  ob-) : 

ofSfyncan,    displease^    ofstingan,    stab    to 
death. 

(4)  =  '  attain  by '  the  action  of  the  simple  verb  : 

offaran,  catch  up  with,  ofascian,  learn  hy 
asking. 

(5)  intensive  :  ofhyiigrocl,  very  hungry. 
ofer-     (1)  =  '  over  ' :  oferbrgedan,  overspread. 

(2)  negative  :  of ergietan,  forget. 
on-        (1)  =  '  on,'  '  of  ' :  ondrincan,  drink  of. 

(2)  =  'from,'  'out  of:  onspringan,  hurst  forth. 

(3)  =  '  un-' :  onlucan,  unlock. 

(4)  intensive  :  onstyrian,  agitate. 

or-  =  '  without ' :  orsorg-,  without  anxiety.,  orwene,  with- 
out hope.,  desperate. 
otS-  =  '  away '  (Lat.  ex-,  ab-,  de-)  :  oSTfleon,  fiee  aivay. 
to-         (1)  =  '  to  ' :  tocyme,  advent. 

(2)  =  '  asunder '  (Ger.  zer-,  Lat.  dis-) :  toteran, 
tear  apart.,  tocnawan,  discern. 
un-       (1)  =  '  un-' :    unforht,  fearless,  unrim  (umnum- 
her~),  multitude. 
(2)  =  '  bad ' :  undsed,  ill  deed. 
wii^rer-  (1)  =  '  again '  :  wiQ'ertrod,  return. 

(2)  =  '  against ' :  wiSTersaca,  adversary. 
ymb-  =  '  around '   (Lat.    circum-) :    ymbgang,    circuit, 
ymbsittan,  besiege. 


84  FORMATION   OF   WORDS. 

143.  Suffixes  of  masculine  nouns.  —  The  more  important 
are  -end,  -ere,  -ing,  -ling,  besides  the  originally  inde- 
pendent words  -dom,  -had,  and  -scipe.  The  first  four 
denote  persons ;  the  last  three,  qualities  or  abstractions. 
Besides  these,  there  is  a  masculine  suffix  -els,  denoting 
things. 

-end  (orig.  -ende,   forming  present  participles)  =  '-er,' 
'-or':  scieppend,    creator.      Contract    nouns   with 
this  ending  are  feond,  enemy ^  freond,  friend. 
-ere  ='-er':  hearpere,  harper^  bocere,  scrihe. 
-ing  (1)  =  '  son  of  '  :    ^Eiacelwulflng",   son  of  Athelwulf 
Adaming^,  son  of  Adam. 
(2)  more  generally :  Canting,   inhabitant  of  Kent., 
cyning,  king^  pining,  penny.    The  i  sometimes 
causes  umlaut,  sometimes  not. 
-ling:  geongling,  youngling.,  hyrling,  hireling. 

-dom  (Ger.  -thum)=  '-dom,'  '-ity,'  '-ism,'  '-ship,'  '-acy': 
Cristendom,  Christianity^  cynedom,  kingship. 

-had  (Ger.  -heit,  -keit)= '-hood,'  '-head,'  '-ity':  cild- 
had,  childhood^  maegdenhad,  virginity. 

-scipe  (Ger.  -schaft)  = '-ship,'  '-hood,'  '-ness,'  '-ity': 
freondscipe,  friendship^  feondscipe,  enmity. 

-els  :  byrgels,  tomh^  rsedels,  7'iddle. 

144.  Suffixes  of  feminine  nouns.  —  The  chief  are  -estre, 
-nes,  -3",  -tSxx  Q-tSo)^  -ung  (-ing),  and  the  originally  inde- 
pendent -rgeden. 

-estre  =  '  -tress  ' :  Iserestre,  instructress. 


FORMATION   OF    WORDS.  85 

-nes  (Ger.  -nis)=  '-ness,'  '-ity,'  forms  abstracts  from 
the  present  and  past  participial  stems  of  verbs, 
but  especially  from  adjectives:  elitnes,  persecution^ 
forsewennes,  contempt^  halignes,  holiness. 

-9",  -STu,  -tSo  =  '  -th '  :  li^iar,  healthy  str^ng-STu,  strength. 
This  ending  was  originally  -iara,  the  -i  of  which 
caused  umlaut. 

-ung  (occasionally  -ing')=  '-ing,'  '-ation,'  forms  nouns 
from  the  present  stem  of  (usually  weak)  verbs : 
bletsuug,  blessing,  costung,  temptation. 

-rsedeii  =  '  -red,'  '  -ship,'  '  -ity ' :  hierdrgeden,  guardian- 
ship, guard. 

145.  Suffixes  of  neuter  nouns.  —  The  two  principal,  -lac 
and  -rice,  were  originally  independent  words :  — 

-lac  (Mod.  Eng.  -lock,  -ledge) :  brydlac,  wedding. 
-rice  =  '  rule,'  '  realm,'  '  region ' :   biscoprice,  bishopric, 
heofonrice,  kingdom  of  heaven. 

146.  Adjective  suffixes.  —  The  principal  are  -en,  -ig,  -iht, 
-isc,  and  -ol,  besides  the  originally  independent  -bsere, 
-cund,  -faest,  -feald,  -full,  -leas,  -lie,  -mod,  -sum,  -weard, 
-w^nde,  -weorO",  -wierace,  and  -wis.  The  first  four  some- 
times cause  umlaut,  sometimes  not. 

-en  (Lat.  -inus)=  '-en':  linen,  linen,  gylden,  golden. 
-ig  (Ger.  -ig)=  '-y ':  eadig,  blessed,  grsedig,  greedy. 
-iht  (Ger.  -icht)=  '-y ':  hreodiht,  reedy,  stseniht,  stan- 
iht,  stony. 


86  FORMATION   OF   WOKDS. 

-isc  (Ger.  -isch)  =  '  -ish ' :  forms  adjectives  from  com- 
mon, but  especially  from  proper  nouns :  hJeSfenisc, 
heathenish^  Englisc,  English. 

-ol  (Lat.  -ulus)=  'disposed  to':  swicol,  deceitful. 

-bsere  (Ger.  -bar,  Lat.  -ferus,  -fer,  -ger) :  cwealmbsere, 
deadly.,  lustbsere,  agreeable. 

-cund  =  '-ly  ' :  heofondcuiid,  heavenly. 

-faest  (Ger.  -fest)  =' possessing,'  *firm  in':  st^defaest, 
possessing.,  or  firm  in.,  one's  place.,  steadfast.,  arfsest, 
merciful^  pious. 

-feald  (Ger. -fait)  = '-fold' :  f eowerf eald, /oi^r/oZc?. 

-full  (Ger.  -voll)  =  '  -ful ' :  j^eleaff ull,  faithful,  synf ull, 
sinful. 

-leas  (Ger.  -los)  =  '-less':  arleas  (Ger.  ehrlos),  infamous. 

-lie  (Ger.  -lich)  =  '-ly,'  '-al':  eynelie,  royal,  eori^riic,  ter- 
restrial. 

-mod  (cf.  Ger.  -miithig)=  '-minded':  aDmod  (cf.  Ger. 
einmiithig),  unanimous,  eaarmod,  humble. 

-sum  (Ger.  -sam)=  '-full,'  '-some,'  '-able':  lufsum,  lov- 
able, wynsum,  winsome. 

-weard  (cf.  Ger.  -warts)  = 'ward':  hamweard,  home- 
ivard,  on  the  way  home,  aiidweard,  present. 

-w^nde  = '-ary':  halw^nde,  salutary. 

-weorar,  -wur9'=  '-worthy':  arweorSr,  arwuriar,  venerable. 

-wierare,  -wyriSre  (cf.  Ger.  -wiirdig)=  '-worthy':  nyt- 
wierSTe,  useful. 

-wis  =  '-wise ' :  gesceadwis,  intelligent,  rihtwis,  righteous. 


FORMATION   OF   WORDS.  87 

147.  Composition.  —  Compounds  are  numerous  in  Old 
English.  In  this  respect  it  resembles  German  and 
Greek,  while  Modern  English  has  allowed  this  power 
of  forming  compounds  to  fall  into  disuse,  largely 
through  the  influence  of  Latin  and  French.  For  this 
reason  it  would  often  be  easier  to  make  an  idiomatic 
translation  into  Old  English  from  Greek  than  from 
Latin  ;  in  its  plastic  and  pictorial  quality  a  page  of 
Old  English  poetry  suggests  Homer  or  Pindar  rather 
than  Virgil  or  Horace,  and  among  Roman  poets  the 
earlier,  such  as  Lucretius. 

The  relation  of  the  first  element  of  compounds  to 
the  second  should  always  be  noted.  The  first  limits  or 
defines  the  second,  and  for  this  reason  takes  the  stress ; 
but  the  precise  relation  of  the  two  elements  is  now  of 
one  sort,  now  of  another.  Sometimes  it  may  be  ex- 
pressed by  a  preposition,  sometimes  by  the  sign  of  a 
case,  sometimes  by  an  adjective  :  gsers-hoppa,  gsers- 
stapa,  grasshopper^  hopper  in  or  through  the  grass ; 
han-cred,  coek^s-crowing ;  heah-^ngel,  high-angel,  arch- 
angel ;  gini-stan,  gem-stone^  jewel. 

Although  compounds  should  be  studied  with  refer- 
ence to  the  meaning  and  relation  of  their  components, 
they  should  frequently  be  translated  by  a  simple  Mod- 
ern English  word.  Thus  g-aerslioppa  may  sometimes 
be  translated  by  locust;  gimstan  should  never  be 
translated  gemstone ;  and  heahfaeder  should  always 
be  rendered  by  patriarch  or  father. 


SYNTAX. 


148.  Object  of  this  sketch.  —  The  object  of  the  present 
sketch  is  not  to  present  a  complete  view  of  Old  English 
syntax,  even  in  outline,  but  rather  to  call  attention  to 
such  peculiarities  as  are  most  likely  to  cause  difficulty. 
Many  constructions  common  to  all  the  cultivated  Euro- 
pean languages,  especially  to  the  inflected  ones,  will 
either  be  passed  over  without  notice  or  but  briefly 
touched  upon. 

Nouns. 

149.  Subject.  —  The  subject  of  a  finite  verb  is  in  the 
nominative  case.     For  that  of  an  infinitive,  see  169. 

150.  Predicate  nominative.  —  A  predicate  noun  (or 
adjective),  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing  as  its 
subject,  agrees  with  it  in  case.  Examples :  ic  eom 
Apolloiiius;   tfset  ic  gewurde  wseclla. 

.  151.  Apposition.  —  A  noun  annexed  to  another  noun, 
and  denoting  the  same  person  or  thing,  agrees  with 
it  in  case.  Examples :  and  wende  araet  lieo  Diana 
wgere,  seo  gyden;  Arcestrates  (gen.)  dohtor  tfses 
cyning'es. 

Note  hie  sume  =  some  of  them. 

88 


NOUNS.  89 

152.  Vocative.  —  The  vocative,  which  is  identical  in 
form  with  the  nominative,  is  used  in  direct  address. 
It  may  be  preceded  by  an  interjection,  the  second 
personal  pronoun,  or  a  possessive  pronoun;  this  pos- 
sessive pronoun,  when  followed  by  an  adjective,  usually 
takes  before  the  latter  the  demonstrative  pronoun  se. 
Examples:  (Tu  sse  Neptune;  mm  se  leofesta  faeder. 

153.  Genitive  with  nouns.  —  The  genitive  is  distinc- 
tively an  adnominal  case ;  that  is,  its  principal  function  is 
to  limit  the  meaning  of  a  noun.  Its  sign  is  of.  It  denotes 
various  relations,  not  all  of  which  can  be  strictly  defined. 

a)  Relationship:   ure  ealra 'luodor. 

F)  Source  :  s  u  ii  n  a  n  and  m  o  n  a  n  leoman ;  <T8ere 
liearpan    sweg- ;    fr^mdra    STeoda    ung^ecTwsernes. 

c)  Subject.  The  noun  in  the  genitive  stands  for  the 
author  of  the  action  denoted  by  the  noun  upon  which 
the  genitive  is  dependent.  Example:  (Tinra  hal- 
gena  earnungum. 

d)  Object.  This  may  be  known  by  the  possibility 
of  turning  the  noun  upon  which  it  is  dependent  into 
a  cognate  verb,  when  the  noun  in  the  genitive  will 
become  the  object  of  that  verb ;  for  example,  in  Frean 
^gesan,  ^gesan  is  an  obj.  gen.,  because,  if  we  substi- 
3  tute  for  the  noun  ^gesa,  fear^  the  verb  fear.,  the  noun 
Lord  becomes  the  object  of  the  verb.  Examples:  (Jses 
dseges  liehtinge ;  lifes  tilungum ;  unsc^aTcTigra 
beswicend;  Iseswe  sceapa  and  neata;  hylit  li^le. 


90  SYNTAX. 

e)  Cause  (denoted  by  for):  lean  arissa  swges- 
enda. 

/)  Characteristic :  iiieregreotaii  selces  liiwes; 
treowum  missenlicra  cyiiiia;  setl  his  maeg- 
enarrymnesse.  Here,  perhaps,  belongs:  werhades 
and  wif hades  he  g-esceop  hie. 

g)  Specification  of  time:   anes  nioncTes  fierst. 

A)  Specification  of  place:  g^arsecges  igland  (Latin 
influence). 

i)  Unclassified:  (Tsere  neoAvolnessc  bradnes ; 
acaet  ma^gen  1  u  f  e  ;    tSv^m  s  p  r  ae  c  e  i^nde. 

154.  Partitive  genitive.  —  Tlie  genitive  denotes  the 
whole,  with  words  denoting  a  part. 

a)  With  nouns:  nnrini  ceastra;  fela  gear  a; 
ly  til  won  cwicera  cynna. 

5)  With  pronouns:  manna  genigne ;  hiera  nan; 
hwilc  eower;  griiinena  gehwa^ne ;  hwaethwugu 
swilces;  se  manna.  Note  the  peculiar  anra 
gehwilc,  each  07ie. 

c)  With  numerals:  eahta  fota;  f eower  hund 
wintra. 

d)  With  superlatives:  beacna  beorhtost.  Simi- 
larly, with  a  cognate  noun,  to  denote  eminence : 
dryhtna  Dryhten. 

155.  Genitive  with  adjectives.  —  The  genitive  is  used 
to  define  an  adjective  with  respect  to  the  part  or 
relation    in    which    the    quality    is    conceived.       Such 


NOUNS.  91 

adjectives  are  frequently  akin  to  verbs  which  take 
the  genitive  (156),  and  sometimes  correspond  to  Latin 
adjectives  of  inclination  in  -ax.  They  may  be  roughly 
classified  as  follows  :  — 

a)  Want:  dselleas  mines  renes;  idel  and  unnyt 
goda  (154.  5)  greliwilces. 

/>)  Fulness:  berende  (Lat.  ferax)  missenlicra 
fugla. 

(?)  Desire:   setes  g-eorn. 

cT)  Retentiveness  :  f aesthaf ol  (Lat.  tenax')  m  i  n  r  a 
goda. 

e)   Knowledge:   wordes  wis. 

156.  Genitive  with  verbs.  —  The  genitive  is  used  with 
many  verbs,  mostly  such  as  denote  mental  action,  but 
also  with  those  of  cessation  and  refusal,  and  some 
others.  Frequently  the  underlying  notion  is  a  parti- 
tive one ;  that  is,  the  object  is  conceived  as  affected 
in  part. 

<x)  Desire:   friSTes  wilnedon. 
5)  Request:   biddende  niinra  go  da. 
(?)  Rejoicing:   Jjses  se  hlanca  gefeah. 
d^  Experiment:  waeda  cunnedan. 
e)   Use:   eardes  brucacT. 
/)   Care:   giemden   (Taes  dseges. 
^)  Supposition   or  belief:    nohtes   ^lles  wendon ; 
CJses  geliefan. 


92  SYNTAX. 

K)  Fear;   ne  ondrsed  tSvi  d'e  seuiges  (Tinges. 

i)  Granting:   ara  unnan. 
y)  Refusal:   tiSTe  forwierndest. 
Ic)  Cessation :   geswac  his  weorces. 
V)  Awaiting:   acaes  wordes  bad. 
TTi)  Approaching:   ceoles  neosan. 
n)  Producing:   gasta  streonan. 

157.  Adverbial  genitive.  —  Certain  adverbial  relations 
may  be  expressed  by  the  genitive  (cf.  71).  Example: 
hine  gew^nde  arses  weges. 

1.  The  demonstrative  cTait  is  frequently  used  in  the 
genitive  in  various  adverbial  senses.  Thus  of  time, 
araes  (STe)  =  from  the  time  that^  after ^  aftenvards ; 
of  manner,  =  as  far  as,  as;  of  cause,  =  for  this, 
because;  etc. 

158.  Genitive  with  prepositions.  —  The  genitive  is  occa- 
sionally used  with  certain  prepositions,  such  as  wiar,  to, 
and  wana.  Examples:  wicT  tSsan  f  aestengeates ; 
to  acaes;    anes  wana  siextig  (78.  5). 

159.  Genitive  with  other  cases.  —  Verbs  which  take  a 
genitive  denoting  the  thing,  may  also  take  a  dative  or 
accusative  of  the  person. 

a)  With  dative  (including  reflexives,  184) :  him 
(164.  a)  ne  uSTe  (156.  i)  God  l^ngran  llfes; 
nolde  ge  me  (dat.)  w  se  d  a  tiSfian  (156.  z) ;  ge 
me   (dat.)   setes    forwierndon   (156.  j^ ;    Apollonius 


NOUNS.  93 

hiere   (164.   (?)   tfses   tfancode;    ne   ondrsed   (156.    Ji) 
tfu  tfe  (161.  1)  geniges  tfinges. 

5)  With  accusative  (including  impersonals,  190): 
tfe  (ace.)  ohtes  axian;  hine  fultumes  bsedon ; 
tfe  tweonie  cTgere  sprsece;  m^reliarenduin  (161) 
m il  t  s a  biddan  wuldres  Aldor  (ace.) ;  tfeguas 
tfearle  gelyste  (190)  garg-ewi lines. 

160.  Dative  in  general.  —  The  dative  denotes  the 
indirect  object,  usually  the  person  to  or  for  or  with 
reference  to  whom  something  is  done.  When  used 
with  verbs  (164),  the  general  notion  of  the  verb  may 
often  be  regarded  as  implying  some  sort  of  giving  (or 
its  opposite),  if  this  term  be  employed  in  its  widest 
sense. 

1.  The  dative  is  sometimes  used  for  the  instru- 
mental (174):    cleopode  micelre  stefne. 

161.  Dative  of  benefit  or  interest.  —  The  sign  of  this 
dative  is  for.  Examples:  scipu  eow  eallum  ic 
wyrce.      Perhaps  also:   iSrinre  eoraran  ne  rintf. 

1.  Akin  to  this  is  the  reflexive  dative  (184) :  tfaet 
hie  him  (for  themselves}  wsepiiu  worhten. 

2.  Similar,  too,  is  the  dative  of  possession,  which, 
without  much  change  in  the  sense,  might  be  replaced 
by  the  genitive:  him  feollon  tearas  of  tfsem  eagum 
(so  Ger.  ihm  fielen  Thrdnen  von  den  Au^en) ;  him 
mQii  feaht  on  last;   wulfum  to  willan. 


94  SYNTAX. 

162.  Dative  of  deprivation.  —  Some  verbs  of  depriva- 
tion (cf.  177)  take  the  dative  of  the  object  removed, 
sometimes  with  an  accusative  of  the  person  from 
whom.  Examples:  he  hine  iinscrydde  i^r^in  healf- 
an  sciccelse;  (Tiiij^um  ongierede  and  genac- 
odode. 

163.  Dative  of  resemblance  or  approach.  —  This  is 
self-explanatory. 

a)  With  verbs:  geflit  cymcy  STaein  be  he  aid- 
en  dum. 

h)  With  adjectives  (cf.  165):    fiig-ole  gelicost. 

164.  Dative  with  various  verbs.  —  Such  are  verbs 
of  (160)  — 

a)  Giving  or  imparting:    ifTearfiim  daelan. 

^)  Speaking:   hiereiireahte;   him  gecycTan. 

c)  Thanking:   Godc  <Taiiciende. 

c?)   Promising:    behet  inluiiiii  liireowe. 

e)  Serving  and  benefiting:  he  him  (STenode  ; 
fr^mme  gehvvilc  o  3"  r  u  m  ;  hi  m  feiig  God  on 
f ultiim  ;    manigum   genyhtsumian. 

/)  Obeying  and  following:  gehiersumian  minum 
willan;   tSe  hiere  folgode. 

^)  Pitying:   gemiltsa  me. 

K)  Requiting:   forgieldan  geg-hwilcum. 

^)  Ruling  :  9"  e  o  d  u  m  racian .  Si milarly ,  y  S"  u  m 
stilde. 

y)  Receiving:   onfeng-  tT^re  wunung-e. 


NOUNS.  95 

Tc)  Pleasing  and  suiting :  him  eallum  licode;  <Te 
gedafenaar. 

V)  Seeming:   me  (Tyncar. 
m)  Opposing:   worulde  wiarsacan. 
n)  Betraying  or  deserting:   swicaS"  tSe. 
o)  Using  (rare):   notaar  crsefte  minum. 

165.  Dative  with  adjectives.  —  The  dative  is  chiefly 
employed  with  adjectives  signifying  dear^  generous^ 
useful^  obedient,  etc.,  and  the  •  opposite.  Examples  : 
lidwerigum  este  ;  G o d e  (Tone  leof an  f aeder  (the 
father  dear  to  God);  belief e  ic  eom  cyningre; 
folcum  fracoKT. 

1.  The  dative  of  want  or  deprivation  (cf.  162)  is 
also  found  here:   Gode  orfeorme. 

166.  Dative  with  prepositions.  —  The  dative  is  by 
far  the  commonest  case  with  prepositions.  Examples 
would  be  superfluous. 

1.  After  the  preposition  on  (in),  certain  adjectives, 
like  mid  and  ufanweard,  agree  with  the  following 
noun,  instead  of  being  treated  like  nouns  governing 
it  in  the  genitive,  as  are  their  counterparts  in  Mod. 
Eng.  Examples :  on  midre  <Taere  sse  (so  Lat. 
in  medio  mari,  but  Mod.  Eng.  in  the  midst  of  the 
sea~);    on  tTsem  fgestene  ufanweard  um. 

167.  Dative  absolute.  —  A  noun  and  a  participle,  not 
involved   in    the    main    construction    of    the    sentence, 


96  SYNTAX. 

may  stand  by  themselves  in  the  dative,  and  consti- 
tute an  adverbial  clause,  most  frequently  of  time. 
This  construction  is  imitated  from  the  Latin  ablative 
absolute.  Examples:  onfangeure  his  bletsunge; 
sSTisum  ealluni  tSus  gedonum. 

168.  Accusative  after  transitive  verbs.  —  The  direct 
object  of  a  transitive  verb  is  put  in  the  accusative. 
Examples :  he  swaiig  (Tone  top;  ealue  noriaFtlgel 
genornon. 

1.  A  special  case  of  the  foregoing  is  the  cognate 
accusative,  in  which  the  object  is  etymologically  akin 
to  the  verb:   libbaff  hlera  lif. 

169.  Subject  accusative.  —  The  subject  of  an  infini- 
tive is  put  in  the  accusative.  Examples :  geseah  he 
suinue  flscere  gaii ;  he  gehlerde  tfone  blisse- 
sang  upastlgaii. 

170.  Accusative  of  extent.  —  The  accusative  may  de- 
note extent  of  time  or  space.  Example :  waes  se 
storm  ealiie   (Tone    claeg  swISTe   micel  and  Strang. 

171.  Accusative  after  impersonals. —  Impersonals  (190) 
of  appetite  or  passion  govern  an  accusative  of  the 
person  suffering.      Example:   me  hyngrede. 

172.  Accusative  after  prepositions.  —  Some  preposi- 
tions always  govern  the  accusative,  others  only  under 


NOUNS.  97 

certain  circumstances.  Those  of  the  former  class 
are  g-eond,  otf,  larurh,  and  ymb(e) ;  of  the  latter, 
a  large  number  that  more  frequently  take  the 
dative  (166). 

1.  Of  the  second  class,  on  (in)  is  perhaps  the  com- 
monest representative,  taking  the  dative  when  denoting 
rest  in,  the  accusative  when  denoting  motion  towards; 
this  distinction,  however,  is  not  invariably  observed. 
Examples  of  accusative:  ineode  on  tfset  hsetf;  in 
t^set  mynster  eode. 

Exceptions  to  the  rule  are:  on  STone  seofocTan 
dseg;    mid  tf one  bisceop. 

173.  Two  accusatives.  —  Verbs  signifying  to  make,  to 
name,  to  regard,  and  the  like,  may  take  a  predicate 
accusative  besides  the  object  accusative.  Examples : 
God  hine  (obj.  ace.)  geworhte  wundorlicne  and 
fsegerne;  God  geciegde  iSTa  drygnesse  (obj.  ace.) 
e or 9" an;  hwonne  gesawon  we  tfe  (obj.  ace.)  liun- 
grigne? 

174.  Instrumental  in  general.  —  The  instrumental, 
which  in  form  is  sometimes  (especially  in  the  plural) 
indistinguishable  from  the  dative  (see  160.  1),  denotes 
manner,  means,  instrument,  or  material.  Its  sign  is  % 
or  with.  Examples:  geseah  bli^'um  and  wl  it  an; 
gestaSFolade  strangum  mihtuni;  gef  aestnade 
folmum;  gefrsetwade  foldan  sceatas  leomum 
and   leafum. 


98  SYNTAX. 

This  case  is  more  common  in  poetry  than  in 
prose,  where  its  place  is  often  taken  by  mid  with 
the  dative ;  even  in  poetry,  the  simple  instrumental 
sometimes  alternates  with  the  dative  accompanied  by 
mid,  e.g.  (^Aiidreas.,  320)  sarcwide  occurs  in  the  same 
construction  as  mid  oferhygdum.  Occasionally  the 
instrumental  is  employed  where  Modern  English 
would  use  an  accusative:  m nudum  brugdoii,  they 
waved  (witJi)  their  hands. 

The  instrumental  being  one  of  the  more  difficult 
cases  to  master,  a  few  of  its  regular  combinations  are 
separately  appended :  — 

'a)  With  verbs  of  journeying  and  transporting,  where 
its  sign  may  almost  be  regarded  as  in:  c e o  1  u m  liifyan  ; 
faeiarmum  f ^rian ;  si  are  gesohte.  So  with  libban: 
dream  urn  lifdoii. 

5)  With  verbs  of  speaking,  to  indicate  voice  or  lan- 
guage (see  also  160.  1):  wordum  cwsetf ;  ondsweor- 
odon  gencwidum. 

c)  With  past  participles,  generally  preceding  the 
latter  (common  in  poetry):  svv^eordum  geheawen; 
hilde  j?es8ej?ed;   dome  gedyrsod. 

d}  With  adjectives  (generally  in  poetry),  to  denote 
m  what  respect^  or  sometimes  instrumentality:  fearer- 
iim  hremig  ;  ^cgum  gecoste ;  mundum  f reorig ; 
synniim  wuiide.  These  last  two  afford  the  met- 
rical combinations  exhibited  in  217.  1  —  among  the 
commonest  in  Old  English. 


ADJECTIVES.  99 

175.  Instrumental  with  prepositions.  —  Mid,  which  fre- 
quently takes  the  dative,  is  sometimes  found  with  the 
instrumental,  especially  in  the  Anglian  dialect ;  so 
occasionally  for.  Examples:  mid  ealle;  mid  micle 
sige;   mid  tfy  readestan  g-odw^bbe;   for  liwy. 

176.  Adverbial  instrumental.  —  The  instrumental  may 
denote  adverbial  relations,  especially  time  when.  Exam- 
ples: sume  dseg-e;  tfy  seofoacan  daege;  gelce 
geare;   word  stunde  ahof. 

1.  It  may  also  denote  the  number  of  times :  siex- 
tiene  si  arum. 

2.  The  instrumental  may  denote  the  way:  tfy  ilcan 
weg-e. 

177.  Instrumental  of  deprivation.  —  Some  verbs  of 
deprivation  may  take  an  object  of  which  in  the 
instrumental  (cf.  162).  Examples:  maSTmum  be- 
dseled ;    sehtum   bensemde. 

178.  Instrumental  of  difference.  —  The  instrumental 
denotes  the  measure  of  difference.  Examples:  micle 
l^ngran  ;  tf  y  bealdran  ;  }?  o  n  cymlicor  ;  str^iigre 
eallum   arsem   gergedoQum. 

Adjectives. 

179.  Agreement  of  adjectives.  —  Adjectives  agree  with 
their  nouns  in  gender,  number,  and  case.  This  applies 
also   to    demonstrative,  possessive,   and   indefinite   pro- 


100  SYNTAX. 

nouns,  and  to  participles,  when  used  as  adjectives. 
When  used  predicatively,  however,  participles  may 
be  uninflected. 

180.  Strong  and  weak  adjectives.  —  For  the  distinc- 
tion in  the  use  of  strong  and  weak  adjectives,  see  55. 

181.  Adjectives  as  nouns.  —  An  adjective  may  be  used 
as  a  noun  (see  55).  Examples:  tfa  yiiibsittendan; 
hwa  giefiSr  3" gem  uncuaran  llfes  fultum. 


Adverbs. 

182.  Use  of  adverbs.  —  Adverbs  qualify  verbs,  adjec- 
tives, and  other  adverbs. 

183.  Two  negatives.  —  Two  or  more  negatives 
strengthen  the  negation,  instead  of  making  an  affirma- 
tive.     Example:   tSin  iiis  nan  wilit. 


Pronouns. 

184.  Reflexive  pronouns.  —  The  reflexive  pronoun 
(82),  in  the  dative  (161.  1 ;  cf.  159)  or  accusative, 
is  used  with  certain  verbs  whose  counterparts  in 
Mod.  Eng.  would  not  necessarily  require  it. 

a)  Dative :  worhton  him  hocas ;  bjer  him  eaxe 
on  hancla ;  him  land  curon;  gewat  him;  far  tfe; 
cierde  we  us. 


VERBS.  101 

5)  Accusative :  he  ger^ste  li  i  n  e  ;  t^set  treow 
brget  hit;  bew^nde  hine;  hine  gem<^iig(le  ; 
eow  fysan. 

185.   Relative  pronouns.  —  For  these  see  87. 


Verbs. 

186.  Forms  of  the  verb.  —  Old  English  verbs  are 
either  transitive  or  intransitive.  They  have  two 
voices,  —  active  and  passive ;  three  moods,  —  indica- 
tive, optative,  and  imperative  —  besides  the  infinitive, 
gerund,  and  participles ;  and  five  tenses,  —  present, 
preterit,  perfect,  pluperfect,  and  future.  The  uses 
of  these  forms  correspond,  in  general,  to  those  of 
the  same  forms  in  other  languages. 

187.  Voices.  —  The  forms  of  the  active  voice  are 
given  in  95 ;  those  of  the  passive  are  formed  by 
adding  the  past  participle  to  the  appropriate  tense  of 
wesan  (beon),  he^  or  weorSfan,  become. 

188.  Tenses.  —  Only  two  independent  tenses  are  dis- 
tinguished by  their  stems,  —  the  present  and  the  pret- 
erit. The  present  may  also  be  used  for  the  future ; 
the  preterit,  for  any  of  the  three  past  tenses.  Other- 
wise the  distinctions  of  tense  are  indicated  by  means 
of  auxiliaries,  as  in  Modern  English:  the  future  being 
formed  by  the  infinitive  with  sculan,  shall  (133),  and 


102  SYNTAX. 

willan,  will  (139);  the  perfect  and  pluperfect,  by  the 
past  participles  with  the  appropriate  tenses  of  hab- 
ban,  have  (121),  in  the  case  of  transitive  verbs,  and 
of  wesan,  he  (138),  in  the  case  of  intransitives. 

189.  Agreement.  —  A  finite  verb  agrees  with  its  sub- 
ject in  number  and  person.     Exceptions  are:  — 

1.  When  the  subject  consists  of  two  nouns  denoting 
essentially  the  same  thing,  united  by  a  conjunction, 
the  verb  in  agreement  may  be  in  the  singular:  sie 
sibb  and  g-eicTwaernes  betweoli  us. 

2.  A  collective  noun  may  take  a  verb  in  the  plural : 
seo  cneoris  wagon  and  Iseddon. 

3.  A  plural  verb,  with  a  predicate  in  the  plural, 
may  be  introduced  by  a  neuter  singular:  (Taet  waeron 
^ngla  gastas;   hit  a^onne  wseron  mine  waeteru. 

Note.  —  The  subject  is  sometimes  to  be  supplied  (cf .  190) :  het 
ffaet  leoht  Daeg. 

190.  Impersonals.  —  Impersonal  verbs  are  those  whose 
subject  is  an  implied  hit,  it.  They  are  often  transi- 
tive, taking  an  object  in  the  dative  or  accusative  (164. 
k^l;  171).  Examples:  me  laryncity;  me  hyngrede; 
swa  gesselde  iu ;  hii  hyre  set  beaduwe  gespeow. 
Sometimes  they  take  two  cases  :  J^egnas  g  e  1  y  s  t  e 
gargewinnes  (159.  6). 

191.  Indicative.  —  The  indicative  has  the  functions 
common  to  it  in  most  languages. 


VERBS.  103 

192.  Optative  in  general.  —  The  optative,  sometimes 
called  the  subjunctive,  is  used  to  express  an  action 
or  state  simply  as  conceived  by  the  mind.  It  is 
employed  either  in  independent  sentences  or  in  sub- 
ordinate clauses.  Of  these  subordinate  clauses  there 
are  two  principal  kinds,  —  substantive  or  noun  clauses, 
and  adverbial  clauses.  Of  these,  the  noun  clauses, 
generally  introduced  by  arset,  are  the  more  important. 
Whenever  the  conjunction  tfaet  can  be  translated  in 
order  that  or  so  that,  it  introduces  an  adverbial  clause ; 
otherwise,  a  noun  clause.  Other  adverbial  clauses  are 
those  of  place,  time,  and  maymer.  Less  frequent  are 
adjective  clauses,  introduced  by  or  implying  a  relative 
pronoun. 

193.  Optative  in  independent  clauses.  —  Under  this 
head  falls  the  use  of  the  optative  (a)  to  express  a 
command  or  an  emphatic  wish ;  (5)  in  doubtful  ques- 
tions implying  a  negative  answer;  and  ((?)  in  hypo- 
thetical sentences. 

a)  Command:  beo  nu  leolit;  adl  9'e  fornime; 
gan  we  secean. 

6)  Question:  hwaet  aronne  me  fr^mede  gedeorf 
mm? 

<?)  Hypothesis:   sie  (Tset  aru  sie. 

194.  Optative  in  noun  clauses.  —  The  noun  clause 
takes  the  place  either  of  the  subject  (or  predicate 
nominative)   or  of   the    object   of    a    principal    clause. 


104  SYNTAX. 

The  object  clause  is  commonest  after  verbs  of  knowl- 
edge, affirmation,  command,  and  desire,  such  as  know^ 
say^  order ^  wish,  etc. 

a)  Subject  clause :  licaSr  are  acset  Apollonius  tfus 
lieonan  fare;   wen  is  Sfaet  tfu  geiuete  suiniie. 

^)  Object  clause  :  gewite  hwaet  se  geonga  mann 
s  i  e  ;  ne  meahte  fiiidan  liAvilc  liiera  f orliden 
wsere  ;  ic  are  bebeode  arset  arii  arset  nsenig-um 
iii^nn  c  y  ar  e  ;  ic  wysce  araet  ic  ^f t  forlidennesse 
gef  are. 

Note.  —  Certainty  is  rendered  by  the  indicative :  ic  oncnawe 
fSsat  fSu  eart  wel  gelSred. 

195.  Optative  by  attraction.  —  This  is  a  name  given 
to  the  optative  found  in  clauses  following  another 
optative.  Examples :  sprytte  (193.  a)  seo  eorare 
treow,  araes  seed  sie  on  liini  selfum;  wen  is  tfixit 
aru  geniete  (194.  a)  sunine  arajt  tfe  geniiltsie; 
araes-are  aru  geare  forwite  (196.  /)  hwsem  afu 
gemiltsie;  tf  set  sum  gestreon  ic  me  begiete 
(196.  /),  aranan   ic  me  af  ede. 

196.  Optative  in  adverbial  clauses. —  These  are  clauses 
of  place  (where'),  of  time  (before,  until,  when,  while), 
of  manner  (as  if),  conditional  (if),  concessive 
(though),  final  (in  order  that),  and  consecutive  (so 
that).  Hypothetical  or  indefinite  character  in  some 
measure  attaches  to  the  optative  in  each. 


VERBS.  105 

d)  Place :  cTset  tSu.  wer  geceose  tTser  tSu.  self 
wille. 

6)  Time:  ser  se  d^eg  cuiiie;  bid  ocy-STset  he  cume. 

c)  Manner:   swilce  lie  cuma  wsere. 

d)  Conditional:  gif  tSu.  iie  finde  iiaenne,  w^iid 
aroniie  liider  oiigean ;  swa  hit  STe  ne  mislicie. 
But  sometimes  indicative:    gif  (Tu  me  geliefst. 

e)  Concessive:   STeali  iSTu  stllle  sie. 

/)  Final :  and  ges^tte  hie  on  (Tsere  heofonan, 
araet  hie  scinen  ofer  eorcTan.  So  with  i^fges-are : 
9'8es-9'e  STu  geare  forwite.  Negative:  (Ty-lses-cye  cTe 
tweonie. 

^)  Consecutive :  adl  (Te  fornime,  i^rget  tSu.  ne 
beo  lial. 

197.  Optative  in  adjective  clauses.  —  Whenever  a 
sentence  introduced  by  an  actual  or  virtual  relative 
implies  an  element  of  doubt,  it  may  take  the  opta- 
tive. Examples:  geceose  senne,  hwilcne.  Sfu  wille 
(hwilcne  is  a  virtual  relative) ;  swa-hwaet-swa  STu 
wille. 

198.  Imperative.  —  The  imperative  is  used  in  com- 
mands, sometimes  with  the  second  personal  pronoun, 
sometimes  without.  Examples:  beo  blicye  mid  us; 
wite  STu ;   ge  ^fthw^rfatT  to  ciricean. 

199.  Infinitive.  —  The  infinitive  is  construed  as  a 
neuter  noun,  the   subject   or  object   of   a   finite  verb. 


106  SYNTAX. 

When  the  object,  it  may  itself  have  a  subject  noun 
or  pronoun  in  the  accusative  (169). 

a)  Subject  (or  pred.  nom.,  150):  micel  hienar  and 
sceaniu  hit  is   n  ell  an. 

^)  Object :  nellan  w  e  s  a  n  ;  het  hyre  arinenne 
heafod  onwriaran. 

1.  An  object  infinitive  is  sometimes  used  for  pur- 
poses of  specification.  With  verbs  of  motion  this 
may  often  be  translated  by  the  present  participle, 
occasionally  by  the  infinitive  of  purpose  (=  in  order 
to).  Examples:  conion  liSran;  gewat  him  gangan; 
feran  gasta  streonan  (purpose). 

200.  Gerund.  —  The  gerund  may  usually  be  trans- 
lated by  the  Mod.  Eng.  infinitive,  in  a  variety  of 
senses.  Examples:  comon  mlnre  dohtor  to  bid- 
da  n  n  e  ;  land  swliare  f eorr  to  geseceanne;  STa 
estas  him  beforan  l^gde  ace  he  him  to  beodanne 
haefde. 

Prepositions. 

201.  Cases  governed.  —  For  the  cases  governed  by 
prepositions,  see  158,  166,  172,  175. 

1.  The  preposition  sometimes  follows  its  object,  or 
immediately  precedes  the  verb,  and  at  times  is  diffi- 
cult to  distinguish  from  an  adverb,  or  a  prefix  of  the 
verb.  Examples:  are  (87.  e)  tSvL  aefter  axodest;  ^e 
STu  swa  wel  wiSC  gedest. 


COK  JUNCTIONS. 


107 


Conjunctions. 

202.   Correlatives.  —  Some  of  the  more  common  cor- 
relatives are  the  following:  — 


«)     ge ge, 

5)     tfe are, 

(?)     ne ne, 

fiera-S^a tSsi 

d){tf^ ara 

(^  (Tonne   ....   (Tonne  J 

e)     areali areah, 

/)     swa-swa  .  .  .  swa, 
^)     swa swa, 


both  .  .  . 
whether  . 
neither.  . 


and. 

or. 

nor. 


when (then}. 


though 
so   .  . 
the  .  . 


.  .  as. 
.  .  the. 


PROSODY. 


203.  Old  English  verse  stichic.  —  Old  English  verse  is 
rarely  strophic,  but  almost  without  exception  stichic; 
that  is,  consists  of  ungrouped  lines,  following  each 
other  as  in  Modern  English  blank  verse. 

204.  The  line  and  the  hemistich.  —  The  line  of  poetry- 
consists  of  two  hemistichs,  separated  by  the  caesura. 
Example :  — 

bord  and  brad  swyrd,      bruiie  helmas. 

The  hemistich  may  be  either  normal  or  expanded. 
A  normal  hemistich  contains  two  metrical  feet.  Ex- 
ample :  — 

•  cene  under  cumblum. 

An  expanded  hemistich  contains  three  metrical  feet. 
Example :  — 

swiiarmod  sinces  ahte. 

205.  The  foot.  —  A  metrical  foot  is  a  portion  of  a 
line  containing  one  primary  stress.  The  syllable  re- 
ceiving the  primary  stress  may  or  may  not  be  fol- 
lowed or  preceded  by  one  or  more  lighter  or  slurred 
syllables. 

108 


PROSODY.  109 

Of  the  lighter  syllables  following  or  preceding  a  pri- 
mary stress,  one  may,  under  certain  circumstances,  re- 
ceive a  secondary  stress  (23).  A  syllable  which  receives 
neither  primary  nor  secondary  stress  is  called  unstressed. 

206.  Stressed  and  unstressed  syllables.  —  The  primary 
stress  nearly  always  falls  upon  a  long  syllable  ;  this 
long  syllable  may,  however,  be  represented  by  two 
syllables,  of  which  the  first  is  short,  and  the  second  so 
light  as  to  admit  of  syncopation.  The  substitution  of 
two  such  short  syllables  for  a  single  long  one  is  called 
resolution. 

A  long  syllable  is  one  which  contains  a  long  vowel 
or  diphthong,  or  a  short  vowel  followed  by  two  conso- 
nants. A  short  syllable  is  one  which  contains  a  short 
vowel  followed  by  a  single  consonant  (4).  Long  and 
short  syllables,  when  stressed,  are  represented  in  metri- 
cal schemes  by  the  macron,  — ,  and  the  breve,  ^,  respec- 
tively. Stressed  syllables  are  indicated  by  the  acute 
or  grave  accent,  according  as  the  stress  is  primary  or 
secondary.  Unstressed  syllables,  whether  short  or  long, 
are  represented  by  the  oblique  cross,  x . 

The  syllable  which  receives  the  primary  stress  is 
usually  the  root  syllable  of  a  word,  while  the  lighter 
or  slurred  syllables  comprise  the  terminations,  enclitics, 
and  proclitics ;  occasionally,  however,  the  second  ele- 
ment of  a  compound  word  is  reckoned  as  a  slurred 
syllable,  though  usually  it  takes  a  secondary  stress. 


110  PROSODY. 

207.  Classification  of  feet.  —  The  terms  iambic^  trochaic, 
etc.,  are  used  analogically,  with  reference  to  stress,  and 
not,  as  in  Greek  and  Latin  prosody,  with  primary  refer- 
ence to  quantity.  This  being  understood,  Old  English 
metrical  feet  may  be  classified  as  follows :  — 

1.  Monosyllabic :  The  monosyllabic  foot  regularly 
consists  of  a  long  syllable  under  the  primary  stress,  -^. 
This  foot  is  never  found  except  in  conjunction  with  one 
of  the  dactylic  type  having  a  secondary  stress  (1.  h  to 
1.  k,  216). 

2.  Disyllabic :  The  disyllabic  foot  may  be  either  tro- 
chaic, ^  X ,  or  iambic,  x  ^.  In  the  trochaic  foot,  the 
unstressed  syllable  may  be  replaced  by  a  long  syllable 
under  the  secondary  stress.  The  dactyl  formed  by  the 
resolution  of  the  trochee  may  be  called  the  light  dactyl, 
to  distinguish  it  from  the  heavy  or  normal  dactyl,  in 
which  the  first  syllable  is  long. 

3.  Trisyllabic :  The  trisyllabic  foot  is  either  dactylic, 
_^  X  X ,  or  anapa3stic,  x  x  ^.  If  dactylic,  either  the  second 
or  third  syllable  has  in  some  cases  secondary  stress. 

4.  Polysyllabic :  If  tetrasyllable,  this  foot  resembles 
either  a  first  pseon,  ^ x  x  x ,  or  a  fourth  paeon,  x  xx^. 
If  it  contains  a  greater  number  of  syllables,  it  is  still 
essentially  dactylic  or  anapsestic  in  effect,  ^xxx...,  or 

...X  X  x_L. 

In  any  of  the  foregoing  feet,  resolution  may  take 
place,  thus  apparently  increasing  the  number  of  typical 
syllables. 


PROSODY.  Ill 

208.  Anacrusis.  —  Before  hemistichs  beginning  with 
a  primary  stress,  one  or  more  unstressed  syllables  may 
occur.  These  unstressed  syllables  constitute  what  is 
known  as  the  anacrusis.  It  is  rare  at  the  beginning 
of  the  second  hemistich,  but  more  frequent  before  the 
first. 

209.  Expanded  hemistichs.  —  These  are  formed  by  pre- 
fixing a  foot  of  the  form  ^x...  (less  frequently  ^,  and 
rarely  in  the  first  hemistich  x  z.)  to  a  regular  hemistich 
of  two  stresses.  Expanded  lines  are  employed  in  pas- 
sages of  peculiar  elevation  and  solemnity,  or  expressive 
of  unwonted  agitation.  The  expanded  hemistich  has 
three  stresses,  instead  of  the  normal  two,  since  the  pre- 
fixed portion  differs  from  the  anacrusis  in  having  a 
primary  stress.  As  a  rule,  the  first  and  second  stresses 
of  the  first  hemistich,  when  expanded,  take  alliteration, 
while  in  the  second  hemistich  the  place  of  the  allitera- 
tive syllable  is  unchanged,  coinciding  normally  with  the 
(new)  second  stress.     Example  :  — 

beaga  and  beorlitra  mad'ma,      hi  J^aet  }?aere  beorhtan  idese. 

210.  Alliteration.  —  Alliteration  is  a  poetical  ornament 
which  is  a  distinctive  feature  of  Old  English  verse.  It 
consists  in  the  employment  of  the  same  or  similar 
sounds  at  the  beginning  of  two  or  more  syllables  which 
receive  the  primary  stress.  The  second  hemistich  con- 
tains one  such  alliterative  syllable,  as  a  rule  that  which 


112  PROSODY. 

has  the  first  primary  stress ;  the  first  hemistich  has  reg- 
ularly two,  though  frequently  only  one.  The  allitera- 
tive sound  must  be  the  same  throughout,  if  consonantal; 
if  vocalic,  it  is  usually  different  in  the  three  syllables. 
Examples  are :  — 

a)  gr-Avne  gruiaffrecan,       r/aras  s^ndon. 

b)  on  tSiet  rfaegred  sylf,       fiynedan  scildas. 

c)  earn  wtes  georn,       wrigfeffera. 

In  expanded  lines,  the  additional  foot  frequently 
takes  alliteration,  thus  removing  it  from  one  of  its 
normal  positions. 

211.  Alliteration  in  relation  to  stress.  —  The  accentual 
principles  observed  by  Old  English  poets  in  their  man- 
agement of  alliteration  virtually  reduce  themselves  to 
one :  that  the  most  important  syllables  of  the  most  im- 
portant words  should  receive  primary  stress.  It  must 
be  borne  in  mind,  however,  that  the  stress  is  sometimes 
rhetorical,  that  is,  depends  not  so  much  upon  the  intrin- 
sic weight  of  the  word  as  upon  that  which  belongs  to 
it  in  virtue  of  its  relation  to  other  words  in  the  same 
sentence.  For  example,  a  preposition  might  be  ex- 
pected to  have  less  intrinsic  weight  than  a  following 
noun,  yet  instances  occur  where  the  preposition  allit> 
erates. 

One  general  rule  is  that  if  a  noun  and  a  verb  are 
found  in  the  same  hemistich,  it  is  the  noun  that  allite- 
rates. 


PROSODY.  113 

212.  Difference  between  the  two  hemistichs.  —  The  first 
hemistich  frequently  differs  from  the  second,  not  only 
in  the  number  of  its  alliterative  syllables,  but  also  in 
that  of  the  unstressed  syllables  admitted  between  two 
primary  stresses,  or  in  the  form  of  anacrusis. 

213.  Rime.  —  Rime  and  various  forms  of  assonance 
are  occasionally  employed  by  Old  English  poets,  some- 
times for  the  purpose  of  uniting  more  closely  the  two 
halves  of  the  same  line,  less  frequently  to  associate  the 
second  half  of  a  line  with  the  first  or  second  half  of  the 
following  line,  rarely  in  formulas  or  compounds  within 
the  same  hemistich. 

214.  Masculine  and  feminine  rime.  —  Masculine  or  mon- 
osyllabic rime  is  perfect,  when  the  riming  vowels  are 
identical,  and  are  followed  by  the  same  consonants  or 
consonant  combinations.     Example  (from  Beowulf):  — 

code  yrremod  :  him  of  eagum  stod. 

Feminine  or  polysyllabic  (usually  disyllabic)  rime  is 
perfect  when  the  first  riming  syllables  are  perfect  mas- 
culine rimes  and  the  following  syllables  are  identical. 
Example :  — 

scildburh  scaeron,       sceotend  wseron. 

There  are  also  various  sorts  of  imperfect  rime. 

215.  Kennings.  —  A  characteristic  ornament  of  Old 
English,  as  well  as  of  early  Teutonic  poetry  in  general, 


114  PROSODY. 

are  the  kennings.  This  term,  which  is  of  Norse  origin, 
designates  those  synonyms  or  periphrastic  phrases  which 
are  employed  to  diversify  the  expression  of  a  thought, 
or  to  avoid  the  repetition  of  the  same  word,  usually  a 
noun.  Many  of  these  are  striking  metaphors,  but  by 
no  means  all ;  some,  though  metaphorical  in  their  origin, 
were  undoubtedly  so  familiar  to  the  poet  and  audience 
that  their  peculiar  significance  was  overlooked,  and  they 
were  regarded  as  stereotyped  and  convenient  synonyms. 
Examples  of  kennings  for  God  are :  arfsest  cyning, 
mihtig  dryhten,  metod,  frea  selmilitig-. 

216.  Ordinary  sequences  of  long  and  short  syllables.^  — 
Before  proceeding  to  examine  the  metrical  constitution 
of  the  hemistich,  it  is  desirable  to  consider  the  ordinary 
sequences  of  long  and  short  syllables  in  Old  English, 
and  particularly  in  Old  English  poetry. 

1.  Long  syllables  followed  by  short  or  slurred  sylla- 
bles.    A  long  stressed  syllable  may  be  followed :  — 

a)  by  a  derivative  or  inflectional  syllable:  scuras   ^x 

6)  by  a  monosyllabic  proclitic  :  ^f  t  to  ^  x 

c)  by  a  monosyllabic  prefix:  mod  a(r6ted)  ^x 

d)  by  a  derivative  or  inflectional  syllable  +  a  mono- 
syllabic prefix  or  proclitic  :  cenra  to  Z.  x  x 

e)  by  a  disyllabic  proclitic  or  prefix :  fynd  ofer(wun- 
nen)  Z.x  x 

1  This  paragraph  is  designed  only  for  reference. 


PROSODY.  115 

/)  by  a  monosyllabic  proclitic  -}-  a  monosyllabic  pre- 
fix :  forcT  on  g-e(rihte)  ^x  x 

g)  by  two  monosyllabic  words  :  him  STa  se  jlx  x 

A)  by  two  syllables,  derivative  or  inflectional:  mod- 
igre  Z.W  X 

^)  by  the  second  qlement  of  a  compound  word,  with 
or  without  a  derivative  syllable  interposed :  — 

(a)  scirmseled  ^w  x 

(yS)  hildeleoaF  ^x^ 

y)  by  a  disyllabic  word,  with  the  stress  upon  its  second 
syllable:  near  setstop  (^e'oz^^.)  ^xw 

¥)  by  a  derivative  or  inflectional  syllable  H-  a  mono- 
syllabic word  :  eaSTe  maeg  ^  x  ^ 

2.  Long  syllables  preceded  by  short  or  slurred  syl- 
lables.    A  long  stressed  syllable  may  be  preceded :  — 

a)  by  a  monosyllabic  prefix:  g-efeoll  xz. 

J)  by  a  monosyllabic  proclitic  :  Sfurh  niin(e)  xZ 

c)  by  a  derivative  or  inflectional  syllable :  (frym)9'a 
God  xZ. 

<I)  by  a  derivative  or  inflectional  ending  -f  a  mono- 
syllabic prefix  or  proclitic  :   (hlanc)a  gefeali  x  xZ. 

e)  by  a  disyllabic  ending:   (lar)ena  g"od  (^Beow.') 

X  xZ. 

/)  by  a  disyllabic  proclitic:  sySfSTan  frym<y(e)     x  xZ. 

g}  by  two  monosyllabic  words  :  tfa  tfe  hwil(e)    xxZ. 

3.  Long  syllables  followed  by  long  or  stressed  syl- 
lables. In  addition  to  the  cases  instanced  under  1.  h  and 
^,  which  belong  under  the  head  of   secondary  stress, 


116  PROSODY. 

stressed  syllables  proper  are  here  to  be  considered.     A 
long  syllable  may  be  followed :  — 

a)  by  a  monosyllabic  word:  brad  swyrd        jLA(Z.1J) 
h)  when   a   monosyllable,   by   the  first'  syllable   of  a 
disyllabic  word  :  dom  tig(oii)  ^^(Z.!.) 

(?)  when  a  monosyllable,  by  the  first  syllable  of  a  tri- 
syllabic word :  saiigr  hild(eleo9')  j1Z(Z:i) 

d)  when  the  second  syllable  of  a  disyllabic  word,  by 
the  first  syllable  of  a  disyllabic  word:  (ge)gan  li8efd(oii) 

e)  when  the  first  syllable  of  a  polysyllabic  word  (often 
a  compound),  by  the  second  syllable  of  the  same  word: 
niariieard,  burlileod(uiii)  Z.j1(Z.^) 

4.  Short  stressed  syllables  followed  by  short  or 
slurred  syllables.  A  short,  stressed  syllable  may  be 
followed :  — 

a)  by  a  single  unstressed  syllable,  forming  with  it  two 
metrical  syllables  :  cyniiig  6  x 

5)  by  an  unstressed  syllable,  forming  with  it  the  met- 
rical equivalent  of  a  single  long  syllable,  and  capable  of 
being  substituted  for  the  latter  in  every  position:  8e9'e(le) 

Compounds  are  metrically  regarded,  for  the  most  part, 
as  composed  of  two  independent  words,  but  their  length, 
taken  in  connection  with  the  invariability  of  their  typi- 
cal forms,  restricts  the  employment  of  certain  compounds 
to  particular  metrical  schemes.  Thus,  compounds  like 
hildensedran  are  adapted  to  hemistichs  of  the  trochaic 


PROSODY.  117 

type,  Z.X  I  _/ X  ;   those  like  burlileodum    to   the   type 

J^  I  ^X  X. 

217.  Constitution  of  the  hemistich.  —  There  are  five 
normal  types  of  the  hemistich,  which  may  be  called 
respectively  (cf.  207)  the  1)  trochaic  (dactylic),  2) 
the  iambic  (anapsestic),  3)  the  iambic-trochaic,  4)  the 
monosyllabic-bacchic  (or  -ere tic),  and  the  5)  bacchic- 
monosyllabic.  Types  4  and  5  occasionally  become  tro- 
chaic-bacchic  and  bacchic-trochaic  respectively. 

Every  hemistich  ends  either  in  a  stressed  syllable,  or 
in  a  stressed  syllable  followed  by  a  single  short  syllable. 

Occasionally  a  greater  number  of  unstressed  syllables 
than  three  occur  together,  but  without  destroying  the 
character  of  the  verse  as  belonging  to  one  of  the  fore- 
going types. 

218.  Constitution  of  the  various  types.  —  1.  The  first  or 
trochaic  (dactylic)  type  is  formed  by  the  union  of  two 
feet  like  those  found  in  1.  a  to  1.  g  above.     Thus :  — 

biddaii  wylle  j^  X  |  Z.  X 

cwicera  cynna  w  ^  x  |  j^  X 

ealde  ge  geonge  Z.  X  x  |  jl  x 

With  anacrusis  (208)  :  — 

ofSfSe  sundoryrfes  X  x  |  jl  X  |  Z.  X 

Occasionally,  by  the  introduction  of  two  consecutive 
long  syllables,  as  in  3.  e,  there  occur  hemistichs  of  these 
forms :  — 


118  PROSODY. 

scildburh  scseron  j:^  ^  I  Z.  X 

helmas  and  hupseax  ^  x  x  |  j;!  2l 

A  short  stressed  syllable  is  rare :  — 

arfsest  cyning  Z.  X  |  w  X 

2.  The  second  or  iambic  (anapaestic)  type  is  formed 
by  the  union  of  two  feet  like  those  found  in  2.  a  to  2.  g 
above.     Thus :  — 

se  hyhsta  dsel  X  Z.  |  X  Z. 

beraff  linde  forff  x  x  Z  I  x  ^ 

nu  ic  giimena  gehwaene  xxw2<  |xx625 

With  extra  unstressed  syllables  in   the  first  foot  (207. 

^  *  >aet  he  in  )>8et  burgeteld      x  x  x  x  Z.  I  x  Z 

3.  The  third  or  iambic-ti'ochaic  type  is  formed  by  the 
union  of  two  feet  like  those  found  in  1.  «  to  1.  ^  and  2. 
a  to  2.  ^  respectively.     Thus  :  — 

and  CQmpwige  x  Z  |  Z^  X 

and  ge  dom  agon  X  X  Z  I  ^  X 

on  ffain  sigewQnge  x  x  w  2^  1  Z.  x 

Rarely  a  short  stressed  syllable  :  — 

of  hornbogan  X  Z.  |  <>  x 

set  ffani  sescplegan  x  x  jl  |  w  x 

With  extra  unstressed  syllables  in  the  first  foot :  — 

>e  hie  ofercuman  mihton         XXXXw2^|^x 

It  will  be  observed  that  where  two  long  syllables 
meet  in  the  middle  of  the  hemistich  there  is  such  a 
sequence  as  in  3.  a  to  3.  e. 


PROSODY.  119 

4.  The  fourth  or  monosyllabic-bacchic  type  is  formed 
by  the  union  of  a  monosyllabic  foot  with  such  as  are 
found  in  1.  h  and  1.  i  (a).     Thus  :  — 

maegS*  inodigre  ZL  |  Z.  ^  X 

haeleiy  higerofe  w  25  I  6  2<  :i  x 

Similarly,  the  monosyllabic-cretic  takes  groups  like  1.  i 
(/3),  1.  y,  and  1.  k  for  the  second  foot :  — 

sang  hildeleoiar  ^  I  ^  x  ^ 

An  example  of  the  trochaic-bacchic  type  (found  only  in 
first  hemistichs)  is :  — 

stopon  styrnmode  ^  x  |  jl.  ^  X 

Where  two  long  syllables  belonging  to  different  feet 
come  together  in  the  pure  type,  we  have  various  cases 
under  3,  the  one  above  being  under  c. 

5.  The  fifth  or  bacchic-monosyllabic  type  is  formed 
by  the  union  of  such  feet  as  are  found  in  1.  h  and  1.  i 
(a)  with  a  monosyllabic  foot.     Thus  :  — 

scirmgeled  swyrd  Z.  Jl  X  |  Z. 

sigerofe  haeleU  w2<  ^  x  |  v62< 

219.  Frequency  of  the  various  types.  —  The  relative 
frequency  of  the  various  types  is  indicated  by  their 
order  in  the  last  paragraph,  though  Types  2  and  3 
are  not  far  from  equal.  Thus,  in  the  poem  of  Judith^ 
the  percentages  are,  in  round  numbers,  as  follows,  not 
counting  expanded  lines,  which  mostly  belong  to 
Type  1  (209):  — 


120  PROSODY. 

First  Second 

Hemistich.  Hemistich. 

Type  1 47  47 

Type  2 14  26 

Type  3 19  19 

Type  4 15  5 

Type  5 5  3 

220.  A  specimen  of  scansion.  —  The  following  passage 
(Judith^  164-175),  accompanied  by  the  scheme  of  its 
scansion,  will  serve  to  illustrate  the  metrical  principles 
contained  in  the  foregoing  paragraphs :  — 

ffreatum  and  (STrymfnuin         )>rungon  and  nrnon 

ongean  iSfa  J>eodnes  maegS'         J>usendmaeluin, 

calde  gc  geonge  ;         seghwylcuni  Avearl5 

ni^n  on  i^aire  medobyrig         mod  areted, 

syiS'S'an  hie  ongeaton        J>8et  wais  ludith  cumen 

^ft  to  eiarie,         and  ffa  ofostlice 

hie  mid  eaffmedum         in  forleton. 

}>a  seo  gleawe  het,        golde  gefraetewod, 

hyre  ijinenne        J>ancolmode 

J>aes  h^rewiel^an         heafod  onwriiyan, 

and  hyt  to  behffe        blodig  ajtywan 

J>am  burhleoduin,        hu  hyre  aet  beaduwe  gespeow. 


1. 

^X  X 

IZx 

II 

/_X  X 

1  J^X 

1. 

2. 

X 

X  x^ 

1  x^ 

II 

Z.X 

l^x 

1. 

1. 

Z.X  X 

l-^x 

II 

^^x 

\z. 

5. 

1. 

/ 

.XXX 

1    WXN,2< 

II 

^x 

IZx 

1. 

1. 

/ 

.XXX 

1-/  X 

II 

X  Xji 

1  x6  X 

2. 

1. 

Z.y.  1 

IZx 

II 

X  x6x  1 

l^x 

3. 

3. 

X  X  /.  i 

l^x 

II 

^x 

IZ.X 

1. 

2. 

X  x^ 

1  x_/ 

II 

Z.X  X 

1  62<x 

1. 

3. 

X  X  ^ 

l^x 

II 

^x 

1  ^x 

1. 

3. 

x6x  1 

Z.X 

II 

^X  X   1 

Z.X 

1. 

1. 

j^X  X   1 

l^x 

II 

^X  X   1 

IZX 

1. 

3. 

xZ.  1 

l^x 

II 

X  X  X  X  62< 

1    Xji 

2. 

READER. 


THE   CKEATION   OF   THE   WORLD. 

(^Ifric's  Translation  of  Genesis,  I.-II.  3.) 

[In  the  earlier  pages,  references  will  be  made  to  the  forms  of 
words  as  they  occur  in  the  Vocabulary,  whenever  there  might  be  diffi- 
culty in  discovering  the  latter.    Other  references  are  self-explanatory. 

The  student  should  by  all  means  be  familiar,  before  beginning 
this  first  selection,  with  the  declension  of  the  third  personal  pronoun 
(81),  the  demonstrative  se  (84),  the  first  seven  ordinals  (78),  the  con- 
jugation of  wesan  (138)  and  weorS'aii  (104),  the  prepositions  aefter, 
bufan,  fram,  ofer,  on,  to,  and  under,  the  particle  fSe  (87.  d),  and 
the  distinction  between  the  two  9'a's  (84.  1)  and  the  two  ffaet's.] 

On  anginne  gesceop^  God^  heofonan^  and  eor^an.  Seo^ 
eor^e  so^lice^  wses*'  idel  and  gemtig;  and  ^lestru"  waeron® 
ofer^  (5£ere^  neowolnesse^  bradnesse^";  and  Godes  gast  wses^ 
gef ^red"  ofer  wseteru.^^  God  cwse^^^  6a,  "GeweorSe  ^^  leoht "; 
and  leoht  wearS^^  geworht.^^    God  geseah^^  (5a  tSaet  hit^^  god 

1  See  gescieppan,  and  18.  lo  gee  166. 

2  The  order  is  probably  deter-  n  wses  gef^red  =  Lat.  fereha- 
mined  by  the  Latin :  creavit  Deus.      tur.     See  gef^rian. 

3  53.  3.  12  See  wseter,  and  47.  1,  6. 
*  See  se.  is  gee  cweiaran. 

^  Lat.  autem.  i*  See  geweorUan,  and  193.  a. 

6  See  wesan.  is  See  weorljan. 

7  Plural,  like  Lat.  tenebrcB.  i^  Wearff  geworht  = /ac^a  est. 

8  Governs  bradnesse.  See  gewyrcean. 

^  Genitive,  dependent  on  brad-  i'^  See  geseon. 

nesse  (153.  i).,  is  gee  he. 

123 


124  THE   CREATION   OF   THE   WORLD. 

W8es^;  and  he  gedaelde^  t^set^  leoht  fram  ^eem^  'Siestrum.'* 
And  het^  Saet^  leoht  Daeg,  and  ^a^  ^Testru'*  Niht.  Da  waes^ 
geworden^  sefen  and  morgen  an  dsegJ 

God  cwae6^  'Sa  ^ft,^  "GeweorSe^"  nil  faestnes  tomiddes 
5  ^sem^  waeterum,^^  and  totwseme^^  'Sa^  waeteru^^  fram  Ssem 
wseterum."  And  God  geworhte  'Sa  fsestnesse,  and  totwsemde 
tia  wseteru  ^e^^  waeron  under  tisBre  fsestnesse  fram  ^aem  ^e^^ 
wteron  bufan  'Saere  fsestnesse ;  hit  waes  6a  swa  gedon.^^  And 
God  het  tSa  fsestnesse  Heofonan.^^     And  waes  Sa  geworden 

lo  aif en  and  morgen  o6er  ^^  dseg. 

God  Sa  soSlice^''  cwseS,  "Beon^^^  gegaderode^^  Sa  waeteru 
Se  ^^  sind  ^  under  SiBre  lieof onan,  and  seteowie  ^  drygnes  ^^ " ; 
hit  waes  Sa  swa  gedon.  And  God  geciegde^^  Sa  drygnesse 
EorSan^;  and  Siiera^  waetera  gegaderunga^^  he  het  Saes^; 

15   God  geseah  Sa  Stet  hit  god^  waes.     And  cwaeS,^  "Sprytte^^ 
seo  eorSe  growende^''  g,iers,^  and  siSd  wyrcende,^'  and  aeppel- 

1  See  wesan.     ^  See  gcd^elan.  1^  See  gegaderian,  and  62. 

8  See  se.  *  See  p.  123,  note  7.     20  ggg  aeteowian. 

^  See  hatan,  and  189,  note.  21  L^t.  arida,  dr.  ^rjpd. 

^  WsBs    geworden   =  factum  ^a  g^e  geciegan. 

est.     See  geweoraPan.  2.3  g^e  173. 

7  Lat.  dies  unus.  •    ^4  Ace.  plur. 

8  See  cweiSan.  25  Acc.  plur.;  see  sS. 

9  Lat.  quoque.  ^e  gee  4. 

10  See  geweorffan,  and  193.  a.  27  cf.  Mod.  Eng.  g^io^/i. 

11  See  waeter,  and  47.  1,  0.  28  gee   spryttan,   and    193.   a. 

12  See  totwSeman.  Lat.  germinet. 

13  See  87.  d.  29  gee  growan,  and  61. 

14  Past  part,  of  gedon.  so  See  31. 

15  See  173.  ^i  See  wyrcean,  and  61.    Gro- 

16  Lat.  secundus.  wende  gaers  and  saed  wyrcende 
1'^  Lat.  vero.  —  herbam  virentem  et  facientem 
18  See  193.  a.  semen. 


THE   CREATION   OF   THE   WORLD. 


125 


b^re^  treow,  wyestm^  wyrcende  sefter  his  cynne,^  ^ses  saed 
sie''  on  him^  selfum^  ofer  eort5an";  hit  wses  8a  swa  gedon. 
And  seo  eort5e  fort5ateah^  growende  wyrt  and  s^d  berende^ 
be  hiere^  cynne,  and  treow  w^stm  wyrcende,  and  gehwilc^*^ 
sM"  hsebbende  sefter  his  hiwe^^;  God  geseah  Sa  ^aet  hit 
god  wses.  And  wses  geworden  sefen  and  m^rgen^^  se  t^ridda^'* 
dseg. 

God  cw8e6  Sa  so^lice/^  "Beon  nu  leoht  on^^  f^^re  heofonan^'' 
faestnesse,  and  tod^len^^  daeg  and  niht,  and  beon  to^*^  tac- 
num,^'^  and  to  tldum,^  and  to  dagum,^^  and  to  geamm.^^  And 
hie  semen  2^  on  tSsere  heofonan  fsestnesse,  and  aliehten  Sa 
eorSan " ;  hit  waes  t5a  swa  geworden.  And  God  geworhte 
twa^'*  miclu^^  leoht;  t58et  mare^  leoht  to  ^ses  dseges  lieht- 
inge,^  and  ^ddt  leesse  leoht  to  t^eere  niht^^  iTehtinge;  and 
steorran  he  geworhte.     And  ges^tte^  hie  on  t^tere  heofonan, 


1  Lat.    pomiferum,    Gr.    Kdp- 
TTLfxov.     See  146. 

2  Ace.  sing.,  after  wyrcende. 

3  See  cynn. 

4  See  195. 

s  Dat.  sing. 

6  See  self. 

7  Lat.  protuUt. 

8  Agrees    with    wyrt.      See 
beran. 

9  Why  hiere,  instead  of  his  ? 
i<^  Nom.  sing. 

11  Ace.  sing. 

12  Lat.  speciem.     See  hiw. 

13  Note  the   different  form,  — 
m^rgen  instead  of  morgen. 

14  See  78. 

1"  Lat.  autem. 


16  See  166. 
1'^  Gen.  sing. 

18  See  todselan. 

19  See  tacen,  and  24. 

20  See  tid,  and  24. 

21  See  daeg,  and  24. 

22  See  gear,  and  24. 

23  See  193,  a.     Write  the  opt. 
pret.  plur.  of  this  verb. 

24  See  twegen. 

25  See  micel. 

26  See  66. 

27  What  is  the  relation  of  the 
stem-vowel  to  that  of  leoht  ? 

28  For  niht,  instead  of  nieht, 
see  19.     See  153.  d. 

29  See  ges^ttan,  and  189,  note. 


126  THE   CREATION    OF   THE    WOKLD. 

•gset  hie  scinen^  ofer  eorSan,  and  giemden  ^ses  dseges^  and 
•Ssere  niht,  and  todselden  leoht  and  Siestru;  God  geseali  tSa 
Sset  hit  god  waes.  And  waes  geworden  gefen  and  m^rgen  se 
feorSa^  dseg. 

God  cwgeS  eac  swilce/  "Teon  nu  Sa  wseteru  for^^  swim- 
mendu  cynn  cucu*^  on  life/  and  fleogendu^  cynn  ofer  eor^an 
under  Siere  heofonan  faestnesse."  And  God  gesceop  t5a^  'Sa 
miclan  hwalas/°  and  eall  libbendu  fisccynn  and  styriend- 
licu,"  Se^^  Sa^'^  waeteru  tiigon'"*  for?>^^  on  hiera  hiwum,  and 
eall  fleogendu  cynn  sefter  hiera  cynne ;  God  geseah  tia  'Sset 
hit  god  waes.  And  bletsode^"  hie,  cSus  ewetSende/''  "Weaxa^,^^ 
and  beot5  gemanigfielde/-^  and  gefyllaS  ^  Syere  sie  wseteru,  and 
^a  fuglas  beon^^  gemanigfielde  ofer  eorSan."  And  Sa  wses 
geworden  iSfen  and  m^rgen  se  fifta  daig. 

God  cwaetS  eac  swilce,  "Lyede^-  seo  eor^e  forS^  cucu  nle- 
tenu^*  on  hiera  cynne,  and  creopendu^  cynn  and  deor  sefter 
hiera  hlwuin" ;  hit  wses  t^a  swa  geworden.  And  God  geworhte 
Saere  eorfian  deor  sefter  hiera  hlwum,  and  t5a  nietenu  and  eall 
creopendu  cynn  on  hiera  cynne ;  God  geseah  Sa  f^set  hit  god 

1  Opt.  pret.   =  Lat,  lucerent.  ^^  Nom.  plur. 
What  would  be  the  opt.  pres.  ?                i*  See  teon. 

2  See  156.  /.  ^^  Tugon  foriaf  =  produxerunt. 

3  See  78.  i^  See  bletsian,  and  33. 
^  Eac  swilce  =  etiam.                       ^'^  See  eweffan. 

5  Producant  =  teon  .  .  .  forS".  ^^  gee  weaxan,  and  24. 

^  See  cucu.  i^  Past  part,  in  nom.  plur. 

7  See  lif.  20  See  gefyllan. 

8  See  fleogan,  and  61.  21  gee  193.  a. 
8  Adverb  ;  see  84.  1.  22  gee  isedan. 

1'*  See  hwael.  23  Lggde  .  .  .  forQ"  =  producat. 

11  Lat.  motabilem.  24  gee  nieten. 

^2  Aco.  25  gee  creopan. 


THE   CREATION    OF   THE   WORLD.  127 

waes.  And  cwse'S,  "  Uton  ^  wyrcean  mann  to  ancllicnesse  and 
to  urre^  gelicnesse,  and  he  sie^  ofer  'Sa  fiscas,"*  and  ofer  t5a 
fuglas,  and  ofer  t5a  deor,  and  ofer  ealle  gesceafta/  and  ofer 
eall  t5a  creopendan  Se  styriaS^  ofer  eorSan."  God  gesceop  6a 
mann  to  his  andlicnesse,  to  Godes  andlicnesse  he  gesc6op 
hine  ;  werhades  ^  and  wif  hades  he  gesceop  hie. 

And  God  hie  bletsode,  and  cwseS,  "Weaxa^,  and  beotS 
gemanigfielde,  and  gefyUaS  t5a  eortSan  and  gewieldat^^  hie, 
and  habba'6^  on  eowrnm''^  gewealde  'Ssere  see  fiscas,  and  Ssere 
lyfte  fuglas,  and  eall  nieteim  t5e  styriaS  ofer  eor'San."  God 
cwseS  t5a,  "Efne  ic  forgeaf "  eow^^  eall  gsers  and  wyrta  sged^^ 
berenda  ofer  eort5an,  and  eall  treowu,  Sa-6e^^  habbaS  saed 
on  him  selfum  hiera  agnes  cynnes,  tiset  hie  beon  eow^'*  to 
m^te ;  and  ealliim  nietenum  and  eallum  fugolcynne  and 
eallum  6^m  Se  styriaS  on  eort5an,  on  Ssem-'Se^^  is  lib- 
bende  ^^  llf,^'  ^set  hie  haebben  him  to  ^^  gereordianne  " ;  hit 
wses  '6a  swa  gedon.  And  God  geseah  eall  6a  6ing^^  6e  he 
geworhte,  and  hie  w^ron  swi6e  god.  Wses^  6a  geworden 
eefen  and  m^rgen  se  siexta  dseg. 

1  =  Let  us.  1°  See  83. 

2  See  83.  Urre  properly  belongs  ^^  See  forgiefan. 

to  both  nouns  ;  Lat.  ad  imaginem  ^^  gee  ara,  and  164.  a. 

et  similitudinem  nostram.  ^^  See  24.                i^a  gee  87.  h. 

3  See  wesan.  "  See  161.  2.    Auth.  Vers. :  'to 
*  See  iisc.  you  it  shall  be  for  meat.' 

6  See  gesceaft.  ^^  =  whom. 

6  See  styrian.  ^^  See  libban. 

"^  See  153.  /.  ^'^  Libbende  lif  =  anima  viva. 

8  What  is  the  relation  of  the  i^  gee  gereordian,  and  200. 
stem  diphthong  to  that    of    ge-           ^^  Ace.   plur.      Why   like    the 
weald  ?  singular  ? 

9  See  habban.  20  gee  189.  1. 


128 


THE   CREATION   OF   THE    WORLD. 


Eornostlice^  'Sa  waeron  fullfr^mede^  heofonas  and  eorSe 
and  eall  hiera  fraetwung.^  And  God  t5a  gefylde^  on  t5one 
seofof5an  dseg^  Ms  weorc^  6e  he  geworhte,  and  he  ger^ste'^ 
hine*  on  t^one  seofo^an  daeg  fram  eallum  t^tem  weorce  Se  he 
5  gefr^mede.  And  God  gebletsode  Sone  seofo^an  dseg  and 
hine  gehalgode,^  for-'Son-'Se  he  on  ^one  dseg  geswac^*^  his 
weorces"  5e  he  gesceop^^  to  wyrceanne.^^ 


1  Lat.  igitur. 

2  See  fullfr^inman.  Lat.  per- 
fecti. 

3  Lat.  ornatus,  Gr.  Kbafios ; 
arrayj  or  apleiidid  array,  would 
perhaps  express  the  original 
sense. 

*  Lat.  complevit. 

^  Ace.  where  we  should  expect 
dat.;  Lat.  die  septimo.    See  172.  L 

c  Sing.,  as  the  Latin  shows. 

'  See  ger^stan.  Why  but  one 
t  in  the  preterit  ? 

8  See  184.  b.       , 

^  See  gehalgian.  From  halig  ; 


for  loss  of  i  see  23.  The  root  is 
hal ;  after  umlaut  of  the  stem 
vowel,  what  would  this  syllable 
become,  and  in  what  words  is  it 
found  ? 

i'^  See  geswican. 

11  His  weorces  =  ab  omni 
opere  svo.    See  156.  k. 

1-  gesceop  to  wyrceanne  = 
creavit  ut  faceret ;  Marg.  of  Auth. 
Vers., '  created  to  make.'    See  200. 

13  Wyrc-  not  umlaut  of  weorc-. 
The  relation  here  is  an  ablaut  one 
(22)  :  were  and  wurc  (wore) ; 
cf.  Gr.  (pyop  and  dpyavov. 


II. 


TRADES   AND   OCCUPATIONS. 

(From  ^Ifric's  Colloquy,  probably  prepared,  like  his  Grammar,  for  the 
instruction  of  English  youths  in  Latin.  There  are  two  MSS.  —  one  in  the 
British  Museum,  the  other  at  Oxford.  The  Oxford  MS.  has  the  rubric: 
Hanc  sententiam  Latini  sermonis  olim  Alfricus  abbas  composuit,  qui  mens 
fait  magister,  sed  tamen  ego,  ^Ifric  Bata,  multas  postea  huic  addidi 
appendices.  This  is  virtually  J^lfric  Bata's  sole  title  to  fame.  The  Old 
English,  like  the  Latin,  is  probably  of  the  late  tenth  century.) 


The  Merchant  and  his  Merchandise. 

Teacher.     Hwset  ssegst^  M,  raangere^? 
Merchant.     Ic  s^cge  'Saet  behefe^  ic  eom  ge*  cyninge^  and 
ealdormannum/  and  weligum,  and  eallum  folce. 


1  See  123. 

2  Lat.  mercator.  Other  Old 
English  terms  for  merchant  are 
ciepa  and.  ciepmann.  Erom  a 
collateral  form  of  the  latter,  ceap- 
mann,  without  umlaut,  is  derived 
Mod.  Eng.  chapman.  How  is  chap- 
related  to  cheap  ?  See  the  Kew 
English  Dictionary  (iVeio  Eng. 
Diet.)  under  these  words. 

3  Lat.  utilis.  Cf .  the  Mod.  Eng. 
noun  behoof. 

^  ge  .  .  .  and  =  Lat.  et  .  .  .  et. 
5  Carlyle  {Sartor  Besartus,  Bk. 
3,  Chap.  7)   has  the  following: 

6  Lat. 


'■'■  Konig  (King),  anciently  K'on- 
ning,  means  Ken-ning  (Cunning), 
or  which  is  the  same  thing,  Can- 
ning. Ever  must  the  Sovereign 
of  Mankind  be  fitly  entitled  King." 
On  the  other  hand  Gummere  {Ger- 
manic Origins^  p.  270):  "At  the 
head  of  the  family  we  found,  of 
course,  the  father ;  and  at  the  head 
of  the  state  we  naturally  look  for 
the  king.  The  word  *  king '  means 
the  child  or  son  of  the  tribe,  its 
representative  or  even  creation ; 
man  of  race,  man  of  rank.  Grad- 
ually the  king  ceases  to  be  re- 

ducihus. 
129 


130 


TRADES    AND   OCCUPATIONS. 


Teacher.     And  hu  ? 

Merchant.  Ic  astlge  mm  scip  mid  hleestum  ^  mlnum,  and 
rowe^  ofer  splice  ^  dselas/  and  ciepe^  mln  c^ing,  and  bycge 
•Sing^  deorwierSu,^  t5a  on  f5isum  lande  ne  beo6  ac^nnede,  and 
ic  hit  togeltede''  eow  hider  mid  miclum  plihte^  ofer  s^,  and 
hwJluni  forlidennesse  ic  6olie,  mid  lyre  ealra  Singa  mlnra, 
unease  ^  cwic^  setberstende.^ 

Teacher.     Hwilc  Sing  gel^dst  t5u  us  ? 

Merchant.  Paellas  ^*^  and  sTdan,"  deorwierSe  gimmas  and 
gold,  seldcutS^^  reaf  ^^  and  wyrtgemang,^'*  win  and  ^le,  elpes^^ 
ban^^  and  msesling,'^  aer^"  and  tin,  swefel  and  glses,  and  t5yl- 
lices  ^^  fela. 


garded  as  a  creation  of  his  race ; 
his  ancestry  is  pushed  back  to 
the  gods,  and  his  right  is  quite 
above  all  sanctions  of  popular 
choice  or  approval/'  Which  of 
these  views  is  confirmed  by  ety- 
mology ? 

1  Lat.  mercihus. 

2  Lat.  navigo. 

8  Lat.  marinas. 
*  Lat.  partes. 

5  Lat.  vendo.  -    ■ 

6  Lat.  res  pretiosas. 
"^  Lat.  adduco. 

8  Lat.  periculo.  Mod.  Eng. 
form  of  pliht  ? 

9  Lat.  vix  vivus  evadens.  Note 
the  love  for  alliteration,  even  in 
the  Latin. 

10  Lat.  purpurum.  Cf .  Spenser 
(F.  Q.  2.  9.  37):  "In  a  long  pur- 
ple pall. ^'' 


11  Lat.  sericum.  From  this 
Latin  word  (indicating  what 
country?)  comes  OE.  seoI(o)c. 
What  Mod.  p]ng.  word  from  the 
latter  (or  the  equivalent  Old 
Norse  (ON.)  silki)?  Cf.  Skeat's 
Principles  of  English  Etymology 
(I.) ,  p.  440  (Skeat,  Prin.) .  Other 
words  in  which  Eng.  I  =  Lat.  r 
(through  OE.)  are  plum  =  Lat. 
prunus  ;  purple  =  Lat.  purpura  ; 
turtle  =  Lat.  turtur. 

12  Lat.  varias,  but  this  looks 
like  a  mistake.  Varius  usually 
=  mis  (sen)  lie  or  manigfeald. 

13  Lat.  vestes. 

1*  Lat.  pigmenta.  Translate, 
spice. 

^^  Lat.  ebur.    j  ^ 

16  Lat.  aurichalcum.     -  ,■  ^ 

1'^  Lat.  aes. 

18  See  154.  a. 


TRADES    AND   OCCUPATIONS. 


131 


Teacher.  Wilt^  5u  s^Uan  Sing  t5in  her  ealP  swa^  6u  hie 
gebohtest  cSser  ? 

Merchant.  Ic  nelle.  Hwset  Sonne  me  fr^mede^  gedeorf^ 
mm?  Ac  ic  wille  hie  ciepan  her  lufiicor^  Sonne  ic  gebycge 
S^er,  Ssef^  sum  gestreon''  me^  ic  begiete,^  Sanan  ic  me  afede/*^ 
and  mm  wif,  and  minne  sunu. 


The  Choice  of  Occupatioris. 

Teacher.  Hwset  ssegst  M,  wisa?  Hwilc  crseft"  6e  is^^ 
gec^uht  ^"^  betweox  Sas  f urSra  ^'^  wesan  ? 

Counsellor.  Ic  s^cge  ^e,  me  is  ^^  geSuht  ^^  Godes  (5eowdom  ^^ 
betweoh  (5as  crseftas  ealdorscipe  ^''  healdan,  swa-swa  hit  is  ^^ 
germed  on  godspelle,  "Fyrinest  seceaS  rice  Godes,  and  riht- 
wisnesse^^  his,  and  t5as  Sing  call  beo(5  togelecte^^  eow." 

Teacher.  And  hwilc  ^e  is^^  gec^uht  betweox  woruldcreeftas^ 
healdan  ealdordom  ?  ^" 

Counsellor.     Eor$til(5,^^  for-Sam  se  ierSling^^  us  ealle  fet.^^ 


1  See  139. 

2  z=  just  as. 

3  See  193.  h. 

4  Lat.  labor. 

^  Lat.  carius. 


Possibly  mis- 


written  for  leoflicor.  A  literal 
translation,  not  regarding  the 
sense ;  deorra  or  dierra,  from 
"deore  or  diere,  dear,  would  be 
more  normal. 

6  See  84.  1. 

■^  Lat.  lucrum.     Ace.  sing. 

8  See  161.  1. 

9  Lat.  adquiram.    See  196.  /. 
10  See  195. 


11  Lat.  ars. 

12  Conjectural ;  not  in  the  MSS. 

13  See  lafyncean. 

"  Lat.  prior.     Nom.  sing. 
15  Lat.  videtur. 
10  See  143  and  149. 
1'^  Lat.  primatum. 

18  See  144. 

19  Lat.  adjicientur.     See  toge- 
iecan,  and  62. 

20  Lat.   artes  seculares.      MS. 
crseftas  woruld. 

21  Lat.  agricultura.    See  147. 

22  Lat.  arator. 

23  See  fedan. 


132  TRADES   AND   OCCUPATIONS. 

Se  smid  soegd : 

Hwanan  'Sgem  ierSlinge  sulhscear^  0(5^e  culter,^  ^e  na  gade^ 
hsef^  btitan  of  crsefte  minum  ?    Hwanan  fiscere  *  angel,  ot5t5e 
sceowyrhtan  sel,  ot5t5e  seamere  ntedl  ?     Nis  hit  of  mlnum 
5   geweorce  ? 

Se  gedeahtend^  andswarad : 

So^,  witodlice,  saegst  ^u^;  ac  eallum  us  leofre  is  wician^ 

mid  •Seem  ierSlinge  tSonne  mid  ^e,  for-t5am  se  ier^ling  s^letS 

us  hlaf^  and  dr^nc.      Dii,  hwset  shiest  M^  us  on  smiSSan 

10  Sinre  butan  iserne^  fyrspearcan,^  and  sweginga^^  beatendra" 

sl^cgea^^  and  blawendra  b^lga? 

Se  treowwyrhta  ^^  smgd : 

Hwilc  eower"  ne  notaS^^  crsefte'^  minum  —  ^onne  htis," 
and  mislicu  f atu,  and  scipu  eow  ^^  eallum  ic  wyrce  ^^  ? 
15       Se  smW^  andwyrt : 

Eala  treowwyrhta,  for^^  hwy^^  swa  spriest  tSu,  'Sonne  ^ 


1  MS.  sylanscear.  11  Lat.  tundentinm. 

2  Lat.  culter.  12  L^t  malleorum. 

*  See  24.  i^  Lat.  lignarius.    See  147. 

*  See  161.  1*  See  154.  b. 
s  Lat.  consiliarius.  1^  Lat.  iititur. 
6  Not  in  MS.                                         16  See  164.  o. 

■^  Lat.  hospitari  ;  see  199.  a.  ^'^  Lat.  domos. 

8  Lat.  panem.    Bread,  which  i^  See  161. 

is  found  in  Old  English,  scarcely  1^  Lat.  fabrico. 

has  any   other  sense   than   that  20  Lat.  ferrarius.       MS.   gol-" 

of  1)  fragment,  2)  broken  bread.  siniff  (sic). 
Later    it    acquires    its    modern  21  ^^t.  cur ;  see  175. 

meaning.     See  New  Eng.  Diet.,  22  L^t.    cum.      Other    tempo- 

s.v.  bread.  ral  conjunctions  used  to  denote 

^  Lat.  ferreas  scintillas.  cause  are  nn  and  Sfa.    Has  Mod. 

1*^  Lat.  sonitus.  Eng.  any  similar  idiom  ? 


TRADES   AND    OCCUPATIONS. 


133 


ne  furSum^  an  6yrel  butan  craefte  minum  M  ne^  meaht'^ 
dori^? 

Se  gedeahtend  smgd : 

Eala,  geferan^  and  gode  wyrlitan !  Uton  toweorpan 
hwsetlicor^  t5as  gefiitu/  and  sle^  sibb  and  geSwsernes'"^  be- 
tweoh  us,  and  fr^mme^*^  anra"  gehwilc^^  ot^rum^  on  crsefte 
his,  and  ge^weerien^^  simle  mid  Ssera  ierSlinge,  6ger^^  we 
bigleofan^^  us,  and  fodor  liorsum  urum  habba^.  And  ^is 
geSeaht  ic  s^lle  eallum  wyrlitum,  Sset  anra^^  gehwilc  craeft 
his  geornlice  begange,^^  f or-^am  se,  t5e  craeft  '^  his  f orlaet,  he  ^^ 
bi6  forlseten  fram  •ggem  crsefte.  Swa-hw8ef5er^"  ^u  sie — swa^^ 
maessepreost,-^  swa  munuc,^  swa  ceorl,^"'  swa  c^mpa^ — bega^^ 
•Se  selfne  on  (Sisum,  and  beo  t58et  Su  eart;  for-Sam  micel  hlenS^ 
and  sceamu  hit  is  m^nn  nellan^^  wesan  t5aet  he  is  and  t^set  he 
wesan  sceaL^ 


1  Lat.  saltern. 

2  See  183. 

3  Lat.  vales. 

*  Lat.  facere. 

5  Lat.  socii  ;  see  152. 

6  Lat.  citius ;  used  almost  in 
tlie  sense  of  the  positive ;  see  76. 

'^  Lat.  contentiones. 

8  See  189.  1. 

^  Lat.  Concordia. 

10  Lat.  prosit. 

11  Lat.  unusquisque.  MS.  urum 
gehwylcum, 

12  See  160. 

13  Lat.  conveniamus. 

14  Lat.  uU. 

15  Lat.  victum. 

16  See  154.  h. 


17  See  194.  h. 

18  Ace.  sing. 
13  Lat.  ipse. 

20  Lat.  sive. 

21  Swa  .  .  .  swa  =  Lat.  sive 
.  .  .  seu. 

22  Lat.  sacerdos. 

23  Lat.  monachus,  from  whicli 
the  OE.  word  is  derived.  For 
the  u  cf.  OE.  munt  =  Lat. 
montem. 

24  Lat.  laicus. 

25  Lat.  mz7es. 

26  MS.  bega  o»e  behwyrf. 
Lat.  exerce. 

2^^  Lat.  damnum. 

28  MS.  nelle.     See  199.  a. 

29  Lat.  de5e«. 


5. 


III. 


THE   DAY   OF   JUDGMENT. 


(From  ^Ifric's  Homilies,  vol.  2,  pp.  106-108;  being  a  paraphrase  of 
Matt.  25:31-46.) 

Witodlice*  Mannes  Beam  cymS^  on  his  maegentSrymme, 
and  ealle  ^nglas^  samod  mid  hiin  to  tSeem  miclan'*  dome.^ 
Donne  sitt^  he  on  ■Seem  setle  his  msegenSrymnesse/  and 
beoS  gegaderode  setforan  him  ealle  ^eoda/  and  he  toscaet^ 
hie  on  twa,  swa-'swa  sceaphierde  ^^  toscyet  sceap "  fram 
gatum.^-  Donne  gelogaS  he  t5a  sceap  on  his  swif5ran^^ 
hand,  and  'Sa  g'^t^^  on  his  winstran.  Donne  cwiS^^  se 
Cyning  Crist  to  ^eem  t5e  on  his  swISran  hand  standaS, 
"CumaS   ge   bletsode  ^''*  mines   Fgeder/^   and   geagniat5   Saet 


1  Lat.  autem. 

2  See  cuman. 

3  See  ^ngel.  What  is  the  his- 
tory of  this  word  before  it  entered 
Old  English  ? 

4  See  55. 

»  In  what  modern  compound 
does  this  meaning  of  dom  persist? 

6  See  sittan. 

7  See  153.  /. 

8  Nom.  plur. 

^  See  toseeadan.  Account  for 
the  vowel  ae. 

10  In  compound  words,  the 
vowel  of  the  first  syllable  is  apt 


to  be  shortened  in  Mod.  Eng., 
the  more  general  principle  being 
that  shortening  is  apt  to  occur 
before  an  accumulation  of  con- 
sonants. Besides  sceaphierde, 
shepherd,  note  e.g.  wisdom,  wis- 
dom. 

11  Plural ;  account  for  the  form. 

12  See  24. 

13  See  swiS". 
1*  See  52. 

15  See  cweafan.     What  is  the 
ind.  pret.  3d  sing.  ? 

16  Past  part,  in  nom.  plur. 

17  See  43.  8. 


184 


THE   DAY   OF   JUDGMENT. 


135 


rlce^  ^e  eow^  gegearcod  wses  fram  frym^e  middangeardes. 
Me^  hyngrede/  and  ge  me  gereordedon;  me^  Syrste,  and  ge 
me^  sc^ncton;  ic  wses  ciima,^  and  ge  me  underfengon''  on 
eowrum  giesthusum;  ic  wses  nacod,  and  ge  me  scryddon^; 
ic  wees  geuntrumod,  and  ge  me  geneosedon ;  ic  waes  on 
cwearterne,  and  ge  comon  to  me  and  me  gef ref redon.^ " 
Donne  andswariaS  ^a  rihtwisan  ^°  Criste  ^^  and  cweSaS, 
"Dryhten,  hwonne  gesawe^^  we  tSe  hungrigne,  and  we  6e 
gereordedon  ?  0(S6e  t5urstigne,  and  we  6e  sc^ncton  ?  o56e 
hwonne  wsere  M  cuma/^  and  we  «e  underfengon  ?  o6^e 
hwonne  gesawe^^*  we  '5e  untrumne  oSSe  on  cwearterne,  and 
we  t5e  geneosedon  ? "  Donne  andwyrt  se  Cyning  ^gem 
rihtwisum  Sisum  wordum/'*  "  So6  ^^  ic  eow  s^cge,  swa  ^^ 
lange    swa^''   ge   dydon   anum,   ^isum   leestan/^   on   mmum 


1  Still  found  as  the  last  sylla- 
ble of  bishopric. 

2  See  81. 

3  See  190. 

*  What  is  the  relation  of  the 
stem-vowel  to  that  of  hungrig  ? 
See  90. 

5Dat. 

^  Lat.  hospes. 

■^  See  underfon. 

8  What  peculiar  senses  has  the 
verb  shroud  in  Spenser,  Shake- 
speare, or  Milton?  What  form 
would  scrydan  most  naturally 
assume  in  Mod.  Eng.  (24)  ? 
How  can  the  Mod.  Eng.  form  of 
the  verb  shroud  be  accounted 
for? 

9  What  is  the  relation  of  the 


stem-vowel  to  that   of   f rofor  ? 
See  90. 

10  Nom.  plur.     See  181. 

11  Dat. 

12  See  geseon. 

13  See  150.         i^a  gee  95,  note. 

14  See  174.  b. 

15  Lat.  amen,  Eng.  verily. 

16  =  so. 

17  =  as.  Notice  this  early  use 
of  so  long  as  (=  Lat.  quamdiu) 
in  the  sense  of  inasmuch  as. 

18  The  WS.  translation  of  the 
Gospel  has  anum  of  afisum 
minum  Isestuin  gebroiffruin, 
which  is  much  more  literal.  In 
^Ifric's  version  we  must  under- 
stand leestan  to  be  in  apposition 
with  anum.     See  66. 


136  THE   DAY   OF   JUDGMENT. 

naman,  ge  hit  dydon  me  selfum.^''  Donne  cwit5  lie  ^ft 
to  t^gem  synfullum,  'Se  on  his  winstran  healfe  standaS, 
"  Gewita^  fram  me,  ge  awiergdan,  into  t5gem  ecean  fyre, 
Se  is  gegearcod  Sssm  deofle-  and  his   awiergdum  gastum. 

5  Me  hyngrede,  and  ge  me  tetes  ^  f orwierndon  ;  me  Syrste, 
and  ge  me  drincan  ne  sealdon;  ic  wees  cuma,  and  ge  me 
underf on  noldon ;  ic  wses  nacod,  nolde  *  ge  me  weeda  ^ 
tlSian^;  ic  waes  untrum  and  on  cwearterne,  nolde*  ge 
me  geneosian."     Donne  andswariaS^  tSa  unrihtwisan  nian- 

lo  fullan,^  "La  leof,  hwonne  gesawe''  we  Se  hungrigne,^  oSSe 
Surstigne,  oSSe  cuman,  oSSe  nacodne,  oSSe  geuntrumodne, 
oSSe  on  cwearterne,  and  we  Se  noldon  Senian^"?  Donne 
andwyrt  se  Cyning  him,  and  cwiS,  "  SoS  ic  eow  s^cge, 
swa   lange    swa   ge   forwierndon    anum    of   Sisum    lytlum, 

15  and  noldon  '*'  liim  on  milium  naman  tlSian,  swa  lange " 
ge  me  selfuin  his'^  forwierndon."  Donne  faraS  Sa  uncyst- 
gan^^  and  Sa  iinrilitwlsan  into  ecre  cwicsilsle,  mid  deofle 
and  his  awiergdum  ^nglum ;  and  Sa  rihtwisan  gecierraS 
fram  Stem  dome  into  S;Jem  ecean  life. 

1  Not  =  myself;  self  agrees  "^  How  is  the  and-  of  this 
with  me.  The  Latin  has  no  orig-  word  related  to  the  anti-  of 
inal  here  for  self;  iF^lfric  adds  it       Eng.  antiphon? 

to  strengtlien  the  expression.  ^  See  4. 

2  See  161.  »  See  173. 

3  See  159.  10  See  139. 

4  See  95,  note.  "  Correlative    with    the    swa 

5  See  159.  What  is  the  Mod.  lange  swa  of  the  preceding 
Eng.  form  of  this  word  ?  clause. 

6  See  28  ;  164.  e.  12  See  55  ;  57.  3 ;  181. 


IV. 

BEDE'S   DESCRIPTION   OF   BRITAIN. 

(Eccl.  Hist.,  Bk.  I.,  Chap.  I.) 

[^Ifric  testifies  to  a  translation  of  Bede's  History  having  been  made 
by  Alfred,  and  so  does  William  of  Malmesbury;  besides,  the  MS.  of  the 
Cambridge  University  Library  twice  has  this  couplet, — 

Historicus  quondam  fecit  me  Beda  latinum, 
Alfred  rex  Saxo  transtulit  ille  pins. 

On  the  other  hand,  it  has  such  undoubted  Anglian  peculiarities  that  it 
has  been  suggested  (by  Miller,  its  latest  editor)  that  '*  the  version  may 
have  been  executed  by  Mercian  scholars  under  orders  from  the  king,"  and 
that  it  was  possibly  made  at  Lichfield. 

The  distinction  between  English  idiom  and  imitation  of  the  Latin  should 
be  remarked,  wherever  possible.  Moberly's  edition  of  the  Ecclesiastical 
History,  which  contains  scholarly  and  interesting  notes,  may  profitably  be 
compared.] 

Breoton^  is  garsecges^  Igland,  ^set  wses  Tu  geara  Albion 
haten.  .  .  .  Hit  is  welig — 'Sis  igland  —  on  waestmum  and  on 
treowum  missenlicra  cynna/  and  hit  is  gescrepe  on  Iseswe 
sceapa"*  and  neata^;    and   on    sumum    stowum  wingeardas 

Britannia  oceani  insula,  cui  quondam  Albion  nomen  fuit. 
.  .  .  Opirna  frugibus  atque  arboribus  insula,  et  alendis 
apta  pecoribus  ac  jumentis ;  vineas  etiam  quibusdam  in 
locis  germinans :   sed  et  avium  ferax  terra  marique  gene- 

1  Moberly  says:  "This  descrip-  3  gee  153.  /. 
tion  of  Britain  is  pieced  from  the            *  See  153.  d. 

accounts  of  Plinius,  Solinus,  Oro-  ^  what  Mod.  Eng.  word  repre- 

sius,  Dio  Cassius,  and  Gildas."  sents  this?    What  OE.  noun-stem 

2  See  153.  h.  contains  the  umlaut  of  this  one  ? 

137 


138  bede's  description  of  Britain. 

growaS.  Swilce  eac  Seos  eorSe  is  berende  missenlicra 
fugla^  and  ssewihta.  .  .  .  And  her  beoS  oft  fangene^* 
seolas,  and  hranas,  and  m^reswin ;  and  her  beotS  oft 
numene^  missenlicra^  cynna  weolocscielle  "^  and  muscule, 
and  on  'Ssem  beoS  oft  gemette^  Sa  b^tstan^  meregreotan^ 
telces  hiwes.  And  her  beoS  swr8e  genyhtsume  weolocas, 
of  ^^m  bis  geworht  se  weolocreada  t^lg,  tSone  ne  maeg 
sunne  bltecan  ^  ne  ne  regn  ^  wierdan ;  ac,  swa  he  biS 
ieldra/^  swa  he  fsegerra  hv6.  Hit  hsefS"  eac  —  Sis  land 
—  sealtseaSas ;  and  hit  haefS  hat  wgeter,  and  hat  baSu/^ 
clelcre   ielde  ^^  and   hade,  Surh   tod^leda   stowa/"*  gescrepe. 

ris  diversi.  .  .  .  Capinntur  antem  Sfspissime  et  vituli 
marini,  et  delphines,  necnon  et  ballenje :  exceptis  vario- 
rum generibus  concliyliorum ;  in  quibus  sunt  et  musculae, 
quibus  inclusam  saipe  margaritam,  omnis  quidem  coloris 
optiniam  inveniunt.  .  .  .  Sunt  et  cochleae  satis  superque 
abundantes,  quibus  tinctura  coccinei  coloris  conhcitur, 
cujus  rubor  pulclierrimus  nullo  unquam  solis  ardore,  nulla 
valet  pluviarum  injuria  pallescere  ;  sed  quo  vetustior  est, 
eo  solet  esse  venustior.  Habet  fontes  salinarum,  habet  et 
fontes  calidos,  et  ex  eis  fluvios  balnearum  calidarum, 
omni  setati  et  sexui,  per  distincta  loca,  juxta   suum   cui- 

1  This  genitive  after  a  present  «  From     what     adjective     is 

participle  is  exceptional ;  cf .  the  blaecan  derived  (17)  ? 
Latin  for  an  explanation  (155).  ^  To   what  might  regn   con- 

la  See  fon.  2  gee  niman.  tract  (28)  ? 

8  See  p.  130,  n.  12.    *  Norn.  plur.  i*'  See  65. 

5  From  what  noun  is  the  stem  11  See  121. 
of  metan  derived  ?     See  14.  ^^  gee  bseSf. 

6  See  66.  ^^  Governed  by  gescrepe.    See 
■^  This  word   is   adapted  from       165. 

the  Latin,  but  simulates  a  com-  1*  What   does  -stoiv  mean   in 

pound  of  m^re,  sea,  and  greot,  a  proper  name  like  Chep- 
earth,  gravel.  stow  f 


BEDE'S   description   of   BRITAIN.  139 

Swilce  hit  is  eac  berende  ^  on  w^cga  orum  —  ares  and 
isernes,  leades  and  seolfres.  Her  biS  eac  gemett  gagates; 
se  stan  bi^  blsec  gimm;  gif  man^  hine  on  fyr  deS/  ^onne 
fieoS  'S^r  nseddran'*  onweg.^  Wses  t5is  igland^  eac  ge- 
weorSod  mid  S^m  aeSelestum  ceastrum'' — anes  wana  t5rit- 
igum^  —  ■Sa-6e^  wseron  mid  weallum/*^  and  torrum/*^  and 
geatum,  and  t^sem  trumestum  locum  getimbrede,  butan 
ot5runi  Igessan^^  unrime  ceastra. 

And  for-'Sam-tSe  Sis  igland  under  Sgem  selfum  nort^dyele 
middangeardes    niehst    lit)/^   and    leohte    niht    on    sumera 

que  modum  accommodos.  .  .  .  Quae  etiam  venis  metal- 
lorum,  seris,  ferri,  et  plumbi  et  argenti  fsecunda,  gignit  et 
lapidem  gagatem  plurimum  optimumque :  est  autem  nigro- 
gemmeus  et  ardens  igni  admotus,  incensus  serpentes  fugat. 
.  .  .  Erat  et  civitatibus  quondam  viginti  et  octo  nobilis- 
simis  insignita,  praeter  castella  innumera,  quae  et  ipsa  muris, 
turribus,  portis,  ac  seris  erant  instructa  firmissimis. 

Et  quia  prope  sub  ipso  septentrionali  vertice  mundi  jacet, 
lucidas  sestate  noctes  habet ;   ita  ut  medio  ssepe  tempore 

1  Cf.  the  construction  of  this  '  From  Lat.  castra.     Cf.  the 
word  with  that  above,  p.  I^jS,  1.  1,       -caster^    -Chester^    of    Lancaster, 

2  See  89.  e.  ^  See  140.       Winchester,    etc.      Some  of  the 
4  How    did    naeddre    become       more   important   of   these    cities 

adder?     Cf.  OE.  nafogar,  Mod.  were  York,  Colchester,  Winches- 

Eng.  auger.      See   Skeat,   Prin.,  ter,  Canterbury,  and  Chester  (see 

p.  21G.  Moberly,  p.  7). 

^  There    is    a    parallel    form,  ^  Cf .  78.  5  ;  158.     The  number 

aweg,   already  in  OE.     The  a-  does  not  correspond  to  the  Latin, 

is  a  contraction  of  on.     Mention  ^  Does  this  relative  have  the 

other  Mod.  Eng.  words  in  which  same  antecedent  as  in  the  Latin  ? 

the  a-  represents  on.  lo  Weall  is  from  Lat.  vallum; 

6  How    does    the    Mod.    Eng.  torr,  from  Lat.  twris. 

island  acquire  its  s  ?    See  Skeat,  "  See  24. 

Pfin.,  p.  380.  12  See  licgan,  and  28. 


140  BEDE's   description   of   BRITAIN. 

haef^  —  swa  (5set  oft  on  midre  niht  geflit  cymS^  Ssem 
behealdendum,  hwseSer  hit  sle  Se^  gefenglomung,  $e  on 
morgen  dagung  —  is  on  Ssem  sweotol,  Sset  8is  Tgland  ^ 
hsefS  micle*  l^ngran  dagas  on  sumera,*  and  swa  eac  niht® 
5   on  wintra/  (Sonne  6a  sfiSdtelas  middangeardes/ 

noctis  in  quaestionem  veniat  intuentibus,  utrum  crepus- 
culum  adhuc  permaneat  vespertinum,  an  jam  advenerit 
matutinum,  utpote  nocturno  sole  non  longe  sub  terris  ad 
orientera  boreales  per  plagas  redeunte  :  unde  etiam  plu- 
rimse  longitudinis  habet  dies  sestate,  sicut  et  noctes  contra 
in  bruma. 

^  See  cuman.  &  See  43.  5. 

2  Lat.   utrum   .   .   .  an    =    fSe  ^  Niht   belongs  under  62.     It 
.  .  .  iflfe  (202.  b).  has  already  experienced   umlaut 

3  ig-  represents  ie-,  the  umlaut  in  the  nominative,  and  hence  does 
of  ea,  water.     Ea  goes  back  to  not  change  in  the  ace.  plur. 

the  same  Indo-European  root  as  "  This  last  clause  is  supplied  by 

Lat.  aqua.  the  translator. 

4  See  178. 


V. 


^THELWALD   CALMS   THE   SEA.^ 

(Bede,  Eccl,  Hist.,  Bk.  V.,  Chap.  I.) 

Ic  com  mid  tw^em^  66rum  broSrum  to  Farne,'^  Ssem 
Iglande.  Wolde  ic  sprecan  mid  Sone'*  arwiert5an  feeder 
J^Selwald.  Mid-(5y  ic  Sfi  wees  mid  his  gesprece  wel 
gerett/  and  me  bletsunge  bsed,  and  we  ham^  hwurfon/ 
6a  we  Sa  w^ron  on  midre^  S^ere  sse,  8a  ^  waes  samninga  5 
heofones  smyltnes  tosliten,  Sgere-Se  ^^  we  'div  lidon "  ut ; 
and  swa  micel  winter  ^-  us  onhreas,^^  and  swji  re6e  storm 
com,  Sset  we  ne  mid  segle  ne  mid  rownesse  awiht 
framgan"  meahton,  ne  we  us  nohtes^^  ^lles  wendon  nefne 


1  This  story  was  related  by 
Abbot  Gutlifrith  to  Bede.  iEthel- 
wald  succeeded  Cuthbert  as  the 
hermit  of  Fame,  dwelling  there 
from  687  to  699,  when  he  died. 

2  See  79. 

3  Two  miles  fromBamborough. 
One  of  the  islands  of  the  group 
was  the  scene  of  Grace  Darling's 
heroism  in  1858,  That  inhabited 
by  iEthelwald  was  the  largest. 

•*  The  ace.  with  mid  is  excep- 
tional (172.  1).  5  See  113. 

6  Ace.  sing,  as  adv.  ;  Lat. 
domum. 


"'  Lat.  rediremus. 

8  See  166.  1. 

9  To  fit  =  interrupta  est  sere- 
nitas  qua  vehebamur. 

1*^  Translate  in  (or  with)  which. 
The  Latin  shows  that  the  prepo- 
sition is  to  be  understood. 

11  See  liiSfan,  and  37. 

12  Lat.  hiems,  but  no  doubt  in 
the  sense  of  tempest. 

13  See  onhreosan.  What  is 
the  ind.  pret.  plur.  ? 

14  Lat.  projicere. 

15  See  166.  a. 


141 


142 


^THELWALD   CALMS   THE  SEA. 


dea^es^  selfes.  Mid-Sy  we  Sa  swit5e  lange  wi5  (5^m  winde 
and  wi6  6^em  sse  holunga^  campedon  and  wunnon,^  Sa  set 
niehstan  locedon  we  on  bsecling,  hwseSer  wen"*  wtere*  "Saet 
we  aenige^  Singa^  furSum  Sset  igland  gesecean^  mealiton, 

5  ^'dit  we  'ddi'  ut  of  gangende''  wyeron/  Cierde^  we  us  Sider 
we  cierdon,  gemetton'-^  we  us  ^eghwanan  gellce'"  storme^'^ 
fores^tte  and  foretynde,  and  nsenigne  hyht"  h^le^-  in  us 
to^^  lafe^^  standan.^^  Da  wses  sefter  langum  fsece  t^set  we 
tire    gesiht5    feorr^'*  upahofon,   tSa    gesawon   we    in    Fame, 

10  t5gem  Iglande,  Gode^"^  6one  leofan  faeder  ^Selwald  of  his 
diegelnessum  *^  utgangende/'  Saet^^  lie'^  wolde^^  iirne  sItSfset 
sceawian,  and  geseon  hwaet  us  gelumpe/^  for-<5()n  lie  ge- 
hierde  (Saet  gebrec  tJiera  storma  and  Sses  weallendes  s^s.^ 
Mid-5y  he  t5a   us   eac   sceawode,   and   geseah   in   gewinne 

[5   and    in    ormodnesse  ^'    ges^tte    beon,^    t5a    blegde    he    his 


1  See  166.  g. 

2  Lat.  frustra. 

3  See  winnan. 

4  Lat.  forte. 

^  Lat.  aliquo  conamine.  For 
eenige  see  174 ;  for  "Siuga.  see 
154.  b. 

6  Lat.  repetere. 

■^  Lat.  egressi  eramus.  The 
pres.  part,  with  the  verb  is  some- 
times used  in  OE.  to  denote  the 
simple  past,  as  here,  and  not  the 
progressive. 

8  See  95,  note. 

^  To  foretynde  =  Lat.  inve- 
nimus  nos  undiqueversum  pari 
tempestate  proeclusos. 

10  See  174. 


"  Ace.  sing.,  the  subj.  of 
standan. 

12  See  153.  d. 

'3  Lat.  restare. 

1*  Translate,  /rom  a  distance. 

1^  Governed  by  leofan  ;  = 
amantissimum  Deo.     See  165. 

^^'  Lat.  latibulis. 

1"  Translates  the  Latin  past 
part.,  egressum. 

1^  Translate,  that  he  might,  in 
order  to,  to.  The  Latin  has  the 
infinitive.  i^  gee  194.  b. 

2"^  Lat.  fragore  procellariim  ac 
ferventis  oceani. 

21  Lat.  desperatione. 

22  Supply  ns  as  subject  ace. 
(169). 


^THELAVALD   CALMS    THE   SEA.  143 

cneowu  to  Fseder  ures  Dryhtnes  Heelendes  Cristes,  and 
wses^  gebiddende^  for  urre  hsele  and  for  tirum  life.  And 
mid-t5y  he  tSa  Sset  gebed  gefylde,^  lie  6a  samod  setgsedere 
ge  'gone  at5undnan^  sge  gesmylte  ge  6one  storm  gestilde, 
to^  'Son''  t^sette*  6urli^  ealP  seo  replies  ^ses  stormes  waes^ 
blinnende/  and  gesyndge^  windas  ^urh  Sone  smyltestan 
see  us  set  lande  gebroliton.  Mid-t5y  we  6a  tip  com  on  to 
lande,  and  ure  scip  eac''  swilce''  fram  Ssem  ySum  up 
abeeron,  6a  sona  se  ilea  storm  ^ft  hwearf  and  com,^  se-6e 
for^  urum^  intingan^  medmicel  faec^°  gestilde,  and  ealne 
6one"  daeg^*'  swT6e  micel  and  Strang  wees,  Ssette^  m^nn 
sweotollice  ongietan  meahton  ^aette  se  medmicla  fierst 
68ere  stilnesse,  6e  ^ler  becom,  to^'^  beimm^^  68es  Godes^* 
weres'^  for  intingan  urre  li^le^*^  heofonlice^''  forgiefen'^  waes. 

1  See  above,  p.  142,  n.  7.  ^  i^^t,.  nostri  gratia. 

^  Lat.  complerpt.  ^^  See  170. 

^  Lat.  tumida.  i^  Lat.  illo.    Translate,  that. 

4  Lat.  adeo  ut,  nearly  =  so  that.  i^  From  iaCaet-ffe  (34). 

5  Lat.  per  omnia,  =  entirely.  ^^  Lat.  ad  preces.    Cf.  the  Mod. 

6  Lat.    secimdi.      What    letter  Eng.  phrase,  '  bootless  bene.' 
(sound)  has  been  lost  from  the  i*  Dependent  on  weres. 
OE.  form  ?  1°  Dependent  on  benum. 

■^  Lat.  quoque.  i^  Lat.  evasionis. 

8  Supply  ^f t.     Latin  has  only  i'^  Lat.  ccelitus  =  from  heaven. 

one  verb,  rediit.  i^  Not  forgiven.,  but  given. 


VI. 


THE   INVASION   OF   BRITAIN   BY   THE   PICTS 
AND   SCOTS. 

(Bede,  Eccl.  Hist.,  Bk.  I.,  Chaps.  XI.,  XII.) 

Of  t5iere  tide^  Romane  blunnon^  rlcsian  on  Breotone. 
Hsefdon  hie  Breotona  rice  feower  liiind  wintra,^  and,  t^ses 
fiftan,  himdseofontig,"  f5cTes-t5e^  Gains,  oSre  naman  Julius, 
se  casere,^  c^aet  il(;e  igland  gesohte.  And  ceastra,  and 
5  torras,^  and  strata, **  and  brycga  on  hiera  rice  geworhte 
wieron,  t^a  we  to-dseg  sceawian  magon.  Eardodon  Bryttas 
binnan  ^i5m  dice"  to  suSd^le,  t5e  we  gemyngodon  t5aet 
Severus,^"  se  casere,  het  Swieres  ofer  5set  Iglaud"  gedlcian. 


1  Lat.  ex  quo  tempore  =  Eng. 
froin  this  time  forth. 
'^  See  blinnan. 

3  See  154.  c. 

4  So  the  Latin :  jmst  annos 
ferme  quadringentos  septuaginta. 
But  the  best  calculations  make 
this  to  liave  been  about  sixty 
years  earlier. 

5  Lat.  ex  quo  =  Eng.  fro^n  the 
time  that. 

^  Lat.  Gaius  Julius  Caesar. 
^  Lat.  farus,  for  pharos.,  from 
Pharos,  the   name   of  an   island 


near  Alexandria  in  Egypt.  The 
lighthouse  built  on  this  island 
gave  its  name  to  other  light- 
houses (cf.  Fr.  phare).  Here 
watch-towers  are  meant. 

8  Lat.  stratce.  Are  the  two 
words  connected  ?  See  Skeat, 
Prin.,  pp.  68,  432. 

9  Lat.  intra  vallum.  Mod.  Eng. 
ditcJi  is  Southern  English;  dike 
probably  Northern.  Cf.  Eng. 
church  with  Scotch  kirk. 

10  This  wall  was  between  the 
Friths  of  Forth  and  Clyde  (see 


11  Lat.  t7'ans  insulam. 
144 


THE   INVASION   OF   BRITAIN. 


145 


Da^  ougunnon  twa  tSeoda,  Pihtas^  norSan,  and  Scottas 
westan,  hie  onwinnan,  and  hiera  gehta  niman  and  h^r- 
gian;  and  hie  fela  geara  iermdon  and  hiendon.  Da,  on 
t^gere  unstilnesse,  ons^ndon  hie  aerendwrecan  ^  to  Eome 
mid  gewritum''  and  wependre  bene;  him  fiiltumes^  b^edon,  5 
and  him  geheton  eat5mode  hiernesse  and  singale  under- 
^eodnesse,*^   gif   hie    him    gefultumoden   tSset   hie   meahten 


Moberly's  Bede,  p.  16),  but  Bede, 
following  Orosius,  is  no  doubt 
thinking  of  that  between  the  Tyne 
and  the  Solway  Frith,  which  was 
built  by  Hadrian  (a.d.  120).  Sev- 
erus'  wall  was  built  a.d.  207-210. 

1  "[This  account]  is  pieced  to- 
gether as  an  abridgment  of  Gil- 
das,  xi.-xvi. ;  but  the  turgidity 
of  his  style  is  chastened,  and  his 
faulty  grammar  in  several  places 
corrected"  (Moberly,  pp.26,  27). 

2  On  the  Picts  the  last  edition 
of  Chambers'  Encyclopoidia  re- 
marks: "Four  hypotheses  have 
been  formed  in  regard  to  the 
language  and  origin  of  the  Picts. 
The  first,  started  by  Pinkerton 
and  put  by  Sir  Walter  Scott  into 
the  mouth  of  the  'Antiquary,'  is 
that  they  were  Teutons,  speak- 
ing a  Gothic  dialect ;  the  second, 
maintamed  by  Dr.  Skene,  is  that 
they  were  Gaelic-speaking  Celts ; 
.  .  .  the  third,  due  to  Professor 
Rhys,  is  that  the  Picts  were  non- 
Aryans,  whose  language  was  over- 
laid by  loans  from  Welsh  and 


Irish ;  and  the  fourth,  held  by 
two  of  the  most  eminent  Celtic 
scholars  of  the  day,  Professor 
Windisch  and  Dr.  Whitley 
Stokes,  is  that  they  were  Celts, 
but  more  nearly  allied  to  the 
Cymry  than  to  the  Gael.  .  .  . 
The  conclusion  to  which  we 
come  is  that  the  Picts,  what- 
ever traces  they  show  of  a  non- 
Aryan  racial  element,  .  .  .  spoke 
a  Celtic  language  belonging  to  a 
branch  of  Celtic  allied  to  the 
Cymric,  .  .  .  and  that  this  dia- 
lect of  the  Gallo-Cymric  stock 
was  a  wave  of  Celtic  speech 
from  the  continent  previous  to 
the  Gaulish  which  held  England 
when  Cgesar  entered  Britain." 

3  Lat.  legatos. 

4  Lat.  epistolis. 

5  See  156.  b. 

6  This  pair  of  phrases  renders 
subjectionem  continuam.  What 
parallel  to  the  use  of  such  synony- 
mous terms  may  be  found  in  the 
English  Prayer-Book  ?  How  is  it 
to  be  accounted  for  ? 


146  THE   INVASION   OF   BRITAIN. 

hiera  fiend  ^  oferwinnan.  Da^  ons^ndou^  hie  him  micelne 
h^re  to  fultume,  and,  sona  'Sses-Se  hie  on  6is  igland  comon, 
•Sa  campedon  hie^  wi6  hiera  feondum,  and  him  micel  wsel 
ongeslogon,  and  of  hiera ^  gemserum  adrifon  and  afiiemdon^; 

5   and  l^rdon  'Sset  hie  fsesten"  worhten  him^  to  gebeorge  wi'S 
hiera  feondum ;  and  swa,  mid  micle  sige,^  ham  foron.^*^ 

Da"  tSset  t$a  ongeaton  5a  ^iran  gewinnan/^  •gget  se  Eoma- 
nisca  h^re  wses  onweg  gewiten,  5a  comon  hie  sona  mid 
sciph^re  on  hiera  landgemiiern,  and  slogon^^  ealle  and  cweald- 

10  on''^  ^aet  hie  gemetton,  and  swa-swa  ripe  ierSe"  fortryedon  and 
fornomon,  and  hie  mid  ealle  ^^  foriermdon.  And  hie  ^a  ^ft 
s^ndon  yerendwrecan  to  Kome,  and  wependre  stefne  him 
fultumes  b^don/^  ^aet^'  se^''  earme  eSel  mid  ealle  ^^  ne 
fordilgod  ne  wiJere,  ne  se  nama  5^re  Romaniscan  'Seode/^ 

15   se-Se  mid  him  swa  lange  scean^^  beorhte/^  fram  fr^mdra 

1  See  46.  here  omitted  in  tlie  translation, 

2  This  may  be  anywhere  be-  describing  the  construction  of 
tween  a.d.  388  and  420.  See  the  (earthen)  wall,  between  the 
Moberly,  p.  27.  Friths  of  Forth  and  of  Clyde. 

3  This  clause  tran.slates  Qnibus  1^  These  three  iJa's  respectively 
moxlegiodestinaturarmata.  Note  =  v^hen^  then,  and  the. 

the  use  of  the  active  for  the  pas-  ^^  j^at.  inimici. 

sive,  which  also  appears  in  other  ^^  Lat.  cccdunt.     See  above,  p. 

sentences  of  the  context.  145,  n.  6. 

4  The  legionaries,  apparently.  ^^  Lat.  segetem. 

^  Of  the  Britons  ;  Lat.  socio-  ^^  Mid  ealle  =  completely.   See 

rum  finibus.  175. 

^  Lat.  expulit.     See  above,  p.  1*^  Lat.  implorantes. 

145,  n.  6.  1"  MS.  ffaet. 

■^  Lat.  murum.  ^^  Lat.  provincice. 

8  See  184.  a.  ^^  Lat.  claruerat.     Is  the  Old 

9  Lat.  triumpho.     See  175.  English  to  be  translated  as  perfect 
10  A  passage  of  the  Latin   is  or  as  pluperfect?  See  scinan  (18). 


THE   INVASION   OF   BRITAIN.  147 

■geoda^  unge'Swsernesse  ^  fornumen  and  fordilgod  beon 
sceolde.  Da  wses  ^ft  h^re^  hider  s^nd/  se  wses  cumende 
on  ungewenedre^  tide,  on  heerfeste.  And  hie  sona  wiS 
hiera  feondum  gefuhton,  and  sige  hsefdon,  and  ealle  t5a, 
t5e  •Sone^  deaS®  beswlcian^  meahton,  ofer  t^one  s^  norS  5 
afliemdon,  Sa-'6e  ser,  gelce  geare/  ofer  gone  s^  hlo8edon 
and  h^rgedon.  Da  gessegdon  Romane  on  an^  Bryttum 
tSset  hie  no  ma  ne  meahten  for  hiera  gescieldnesse^  swa 
gewinnfullicum  ^^  fierdum "  sw^ncte  ^^  beon.^^  Ac  hie 
manedon^^  and^^  Iserdon^""^  gaet  hie  him  w^pnu  worhten,"  10 
and  modes  str^ngtle  nomen/^  Sset  hie  campoden  and  wig- 
stoden  hiera  feondum.^''  And  hie  him  t5a  eac  to  rsede 
and  to  frofre  fundoii  t58et  hie  gemeenelice  fsesten  ge- 
worhten  him  to  gescieldnesse  —  st^nenne  weall  rihtre  ^^ 
stage  ^^  fram  eastsae  og  westsee,  gser  Severus/^  se  casere,  15 
lu  het  dician  and  eorg weall  gewyrcean;  ■gone  man^^  nu 
to-dseg  sceawian  maeg,  eahta  fota^  bradne,  and  tw^lf 
fota^  heahne.^^      Swilce  eac  on  ^ses  sees  wearoge  to  su^- 

1  See  153.  c.  12  L^t.  fatigari. 

2  Lat.  improhitate.  ^^  Lat.  nionent.     See  above,  p. 

3  Lat.  legio.  145,  n.  6. 

*  Past  part. ;  see  113.  1*  See  194.  b.       1^  See  niman. 

5  Lat.  inopinata.  ^^  The  translation  here  is  very 

6  Lat.  evadere^  not  mortem  free,  as  is  much  of  this  selection, 
evadere.  i''  Lat.  recto  tramite  ;  see  160. 

7  See  176.  1 ;  176.  2. 

8  On  an  =  at  once;  it  is  the  ^^  This  is  wrong;  it  is  Hadrian's 
Mod.  Eng.  anon,  which  see  in  wall  that  is  meant.  See  p.  144, 
the  New  Eng.  Diet.  n.  10,  and  an  article  in  the  Quar- 

9  Lat.  defensionem.  terly  Beview  for  January,  1860. 
w  Lat.  laboriosis.  i9  See  89.  e.  20  gge  154.  c. 
11  Lat.  expeditionibus.                           21  ^  comparison   of  this  sen- 


148  THE   INVASION    OF   BRITAIN. 

d^le,  'Sanan  '5e  hie^  sciph^re^  on  becom,  torras  timbredon 
to  gebeorge^  tSses  sses.  Da,  sona  68es-Se  'Sis  fgesten  geworht 
wses,  'Sa  sealdon  hie  him  bysena'*  maniga  hii  hie  him  wsepnu 
wyrcean  sceolden,  and  hiera  feondnm  wiSstandan^;    and^ 

5  hie  'Sa  gretton,  and  him  cy^don  ^aet  hie  ntefre  ma  hie 
secean  woklon ;  and  hie  sigefeeste  ofer  s^  ferdon.  Da^ 
■Sset  Sa  Pihtas  and  Scottas  geaxedon,  Sset  hie  ham  gewitene 
waeron,  and  eac  Saet  hie  hider  no^  ^ft  ma  hie  secean  ne^ 
woldon,  Sa  wiSron   hie   Sy^  beaklran  gewordene,  and  sona 

lo  eahie  norSdSl  Sises  Ighmdes  06  Sone  weall  genomon^'* 
and^"  ges^tton.^^  WiS  Sisum  stod  on  Saem  fa3stene  ufaii- 
weardum"  se  earga'^  feSa^^  Brytta,  and  Sier  forhtiendre  ^* 
heortan^^  wunode  dieges^^  and  nihtes.^^  Da  sohton  hiera 
gewinnan  him  searwn,  and  worhton  him  hocas,  and   mid 

15  Ssem  tugon  hie  earmlice^^  adun  of  Stem  wealle;  and  hie 
weeron  sona  deade  swa  hie  eorSan  gesohton.^''  Hie  Sa 
forleton  Sone  weall  and  hiera  byrig/^  and  iiugon^'"^  onweg; 

tence  with  the  original  will  show  cognita    Scotti    Piclique    reditus 

the  translator's  power  and  free-  denegatione. 

dom.  8  See  183.       i'^  Lat.  capessunt. 

1  Ace.  phir.;  the  Britons.  ^  See  178.       i^  See  166.  1. 

2  Nom.    sing. ;   of  the  enemy.  ^'^  Lat.  segnis. 
The  Latin  is  different.                             i^  Lat.  acies. 

3  Lat.  prospectum.  1*  Lat.    trementi    corde.      See 

4  Lat.  monita.  160.  L 

5  Free  translation.  1^  See  74.      Nihtes  is  formed 
^  From  this  point  to  the  end  of       on  the  model  of  dseges,  though 

the  sentence  =  Lat.  et  valedicunt  from  a  feminine  niht. 
soriis  tanquam  ultra  non  rever-  ^^  Lat.  miserrime. 

siiri.    Quibiis  ad  sua  remeantibus.  i"  The  whole  sentence  is  very 

Probably  a.d.  418.  free.  i^  acc.  plur.  (52). 

7  From  here  to  woldon  =  Lat.  ^^  See  fleon. 


THE    INVASION    OF    BRITAIN.  149 

and  hiera  gewinnan  hie  ehton  and  slogon/  and  on  wsel 
lieldon.  Wees  ^is  gefeoht  wselgrimre  and  str^ngre  eallum^ 
t3^m  gergedonum.^  For-'Son  swa-swa  sceap^  fram  wulfum^ 
and^  wildeorum^  beo6  fornumene,  swa  ^a  earman  ceast- 
erwaran  toslitene*^  and^  fornumene*^  wseron^  fram  hiera  5 
feondum,  and  hiera  eehtum ''  beneemde,  and  to  hiuigre 
ges^tte. 

1  See  slean.  2  gee  178.  ^  Lat.  feris. 

3  Lat.  priorihus.  6  L^t.  discerpuntur. 

*  See  47.    What  is  the  modern  pkiral  ?  ^  See  177. 


VII. 


THE   PASSING   OF   CHAD.» 

(Bede,  Eccl.  Hist.,  Bk.  IV.,  Chap.  III.) 

Com^  he^  mid  ^Sel5ryt5e*  of  East^nglum ;  and  he  wses 
liiere  8egna/  and  huses,^  and  hiere  geferscipes,^  ofer  eall 
ealdormann.     Da  Godes  geleafa  ^a  weox,  and  hat  wses,  6a 


1  Chad,  Bishop  of  Lichfield, 
died  March  2,  672.  See  the 
Diet.  Nat.  liiog. 

2  In  660. 

*  (Jwini.  An  interesting  memo- 
rial of  him  was  discovered,  at  the 
end  of  the  last  century,  in  tlie  vil- 
lage of  Haddenham,  near  Ely.  It 
is  a  stone  which  appears  to  have 
formed  the  base  of  a  cross,  and 
on  one  of  its  sides  is  the  foUow^ing 
inscription  :  — 


^    LVCEM   .  TVAM 

.   OVINO 

DA   .    DEVS   .    ET   . 

REQVIE 

AMEN. 

This  is,  according  to  Palgrave, 
perhaps  one  of  the  most  vener- 
able monuments  of  Saxon  antiq- 


150 


uity.  It  long  served  as  a  horse- 
block, but  is  now  in  the  north 
aisle  of  Ely  Cathedral.  Dean 
Merivale  of  Ely  has  suggested 
that  the  words  are  meant  for  a 
pentameter  line  (the  m  in  lucem 
being  elided  even  before  a  con- 
sonant). P'or  further  particulars, 
see  Mayor  and  Lumby's  ed.  of 
Bede,  p.  429,  and  Bright's  Early 
Enrjlish  Church  History,  p.  230. 

4  St,  Etheldred,  or  Audrey  (died 
679),  whose  choice  of  the  island 
of  Ely  as  the  site  of  a  monastery 
led  to  the  erection  of  the  present 
cathedral.  She  was  the  daughter 
of  Anna,  king  (not  queen)  of  the 
East  Anglians.  What  is  the  ety- 
mology of  our  modern  word  taio- 
dry  ? 

°  Dependent  on  ealdormann. 


THE    PASSING    OF   CHAD.  151 

Sohte  he  Saet  he  sceolde  worulde '  wi8sacan,  and  tSaet 
unaswundenlice  swa  gedyde ;  and  hine  middangeardes 
Singum  to  (5on  ongierede^  and^  genacodode^  Saet  he  eall 
forlet  'Sa-Se  he  haefde,  nefne  his  anfealdne  gegierelan,  and 
com  to  Lsestinga  le,  to  (5£em  mynstre^  Sses  arwiert5an  5 
bisceopes.*  Baer  him  ^  sexe  and  adesan  on  handa ;  tac- 
node  in^  Son  (Sset  he  nalaes  to  Idelnesse,  swa.  sume  oSre, 
ac  to  gewinne,  in  t^set^  mynster  eode ;  and  Sset  selfe  eac 
swilce  mid  dsedum  gecy(5de.  And,  for-(5on-Se  he  lyt 
genyhtsumode  in  smeaunge  and  in  leornunge  haligra  10 
gewrita,  he  Sy^  ma  mid  his  handum  wann,  and'**  worhte 
(5a  (5ing  ISe  nTedt5earflicu  wijeron.  Dses^^  is  to  tacne,  (59et 
he  mid  5one  bisceop  in  Saem  foresprecenum  wicum"  for 
his  arwierSnesse  and  for  his  geornfulnesse^^  betweoh  (5a 
brot5or   wees    hsefd.      Donne  ^^  hie    inne  ^'^   hiera    leornunge   15 

1  Sec  26.     The  word  is  origi-  *  From   what    Latin    (Greek) 
nally   a    compound,    from    wer,       word  ? 

man,    and    a    hypothetical    aid,  ^  See  184.  a. 

age    (cf.    the    adj.    eald,    old).  ^  Translate,  b7j. 

From  age  of  man  to  generation  '  Why  the  accusative  ? 

=  the  people  living  at  one  time,  ^  What  is  the  form  of  this  word 

mankind ;   and  from  this  to  in-  in  Mod.  Eng.  ?     Wherein  does  it 

habited  earth,  the  transitions  are  differ  from  the  other  Mod.  Eng. 

not  violent.    The  similar  changes  word  of  the  same  form  ? 

in  the  meaning  of  the  Lat.  soicu-  ^  This   clause    added    by   the 

lum  and  Gr.  Kocr/xos,  especially  in  translator. 

Biblical  usage,  will  be  found  sug-  10  Dependent  on  tacne. 

gestive.  n  Lat.  mansione. 

2  Lat.   exuit ;    two    words    for  12  -phe  double  phrase  translates 
one.     See  162.  pro  suce  reverentia  devotionis. 

8  From     what     Latin     word  ?  i^  _  jyjigfi. 

Has    it    the    same    meaning    in  i*  Adverb ;  contrasted  with  nte, 

'  York  Minster '  ?  next  line. 


152  THE    PASSING    OF    CHAD. 

and  hiera  becrsedinge '  beeodon,  Sonne  waes  he  ute  wyrc- 
ende,  swa-hwset-swa  Searf  gesegen^  wses.^ 

Da  he  (3a  sume'^  dsege^  hwsethwugu  swilces*  ute  dyde, 
and  his  geferan  to  by  rig  to  ciricean  eodon,  swa  hie  gelom- 

5  lice  dydon,  and  se  bisceop,  ana  in  S^re  ciricean,^  0(S6e  in 
becreedinge  0(S6e  in  gebedum  geornfuU  wses,  6a  gehJerde 
he  s^mninga,  swa-swa  he  ^ft  aefter  Son  saegde,  Sa  swet- 
estan  stefne^  and  Sa  fsegerestan,  singendra  and  blis- 
siendra/  of  heofonum  oS  eorSan  astlgan.     Da  stefne^  and 

lo  8one  sang**  he  cwseS  Sset  he  merest  gehlerde  fram  east- 
suSdaele  heofones,  Sset  is  fram  heanesse  SfJere  winterlican 
sunnan  upganges;  and  Sanan  to  him  stycceraLelum^  nea- 
laecton,  oS-Saet  he^*  becom  to  Ssecean^^  Saere  ciricean  Se^^  se 
bisceop  in   wses  ;    and,   ingangende,   call  '^  gefylde,   and   in 

15  ymbhwyrfte  ymbsealde.  And  he  8a  geornlice  his  mod'^ 
aS^nede  ''^  in  Sa  Sing  Se  he  gehlerde.  Da  gehlerde  he 
^ft  swa-swa'*  healfre  tide  ftece/^  of  hrofe  Siere  ilcan 
ciricean  upastlgan  Sone  ilcan  blissesang/^  and,  Sy  ilcan 
wege^''  Se  he  iSr  com,  tip  oS  heofonas  mid  unas^cgendre  ^^ 

20   swetnesse  ^fthweorfan.'^ 

1  MS.  becraedon.  ^  Ace.  after  gehlerde. 

2  Lat.  videbantur.  ^  See  72.                  9«^  Se  sang, 

3  See  176.                 ^  See  154.  b.  10  Lat.  tectum,  for  which  1.  17 
^  Lat.  oratorio  loci.   The  monks  has  hrof. 

had  gone  to  the  church.  Cf .  below,  ^^  Governed  by  in. 

p.  153,  1.  7.  ^2  Ace.  sing. 

s  See  169.     For  this  word  see  ^^  Lat.  animum  intenderet. 

Chaucer,  Knight's  Tale  1704.  1*  Lat.  quasi.         i^  See  176. 

"  Lat.  vocem  suavissimam  can-  ^°  Lat.  Icetitice  canticum.     See 

tantium  atque  Icetantium.     What  169.                             i"  See  176.  2. 

adjective  is  concealed   in  bliss-  ^^  Lat.  ineffabili. 

(see  34)?  ^"^  L?ii.  reverti. 


THE    PASSING    OF   CHAD.  153 

Da  wunode  he  S^r  sum^  faec^  tlde,^  wundriende  and 
wafiende ;  and  mid  behygdigum  mode  Sohte  and  smeade 
hwset  t5a  (5ing  beon  sceolden.  Da  ontynde  se  bisceop  c^set 
eagSyrel  ^  t5^re  ciricean,  and  mid  his  handa  ^  slog  tacen, 
swa-swa  his  gewuna  wses  gif  hwilc  mann  ute  w^re,  Sset 
he  in  to  him  eode.  Da  eode  he  sona  in  to  him.  CwseS 
he,  se  bisceop,  him  to^:  ^'Grang  hraSe  to  ciricean,^  and 
hat^  ure  seofon  bro^or  hider  to  me  cuman  ;  and  Su  eac 
swilce  mid  wes.^"  Da  hie  (5a  to  him  comon,  (5a  manode 
he  hie  gerest  Sset  hie  betweonan  him  Sset  msegen^  lufe^ 
and  sibbe,^  and  betweon^  eallum  Godes  mannum  geornlice 
heolden ;  and  eac  swilce  6a  gesetennesse  'Sses  regollican 
Seodscipes,^*^  ^e  hie  fram  him  geleornodon,  and  on  him 
gesawon,  o8(Se  in  (5^ra  forSgeleoredra  fsedra  dgedum  o85e 
godcundum  gemete,  (Sset  hie  Sa  ungewergedre  ^^  geornful- 
nesse^^  fylgden  and  laesten.^-  J]]fter  Son  he  underSledde/^ 
and  him  ssegde  Sset  se  daeg  swI6e  neah  stode  his  for6- 
fore,^*  and  5us  cwse^  :  '' Se  leofa^^  cuma  and  se  lufiend- 
lica,^^  se-(5e  ge wunode  tire   broSor  neosian,   se   com   swilce 

1  'L?it.aliquantulu7nhorce(110).  '  Lat.  virtutem. 

■^  In  what  Mod.  Eng.  word  is  a  ^  ggg  153   j 

disguised  form  of  -lafyrel   to   be  ^  Lat.  ad  =  toward,  rather  than 

found  ?     What  is  the  etymology  among. 
of  window  9  10  Lat.  instituta  disciplinoi  regu- 

3  See  201.  1.  laris. 

4  What    is   the    etymology    of  ^  See  174 ;  160.1. 

church  ?     From   what  language  12  jjow  is  this   related  to  the 

is  it  originally  derived  ?  Mod.  Eng.  verb  last,  and  to  the 

^  See  hatan.  German  leisten  ? 

6  Imper.  sing.    When  followed  ^^  l^^.  suhjunxit. 

by  the  adj.  heel,  what  Mod.  Eng.  1*  Dependent  on  dseg. 

word  does  it  give  rise  to  ?  i^  Lat.  amahilis. 


154  THE    PASSING    OF   CHAD. 

to-claeg  to  me,  and  me  of  worulde  clegde  and  laSode. 
For-t5on  ge  'Sonne  nu  ^fthweorfaS^  to  ciricean,  and  biddacS^ 
ure  broSor  Saet  hie  mine  forSfore  mid  hiera  gebedum  and 
benum    Dryhtne   bebeoden-;    and   swilce   eac   liiera   selfra 

5   forSfore,  Ssere  tid  is  nnciiS,'^  Saet  hie  gemynen*  mid  waec- 
cenum  and  gebedum  and  mid  godum^  forecuman.^ 

Mid-Sy  he  Sa  Sas  word,  and  ^ises  gemetes  manigu,  to 
him  sprecende  wses,  and  hie,  onfangenre^  his  bletsunge,^ 
swISe  unrote  fram  him  eodon,  Sa  hwearf  se*^  ana^  ^ft^  in 

10  to  him  se-Se  Sone  heofonlican  sang  gehlerde,  and  hine 
eatSmodlice  on  eorSan  astreahte  fore  Sone  bisceop,  and 
(Sus  cwseS :  "  Min  feeder,  mot^*^  ic  6e  ohtes "  axian "  ? 
OwseS  he:  "iVxa  Sa3S ''  Su  wille."  Da  cwaeS  he:  "  Ic 
Se    la    halsie    and    bidde    for    Godes    lufe    Seet    SQ    me 

15  ges^cge*^  hwaet  se  sang  w^re  blissiendra  6e'^  ic  gehlerde, 
of  heofomim  cumendra'*  ofer  Sfis  ciricean,''^  and,  sefter 
tlde,'^  ^fthweorfendra  to  heofonum."  Andswarode  he, 
se  bisceop :  "  Gif  6u  sanges  stefne  gehlerde,  and  Sil 
heofonlic    weorod    ongeate    ofer     us     eac     cuman,    ic    Se 

20   bebeode  on  Dryhtnes  naman  t^aet  Su   8aet  naenigum   m^nn 

1  Here  are  two  independent  ^  L^t.  ipse  solus,  meaning 
verbs,  where  the  Latin  has  rever-       Owini. 

U^ntes  .  .  .  dicite.  '■*  Belongs       with       hwearf ; 

2  Lat.  commendent.  hwearf  .  .  .  ^ft  =  Lat.  rediit. 

3  What  change  of  meaning  in  ^'^  See  137. 
the  modern  word  uncouth  ?  How  ^i  See  156. 
related  to  the  ancient  meaning  ?  12  gg^  194.  6. 

*  See  134.  ^^  Refers  to  sang. 

s  According     to     the     Latin,  1*  Belongs  to  blissiendra. 

weorcuin  should  be  supplied.  ^^  Lat.  oratorium.     See  above, 

^  Dependent  on  gemynen.  p.  152,  n.  5. 

'  See  167.  ^*'  Lat.  tempus. 


THE    PASSING    OF   CHAD.  155 

cy6e^  ne'  s^cge^  ser  minre  forSfore.  Ic  6e  soSlice  s^cge 
Saette  t5aet  waeron^  ^ngla  gastas  Se  t^ser  comon,  Sa  me  to 
6sem  heofonlicum  medum  clegdon  and  lat^edon  Sa  ic  simle 
lufode  and  wilnode.  And,  sefter  seofon  dagum,  hie  ^ft- 
hweorfende^  and  cumende^  me  geheton,  and  me  Sonne 
mid  him  laedan  woldon." 

Dset  wses  swa  soSlice  mid  deede  gefylled  swa  him  to* 
cweden  wses.  Da  waes  he  sona  gehrinen  llchamlicre^ 
untrymnesse,^  and  seo^  daeghw^mlice  weox  and  h^figode; 
and  5a,  (5y  seofo^an  dsege,^  swa  him  gehaten  wses,  sefter- 
5on-6e  his  fort5fore  getrymede^  mid  onfangennesse  t^ses 
Dryhtenlican  iTchaman  and  blodes,  [Ssette^]  seo  halge 
sawl  wses  onliesed  fram  Sses  lichaman  h^fignessum,^"  and 
mid  ^ngla  hitteowdome"  and  geferscipe,  swa  riht^^  is  to 
gellefanne,  Sa  ecean  gefean  and  5a  heofonlican  eadig- 
nesse^^  gestah  and  gesohte.  Is  Sset  hwilc"  wundor  6eah- 
Se  he  gone  dseg  his  deaSes,  o55e  ma/^  Sone  Dryhtnes 
daeg,  bllSe  gesawe,  Sone  he  simle  sorgiende  bad  oS-Sset 
he  come  ? 

^  Lat,  dicas.  ^  Dem.   pron.     Translate    by 

2  See  189.  3.  that. 

3  These     translate     the     Lat.  "^  See  176. 

future    part,   redituros.      Supply  ^  Supply  he  as  the  subject. 

would  be  in  translation,  or  would  ^  The  MS.  has  ffaette,  but  the 

with  the  finite  verb.     The  future  sense  does  not  require  it. 

participle  of  the  following  clause,  lo  Lat.  ergastulo. 

adducturos^    is    translated    by    a  i^  See  33  (lad-). 

finite  verb.  12  L^t.  fas. 

*  Governs  him,  or  may  be  re-  ^^  Ace.  plur. 

garded  as  belonging  to  the  follow-  1*  Translate,  any. 

ing  verb  (201.  1).  ^^  Lat.  potius. 

^See  174:  160.  1. 


VIII. 
THE   DANGERS   OF   GREATNESS. 

(From  Wulfstan's  Homilies,  No.  49.) 

[Wulfstau  —  also  known  by  his  Latinized  name,  Lupus  —  was  Bishop  of 
Worcester  and  Archbishop  of  York  from  1002  to  1023.  This  homily  is  one 
of  those  attributed  to  him,  but,  according  to  Napier,  with  insufficient 
reason,  as  a  portion  of  it  is  found  in  the  Blickling  Homilies,  the  manu- 
script of  which  bears  the  date  of  1)71.] 

^ghwilc  heah  ar,  her  on  worulde,  biS  mid  frecnessum^ 
ymbseakP;  efne  swa^  (5a  woiuldgeSyiigSa  beo5  maran,  swa 
tSa  frecnessa  beoS  swiSran.  Swa  we  magon,  be  t5;Jem,  t5a 
bysena  oncnawan  and  ongietau.''  Daet  treow,  'Sonne,  Se 
5  wiexS^  on  Ssem  wudubearwe,  Saet^  hit  hlTfaS  iip  ofer  eall 
t5a  oSru  treowu  and  brijet^*  hit/  t5onne  s^mninga  storm^ 
gest^nt,  and  se  stranga  wind,^  Sonne  ^°  biS  hit  swISlicor 
gew£eged  and  gesw^nged  Sonne  se  oSer  wudu."  Swa  biS 
eac    gelTce    be    Ssem    heaclifum    and    torrura/^   'Sonne    hie 

1  See  144.            ^  gee  114.  lo  Frequently  the  second  cor- 

3  Swa  .  .  .  maran,  swa  .  .  .  relative,  in  such  pairs  as  ffonne 
sw^iffran  =  the  greater,  the  fiercer.  .  .  .  safonne,  Sfa  .  .  .  aCa,  need  not 
Note  the  tendency  to  antithesis.  be   translated  ;    it   is   frequently 

4  Observe  the  redundancy.  followed  by  an  inverted  order, 
^  See  weaxan.  ^  =  so  that.  as  here,  the  verb  preceding  its 
6a  See  braidan  (34).  subject.     See  202. 

7  See  184.  h.  "  Se  offer  wudu  =  the  rest  of 

8  Note  the  alliteration.  the  forest,  not  the  other  inood. 

9  Second  subject  of  gest^nt.  12  Probably  here  =  crag. 

156 


THE   DANGERS   OF   GREATNESS. 


157 


hlifiaS  feorr  up  ofer  Sa  0(Sre^  eort^an,  hie  Sonne  s^mninga 
feallan  onginnatS,^  and  full  Searlice  hreosan^  to  eorSan. 
Swilce^  eac  be  Ssem  heagum^  muntum  and  dtinum,^  t5a- 
Se  heah  standa^S  ofer  ealne  middangeard,  Sa-hwseSre  wite 
habbaS  Sses  ealdordomes,  (5aet  hie  beoS  geneahhe  mid  5 
heof onf yre '^  geSreade   and   geSrseste,   and   mid   liegum    ge- 


1  See  p.  156,  n.  12. 

2  This  resembles  the  use  of  gin 
in  Chaucer,  almost  as  an  auxiliary 
tense-sign,  like  do  in  Mod.  Eng., 
the  latter  not  being  thus  used  in 
OE.  In  Chaucer  it  usually  occurs 
as  the  preterit  gan^  e.g.  in  the 
Clerk's  Tale,  392  :  "til  the  sonne 
gan  descende."*  See  Lounsbury's 
History  of  the  English  Language. 
An  interesting  parallel  is  to  be 
found  in  New  Testament  Greek, 
as,  for  example,  Acts  1.  1  :  "  The 
former  treatise  I  made,  O  The- 
ophilus,  concerning  all  that  Jesus 
began  (-^p^aTo)  both  to  do  and  to 
teach."  According  to  Thayer, 
however  (Greek-English  Lexicon 
of  the  New  Testament),  there  is 
in  its  employment  always  a  sense 
of  beginning,  in  its  proper  mean- 
ing. 

3  Dependent,  like  feallan,  on 
onginnatS'.  Give  the  ind.  pret. 
plur. 

4  It  would  be  interesting  to 
know  from  what  literary  source 
these  illustrations  are  ultimately 
derived.      They    remind    one    of 


Shakespeare  (Rich.  HI.,  1.  3. 
259-260):  — 

They  that  stand  high  have  many 
blasts  to  shake  them  ; 

And  if  they  fall,  they  dash  them- 
selves to  pieces. 

Cf.  also  3  Hen.  F/.,  5.  2.  11-15. 
No  doubt  many  Elizabethan  par- 
allels could  be  found ;  I  have 
noted  in  Chapman,  Byron''s  Con- 
spiracy, Act  3,  Scene  1  (p.  232 
of  Shepherd's  ed.),  and  Byron''s 
Tragedy,  Act  5,  Scene  1  (lb., 
p.  272).  Perhaps  the  Eliza- 
bethans may  have  derived  them 
from  Seneca;  cf.  the  Chorus  in 
Act  4  of  the  Hippolytus,  vv. 
112.3-1143  ;  Hercules  Fur  ens 
201  ;  (Edipus  8-11.  Seneca 
may  have  caught  a  suggestion 
from  Sophocles,  though  the  par- 
allel is  somewhat  remote ;  see 
the  latter's  Antigone,  vv.  712- 
717,  and  Horace,  C.  II.  10. 

6  See  58.  1. 

6  Redundant.  What  is  dun  in 
Mod.  Eng.  (24)  ?  Whence  is  the 
adverb  doicn  derived  ? 

■^  Note  the  poetical  term. 


158  THE   DANGERS   OF   GREATNESS. 

slsegene.  Swa  t5a  hean  mihta^  her  on  worulde  hreosaf^, 
and  fealla^,^  and  to  lore  weor6a^,  and  Sisse^  worulde^ 
welan  weor$at5  to  sorge,  and  ^as  eorSlican  wundor 
weor6at5  to  nahte.* 

Deah  we  ^isse  worulde  wl^nca^  tilien^  swit5e,  and  in 
wuldre^  sclnen^  swi^e;  t5eah  we  us  gescierpen^  mid  ^y 
readestan  godw^bbe,^  and  gefrsetwien^  mid^  Sy  beorht- 
estan  golde,^  and  mid^  Seem  deorwierSestum  gimmum^ 
utan  ymbhon^;  hwaj^re^  we  sculon  on  nearonesse  ^nde^ 
gebidan.  Deah-t5e  ^a  mihtigestan  and  5a  ricestan  haten^ 
him^^  r^ste  gewyrcean  of  marmanstane/^  and  mid  gold- 
frgetwum  and  mid  gimcynnum  eall  ast^ned,  and  mid 
seolfrenum  ruwum  and  godw^bbe  eall  oferwrigen,  and 
mid  deorwier^um  wyrtgem^ngnessum  eall  gestreded/^  and 
mid  goldleafum  gestreowod  ymbutan,  hwseSre^  se  bitera 
deaS  Sait  todiSleS  eall.  Donne  biS  seo  gl^ng  agoten,^^  and 
se  5rym  tobrocen,  and  Sa  gimmas  toglidene,  and  (Saet 
gold  tosceacen,  and  5a  llchaman  tohrorene"  and  to  dust^^ 
gewordene. 

1  This  suggests   Seneca   (CEdi-  ^  This  word  might  be  omitted 
pus^  Act  1,  V.  11):  —                             in  translation  ;  see  p,  156,  n.  10, 
Imperia  sic  excelsa  Fortunae  obja-  ^  Object  of  gebidan. 

cent.  10  See  184.  a. 

2  Pleonastic.  ii  Which  part  of  this  word  is 

3  Genitive,  dependent       on       native,  and  which  foreign  ? 
welan.  i^  An  instance  of  a  strong  verb 

4  Cf.  Mod,  Eng.  come  to  naught.       (104 ;  cf .  28)  which  has  already 
^  Note  the  alliteration.  become  weak  in  OE. 

6  In  what  mood  and  tense  are  ^^  Note  the  parallelism  and  the 

these  verbs,  and  why  ?  enumeration. 

■*  Mid  governs  both  the  dative  i*  From  what  verb  (37)? 

and  the  instrumental  (175).  ^^  See  24. 


IX. 
DUTIES   OF   THE   RICH   TOWARD   THE   POOR. 

(From  the  same  Homily  as  the  last.) 

Se  Htelend  cwseS  to  t5eem  wlancan^:  ''For  hwy  waere 
t5u  swa  fsesthafol  ininra  goda,  8e  ic  ^e  sealde  ?  To 
hwon^  receleasodest  M  t^gere  giefe,  'Se  ic  6e  geaf  ?  Ic  ^e 
nil  afierre  ^  f  ram  niTnre  s^lene,  Se  ic  Se  f orgeaf ;  ^onne 
bist^  Su  wgedla  on  woruldlife.  For  liwoii^  noldest''  Sti 
geS^ncean  Sset  ic  wille^  forgieldan  segliwilcum  m^nii  aiie 
gode  dted,  Se  for  minum  naman  mann  gedeS  ?  Mid 
hundteontigum  ic  hit  him  forgielde,^  swa  hit  is  on 
mlnnm  godspelle  gecweden  and  gessed,*^  '  Swa-hwset-swa^ 
ge  s^UaS  anum  of  minum  Siiem  Igestum,^  ge  hit  simle  me 
s^llaS,^  and  ic  eow  wiS^*^  Saem  ges^lle^  ecne  dream ^^  on 
heofonum.' 

1  From  what  OE.  word  is  the  ^  Pleonastic. 

Mod.  Eng.  rich  derived  (see  Skeat,  ^  What  portion  of  this  is  lost, 

Prin.^  p.  61)?     From  what  OE.  and  how  is  it  replaced,  in  the 

meaning  is  the  modern  significa-  Mod.  Eng.  ichatsoever  9 
tion  derived  ?  8  ggg  gg 

2  Note  Wulf Stan's  use  of  to  ^  Cf.  the  form  of  this  sentence 
hwon,  for  hwon,  in  the  sense  with  that  on  p.  135,  1.  14. 

of  why.     See  88.  io  =  in  return  for.    How  is  this 

3  See  188.  *  See  139.  to  be  reconciled  with  other  senses 

''  Why  should  not  the  preterit       of  wW  ? 

be  used  here  ?  n  Not  dream,  but  joy,  bliss. 

159 


160        DUTIES    OF   THE   RICH   TOWARD   THE   POOR. 

Dti  mann,  to  hwon  eart  M  me  swa  ungeSancfull  minra^ 
giefena  ?  Hwset !  ic  cSe  gesceop  and  gellffseste,  and  aeg- 
hwset^  •Sses  6e  '6u  hsefst^  ic  6e  sealde.  Mm  is  eall  tSset 
^u    hsefst,   and    t5In    nis    nan   wiht."*      Ic    hit    eall    afierre 

5  fram  t3e;  t$u  leofa^  btitan  me,  gif  Sti  msege.^  De  ic  hit 
sealde,  to'  ^on^  ^set'  M  hit  sceoldest ^- Searf uni  dgelan.  Ic 
sw^rie  t5urh  me*  selfne  Saet  ic  eom  se  ilea  God  Se  t5one 
weligan  and  t5one  heanan  geworhte  mid  minum  handum. 
Deet^  ic  wolde,  Sset  tu.  mine  Searfan  feddest,'-  ^onne  hie 

10  wgeron  be  biddende  minra^'^  goda,^°  and  6u  him  simle 
tKe"  forwierndest.  For  hwon  noldest  M  hit'-*  geft^ncean, 
gif  till  him  mildheortnesse  on  gecySdest,^-  Sset  Sii  ne 
sceoldest^^  ^ses^^  nan  ^ing  forleosan,  ISe^'^  6u  him  dydest, 
ne    me    on   t5aere    s^lene    abelgan    mines  ^^    agnes  ^^  ?      To 

15  hwon  agnodest  M  ^e  anum  «aet  ic  inc^^  baem^^  sealde? 
To  hwon  feddest  611  -Se  senne  of  t^eem  ^e  ic  inc^^  btem^^ 
gesceop  to'*  welan,  and  to'*  wiste,  and  to'*  feorhn^re  ? 
To  hwon  heolde''"*  M  hit  t5e  anum  and  t5Inum  bearnum, 
Saet  meahte   manigum   genyhtsumian^?      Unle(5e   'Se  wses 

1  See  155.  10  See  156.  b. 

2  See  89.  c.  ^  See  121.  "  Not  to  be  confounded  with 
•*  In  what  two  Mod.  Eng.  words       tide.     See  156.  j. 

does  wiht  appear  ?     From  what  12  Optative  more  regular. 

OE.  forms  are  aught  and  naiujht  i^  See  154.  a. 

derived  ?  1*  Refers     to     its     antecedent 

5  See  122  and  198.  ffaes. 

6  =  canst,  not  mayst  (135).  1°  Dependent  on  s^lene. 

■^  =  in  order  that.  i^  Note  this  rare  dual  (81). 

8  What  has  this  accusative  be-  i"  See  79. 
come  in  Mod.  Eng.  ?  i^  =  for,  as. 

9  Anticipative  of  tlie  following  ^^  From  what  infinitive  ? 
noun-clause.  20  xhe  sense  is  pluperfect. 


DUTIES    OF    THE   RICH    TOWABD   THE   POOR.        161 

tSset  tSu  hit  eall  ne  meahtest  gefsestnian,  ne  mid  inseglum 
beclysan.  Wenst  ^u  tSaet  hit^  ^m  sle  tSaet  seo  eor6e  6e 
forf^bringS  ?  Heo^  6e  grewS,^  and  blew(5/  and  s^d  I'M,* 
and  andlifan  bringS.  Ic  nti  afierre  minne  fultum  fram 
tSe;  hafa^  6u  set^  t5inum  gewinne  t5aet  6u  nisege,  and  aet*' 
(5Inuin  geswince.  Ic  Se^  setbrede^  mine  renas,^  Sset  hie 
8inre  eor^an^  ne  rlnen.^'^  Ic  afierre  fram  ^e  mine  mild- 
heortnesse,  and  ($onne  biS  sona  gecySed  Sin  iermSu,  and 
aetiewed. 

Gif  M  wene^^  'Sset  hit  t5in  bocland^^  sle  t^set  M  on 
eardast,  and  on  agne  seht^^  geseald,  hit  t5onne  wseron^'* 
mine  wseteru,  '6a-Se  on  heofonum  wseron,  Sonne  ic  mine 
giefe  eorSwarum  d^lde.  Gif  6u  miht  haebbe,"  deel  renas 
ofer  ^Ine  eort^an.  Gif  '5u  Strang  sle,  s^le  w^stmas  t5inre 
eor6an.  Ic  ahierde  mine  sunnan,  and  heo  gebierht;  Sonne 
forbaerntS^'  heo  ealle  Sine  aeceras,  and  t^onne  bist^^  Su  dsel- 
leas^^  mines  renes/''  and  t5e  Sonne  biS^^  Sin  eorSe  idel  and 
unnyt  goda^^  gehwilces.^^  Mine  Searfan  libbaS  be  me;  gii 
Sii  msege/^  wuna  btitan  me.  Mine  Searfan  me  ealne^  weg* 
habbaS,  and  ic  hie  neefre  ne  forlgete." 

1  Anticipative  of  fSseit.  erty.     The  term  is  explained  by 

2  Refers  to  what  ?  the  following  clause. 

3  See  109.  i^  See  172.  1. 

4  See  Isedan.  i4  See  189.  3. 

s  See  121  and  198.  i^  Are  these  presents  or  futures? 

6  =  from;  of.  at  one's  hands.  i^  See  146. 

7  See  164.  8  See  28.  i^  See  165.  a. 

9  See  161.  -10  MS.  rinaff.  ^^  Dependent    on    gehwilces. 

11  See  196.  d.  See  154.  h. 

12  Land  held  by  boc  or  char-  i^  Dependent  on  idel  and 
ter, /ree^oZd!  es^«^e  ;  distinguished  unnyt.     See  155.  a. 

from  folcland,  communal  prop-  20  See  170.     Mod.  Eng.  alway. 


ALFRED'S  PREFACE  TO  BOETHIUS. 

(Prefixed  to  his  translation.) 

-Alfred  cyning  wses  wealhstocP  t^isse  bee,  and  hie  of 
Boclaedene^  on  Englisc  w^nde,  swa  heo  nu  is  gedon. 
Hwilum  he  s^tte  word  be  worde,  hwllum  andgiet  of 
andgiete,  swarswa  he  hit  •8a  sweotolost  and  andgiet- 
fullicost  ger^ccean  nieahte  for  Ssem  mislicuui  and  manig- 
fealdum  woruldbisgum  Se  hine  oft  ^egSer  ge  on  mode 
ge  on  lichaman  bisgedon.  Da  bisga^  us  sind  swlt5e 
earfoSrlrae  tSe  on  his  dagum  on  t5a  ricu  becomon  ^e  he 
underfangen  haefde,  and  8eah,  6a  he  6as  boo  hsefde 
geleornod,  and  of  Laedene  to  Engliscum  spelle  gew^nd, 
•Sil  geworhte  he  hie  ^ft  to  leoSe,  swa-swa  heo  nu  gedon 
is.  And  nu  bitt*  and  for  Godes  naman  halsaS  iJelcne 
Seera  t5e  6as  boc  raedan  lyste,^  Saet  he  for  hine  gebidde, 
and  liim  ne  wite  gif  he^  hit  rihtlicor  ongiete  t5onne  he^ 
meahte ;  for-Sam-'Se  tele  mann  sceal  be  his  andgietes 
maeSe,  and  be  his  gemettan,  sprecan  ^aet  he  spric6,  and 
don  t^set-^set  he  deS. 

1  Wealh-  signifies  foreign  (see  2  Perhaps  originally  in  contrast 

walnut),  and  sometimes  servant,  to  the  Latin  spoken  in  Britain. 

orig.  Celtic,  Celt  (cf.  Wales,  Welsh,  ^  See  51.  a. 

Cornwall),  from  Volcce,  the  name  *  Supply  he.  ^  See  190. 

of  a  Celtic  tribe  (Csesar,   Gallic  ^  The  reader. 

War,  Bk.  VII.).  ^  Alfred. 

162 


XL 
A   PRAYEE   OF   KING   ALFEED. 

(From  the  end  of  his  translation  of  Boethius.) 

Dryhten/  aelmihtiga  God/  Wyrhta  and  Wealdend  ealra 
gesceafta,  ic  bidde  t5e  for  ^inre  miclan  mildheortnesse, 
and  for  'Ssere  halgan  rode  tacne,^  and  for  Sanctse  Marian 
msegShade,  and  for  Sancti  Michaeles  gehiersumnesse,  and 
for  ealra  '6inra  halgena^  lufan  and  hiera  earnungum,  Sset  5 
M  me  gewissie'^  b^t  tSonne  ic  aworhte  to  ^e;  and  gewissa 
me  to  t^inum  willan,  and  to  minre  sawle  Searfe/  b^t  t^onne 
ic  self  cunne^;  and  gestaSela  mm  mod  to  Sinum  willan  and 
to  minre  sawle  ^earfe ;  and  gestranga  me  wiS  ^aes  deofles^ 
costnungum;  and  afierr  fram  me  $a  fulan  galnesse  and  selce  10 
unrihtwisnesse ;  and  gescield  me  wilS  minum  wiSerwinnum, 
gesewenlicum  and  ungesewenlicum ;  and  tsec  me  Sinne  wil- 
lan'' to  wyrceanne;  ^aet  ic  msege^  6e  inweardlice  lufian  to- 
foran  eallum  t^ingum,  mid  claenum  get5ance  and  mid  claenum 
iTchaman.  For-'Son-tSe  Sti  eart  min  Scieppend,^  and  min  15 
Allesend,  mm  Fultum,  min  Frofor,  mm  Treownes,  and 
mm  Tohopa.  Sie  ^e  lof  and  wuldor  nti  and  a  a  a,  to 
worulde  butan  seghwilcum  ^nde.     Amen. 

1  See  152.  *  See  194.  b.  "^  Object  of  wyrceanne. 

2  Governed  by  for.        ^  See  166.  ^  gee  196.  d. 

3  See  153.  c.  ^  Optative  (130).       »  See  150. 


163 


XII. 
APOLLONIUS   OF   TYRE. 

[The  Old  English  version  of  the  Romance  of  Apollonius,  from  which  our 
extract  is  taken,  belongs,  according  to  Wiilker,  to  the  second  third  of  the 
eleventh  century ;  according  to  Ebert,  to  its  beginning ;  and  according  to 
Riese,  most  probably  to  the  tenth.  The  original  story  was  almost  certainly 
written  in  Greek,  probably  in  the  third  century  of  our  era,  and  by  an  imi- 
tator of  Xenophon  of  Ephesus.  This  is  lost,  and  is  only  represented  by  a 
Latin  version,  which  may  have  been  made  in  the  same  century,  and  in 
any  case  not  later  than  the  sixth,  by  a  writer  of  no  great  education, 
who  introduced  Christian  terms  and  conceptions,  added  some  things,  and 
retrenched  others.  Over  a  hundred  manuscripts  of  this  Latin  version  are 
known,  of  which  twelve  are  in  England.  Scarcely  any  two  manuscripts 
agree,  and  the  discrepancies  are  often  great ;  still,  for  convenience,  they 
have  l)een  grouped  into  three  main  classes.  To  the  third  of  these,  which 
is  not  the  equal  of  the  other  two,  the  immediate  original  of  our  version 
must  have  belonged,  resembling  most  nearly  a  manuscript  of  the  Bodleian 
Library  (Laud  H.  ;i9),  and,  at  the  next  further  remove,  one  of  the  British 
Museum  (Sloan.  1()19). 

The  popularity  of  the  romance  is  attested  not  only  by  the  number  and 
variety  of  the  Latin  manuscripts,  but  no  less  by  the  mediaeval  and  subse- 
quent translations  into  almost  every  modern  language.  Thus,  for  example, 
there  is  in  Old  French  a  romance  of  Jourdaln  de  Blaie,  the  scene  being 
laid  in  the  time  of  Charlemagne,  and  the  temple  of  Diana  being  converted 
into  a  nunnery. 

An  abridgment  of  the  Latin  version  found  its  way  into  the  Gesta  Roma- 
norum,  as  No.  153  of  that  collection.  In  the  twelfth  century  the  story  was 
incorporated  into  the  Pantheon  of  Godfrey  of  Viterbo,  whence  it  was  turned 
into  English  verse  by  Gower,  in  his  Confessio  Amantis  (Pauli's  edition  3. 
284  ff. ;  Morley's  abridgment,  in  The  Carishrooke  Library,  pp.  410-431). 
From  Gower  it  was  borrowed  by  Shakespeare,  or  whoever  was  the  author 
of  the  drama  which  passes  under  his  name,  as  the  groundwork  of  Pericles, 
Pnnce  of  Tyre ;  the  name  Pericles  being  perhaps  adapted  from  the  Pyro- 
cles  of  Sidney's  Arcadia.  The  scenes  of  Pericles  which  may  be  compared 
with  our  extract  are  the  1st,  2d,  3d,  and  5th  of  Act  II.,  and  the  3d  of  Act  V. 

The  Old  English  Apollonius  was  edited  by  Thorpe,  in  1834,  from  MS.  S. 
18. 201  of  Corpus  Christi  College,  Cambridge ;  and  to  this  edition  the  student 

1G4 


APOLLONIUS    OF   TYKE.  165 

is  referred  for  the  spelling  and  punctuation  of  the  original.  It  is  only  a 
fragment,  breaking  off  in  the  midst,  and  recommencing  near  the  end  of 
the  tale,  as  we  have  indicated  below. 

Further  information  will  be  found  in  Rohde,  Der  griechische  Roman, 
Leipzig,  1876;  Teuffel,  History  of  Latin  Literature,  §  489;  Hagen,  Der 
Roman  vom  Konig  Apollonius  von  Tyrus,  Berlin,  1878  {Saminlung  gemein- 
verstdndlicher  wissenschaftlicher  Vortriige,  Serie  13,  Nr.  303,  pp.  561-592) ; 
Warton,  History  of  English  Poetry  2.  302-303;  and  Riese's  edition  of  the 
Latin,  which  is  the  standard  (Leipzig,  1871),  and  costs  but  a  trifle. 

Besides  the  Tudor  versions,  there  is  an  English  translation  in  Thorpe's 
edition,  and  another  —  of  course  not  adhering  closely  to  our  text  —  in  Swan's 
rendering  of  the  Gesta  Romanorum  (Bohn  Library)]. 

The  SMpivreck. 

Apollonius^  hie  baed  ealle  gretan,-  and  on  scip  astah.^ 
Mid-Sy-Se  hie  ongunnon  'Sa  rowan/  and  hie  forSweard 
waeron  on  hiera  weg,  'Sa  wearS  ^sere  see  smyltnes  aw^nd 
faeringa  betweox  twam  tidum,^  and  wearS  miclu  hreohnes 
aweaht,  swa  ^set  seo  sae  cnysede  '6a  heofonlican  tunglu,^ 
and  ^set  gewealc  t^tera  y6a  hwa^erode  mid  windum.  D^r- 
to-eacan  comon  eastnorSerne  windas,  and  se  angrislica 
stiSwesterna   wind   him   ongean    stod/   and   6aet   scip    eall 

1  Apollonius,  King  of  Tyre,  has  Cyrene,  on  the  African  coast.     It 

fled  from  the  cruelty  and  treach-  is  at  this  point  that  our  selection 

ery  of  Antiochus,  King  of  Anti-  begins. 

och,  on  a  richly  freighted  vessel,  2  Observe  the   ellipsis,  —  hade 
and  taken  refuge  with  the   citi-  greet  them  all  —  where  the  sub- 
zens  of  Tarsus.    Finding  the  citi-  ject   of   the    infinitive    is    to    be 
zens  in  extremity,  on  account  of  a  supplied, 
prevalent  famine,  he  relieves  their  ^  gee  28.          *  See  199.  h. 
necessities  by  liberal  gifts,  where-  ^  L^t.  intra  duas  horas  diei. 
upon  they  erect  a  statue  of  him  «  This  seems  to  be  a  reminis- 
in   the  market-place.     But  not-  cence  of  Virgil,  ^neid  I.  103. 
withstanding  the  gratitude  of  his  "^  Lat. (verse):  Hinc Notus,hinc 
beneficiaries,  he  finds  it  expedient  Boreas^  hinc  horridus  Afi-icus  in- 
to leave  them,  and  embarks  for  stat. 


166  APOLLONIUS    OF   TYRE. 

tobserst  on  Sisse  ^geslican  hreohnesse.  Apollonius^  gefSran 
ealle  forwurdon^  to  deaSe,  and  Apollonius  ana^  becom  mid 
sunde  to  Pentapolim  t^sem  Cyreniscan  lande,  and  Sser  tipeode 
on  ^sem  strande.  Da  stod  he  nacod  on  t5seni  strande,  and 
5  beheold  6a  S£e,  and  cwaeS : 

"  Eala !  •&u  s^  Neptune  !  manna  bereafiend^''  and  imsc^S- 
t^igra  beswicend^*!  6u  eart  wselhreowra  t5onne  Antiochus  se 
cyning.  For  minum  Singum  'Su  geheolde  Sas  wselhreow- 
nesse,  'Saet  ic  6urh  Se  gewurde''  wsedla^  and  tSearfa,  and 
10  Saet  se  wgelhreowa  cyning  me  t5y  ie(5^  fordon  meahte. 
Hwider  mseg  ic  nu  faran  ?  Hwaes  ^  maeg  ic  biddan  ? 
065e  hwa  giefS^  Seem  uncuSan^  llfes  fultum?" 

Apollonius  and  the  Fisherman. 

Mid-Sy-(5e  he  t5as   6ing  wses   sprecende   to   him   selfum, 

6a   fseringa   geseah    he    sumne    fiscere^"  gan,   to    S^m    he 

15   beseah,  and  6us  sarlice  cwaeS":   "Gemiltsa  me/^  6u  ealda 

mann,   sle"  Sset   6u   sTe.      Gemiltsa   me   nacodum   forlid- 

enura.      Naes^''  na  ©f  earmlicum^  byrdum^^  geboren;  and, 

1  The  Latin  endings  of  proper  ^  See  55  and  181. 
nouns  are  not  always  a  guide  to           1°  See  169. 

the  case  (54).    Here  we  have  the  11  In  the  original,  he  falls  at 

genitive.  the  fisherman's  feet,  and  bursts 

2  See  forweoraCan.  into  tears.      What   reason   may 

3  See  79.  ^a  gee  43.  6.  have  led  to  the  change  ? 

4  MS.  gewurffe.  12  gee  164.  g. 

5  See  150.  i3  gee  193.  c. 

«  MS.  ea»e.     See  178.  1*  See  189,  note. 

■^  See  156.  h.  ^^  Lat.  humilihus. 

8  Zupitza's  emendation  for  MS.  ^^  Plural,  where  we  should  ex- 

gif.  pect  the  singular. 


APOLLONIUS    OF   TYRE.  167 

tJaes-'Se  ^  8u  geare  forwite  liwiem  Su  gemiltsie,^  ic  eom 
Apollonius,  se  Tyrisca^  ealdormann.'* 

Da,  sona  swa  se  fiscere^  geseah  'Saet  se  geonga  mann 
set  his  fotuni  Iseg,  he  mid '  mildheortnesse  hine  upahof, 
and  Isedde  hine  mid  him  to  his  hiise,  and  ^a  estas^  him 
beforan  l^gde  6e  he  him  to  beodanne  hsefde.  Da  glet  he 
wolde,  be  his  mihte,  maran  arfsestnesse '^  him  gecyt5an; 
toslat  Sa  his  wsefels  on  twa,  and  sealde  Apollonie  t5one 
healfan  dael,  '6us  cweSende :  "  Nim  t^set  ic  Se  to  s^Uanne 
haebbe,  and  ga  into  'Saere  ceastre.  Wen^  is^  Saet  Su 
gemete^  sumne  Saet^^  Se  gemiltsie.^*^  Gif  Su  ne  finde^^ 
nsenne  Se  Se  gemiltsian  wille,  w^nd  Sonne  hider  ongean, 
and  genyhtsumien^^  unc^^  b^m  mine  lytlan"  sehta;  far  Se^^ 
on  fiscnoS^^  mid  me.  Deah-hwaeSre  ic  myngie  Se,  gif  Sii,  ful- 
tumiendum^''  Gode,  becymst  t5  Slnum  iJerran  weorSmynte, 
Saet  Sti  ne  forgiete^^  minne  Searfendlican  gegierelan." 

Da  cwaeS  Apollonius:  "Gif  ic  Se^^  ne  geS^nce  Sonne  me 
b^t  biS,^°  ic  wysce^^  Saet  ic  ^ft  forlidennesse  gefare,  and 
Slnne^^  gelican^^  ^ft  ne  gemete." 

1  Here  =  in  order  that.     See  12  g^e  193.  a. 

157.  1.  ^-3  Note  the  rare  dual  (81). 

2  See  195.  i4  See  55.  i^  gee  184.  a. 

3  Proper  adjectives  in  -isc,  fol-  i^  gge  172.  1. 

lowing  the  Latin,  are  often  used  i'^  See  167.     Gode  is  supplied ; 

where  we   employ  the    genitive.  the  Latin  has  deo  favente. 

Translate,  of  Tyre.  is  gee  194.  b.          i^  Ace. 

*  Lat.  princeps.         ^  See  143.  20  Present  or  future  ?      Could 

6  Lat.  epulas.  Mod.  Eng.  is  be  used  to  trans- 

'  MS.  faestnesse.    Lat.  pietati.  late  it  ? 

8  Lat.  forsitan.        9  See  194.  a.  21  gee  30,  and  194.  h. 

9a  Neut.  for  masc. !  10  See  195.  22  Mod.  Eng.  still  has  thy  like. 

11  See  196.  d.  See  181. 


1G8  APOLLONIUS    OF   TYRE. 

The  Incidents  in  the  Gymnasium. 

^fter  ^isuni   wordum   he   eode    on   t5one   weg    6e    him 

geteeht^  wses,  o^-t^aet  he  becom  to  Seere  ceastre  geate,  and 

Sger  ineode.     Mid-Sy-t5e  he  tSohte  hwone  he  biddan  meahte 

llfes  fultumes,^  t5a  geseah  he  senne  nacodne  cnapan  geond 

5   'Sa  strsete  iernan.     Se  waes  mid^  ^le  gesmierwed,  and  mid 

scietan  begyrd,  and  bser  geongra'*  manna''  plegan"*  on  handa, 

to   tSsem   bset5st^de^  belimpende.^      And   cleopode''  micelre 

stefne,^  and  cvvseS:  "Gehlere,^  ge  ceasterwaran  ^^ !     Gehiere, 

ge  ^lt5eodige/^  frige  and  t5eowe,  se'Sele  and  unseSele  !      Se 

lo   bseSst^de  is  open." 

Da-Sa  Apollonins  t5^et  gehierde,  he  hine  unscrydde  'Saem^^ 
healfan  sciccelse  ^e  lie  on  haefde,  and  eode  into  ^«m  t5weale.^^ 
And  mid-Sy-(5e  he  beheold  hiera  anra"  gehwilcne  on  hiera 
weorce,  he  sohte  his  gelTcan/'^  ac  he  ne  meahte  hine  ^ser 
15  findan  on  tSiSm  flocce.  Da  fteringa  com  Arcestrates,  ealre 
t^^re  tSeode^^  cyning,^^  mid  micelre  in^nige  his  manna/^  and 
ineode  on  Sset  bgeS.  Da  agan  se  cyning  plegian  wiS^^  his 
geferum  mid  t)o$ore.^     And  Apollonins  hine^^  gem^ngde,^^ 

1  See  187.  and  what  is  its  form  in  that  lan- 

2  MS.  fultum.     See  159.  b.  guage  ? 

8  See  174.  ^^  Lat.  peregrini.     See  152. 

4  Lat.  lusus  juvcnales.  12  See  162.       i^  L^^t.  lavacrum. 

s  Lat.  gymnasium.  1*  See  154.  h. 

6  Modifies  plegan.  ^^  Lat.  parem,  Eng.  peer. 

■^  See  20.  ^^  Lat.  regionis. 

8  See  160. 1.    This  word  is  the  1^  See  151. 

Chaucerian  Steven.  ^^  Lat.  famularum.    See  154.  a. 

9  See  95,  note.  i^  Why  not  mid  ? 

10  This  is  a  compound  word,  20  This   curious   word  is  very- 

formed  of  a  Latin  and  an  Eng-       rare  in  Old  English, 
lish  element.      Which  is  Latin,  21  L^t.  miscuit  se.     See  184.  b. 


APOLLONIUS   OF   TYRE.  .  169 

swa-swa  God  wolde,  on  ^ges  cyninges  plegan,  and,  iern- 
ende,  ^one  •5ot5or  gelaehte/  and,  mid  swiftre  hrsednesse 
geslaegene,^  ongean  ges^nde  to  t^sem  plegiendan  cyninge. 
Eft  lie  agean  as^nde;  he  hrsedlice  sloh,  swa  he  hine^ 
n^fre  feallan  ne  let.  Se  cyning  Sa  oncneow  ^aes  geongan  5 
snelnesse/  Sset  he  wiste^  t58et  he  nsefde  his  gellcan  on 
Seem  plegan.^  Da  cwaetS  he  to  his  geferum :  "  Gat5  eow 
heonan;  6es  cniht,  t^ses-tSe  me  6ynct5/  is  mm  gelica.'^ 

Da-'Sa  Apollonius  gehlerde  t^set  se  cyning  hine  h^rede, 
he  arn  hrsedlice,  and  genealgecte  to  ti^m  cyninge,  and  10 
mid  gelseredre^  handa^  he  swang^'^  ^one  top  mid  swa 
micelre  swiftnesse  'Sset  S^em  cyninge  wees  geSuht  swilce 
he  of  ielde  to  geoguSe  gew^nd  w£ere.  And,  sefter  t5aem, 
on  his  cynesetle  he  him  ^^  gecwemlice  ^^  Senode  ^^ ;  and, 
Sa-^a  he  uteode  of  'Ssem  beetle,  he^^  hine^^  l^dde  be  'Sgere  15 
handa,  and  him^^  t5a  siSSan  •Sanan  gew^nde,  Sses  weges^'' 
^e  he  ^r  com. 

1  See  114.  and  164. 1.    What  Mod.  Eng.  word 

2  Lat.  suhtili  velocitate  percus-       comes  from  me  fSyncfS  ? 
sam.      The   OE.  participle    is   a  .  ^  Lat.  docta. 

httle  awkward.  9  See  51.  3. 

3  The  ball.  10  Here    the    English    departs 
*  Lat.  velocitatem.                            from  the  Latin :  ceroma  fricavit 

5  See  126.  What  is  the  latest  eum  tanta  suhtilitate,  ut  de  sene 
English  quotation  that  you  can  juvenem  redderet.  Top  would 
find  for  this  word  ?  seem  to  signify  the  same  as  ffoiaCor. 

6  This  clause  is  not  very  clear.  ^  See  164.  e. 
The  Latin  has :  et  quia  sciebat  se  ^^  L^t.  gratissime. 
(i.e.   Archistrates)   in  pike   lusu           i^  See  28. 
neminem  parem  haber^e,  ad  suos  i*  Apollonius. 
aitj  famuli,   recedite ;    hie  enim  1^  Archistrates. 
juvenis,  etc.  i^  See  184.  a. 

"^  Lat.  ut  suspicor.     See  157.  1  ^^  See  157. 


170  .  APOLLONIUS   OF   TYRE. 

Da  cwae'S  se  cyning  to  his  maiinum/  sitSt5an  Apollonius 
agan^  wses :  "Ic  sw^rie  'Surh  t5a  gemsenan  hsele^  tJaet  ic 
me  nsefre  b^t  ne  bat^ode  6onne  ic  dyde*  to-dseg,  nat  ic 
t)urh^  hwilces  geonges  maunes  'Senunge.^      Da  beseah   he 

5  hine  to  anum  his  manna,  and  cwaet^ :  "  Ga,  and  gewite 
hwa3t^  se  geonga  mann  sie,  t5e  me  to-daeg  swa  wel  gehier- 
sumode." 

Se  mann  t5a  eode  sefter  Apollonio.  Mid-t5y-'(Se  he  geseah 
Saet  he^  wses  mid   horgum^  sciccelse   bewsefed,  t5a  w^nde 

[o  he  ongean  to  ^oem  cyninge,  and  cwseS :  "  Se  geonga  mann 
tSe^^  t)u  tefter  ascodest  is  forliden^^  mann.""  Da  cwaeS  se 
cyning:  *'Durh^  hwset^^  wast^^  M  'Sset?"  Se  mann  him 
andswarode,  and  cwsetJ :  "  Deah  he  hit  self  forswige,"  his 
gegierela  hine  gesweotohiS."     Da  cwset^   se   cyning :    "  Ga 

15  hrsedlice,  and  s^ge  him  tSset^*  'se  cyning  bitt  'Se  tSset  M 
cume'^'to  his  gereorde.' " 

Ajyollonius  at  the  Feast. 

Da  Apollonius  ^set  gehierde,  he  ^aim  gehiersumode,  and 
eode  for^  raid  Si5m  m^nn,  oS-t58et  he  becom  to  t^aes  cyninges 

1  Lat.  nmicos.  ^  Apollonius.       ^  Lat.  sordido. 

■■2  How  is  the  sense  of  Mod.  Eng.  ^^  Governed    by    sefter.      See 

ago  related  to  that  of  this  word  ?  87.  c  and  201.  1. 

3  This  phrase  shows  Christian  11  Lat.  navfragus. 
influence.                                                  12  j^at.  %inde. 

4  Note  this  use  of  don  to  re-  i^  gee  126.  1*  See  196.  e. 
place  a  verb  of  specific  meaning.              1°  Confusion  of  two  construc- 

5  Governs  iafenunge.  tions,  the  direct  and  the  indirect. 

6  See  28.  ^^  Lat.  ut  venias.    Translate  by 
"'  How  does  this,  as  here  used,       the   infinitive,  as  often   in   such 

differ  in  meaning  from  hwa  ?  cases. 


APOLLONIUS    OF   TYRE.  171 

healle.-^  Da  eode  se  mann  in  beforan  to  Ssem  cjminge, 
and  cwseS:  "Se  forlidena^  mann  is  cumen,  ■Se  ^u  aefter 
s^ndest^;  ac  he  ne  mseg  for  sceame  ingan  butan  scrude." 
Da  het  se  cyning  hine  sona  gescrydan  mid  weorSfullum'* 
scrude,  and  bet  hine  ingan  to  ^Sm  gereorde.  5 

Da   eode   Apollonius   in,   and   gesaet,   t^ger   him    getaeht^ 
wses,    ongean  tSone   cyning.       Da^  wearS   t^a   seo   ^enung^ 
ingeboren,   and,   sefter   ■g^em,   cynelic^   gebeorscipe.^      And   ' 
Apollonius  nan  (5ing  ne  set,  t5eah-t5e  ealle  oSre  m^nn  seton 
and    bMe    waeron.       Ac    he    beheold    t^aet    gold,    and    t58et   to 
seolfor,  and  t^a  deorwurSan^  reaf,  and  'Sa  beodas,  and  6a 
cynelican   ■genunga.^^      Da-fSa   he   t5is    eall    mid    sarnesse" 
beheold,  Sa  sset  sum  eald  and  sum^^  sefestig   ealdormann 
be   Ssem   cyninge.      Mid-'Sy-'Se   he   geseah   ^set   Apollonius 
swa  sarlice  sset,  and  eall  Sing  beheold,  and  nan  tSing  ne   15 
set,   Sa   cwseS    he   to    Saem    cyninge:    "Du^^   goda    cyning, 
efne,  Ses  mann  Se^*  Sii  swa  wel  wiS  gedest,  he  is  swiSe 
sef estfull  for  SInum  gode."      Da  cwaeS  se  cyning :    "  De  ^^ 
misSyncS;  soSlice  Ses  geonga  mann  ne  aefestaS  on  nanum 
Singum   Se   he   her  gesiehS,  ac   he   cyS^*^  Sset   hsefS'^  fela  20 

1  Lat.  ad  regem.  ^  Lat.  cena  regalis. 

2  See  55.  .  ^  gee  146. 

8  Is   this  present    or  preterit  '^^  Lat.  ministeria. 

(113)?  11  Lat.  doZore. 

4  Lat.  dignis.  12  Note  the  curious  repetition 

^  See  187.  of  sum.      The  Latin  has  senex 

6  It  has  been  suggested  that  invidus. 
the   account   of   this   feast    may  ^^  Lat.  bone  rex.     See  152. 

have  been  imitated  from  that  in  1*  Governed  by  wisac. 

Odys.  4.  71  ff.  IS  See  164. 1. 

'  Lat.  gustatio,  a  sort  of  first  16  Lat.  testatur. 

course.  ^^  See  189,  note. 


172  APOLLONIUS   OF   TYRE. 

forloren.^"  Da  beseah  Arcestrates  se  cyning  blTSum^ 
andwlitan-  to  Apollonio,  and  cwseS :  "  Du  geonga  mann, 
beo^  bllSe^  mid  us,  and  gehyhf*  on  God,  tSaet  t5u  mote 
self  to  ^tem  selran  becuman." 

Entry  of  the  Pi'incess. 

5  Mid-t5y-'Se  se  cyning  ^as  word  gecwaet^,  t5a  fseringa  (5^r 
eode  in  t5aes  cyninges  geong  dohtor,^  and  cyste  hiere 
feeder  and  Sa  ymbsittendan.^  Da'^  heo  becom  to  Apol- 
lonio,  ^a  gew^nde  heo  ongean  to  hiere  fseder,  and  cwseS : 
'•  Du   goda   cyning,  and   mm   se^  leofesta^  f seder,   hwset^° 

lo  is  6es  geonga  mann,  t5e  ongean  (Se  on  swa  weorSlicum 
setle  sitt,  mid  sarlicum"  andwlitan;  nat^^  ic  hwset  he 
besorgat5.^^ "  Da  cwteS  se  cyning:  "Leofe^*  dohtor,  "Ses 
geonga  mann  is  forliden;  and  lie  gecwemde  me  manna 
b^tst^^   on    'Saim    plegan.      For-Sam    ic    hine    gelat5ode    to 

15  (Sisum  I'lrum  gebeorscipe.  Nat  ic  hwaet  he  is,  ne  hwanan 
he  is ;  ac  gif  M  wille  witan  hwaet  he  sTe,  asca  hine, 
for-t5am  Se^^  gedafenatS^'  ■Sset  ^u  wite.^^" 

Da   eode   Sset   mseden   to   Apollonio,  and   mid   forwand- 
iendre^^  spruce   cwse^ :    "Deah   t5u   stille^  sTe   and   unrot, 

1  See  forleosan,  and  37.  ^  Lat.  optime.        ^^  Lat.  quis. 

2  Lat.  hilari  vultu.     See  174.  "  Lat.  JleUU.         12  gee  126. 
8  Lat.  ejmlare.  ^^  Lat.  dolet. 

*  Lat.  spera.     See  197.  ^*  See  55.     Lat.  dulcis. 

^  What  state  and  period  of  civ-  i^  See  66  and  154.  d.     Nom., 

ilization  is  indicated  by  the  pres-  belonging  to  he. 

ence  of  the  girl  at  the  banquet  ?  i^  See  164.  k.          i'^  Lat.  decet. 

6  See  181.                 7  See  202.  d.  is  See  194.  a. 

8  Redundant,  according  to  our  i^  Lat.  verecundo. 

conceptions.     See  152.  20  gee  59. 


APOLLONIUS   OF   TYRE.  173 

Seah^  ic  t5me  ae'Selborennesse  ^  on  Se  geseo.  Nu^  Sonne,^ 
gif  6e'*  to  h^fig  ne  Synce/  s^ge  me  Sinne  naman,  and  'Sin 
gelimp^  ar^ce  me."  Da  cwseS  Apollonius :  "Gif  M  for 
nlede^  ascast  sefter  minum  naman,  ic  s^cge  ^e,  Ic  hine 
forleas  on  sae.  Gif  t5u  wilt  mine  seSelborennesse  witan, 
wite  ^u  ^set  ic  liTe  forlet  on  Tharsum,^"  Dset  maeden 
cwseS :  "  S^ge  me  gewislicor,^  'Sset  ic  hit  msege  under- 
standan."  Apollonius  ^a  soSlice  hiere  areahte  ^^  eall " 
his  gelimp,  and  set  ^^re  sprsece^^  ^nde  him^^  feollon 
tearas  of  ^eem  eagum. 

Mid-Sy-(Se  se  cyning  Sset  geseah,  he  bew^nde  hine  'Sa 
to  t^sere  dehter,^*  and  cwsetS :  "  Leofe  dohtor,  Su  gesyn- 
godest,  mid-^y-Se^^  tSu  woldest  witan  his  naman  and  his 
gelimp.  Dti  hsefst  nu  geednlwod  his  eald  sar/''  ac  ic 
bidde  ^e  t5£et  ^u.  giefe  him  swa-hwset-swa  'Sii  wille. 
Da-'Sa  t58et  mteden  gehierde  'Sset  hiere  waes  aliefed  fram 
hiere  f seder  ^^  t^a^t^^  heo  ser  hiere  ^^  self^^  gedon  wolde,  Sa 
cwaetS  heo  to  Apollonio :    "Apolloni,  soSlice  tSti  eart  ure^; 

1  Second    correlative    =    Lat.  lo  See  114. 
tamen.      Translate  yet,   or   omit  ii  Plural. 
(201.  e).  1--2  See  153.  1. 

2  Lat.  nohilitatem.  i3  gge  161.  2. 

3  Are    these    notes    of    time  ?  i*  See  52.  2. 
The  Latin  has  nothing  similar.  i^  Lat.  dum. 

*  See  164.  I.  ^  See  196.  d.  ^^  Lat.  veteres  ei  renovasti  dolo- 

6  Lat.  casus  tuos.  Observe  the  res,  a  reminiscence  of  the  Virgil- 
general  resemblance  to  the  story  ian  (^n.  II.  3)  jiihes  renovare 
of  Dido,  in  the  ^neid.  dolorem. 

7  MS.  neode.  Lat.  necessi-  ^^  See  43.  8.  i^  =  ichat. 
talis.                                                           1^  Lat.  ipsa. 

8  See  p.  165,  n.  1.  20  Note  this  predicate  use  of  are, 

9  Lat.  apertius.  =  Lat.  noster  es  (cf.  ^n.  II.  149). 


174  APOLLONIUS   OF   TYRE. 

forlset  f)me  murcnunge^;  and,  nti^  ic  mines  f seder  ^  leafe 
hsebbe,  ic  gedo^  t5e  weligne."  Apollonius  hiere  ^ses  'San- 
code/  and  se  cyning  blissode  on  his  dohtor  welwillend- 
nesse,*'  and  hiere  to  cwsetS :  "Leofe  dohtor,  hat  f^ccean 
5  •8ine  hearpan,''  and  gecieg  (5e  to  •Sinum  friend,^  and  afiersa 
fram  t5^m  geoiigan  his  sarnesse." 

A  Lesson  in  Music. 

Da  eode  heo  iit,^  and  het  f^ccean  hiere  hearpan.  And 
sona  swa  heo  hearpian  ongann,  heo  mid  wynsumum  sange 
gem^ngde   ^aere   hearpan    sweg.       Da    ongimnon    ealle    'Sa 

lo  m^nn  liie  h^rian  on  hiere  swegcrsefte ;  aiid  Apollonius 
ana^"  swlgode.  Da  cw8et5  se  cyning:  "Apolloni,  nu  Sii 
dest"  yfele,  for-^am-?)e  ealle  m^nn  h^riaS  mine  dohtor 
on  hiere  swegcraefte,'^  and  ^u  ana  hie,  swTgende,^-'^  taelst.^^" 
Apollonius    cwgeS :    "  Eala,    tSu    goda    cyning,    gif    ^Ti    me 

,5  geliefst,"  ic  s^cge  t5«t  ic  ongiete  'Sset  soSlice  t5in  dohtor 
gefeolP^  on  swegcraeft,  ac  heo  nsefS  hine  na  wel  geleornod; 
ac  hat  me^"  nu  s^llan  6a  hearpan,  tSonne  wast^''  t^u  nii  Sset 
tSu  giet  nast.^'  "     Arcestrates  se  cyning  cw8e6 :   "  Apolloni, 

1  Lat.  mcerorem.  of  course   it  does  not  translate 

2  Now,  or  since  ?  these  words. 

8  See  43.  8.  »  Not  in  the  Latin. 

4  Future  sense,  icill  make.  See  1°  See  79.  ^  "  See  140. 
173.  ^2  Lat.  arte  musica. 

5  See  159.  a.  ^^a  Yot  swigiende. 

6  Lat.  henignitate.  ^^  Lat.  vituperas. 

7  Lat.  lyram.  1*  See  196.  d. 

8  This  clause  is  not  altogether  ^^  Lat.  incidit.  Translate,  has 
clear.     It  seems  to  stand  for  the  chanced. 

Lat.  exhilara  convivium,  though  ^^  See  164.  a.  ^^  See  126. 


APOLLONIUS    OF   TYRE.  175 

ic  oncnawe  soSlice  t^set  (5u  eart^  on  eallum  Singum  wel 
gelgered.'^ 

Da  het  se  cyning  s^llan  Apollonie  ^a  hearpan.  Apol- 
lonius  'Sa  uteode,  and  hine  scrydde,  and  s^tte  senne 
cynehelm  upon  his  heafod,  and  nom  'Sa  hearpan  on  his 
hand,  and  ineode,  and  swa  stod  Saet  se  cyning  and  ealle 
^a  ymbsittendan  wendon  ^set  he  nsere  Apollonius,  ac  t5aet 
he  weere  Apollines,^  'Ssera  h^t5enra  god.  Da  weart5  stihies 
and  swige^  geworden  innan  'Ssere  healle.  And  Apollonius 
his  hearpensegl  genoni,  and  he  'Sa  hearpestr^ngas  mid 
crsefte  astyrian  ongan,  and  t^aere  hearpan  sweg  raid  wyn- 
sumum  sange  gem^ngde.'^  And  se  cyning  self,  and  ealle 
(5e  ^ser  andwearde  wgeron,  micelre  stefne  cleopedon  and 
hine  h^redon.  ^fter  'Sisum  forlet^  Apollonius  t5a  hearpan, 
and^  plegode,  and  fela  faegerra  t5inga^  ^a5r  forSteah,^  t5e 
^iSm  folce  ungecnawen  wses  and  ungewunelic.  And  him^ 
eallum  t^earle  llcode  aelc  ^aera  tiinga''  ^e  he  forSteah. 

SotSlice,  mid-tSy-Se  t^ses  cyninges  dohtor  geseah  Stet  Apol- 
lonius on  eallum  godum  crseftum  swa  wel  wees  getogen,^" 
t3a  gefeoll  hiere  mod  on  his  lufe.  Da,  sefter  t^ses  beorscipes 
ge^ndunge,  cwaeS  Sset  mseden  to  t5aem  cyninge  :    "Leofa" 

1  See  194,  note.  2  Apollo.  ^  The  rest  of  this  sentence  para- 

3  We  are  reminded  of  ^n.  II.  phrases :  induit  statum  comicum 
1,  Conticuere  omnes.  et  inauditas  actiones  expressit,  de' 

4  To  this  sentence  there  corre-  inde  tragicum. 
sponds  in  the  Latin  :  —  '^  See  154.  a,  h. 

arripuit  plectrum,  animumque  ac-  ^^*-  ^^P'>'^^sU. 

commodat  arti ;  ^  See  164.  k. 

cum   chordis   miscetur  vox   cantu  10  See  geteon.     What  relation 

modulata.  hasgetogentoMod.Eng.ioawfowF 

^  Lat.  deponens.  1^  See  55. 


176  APOLLONIUS   OF   TYRE. 

f seder,  M  liefdest  me,  lytle^  ^r/  ^set^  ic^  moste^  giefan 
Apollonio  swa-hwaet-swa  ic  wolde  of  ^inum  goldhorde." 
Arcestrates  se  cyning  cwseS  to  hiere :  "  Gief  him  swa- 
hw3et-swa  Su  wille.  ^"  Heo  •8a  swi8e  bli6e  uteode/  and 
5  cw3et5 :  ^'Lareow^  Apolloni,  ic  giefe  'Se,  be  mines  feeder 
leafe,  twa  hund  punda^  goldes,''  and  feower  hund  punda^ 
gewihte^  seolfres,^  and  t5one  msestan  dsel  deorwurSes^ 
reafes,  and  twentig  'Seowa^'^  manna.^*^"  And  heo  ^a  'Sus 
cwseS   to   Saem   t^eowum   mannum :    "  Berat5   t5as   Sing   mid 

lo  eow,  Se  ic  behet  Apollonio  minum  lareowe,  and  l^cgeaS 
innan  biire^^  beforan  mInum  freondum."  Dis  wearS  'Sa 
Sus  gedon,  aefter  'S^re  cwene  hSse'^;  and  ealle  Sa  ni^nn 
hiere  giefa  h^redon  Se^"^  hie  gesawon.  Da  soSlice  ge^nd- 
ode    se    gebeorscipe,    and    'Sa    m^nn    ealle    arison,^^    and 

15  gretton  Sone  cyning  and  'Sa  cwene,  and  b^don  hie 
gesunde  beon,'^  and  ham  gew^ndon.  Eac  swilce  Apol- 
lonius  cwieS:  "  Dii  goda  cyning,  and  earmra^*^  gemiltsiend, 
and  Su  cwen,  lare  ^^  lufiend,  beon  ge  gesunde.^^"  He 
beseah  eac  to  'Ssem  tSeowum  mannum,  Se  Sset  mieden  him 

20  forgiefen  hsefde,'*  and  him  cwseS  to :  "  NimaS  Sas  Sing  mid 

1  Lat.  paulo  ante.     See  178.  ^^  Lat.  triclinio. 

2  Translate  by   the    infinitive  12  t^ee  the  derivation  of  Mod. 
sign,  to.      The  OE.  follows  the       Eng.  behest., 

Latin.  •             ^^  Ilefers  to  m^nn. 

3  See  197.  1*  So  in  Beowulf  (653-655)  : 
*  Not  in  Latin.  "  Werod  eall  aras;  grette  J^a  .  .  . 
^  Lat.  magister.  guma  oSerne,  .  .  .  and  him  hgel 
6  See  154.  c.  ahead." 

■^  See  153.  /.  ^^  Lat.  vale  dicentes. 

8  See  174.  16  gge  153.  d. 

9  MS.  deorwurafan.  ^^  Lat.  valete. 
10  Lat.  servos.  is  See  188. 


APOLLONIUS    OF   TYRE.  177 

eow,  ^e   me   seo   cwen   forgeaf,  and   gan^   we   secean   ure 
giesthtis,  tSset  we  maegen  us^  ger^stan." 

ApoUonius  as  Teacher. 

Da  adred  t^aet  mgeden  ^set  heo  ngefre  ^ft  Apollonium 
ne  gesawe  swa^  hraSe  swa  heo  wolde;  and  eode  (5a  to 
hiere  fseder,  and  cw8et5 :  "  Du  goda  cyning,  licaS  'Se  wel 
•gset  Apollonius,  ^e  t^urli  us  to-daeg  gegodod'*  is,  'Sus 
heonan  fare/  and  cumen  yfele  m^nn  and  bereafien 
hine?'^  Se  cyning  cwse^ :  ''Wel  M  cwsede.  Hat  hine^ 
findan  hweer  he  hine  maege  weorc5licost ''  ger^stan."  Da 
dyde  Sget  maeden  swa  hiere  beboden^  wses ;  and  Apol- 
lonius  onfeng  S^re  wununge  tSe  him  betaeht  wses,  and 
^ser  ineode,  Gode^  t5anciende,  t5e  him  ne  forwiernde^^ 
cynelices  weorSscipes  and  frofre.  Ac  t^aet  m^den  hsefde 
unstille"  niht,  mid  ^aere  lufe  ongeled  ^^ra  worda^^  and 
sanga  t5e  heo  gehierde  set  Apollonie.  And  na  l^ng^^  heo 
ne  gebad  Sonne  hit  dseg  wses,  ac  eode  sona  swa  hit 
leoht  wges,  and  gesset  beforan  hiere  feeder  ^^  b^dde.  Da 
cwseS  se  cyning:  '^Leofe  dohtor,  for  hwy^^  eart^^  M  'Sus 
serwacol  ? "  Dset  mseden  cwseS  :  "  Me  aweahton  Sa  ge- 
cneordnessa^''  t5e  ic  giestran-daeg  ^^  gehierde.     Nti  bidde  ic 

1  See  193.  a.  lo  See  159.  a. 

2  See  184.  h.  ii  Lat.  inquietam. 

3  Swa  .  .  .  wolde  not  in  Latin.  12  Dependent  on  lufe. 

4  Lat.  ditatus.  i3  gee  77.        i*  See  43.  8. 

5  See  194.  a.  i^  See  175.      10  gge  138. 

6  MS.  him.  !■''  Lat.  studia.     Translate,  ac- 
■^  See  76.                                             complishments. 

8  See  187.  i^  Lat.  hesterna.     Is  giestran 

^  See  164.  m.  related  to  the  Latin  word  ? 


178  APOLLONIUS   OF   TYRE. 

■ge,  for-'Sara,^  'Saet  ■Su  befseste^  me  urum  cuman,^  Apol- 
lonie,  to*  lare."*"  Da  wear's  se  cyning  t5earle  geblissod, 
and  het  f^ccean  Apollonium,  and  him  to  cwseS :  ''  Mm 
dohtor  giernS  ^aet  heo  mote  leornian  aet  Se  Sa  geseeligan 

5  lare  t5e  'Sii  canst  ^;  and,  gif  t5u  wilt  t5isam  t^ingum^ 
gehiersum  beon,  ic  sw^rie  'Se,  Surh  mines  rices  maegenu,' 
tSset  swa-hwset-swa  Su  on  ste  forlure,  ic  t5e  tSaet  on  lande 
gestaSelie.^ "  Da-'Sa  ApoUonius  t5set  gehlerde,  he  onfeng 
Sgem"  m^den  to  lare,  and   hiere   tsehte   swa  wel   swa  he 

10  self  geleornode.^" 

The  Three  Suitors. 
Hit  gelamp  t5a  sefter  t^isuin,  binnan  feawum  tidum," 
Saet  Arcestrates  se  cyning  heold  ApoUonius  hand  on 
handa ;  and  eodon  swa  iit  on  tSeere  ceastre  str^ete.  Da, 
set  niehstan,  comon  t5aer  gan^^  ongean  hie  Srle  gel^rede^^ 
15  weras  and  seSelborene,  Sa  lange  ser  gierndon"  Saes  cyninges 
dohtor.  Hie  t5a  ealle  ■8rle  togaedere  anre  stefne^^  gretton 
6one  cyning.     Da  smercode'^  se  cyning,  and  him  to  beseah, 

1  Lat.  itaque.  "'  Lat.  vires. 

■^  Lat,  tradas.  ^  Lat.  restUuam. 

8  Lat.  hospiti.  »  See  164.  j. 

*  Lat.    studiorum    percipiend-  ^'^  Here  follows,  in  the  Latin, 

oruin  gratia.  an  account  of  how  the  girl  feigned 

5  Cf.   Chaucer,    Miller'^s  Tale       illness,  on  account  of  her  love  for 
18:  "I  can  a  noble  tale."  This       ApoUonius. 

sense  occurs  as  late  as  the  mid-  n  Lat.  post  paucos  dies. 

die  of  the  17th  century;  Lovelace  12  gee  199.  1. 

has:  "  Yet  can  I  music  too."    So  ^^  Lat.  scholastici. 

Jonson,  Magnetic  Lady  1.1:  "She  1*  Lat.  in  matrimonium  petie- 

cowZfZ  the  Bible  in  the  holy  tongue."       runt.     Pluperfect  (188). 

6  Ija,t.  desiderio  natce  mece.    See  1^  See  160.  1. 
165.  ^^  Lat.  subridens. 


APOLLONIUS   OF   TYRE.  179 

and  6us  cw3et5 :  "  Hwset  is  Sset,  tSset  ge  me  anre  stefne 
gretton  ? "  Da  andswarode  hiera  an,  and  cwseS  :  "  We 
beedon  gefyrn  'Slnre  dohtor;  and  Sti  us  oft  hrsedlice  mid^ 
^Icunge^  gesw^nctest.^  For-Sam  we  comon  hider  to-dseg 
•gus  togsedere.  We  sindon  t5me  ceastergewaran,  of  se^elum 
gebyrdum^  geborene ;  nu  bidde  we  t5e  tSset  M  geceose  Se^ 
senne  of  us  ^rim,  liwilcne  t$u  wille  t5e^  to'*  a'Sume  habban." 
Da  cw8et5  se  cyning :  "  Nabbe  ge  na  godne^  timan  aredod.^ 
Mm  dohtor  is  nu  switSe  bisig  ymb  hiere  leornunga/  Ac, 
Sy-l8es-6e^  ic  eow  a  l^ng  slsece,^  awrita'S  eowre  naman  on 
ge  write,  and  hiere  morgengief  e  ^*^ ;  Sonne  as^nde  ic  t5a 
gewritu  minre  d^hter,  Seet  heo  self  geceose  hwilcne 
eower^^  heo  wille."  Da  dydon  Sa  cnihtas  swa ;  and  se 
cyning  nom^^  •6a  gewritu,  and  geinseglode  hie  mid  his 
hringe,  and  sealde  Apollonio,  6us  cweSende :  "  Nim  nu, 
lareow  Apolloni,  swa  hit  6e  ne  mislicie,^^  and  bring  t5inum 
leeringmeedene.^'"'  Da  nom  Apollonius  6a  gewritu,  and 
eode  to  6£ere  cynelican  healle.^^ 

1  Lat.  diferendo  crucias.  after  marriage,  according  to  Teu- 

2  Lat.  natalibus.  tonic  usage.  Cf.  Mod.  Ger. 
^  See  161.                                         Morgengabe. 

4  Cf .  Mod.  Eng.  *  take  to  wife.'  "  MS.  eowerne. 

5  Lat.  apto.  12  See  105. 

6  MS.  aredodne.  i^  Lat.  sine  contumelia  tua  ;  an 
"^  Lat.  studiorum.  apology  for  sending  Apollonius  on 
^  Lat.  ne.  an  errand.     See  196.  c. 

9  Lat.  videar  .  .  .  differre.  i*  Lat.  discipulce. 

10  Lat.  dotis  quantUatem.    The  i^  Lat.  domum.   The  Latin  adds 

present   given    on    the    morning       introivit  cubiculum. 


180  APOLLONIUS    OF   TYRE. 

The  Princess  Chooses. 

Mid-'Sam-t5e   t^aet    msedeii    geseah   Apollonium,   ^a    cwse^ 

heo:    "Lareow,  hwy  g^st  ^u  ana^?"     Apollonius  cwae^ : 

"Hlgefdige^ — uses   giet   yfel   wif^  —  niin   'Sas    gewritu,   ^e 

Sin   feeder  t5e   s^nde,*  and   rsed."      Dset   mseden   nom,  and 

5  rsedde  Ssera  'Sreora  cnilita  naman ;  ac  heo  ne  funde^  na 
Sone  Daman  'Saeron  ^e  heo  wokle.  Da  heo  t5a  gewritu 
oferraed  hsefde,  'Sa  beseah  heo  to  Apollonio,  and  cwseS: 
"Lareow,  ne  oft^yncS*^  hit  t5e  gif  ic  Sus  wer  geceose?" 
Apollonius    cwseS :    "  Na ;    ac    ic    blissie    swic^or ''  ^aet   t5u 

[o  meaht,  t^urh  tSa  lare  t5e  t5u  set  me  imderfenge,  t5e  self  on 
gewrite  gecySan  hwilcne  hiera  6u  wille.^  Mm  willa  is 
^9et  t5u  Se  wer  geceose  ti53r  t^u  self  wille.^"  Dset  mseden 
cwse6 :  "  Eala  lareow,  gif  6u  me  lufodest,  tSu  hit  besorg- 
odest.^"''     ^fter  'Sisum  wordum  heo  mid   modes"  anrsed- 

[5  nesse"  awrat  ot5er  gewrit,  and  t^set  geinseglode,  and 
sealde  Apollonio.  Apollonius  hit  ^ii  ut  bter  on  tSa 
strsete,'^  and  sealde  t5^m  cyninge.  Dset  gewrit  wses  ^us 
gewriten :    "  Du  goda  cyning,  and  mm  se  leofesta  fseder, 

1  The  OE.  is  not  clear.  The  ^  She  has  evidently  learned 
Latin  has  :  Quid  est  quod  sin-  from  him  how  to  write,  according 
gularis  cubiculum  introisti  ?  to  the  English.     The  Latin  has : 

2  Lat.  domina.  How  is  hlaef-  Immo  gratulor  quod  hahundantia 
dige  related  in  meaning  to  studiorum  percepta  me  volente 
hlaford  ?  nuhis. 

3  Not  clear  either  in  the  Latin  ^  See  196.  c. 

or  the  English.    Some  MSS.  have,  10  L^t.     doleres.       Indicative, 

nondum  mulier  et  mala  ;  one  has,  where  the  optative  might  be  e^- 

non  unquam  mulier  fuit  mala.  pected. 

*  Translate,  has  sent.    See  188.  11  Lat.  amoris  audacia. 

s  See  104.  ^  Lat.  dolet.  ^-  Lat.  forum,  as  above,  p.  178, 

7  Translate,  rather.     See  76.  I.  13. 


APOLLONIUS   OF   TYRE.  181 

nil  ^m  mildheortnes  me  leafe  sealde  'Saet  ic  self  moste 
ceosan  hwilcne  wer  ic  wolde,  ic  s^cge  t5e  to  sot5um,  t5one 
forlidenan  mann  ic  wille ;  and  gif  tSu  wundrie  ^set  swa 
sceamfsest^  feemne^  swa  unforwandiendlice  ^  ^as  word 
awrat,  t5onne  wite^  t5fi  ^set  ic  hsebbe  Surh  weax  aboden,'*  5 
Se  nane  sceame  ne  can,^  Sset  ic  self  ^e  for  scearae  s^cgean 
ne  meahte." 

Da-t5a  se  cyning  hsefde   Sset   gewrit   oferreed,^  tSa   nyste 
he   hwilcne   forlidenne   heo    n^mde.      Beseah   'Sa   to   'Ssem 
t5rlm   cnihtum,  and   cwaetS :    '^  Hwilc   eower  is   forliden  ? ''   10 
Da   cw8et5    hiera    an,   se    hatte    Ardalius :    "  Ic    eom    for- 
liden/ "     Se  oSer  him  andwyrde,  and  cwaetS :    "  Swiga  ^u. 
Adl  ^e   fornime,^  t^aet   ^u   ne   beo^  hal   ne   gesund.      Mid 
me  M   boccrseft^"  leornodest,   and  t^u   nsefre   butan   •gsere 
ceastre  geate  fram  me  ne  come.      Hwter  gefore"  t5u  for-   15 
lidennesse  ? "       Mid-'5y-t5e    se    cyning    ne    meahte    findan 
hwilc  hiera  forliden  weere/^  he  beseah  to  Apollonio,  and 
cweeS :    "  Nim    ^u,    Apolloni,    ISis    gewrit,    and    raed    hit ; 
ea^e    mseg   geweorSan   tSset   ^u    wite    IS'eet    ic    nat,    'Sti    tSe 
•Seer  andweard  wsere/^"      Da  nom  Apollonius  Sset  gewrit,   20 
and   rsedde.      And   sona   swa  he   ongeat   ^aet   he   gelufod 

1  Lat.  pudica  virgo.  careful  the  English  have  been  to 

"^  JjSit.  impudeiiter  ;  one  MS.  im-  preserve  than  to  acquire.     Why 

prudenter.  have  we  lost,  or  all  but  lost,  the 

3  See  198.  ver  or  for  as  a  prefix,  — fordone, 

4  Lat.  mandavi.  forwearied,  etc. ;    and  the  zer  or 

5  See  above,  p.  178,  n.  5.  to,  —  zerreissen,  to  rend,  etc.?  " 

6  Lat.  perlectis.  »  See  193.  a.  ^  See  196.  g. 
"^  On  for-  see  Coleridge,  Omni-           ^^  Lat.  Utteras. 

ana  (Bohn  ed.,  p.  414):    "It  is  "  See  107.  12  ggg  194.  h. 

grievous  to  think  how  much  less  ^^  Is  this  optative  ? 


182  APOLLONIUS   OF   TYKE. 

waes  fram  'S^em  meedene,  his^  andwlita^  ealP  areadode.-^ 
Da  se  cyning  Sget  geseah,  $a  nom  he  Apollonies  hand, 
and  hine^  hwon  fram  tSeem  cnihtum  gew^nde,  and  cwse^ : 
"Wast^  tu  tione  forlidenan  mann?"      Apollonius   cwaeS: 

5  "Du  goda  cyning,  gif  'Sin  willa  hv6,  ic  hine  wat."  Da 
geseah  se  cyning  ^set  Apollonius  mid  rosan*  rude*  wees 
call  oferbrseded.^  Da  ongeat  he  tSone  cwide,  and  t5us 
cwse^  to  him :  "  Blissa,  blissa,  Apolloni,  for-6am-t5e  mm 
dohtor  gewilna^  t^aes^  ^e  mm  willa  is.     Ne  maeg   so'Slice 

10  on  ^yllicum  Singum^  nan^  •Sing  geweort5an  butan  Godes* 
willan."  Arcestrates  beseah  to  ^^m  tSrIm  cnihtum,  and 
cwseS :  ^'SoS'*'  is^'^  Sset  ic  eow  ^r  stede,  'Saet  ge  ne  comon 
on  gedafenlicre  ^*  tide  minre  dohtor  to  biddanne,  ac 
Sonne  ^^  heo  maeg   hie   fram   hiere  lare  gesemetgian,  Sonne 

15   s^nde  ic  eow  word.^^" 

Da  gew^ndon  hie  ham  mid  Sisse  andsware,  and  Arces- 
trates se  cyning  heold  forS  on  Apollonius  hand,  and  hine 
Itedde  ham  mid  him,  na  swilce  he  cuma  wyere,^*  ac  swilce 
he   his   aSum   w^re.      Da,  set   niehstan,    forlet   se   cyning 

20  Apollonius  hand,  and  code  ana  into  S^m  bure  Seer  his 
dohtor  inne  waes,  and  Sus  cwseS :  "  Leofe  dohtor,  hwone 
haefst  Su  5e  gecoren  to  gemseccean  ^^  ?  "  Daet  m^den  ^® 
^a  feoll  to  hiere  feeder  fotum,  and  cwseS :    "  Du  arfsesta  ^^ 

1  Lat,  eriibuit.  ^  A  Christian  trait. 

2  See  184.  b.  i'^  Lat.  certe. 

*  See  126.     Lat,  invenisti.  ^^  Lat.  apto.     See  p.  179,  1.  8. 

*  Lat.  roseo  rubore.  ^2  See  202.  d. 

^  Lat.  perfusam.  i^  Note  the  English  idiom.    The 

^  See  156.  a.  Latin  has,  mittam  ad  vos. 

■^  Lat.  hujusmodi  negotio.  ^*  See  196.  c.     ^^  Lat.  conjugem. 

8  See  183.  i^  gee  28.          i^  Lat.  piissime. 


APOLLONIUS    OF   TYKE.  183 

feeder,  gehier  «inre  dohtor  willan.^  Ic  lufie  «one  for- 
lidenan  mann,  t$e  waes  «urli  ungelimp^  beswicen'';  ac, 
t5y-laes-6e^  «e  tweonie'^  'Seere  spraece,  Apolloniuin  ic  wille, 
mlnne  lareow ;  and  gif  M  me  him  ne  shiest,  ^u  forlStst 
Sine  dohtor."  Se  cyning  «a  soSlice  ne  meahte  arsefnian^  5 
his  dohtor  tearas,  ac  areerde  hie  tip,  and  hiere  to  cwseS : 
"Leofe  dohtor,  ne  ondr^d  «u  6e  ^niges^  Singes.*^  Du 
hgefst  gecoren  «one  wer  «e  me  wel  licaS."  Eode  «a  ut, 
and  beseah  to  Apollonio,  and  cwse^  :  ''Lareow  ApoUoni, 
ic  smeade  minre  dohtor  modes  willan ;  ^a  areahte  heo  lo 
mid  wope^  betweox  o6re  sprsece,  «as  ^ing  t5us  cwe^ende : 
'  Du  geswore  Apollonio,  gif  he  wolde  gehiersumian  minum 
willan  on  lare,  $8et  t^u  woldest  him  geinnian^  swa-hwset- 
swa  seo  see  him  setbrsed.^  Nil,  for-^arn-^e  he  gehlersum 
wses  6inre  heese  and  minum  willan,  ic  for  sefter  him  15 
[mid  willan  and  mid  lare^"].'" 

1  Lat.  desiderium.  hears  of  the  death  of  King  Antio- 

2  Lat.  fortuna  deceptum.  chus,  and,  with  his  wife,  sets  sail 

3  OE.  9'y-lses-9'e  gives  Mod.  for  Antioch.  There  follow  the 
Eng.  lest.  What  phonological  events  related  in  the  Shake- 
rule  determines  the  final  t  ?  spearean   Pericles,   in   the    main 

4  See  159.  6  and  196. /.  as  in  Acts  III.,  IV.,  and  V., 
^  Lat.  sustinens.  though  with  not  a  few  differ- 
^  Lat.  de  aliqua  re.  ences.  The  infant  daughter  has 
■^  Lat.  lacrimis  (cf.  JEn.  III.       grown   up,   and,   after  a  variety 

348).  of  experiences,  has  been  restored 

8  Lat.  dares.       ^  Lat.  abstulit.  to    Apollonius.       His    queen    is 

10  The  OE.  MS.  breaks  off  at  priestess  of   Diana   of   Ephesus, 

him.     I  have  supplied  what  fol-  and   thither  he    proceeds,   being 

lows    according    to    the    Latin,  warned  by  an  angel  in  a  dream 

voluntate  et  doctrina.    The  story  to  make  that,  instead  of  Tarsus, 

thus    continues    in    the    Latin :  his  next  goal.     At  this  point  the 

After  the    marriage,   Apollonius  OE.  fragment  recommences. 


184  APOLLONIUS   OF   TYRE. 

ApoUonius  relates  his  Adventures. 

Da  waes  hiere^  gecy'Sed,  ^e  Sser  ealdor^  waes,  t^set  t5ser 
wsere  sum  cyning,  mid  his  aSume  and  mid  his  d^hter, 
mid  miclum  giefum.  Mid-6am-t5e  heo  6set  gehierde,  heo 
hie  selfe  mid  cynelicum  reafe  gefrsetwode  and  mid  pur- 
pran  gescrydde,  and  hiere  heafod  mid  golde  and  mid 
gimmmn  gegl^ngde,  and,  mid  miclum  fyemnena  heape 
ymbtrymmed;'^  com  togeanes  ^aem  cyninge.  Heo  waes 
soSlice  'bearle  wlitig ;  and,  for  Siere  miclan  lufe  Ssere 
clyennesse,'*  hie  s^don  ealle  Sset  Saer  nacre  nan  Dianan 
swa  gecweme^  swa  heo. 

Mid-Sam-'6e  ApoUonius  ^set  geseah,  he  mid  his  aSume 
and  mid  his  d^hter  to  hiere  urnon,^  and  feollon  ealle  to 
hiere  fotum,  and  wendon^  ^?et  heo  Diana  w^re,  sco  gyden, 
for  hiere  miclan  beorhtnesse  and  wlite.  D^et  halig^  sern^ 
wear8  M  geopenod,  and  Sa  lac^  wairon  ingebrohte,  and 
ApoUonius    ongan  ^^  tia   sprecan    and    cweSan :    "  Ic    fram 

1  The  wife  of  ApoUonius.  *  Lat.  castitatis. 

2  Chief,  i.e.  chief  priestess.  ^  Lat.  gratam.     See  165. 

8  Lat.  virginum  constipata  ca-  ^  See  104.  Does  this  verb  agree 

tervis.     An  epic  trait.     Thus  in  with  its  subject  ? 

the  u^neid  (4.   136),  Dido  goes  "  Cf.  Chaucer,  Knight's   Tale 

fortli,    magna    stipante    caterva.  243  ff.:  — 

Thus   in   the   Odyssey   (16.  413),  i  not  whether  sche  be  womman  or 

Penelope  "went  on  her  way  to  goddesse; 

the  hall,  tmth  the  icomen  her  hand-  But  Venus  is  it,  sothly  as  I  gesse. 

maids.''     And  thus  in  Beoioulf  ^  Lat.  sacrario.     JErn  forms 

(923-925) ,  Hrothgar  part  of  the  Mod.  Eng.  barn ;  what 

.     , ,    ,    ^-  ,     ^     ^  -7  does  the  other  element  of  this  word 

tryddode  tirfaest  getrume  micle 

cystum  gecy^ed,  and  his  cwen  mid       stand  for  ? 

him  ^  Lat.  mnneribus. 

medostig  gemaet  mxg'Sa  hose.  '^^  Lat.  cmpit. 


APOLLONIUS   OF   TYRE.  185 

cildhade  wses  Apollonius  gen^mned,  on  Tyrum  geboren. 
Mid-^am-t5e  ic  becom  to  fullum  andgiete/  Sa  naes  nan 
creeft^  (5e  w^re^  fram  cyningum  began,  oSt5e  fram 
ffiSelum  mannum,  t^set  ic  ne  cu6e.*  ...  Da  wear6  ic 
on  see  forliden,  and  com  to  Cyrenense.  Da  underfeng  5 
me  Arcestrates  se  cyning  mid  swa  micelre  lufe  t^set  ic 
set  mehstan  geearnode  tSset  he  geaf  me  his  ac^nnedan^ 
dohtor  to  gemseccean.  Seo^  for  Sa  mid  me  to  onfonne 
mnmm  cynerlce,  and  'Sas  mine  dohtor,  t5e  ic  beforan  ^e, 
Diana,  geandweard  haebbe,  ac^nde  on  sss,  and  liiere  gast  10 
alet.  Ic  'Sa  hie  mid  cynelicum  reafe  gescrydde,  and  mid 
golde  and  gewrite  on  ciste  al^gde,  t^set  se,  ^e  hie  funde, 
hie  weorSlice  bebyrgde';  and  Sas  mine  dohtor  befseste^ 
■ggem  manfullestum'-'  mannum'^  to  fedanne.'"  For  me  'Sa 
to  Egypta  lande  feowertiene  gear  on  heofe.  Da  ic  15 
ongean  com,  Sa  siedon  hie  me  Sset  min  dohtor  wtere 
fortSfaren,^^  and  me  waes  mm  sar  call   geednlwod." 

The  Uecognition. 

Mid-Sam--Se  he  t5as  tiing  call  areaht  hsefde,  Arcestrate 
soSlice,  his  wif,  iip  aras  and  hine  ymbclypte.  Da  nyste 
na^  Apollonius,  ne^^  ne^^  geliefde,  Sset  heo  his  gemseccea  20 

1  Lat.  scientiam.  "  See  196.  d. 

2  Lat,  ars.  ^  See  197.  ^  Lat.  commendavi. 

*  I  have   omitted  the   portion  ^  MS.inanfullestaninannan. 

which  relates  to  his  adventures  Lat.  nequissimis  hominibus. 
before  his  shipwreck.  10  ^at.  nutriendam. 

^  Translate,  own.  ^^  Lat.  defunctam. 

6  Used  almost  as  personal  pro-  ^^  gee  183. 

noun.    From  what  source  is  Mod.  ^^  How  do  ne  and  ne  differ  in 

Eng.  she  derived  ?  meaning  ? 


186  APOLLONIUS   OF   TYRE. 

wsere,^  ac  sceaf^  hie  fram  him.  Heo  t5a  micelre  stefne 
cleopode,  and  cwseS  mid  wope  :  "  Ic  eom  Arcestrate  6in 
gemaeccea,  Arcestrates  dohtor  ^aes  cyninges,  and  ^ti  eart 
Apollonius  mm  lareow,  'Se  me  Igerdest.      Du  eart  se  for- 

5  lidena  mann  Se  ic  liifode.  .  .  .  Hw^r  is  min  dohtor  ? " 
He  bew^nde  hine  -fia  to  Thasian,^  and  cwseS  :  "  Dis  heo 
is."  And  hie  weopon  t5a  ealle,  and  eac  blissedon.**  And 
t^set  word  sprang  geond  eall  t^aet  land  t^set  Apollonius, 
se  maera  cyning,  hsefde  funden  his  wif.     And  5«r  weart5 

10  ormaete^  bliss,  and  M  organa  wieron*^  getogene,^  and  6a 
bleman  geblawene,  and  t5iSr  wearS  bllSe  gebeorscipe 
gegearwod  betweox  ^xm  cyning  and  (5^m  folce.  And 
heo  ges^tte  hiere  gingran,  -ge  hiere  folgode,  to  sacerde, 
and,  mid  blisse  and  heofe  ealre  t^iere  miSgSe  on  Efesnm, 

15  heo  for  mid  hiere  were,  and  mid  hiere  aSume,  and  mid 
hiere  d^hter,  to  Antiochian,  Ster  Apollonio  wees  Sset 
cynerTce  gehealden."  .  .  . 

The  Fisherman^ s  Reward. 

Disum  eallum  t5us  gedonum,^  eode  Apollonius,  se  maera 

cyning,  wiS   Sa   s^.      Da   geseah   he   (Sone   ealdan   fiscere, 

20  6e  hine  ^r  nacodne  underfeng.      Da  het  se  cyning  hine 

1  See  194.  h.         -  Lat.  repellit.  "^  At   this   point    tliere    is    an 

3  More  properly,  'Tharsian';  account  of  Apollonius'  travels 
but  cf.  Shakespeare's  Thaisa.  among  his  former  acquaintances, 

4  Cf.  Macaulay's  "  With  weep-  rewarding  them  according  to 
ing  and  with  laughter  still  is  the  their  deserts,  and  cheering  the 
story  told."  last  hours  of  Archistrates,  who 

5  Lat.  ingens.  divides  his  kingdom  between  his 
^  Lat.  dispommtur.    Translate,       daughter  and  Apollonius. 

were  played.  ^  See  167. 


APOLLONIUS    OF    TYKE.  187 

Itierlice  gelaeccean,  and  to  tSsere  cynelican^  healle^  gelaedan. 
Da-t5a  se  fiscere  'Sset  geseah,  t^set  hine  t5a  c^mpaii^  woldon 
nimaiij  6a  wende  lie  merest  Sset  hine  man  sceolde  ofslean; 
ac,  niid-t5am-6e  lie  com  into  Sees  cyninges  healle,  t5a  het 
se  cyning  hine  l^dan  toforan  Saere  cwene,  and  t5us  cwaeS :  5 
"Eala,  6u  eadge  cwen,  ■gis  is  min  tacenbora,^  Se  me 
nacodne  underfeng,  and  me  getyehte  Sset  ic  to  6e  becom." 
Da  beseali  Apollonius  se  cyning  to  t5yem  fiscere,  and 
cwseS :  "Eala,  welwillenda^  ealda/  ic  eom  Apollonius  se 
Tyrisca,  t5tem  t5u  sealdest  healfne  t)Inne  wtefels."  Him  10 
geaf  6a  se  cyning  twa  hund  gyldenra^  p^ninga,^  and 
hsefde  hine  to  geferan  6a-hwile-6e  he  lifde.  .  .  . 

The  End. 

iEfter  eallum  6isum  Apollonius  se  cyning  .  .  .  wel- 
willendlice  lifde  mid  his  gemseccean  seofon''  and  hund- 
seofontig  geara,  and  heold  6aet  cynerTce  on  Antiochia,  15 
and  on  Tyrum,  and  on  Cyrenense.  And  he  lifde  on 
stilnesse  and  on  blisse  ealle  6a  tid  his  lifes  sefter  his 
earfo6nesse.  And  twa  bee  he  self  ges^tte  be  his  fare^; 
and  ane  as^tte  on  'b^em  temple  Diane,  66re  on  bib- 
liotheca.  20 

Her   ^nda6   ge  wea   ge  wela  Apollonius   69es   Tyriscan, 

1  Lat.  palatium.  ducted  him,   as  it  were,   to  his 

2  Lat,  militibus.  bride. 

3  Lat.  paranymphus.    The  OE.  *  Lat.  benignissime. 
word  properly  translates  Lat.  sig-  ^  See  55  and  181. 
nifer.     Render  here  by  grooms-  ^  Lat.  sestertia  auri. 
man ;    the    fisherman    had    con-  "^  But  Lat.  quatuor. 

8  Lat.  casus. 


188 


APOLLONIUS    OF   TYRE. 


Esede  ^  se  tSe  wille  j  and  gif  hie  hwa  ^  rsede,  ic  bidde 
Cset  he  ^as  aw^ndednesse  ne  tsele,  ac  6a3t  he  hele  swa- 
hwaet-swa  tSseron  sie  to  tale.^ 


1  See  193.  a.  Satiromastix  (a.d.  1602)  there  oc- 

2  ylw?/  one.  Still  found  in  the  curs,  "Suppose  who  enters  now." 
phrase,  '  as  who  should  say  '  ^  cf.  Alfred's  adjuration  at  p. 
{Mach.  3.  C.  42).      In  Dekker's  162,  1.  12  ff. 


XIII. 
THE   SIX   DAYS'   WORK   OF   CEEATION. 

(From  ^Elfric's  Hexameron.) 

[This  may  serve  as  a  commentary  on  Selection  I.,  which,  it  will  be 
remembered,  is  a  translation  by  MUric.  Of  tlie  present  work  its  editor, 
Norman,  says  (p.  vii) :  "  The  treatise  which  is  styled  by  Hickes  in  his 
'  Thesaurus '  the  '  Hexameron  of  St.  Basil '  is  by  no  means  a  literal  trans- 
lation of  the  well  known  work  of  that  father,  but  is  partly  original,  and 
partly  compiled  from  that  work,  and  from  the  commentaries  of  the  Ven- 
erable Bede  upon  Genesis.  The  author  of  it,  from  internal  evidence,  may 
be  pronounced  to  be  iElfric,  as  frequent  references  are  made  to  his  homi- 
lies, and  to  his  epistles  on  the  Old  and  New  Testament." 

Of  Basil's  (d.  379)  delivery  of  the  original  Hexameron,  there  is  a  brief, 
but  spirited,  account  in  Villemain's  Tableau  cle  V Eloquence  Chretienne  au 
IV^  iSiecle  (p.  IIG  ff.),  from  which  we  extract  the  following:  "It  is  more 
interesting  to  survey  him  in  the  act  of  instructing  the  poor  inhabitants  of 
Caesarea,  elevating  them  to  God  by  the  contemplation  of  nature,  and  ex- 
plaining to  them  the  miracles  of  creation  in  discourses  where  the  science  of 
the  orator  who  had  been  trained  at  Athens  is  concealed  under  a  persuasive 
and  popular  simplicity.  Such  is  the  subject  of  the  homilies  which  bear 
the  name  of  Hexameron.  Together  with  the  errors  in  natural  philosophy 
which  are  common  to  all  antiquity,  they  contain  many  correct  views,  and 
descriptions  at  once  felicitous  and  true."] 

On  t5sem  forman  claege  ure  Dryhten  gesceop  seof onf eald  ^ 
weorc :  ^set  weeron  ealle  ^nglas ;  and  ^ses  leohtes  anginn ; 
and  ^aet  antimber  Se^  he  of  gesceop  si^San  gesceafta;  'Sa 
iiplican  heofonan  and  t5a  nit^erlican  eor^an;  ealle  waeter- 
scipas  ^ ;  and  5a  widgillan  see ;  and  tSset  uplice  ^  lyft ;  eall 
on  anum  dsege.     Da  ^nglas  he  geworhte  on^  wundorlicre 

1  See  146.  ^  Governed  by  of.  *  mS.  uplican. 

3  See  143,  and  p.  226,  note  22.  s  Translate,  of. 

189 


190  THE   SIX   days'   work   OF   CREATION. 

fsegernesse,  and  on^  micelre  str^ngt5e,^  manige  Msenda, 
ealle  llchamlease,  libbende  on  gaste ;  be  t^eem  we  ssedon 
hwllum  ^r  sweotollicor  on  gewrite.  Nses  na  God  butan 
leohte  Sa-f5a  he  leoht  gesceop,  —  lie  is  him  self  leoht  t)e 

5  onlieht^  eall  ^ing ;  ac  he  gesceop  Sses  dseges  leoht,  and 
hit  siS6an  geeacnode  mid  ^•ddiii  scinendum  tunglum,  swa- 
swa  hersefter  saeg^.'*  Daeges  leoht  he  gesceop,  and  to- 
draefde  t)a  ^lestru,  Sset  t^a  gesceafta  gesewenlice  warden 
t5urh  t$8es  dseges  llehtinge   on   l^nctenlicre^  tide;    for-'Sam 

10  he  on  l^nctentlde,  swa-swa  iis  lareowas  secgea^,  gesceop 
Sone  forman  daeg  t5isse  worulde  —  tSaet  is  on  geiimcraefte 
XV  cl.  Aprilis^ — and  si^(5an  ^a  gesceafta,  swa-swa  we 
s^cgeaS  her.  Da  iiplican  heofonas,  (Se  ^nglas  onwunia^, 
he   geworhte   eac   ^a   on   t5aem    ilcan    daege ;    be    ^aem   we 

15  singaS  on  sumum  sealme^  ^us :  Opera  manuum  tua- 
rum  sunt  caeli  — "  Dinra  handa  geweorc  sindon  heofonas, 
Dryhten."  Eft  on  d8rum^  sealme  sang  se  ilea  AvTtga: 
Ipse  dixit,  et  facta  sunt;  ij^se  mandavit,  et  creata  sunt  — 
"  He  self  hit  gecwseS,  and  hie  wurdon  geworhte ;  he  self 

20  hit  bebead,  and  hie  wurdon  gesceapene."  Dset  wseter  and 
seo  eorcSe  wteron  gem^ngde  06  'Sone  (Sriddan  dseg ;  6a 
todyde  hie  God,  swa-swa  hersefter  saegS  on  t5isse  ges^t- 
nesse.  Daet  lyft  he  gesceop  to  fires  llfes  strangunge ; 
6urh  Saet  we  orSia^,  and  eac  6a  nietenu ;    and  ure   fnaest 

25   ateoraS  gif  we  ateon  ne  magon,  mid  iirum  orSe,  into   us 

1  Translate,  of.  *  =  it  saith,  is  described. 

2  From  what  adjective  ?     The  ^  From  l^ncten  is  derived  Mod. 
original  ending  is  AfSa.  Eng.  Lent. 

3  How  is  this  stem  related  to  '^  March  18.            ^  pg.  102.  25. 
leoht  ?     Cf.  Jn.  1.9.  s  pg.  33.  9. 


THE   SIX   days'   work   OF   CREATION.  191 

Saet  lyft  and  ^ft  utablawan,  Sa-hwlle-^e  we  beoS  cuce. 
Dset  lyft  is  swa  heah  swa-swa  t5a  heofonlican^  wolcuu, 
and  eac  ealswa  brad  swa-swa  6aere  eor^an  bradnes.  On 
■gsere^  fleogatS  fuglas,  ac  hiera  fit5ru  ne  meahten  nahwider 
hie^  aberan  gif  hie  ne  abaere  seo  lyft.  5 

Secunda  die  fecit  Deus  Jirmamentum  — "  On  SEem  ot5rum 
dsege  ure  Dryhten  geworhte  firmamentum/"  ^e  m^nn 
bata^  rodor.  Se^  belyct^^  on  his  bosme  ealle  eort^an^ 
bradnesse/  and  bin  nan  him  is  gelogod  eall  t^es  middan- 
geard ;  and  he  £efre  gteS  abutan  swa-swa  iernende  hweol,  lo 
and  he  nsefre  ne  st^nt  stille  on  anum,  and  on  anre 
w^ndinge.  Da-hwile-t5e  he  sene  betyrnS,  ga'S  witodlice 
fort5  feower  and  twentig  tida  —  'Saet  is  t5onne  ealles  an 
dseg  and  an  niht.  Done  rodor  God  gehet  heofon.  He 
is  wundorlice  healic  and  wTd  on  ymbhwyrfte ;  se^  g£e(5  15 
Tinder  t5as  eorSan  ealswa^  deop  swa  bufan,  t^eah-Se  'Sa 
ungelseredan  m^nn  tSsss^  geliefan  ne  cunnon.  And  God 
t5a  todgelde  'Surh  his  dryhtenlican  miht  ^a  niSerlican 
wseteru  t5e  w«ron  under  'Sgeni  rodore  frani  tS^m  uplicum 
wseterum  t5e  wiieron  bufan  ^gem  rodore.  Be  ^^m  uplicum  20 
wseterum  awrat  se  witga^°  6us  :  Laudate  eum  coeli  codo- 
rum,  et  aquce  qiice  super  coelos  sunt,  laudent  nomen  Domini 
—  ''H^riaS  hine  heofonas,  ^ara  heofona  heofonas,  and  eac 
^a   wseteru    t5e    bufan    heofonas    sind,    h^rien    hie    Godes 

1  Translate,  of  heaven.  ^  Nearly  =  he. 

2  Nearly  =  hiere.    Lyft  fluctu-  ^  See  belucan, 

ates  in  gender,  in  this  extract,  be-  "^  See  24. 

tween  fern,  and  neut.  ^  What  is  the  difference  of  deri- 

3  Ace.  plur.  vation  between  also  and  as  9 

4  How  is  this  word  rendered  in  ^  See  156.  g. 
p.  124, 1.  4.  10  Ps.  148.  4. 


192  THE  SIX  days'  work  of  creation. 

naman."  Dus  saeg^  t5aet  halge  gewrit.  Ne  h^ria^  Sa 
waeteru  mid  nanum  wordum  God,  ac  -Surh  f5a  gesceafta, 
t5e  he  gesceop  wundorlice,  his  miht  is  g'esweotolod,  and 
he  bis  swa  geh^red. 
5  On  5iBm  'Sriddan  dsege  tire  Dryhten  gegaderode  Sa 
s^lican^  ySa  fram  'S^re  eorSan  bradnesse.  Seo  eortSe 
waes  set  frunian  eall  ungesewenlic,  for-Sam-Se  heo  eall 
waes  mid  ySum  oferSeaht^;  ac  God  hie  asyndrode  fram 
(5aem  sSlicum  y6um  on  hiere  agenne   st^de,  swa-swa  heo 

10  st^nt  0(5  Sis.^  Heo  ne  ITS'*  on  nanum  tSinge,  ac  on^  lofte^ 
heo  st^nt  'Surh  6ses  Anes  miht  t5e^  eall  Sing  gesceop; 
and  he  eall  Sing  gehielt^  butan  geswince,  for-Sam-Se  his 
nama  is  Omnipotens  Deus,  Sset  is  on  Englisc,  "^Imihtig 
God."     His  willa  is  weorc,  and  he  werig  ne  biS,  and  his 

15  micle  miht  ne  mseg  nahw^r  swincan,  swa-swa  se  witga^ 
awrat  be  him,  cweSende,  Quia  in  manu  ejus  sunt  omnes 
Jines  terrm  —  "For-Sam-Se  on  his  handa  sindon  eall  S^re 
eorSan  gemyeru.'^  Da  see  he  gelogode  swa-swa  heo  liS'' 
glet  wiSinnan  Sa  eorSan  on  liiere  ymbhwyrfte ;  and  Seah- 

20  Se  heo  brad  sle,  and  gebleged  gehu,  and  wundorlice  deop, 
heo  wunaS  eall  swa-Seah  on  Saere  eorSan  bosme  binnan 
hiere  gemserum.  God  self  geseah  Sa  Saet  hit  god  wses 
swa,  and  het  Sa  eorSan  arodlice  spryttan  growende  gsers, 
and  Sa  grenan  wyrta  mid   hiera   agnum   s^de   to   manig- 

25   fealdum    leececrsef te  ^ ;    and    Sa    wyrta    sona    wynsumlice 

1  Translate,  of  the  sea.  ^  Refers  to  Anes. 

2  See  114.  '^  See  gehealdan.     Present  or 

3  Until  this,  until  now.  preterit  ? 

*  See  28.  »  Ps.  95.  4. 

6  Mod.  Eng.  aloft.  ^  Cf.  Horn,  and  Jul.  2.  3.  15  ff. 


THE   SIX   days'   work   OF   CREATION.  193 

greowon/  mid  manigfealdum  blostmum,  mislice  gebleode. 
God  het  hie  eac  spryttan,  ^urh  his  godcundan  miht, 
manigfeald  treowcynn,  mid  hiera  wsestmum,  mannum  to 
ofetum  and  to  oSrum  niedum.  And  seo  eorSe,  sona  swa- 
swa  hiere^  God  behead,  stod  mid  holtum  agrowen,  and  5 
mid  healicum  cederbeamum  and  mid  manigum  wudum  on 
hiere  widgilnesse,  mid  seppelbserum  treowum  and  mid  ort- 
geardum,  and  mid  selcum  treowcynne  mid  hiera  agnum 
w^stmum. 

On  tSsem  feorSan  dsege  ure  Dryhten  gecwseS,  ^^GeweorSen   10 
nu  leoht "  —  ^aet  sind,  ^a  leohtan  steorran  on  t^aem   heo- 
fonlican  rodore— "^set^  hie  todselan  msegen  dseg  fram  niht, 
and  hie   beon   to   tacne,   and   tida   gewyrcen    dagum    and 
gearum,    and    scinen    on    'S^em    rodore,    and    onliehten    Sa 
eor6an."       God    geworhte    Sa    sona    twa    sclnendu    leoht,    15 
miclu    and    maeru,    monan    and    sunnan  —  t5a    sunnan    on 
m^rgen    to    ^aes    da^ges    liehtinge,    t^one    monan    on    ^fen 
mannum  to  liehtinge  on  nihtlicre  tide  mid  getacnungiim. 
And    ealle    steorran    he    eac    Sa    geworhte,    and    he    hie 
gefaestnode    on    ^eem    fsestan    rodore,   tSaet    hie    t5a    eortSan  20 
onliehten    mid    hiera    manigfealdum     leoman,     and     t^aes 
daeges   giemden''   and   eac   Saere    niht,   and    t5aet    leoht    to- 
daelden   and   Sa   t5iestru   on    twa.       Naeron    nane    tIda    on 
"Saem  gearlicum  getaele  8er-(5am-t5e  se  aelmihtiga  Scieppend 
gesceop    'Sa    tunglu    to    gearlicum    tidum,    on    manigum  25 
getacnungum,  on  l^nctenlicre  emnihte  —  swa-swa  lareowas 
s^cgea^  on  gerimcraefte,  xii    kl.    Aprilis.^      And    ne    beotS 

1  See  growan.  »  Cf .  p.  125, 1.  9  ff. 

2  Dat.  sing.  *  Cf.  p.  126, 1.  1  ff. 

5  March  21;  cf.  p.  190,  1.  12. 


194  THE  SIX  days'  work  of  ckeation. 

usefre  Eastron^  aer  se  daeg  cume  'Sset  Sset  leoht  hsebbe  t$a 
Siestru  oferswiSed,  ISddt  is,  ^set  se  daeg  beo  l^ngra^  t^onne 
seo  niht.  Be  ^ddm  oSrum  tidum  cwiS  ^eos  ilce  boc  swa^ 
swa  God  saede  him  self  to  Noe :  "  S^dtima  and  haerfest, 
5  sumer  and  winter,  ciele  and  heetu,  daeg  and  niht,  ne 
geswIcatJ  n^efre."  Ne  standaS  na  ealle  steorran  on  t^gem 
steapan  rodore,  ac  hle^  sume^  habbaS  synderlicne  gang 
beneo'San  tiaem  rodore,  mislice  ge^ndebyrde ;  and  'Sa,  tSe 
on  f5yem   rodore   standat5,   tyrnaS''  tefre   abutan   mid   tSsem 

lo  bradan  rodore  on  ymbhwyrfte  (5^re  eorSan,  and  hiera^ 
nan  ne  fielS^  of  'Stem  fsestan  rodore  t5a-hwile-^e  Seos 
woruld  wunatS  swa  gehal.  Eall  swa  g5;S  seo  sunne,^  and 
so^lice  se  mona,'^  abutan  tSas  eort^an  mid  bradum  ymb- 
hwyrfte, eall  swa  feor  beneo^an  swa-swa  hie  bufan  us  ga^S. 

15  On  Sssm  fiftan  dsege  ure  Dryhten  gesceop  of  waetere 
anum  ealle  fiscas  on  slb  and  on  eaiim,  and  eall  t^set  on 
him   criepS,^   and   tSa   miclan    liwalas    on    hiera   cynrenum, 

1  A  plural  (see  the  verb)  used  ^  See  151. 

as    singular.       Eastre    (North.  '^  From  the  Greek  word  rdpvos, 

Eostre)  was,  as   Bede   tells  us,  one    of  whose    senses    is    lathe- 

the    name    of    a   goddess  whose  chisel,    comes    the    Greek,    and 

festival    was    celebrated    at    the  hence  the   Latin  (tornare)  verb 

vernal  equinox ;   it  is   a  deriva-  meaning  '  to  turn  in  a  lathe,'  and 

tive  of  east  (east,  cognate  with  hence    '  to    fashion,'    '  smooth  '  ; 

Skr.     Kshds,    dawn),     and    this  from   the   Latin    is   derived   the 

indicates  that  she  was  originally  English  verb. 
a  goddess  of   the   dawn,      Bede  ^  Dependent  on  nan. 

adds  that  the  passover-tide  was  ^  See  feallan. 

so    called,    "  Consueto    antiquse  '^  Are  these  genders  what  one 

observationis     vocabulo     gaudia  would  expect  ?    What  determines 

nov3e  solemnitatis  vocantes."  them? 


See  65.  ^  See  creopan. 


THE   SIX   days'   work   OF   CREATION.  195 

and  eac  eall  fugolcyiin  ealswa  of  waetere,  and  forgeaf 
■fiaem  fuglum  flylit  geond  t5as  lyft,  and  tSsem  fiscum  sund 
on  e«in  flowendum  y«um.  God  hie  gebletsode  t5a,  Sus 
cwecSende  to  ^sem  fiscum,  "WeaxaS^  and  beo6  gemanig- 
fielde,  and  gefyllaS  t5a  s^";  and  eac,  "Da  fuglas  beon  5 
gemanigfielde  bufan  t^aere  eorSan " ;  and  hit  gewearS  'Sa 
swa.  Da  fuglas,  sot5lice,  t$e  on  flodum  wuniat5,  sindon 
flaxfete  be  Godes  foresceawunge,  ^aet  hie  swimman 
msegen  and  secean  him  fodan.  Sume  beoS  langsweorede,^ 
swa-swa  swanas^  and  ielfetan,  tSset  hie  areecean  him  10 
msegen  m^te*  be^  t^sem  grunde.  And  t5a,  ^e  be^  fiaesce 
libba-8,  sindon  cliferfete,^  and  scearpe  gebilode,^  Sset  hie 
bitan  mgegen  on**  sceortum  sweorum,  and  swiftran^  on 
flyhte,  ^aet  hie  gelimplice  beon  to  hiera  iTfes^"  tilungum. 
Nis  na  eall  fugolcynn  on  Engla  ^eode,  ne  on  naimm  15 
earde  ne  biS  naht  eat5e  eall  fugolcynn,  for-6am-t5e  hie 
fela  sindon,  micle  on  waestme,  and  hie  inislice  fleoga^, 
swa-swa  us  bee  s^cgea^  sweotollice  be^^  'Seem. 

1  Cf.  p.  126,  1.  11  ff.  6  cf .  "  Man  shall  not  live  hy 

2  Not  past  participles,  though       bread  alone." 

with  the  same  ending.  '  Clifer-  is  apparently  related 

3  Swaiias    and    ielfetan    are       to  cleave  —  adhere. 

here  virtually  identical ;    in  ON.  ^  Translate,  with.        ^  See  64. 

swanr  is  the  poetical,  alft  the  ^^  An  interesting  word,  related 

ordinary  designation.     Swan  has  to  Mod.  Eng.  leave.  Germ.  h{e)leih- 

been  doubtfully  derived  from  the  en,  Gr.  Xiirapecv  =  hold  out,  persist; 

root  of  Lat.  sonare,  and  ielfete  originally,  therefore,  Zi/'e  =  a /loZd- 

(cf.  the  ON.  form)  from  that  of  ijig  out,  continuance.    In  German, 

Lat.  albus.  body,  one  of  its  older  meanings,  is 

4  Object  of  araecean.  the  commoner  one  for  Leib.    Here 

5  Here  =  from ;    cf .    '  by   the  =  livelihood. 

roots.'  ^^  So  in  Fielding's ^?neZia  (8.2): 


196  THE  SIX  days'  work  of  creation. 

On  ?$8eni  siextan  daege  ure  Dryhten  gecwseS :  "Ac^nne^ 
seo  eor^e  nu  cucu  nietenu  on  hiera  cynrene,  and  6a 
creopendan  wyrmas,  and  eall  deorcynn  on  hiera  cyn- 
renum."     Hwaet^!  Sa  God  geworhte,  6urh  his  wunderlican 

5  miht,  eall  nietencynn  on  hiera  cynrenum,  and  Sa  wildan 
deor  6e  on  wudum  eardiatS,  and  eall  tSset  fit5erfete^  biS, 
of  'Ssere  foressedan  eor^an,  and  eall  wyrmcynn  t5a-t5e 
creopende  beo(S,  and  t5a  re^an  leon/  6e  her  on  lande  ne 
beotJ,    and    Sa    swiftan    tigres/   and    tSa    sellican    pardes,* 

lo  and  M  ^geslican  beran,  and  6a  orinaetan  elpas,  6a-6e  on 
Engla  Seode  ac^nnede  ne  beo6,  and  fela  o6ru  cynn  6e  ge 
ealle  ne  cunnon.  Da  beoS  langsweorede  6e  libba6  be 
gaerse,  swarswa  olfend^  and  assa,  hors  and  hrySeru, 
headeor   and    rahdeor,   and    gehwilc    oSru ;    and    aelc    bi6 

15  gelimplic  to  his  llfes  tilunge.  Wulfas,  and  leon,  and 
witodlice  beran,  habbaS  strangne  sweoran,  and  sciertran^ 
be^  daele/  and  maran  tuscas,  to  hiera  m^tes  tilunge,  for- 
•gam-Se  hie  libbaS  hiera  llf®  be  reaflace,  swa-swa  gehwilc 
oSru   deor^  6e   d^riaS   Saem  jo6rum.       Da  elpas   beo6   swa 

20  micle  swilce  o6re  muntas,^''  and  hie  magon  libban  6reo 
hund    geara,    and    man    maeg    hie    w^nian    to    wige    mid 

"  I  always  love  to  speak  by  people  ^  Not  elephant,  \)Vit  camel.  EIp 

as  I  find  ";  Shak.,  M.  V.  1.  2.  58 :  (longer  form,  elpend)  is  elephant. 

"  How  say  you    by  the    French  ^  gee  65. 

lord  ?  "  7  Translate,  in  part. 

1  Cf.  p.  126,  1.  15  ff.  8  See  168.  1. 

2  Translate,  Lo  !  ^  Cf .  Shakespeare's  (King  Lear 

3  Fiffer-  is  akin  to  Lat.  quattuor.  3. 4. 143) :  "  Mice  and  rats  and  such 
*  From  Latin.     With  pard  cf.  small  deer."  What  is  the  German  ? 

Shakespeare's  "Bearded  like  the  '^^  So   the   ME.   Bestiary    (ca. 

pard.''  1220)  §ays  (1.604):    ^'j:ipes  arn 


THE   SIX   days'   work   OF   CREATION.  197 

crsefte,  swa  'Saet  m^nn  wyrceaS  wighus  him  on  uppan, 
and  of  Ssem  feohtaS  on  hiera  fierdinge;  t5onne  fliehS  ^Ic 
hors^  afeered^  t5urh  Sa  elpas,  and,  gif  him  hwa  wiSst^nt, 
he  bis  sona  oftreden.^  Ac  we  nellaS  na  swit5or  nu  ymb 
Sis  sprecan.  5 

On  Saem  ilcan  dsege  tire  Dryhten  wolde  mannan  ge- 
wyrcean  of  Saere  ilcan  eorSan,  for-Sam-Se  on  Sisum  fierste 
afeoll  se  deofol  of  Ssere  healican  heofonan,  mid  his 
gegadum,  for  his  upahaefednesse,  into  h^lle  wite.  tJre 
Dryhten  cwseS  be  him  on  his  halgan  godspelle/  hi  veri-  lo 
tate  non  stetit,  quia  Veritas  non  est  in  eo  —  "  He  ne  wunode 
na  on  soSfsestnesse,  for-Sam-Se  seo  soSfsestnes  nis  nates- 
hwon  on  him."  God  hine  geworhte  wundorlicne  and 
fsegerne.  Da  sceolde  he,  gif  he  wolde,  weorSian  his 
Scieppend  mid  micelre  eaSmodnesse,  Se  hine  swa  meerne  15 
gesceop.  Ac  he  ne  dyde  na  swa,  ac  mid  dyrstigre 
modignesse  cwseS^  Sset  he  wolde  wyrcean  his  cynesetl 
bufan  Godes  tunglum,  ofer  S^ra  wolcna  heanesse  on 
Ssem  norSdaele,  and  beon  Gode  gelic.  Da  forlet  he 
Sone  ^Imihtigan,  Se  is  eall  soSfaestnes,  and  nolde  20 
habban  his  hlafordscipe,  ac  wolde  beon  him   self   on   his 

in    Inde    riche,    on    bodi    borlic  giat."     Above,  where   elephants 

[burly]  berges  Hike.''''  are  compared  to  mountains,  Basil 

1  This  seems  to  indicate   that  has,    ^ovvol   rives    crdpKLvoi ;    Am- 

^Ifric  employed  Ambrose's  adap-  brose,    "  velut    quidam    mobiles 

tation  of  Basil's  Hexameron,  since  montes  versantur  in  prseliis,"  etc. 

the  original  does  not  contain  this  ^  So    Shak.,    Macb.   5.   1.   41: 

thought.     Ambrose  has  (Bk.  VI.,  "A  soldier,  and  afeard^ 

Chap,  v.):    "Quid  faciat  eques,  ^  gee  142. 

cum    equus    ejus    perterrefactus  *  Jn.  8.  44. 

tantae   bestise   immanitate    diffu-  ^  Isa.  14,  13. 


198  THE  SIX  days'  work  of  creation. 

selfes  anwealde.  Da  naefde  he  nane  faestnunge,  ac  feoll 
sona  adiine,  mid  eallum  •Ssem  ^nglum  tSe  set  his  rsede 
wgeron,  and  hie  wurdon  aw^nde  to  awiergdum  deoflum. 
Be  ^aem  cwaet^^  se  Hselend  her  on  •gisum  life,  "Ic  geseah 
5  'Sone  scuccan  swarswa  sclnende  lieget  feallende  adun 
dreorig  of  heofonum/'  for-t5am-Se  he  ahreas  ungerydelice. 
Da  wolde  God  wyrcean,  'Surh  his  wundorlican  miht, 
mannan  of  eort5an,  'Se  mid  eaSmodnesse  sceolde  geearnian 
^one  ilcan  st^de  on  tJaera  ^ngla  geferr^dene  Se  se  deofol 

10  forworhte  mid  his  dyrstignesse  ;  and  God  self  cwse'S  'Sa, 
swarSwa  us  ssegS  t5eos  boc,  Faciamus  Iwminem  ad  imag- 
inem  nostram  et  similitudinem  nostram,  et  reliqua,  etc., 
Sset  is  on  lEngliscre  sprsece,  "Uton  gewyrcean  mannan 
to  urre  anlicnesse  and  to  urre  gelicnesse,  t^set  he  anweald 

15  haebbe  ofer  eallum  liscum,  and  ofer  fugolcynne,  and  ofer 
wildeorum,^  and  ofer  eallum  gesceafte."  Her  ge  magon 
gehieran  'Sa  halgan  t^rlnesse  and  so6e  annesse  anre  god- 
cundnesse.  "Uton  wyrcean  mannan"  —  'Sser  is  seo  halge 
t5rlnes.       "  To    urre    anlicnesse "  —  tSaer    is    seo    annes,    to 

20  anre  anlicnesse,  na  to  t5rim  anlTcnessum.  On  Sses  mannes 
sawle  is  Godes  anlicnes,  for-tSam  is  se  mann  selra^  Sonne 
Sa  sawulleasan  nietenu,  Se  nan  andgiet  nabbaS  ymb  hiera 
agenne  Scieppend.  God  Sa  geworhte  of  Seere  eorSan 
lame,''  mid    his    halgum    handum,    mannan    to    his    anlic- 

25  nesse,  and  ableow  on  his  anslene  lifiicne  blaed ;  and  he 
wearS  mann  geworht  on  libbendre  sawle.  God  self  Sa 
siSSan  gesceop  him  naman  Adam,  and  of  his  anum  ribbe 

1  Lk.  10. 18. 

2  What  is  the  etymology  of  wilderness?    Cf.  35. 

3  See  66.  *  See  24. 


THE   SIX   days'   work   OF   CREATION.  199 

worhte  him  gemacan.^  Hiere  nama  wses  Eva,  ure^  ealra 
modor.  And  God  hie  Sa  gebletsode  mid  Sisse  bletsunge, 
"Weaxa^  and  beoS  gem^nigfielde,  and  gefyllaS  ^a  eor(5an, 
and  habbatS  eow  anweald  ofer  t3a  eort5an,  and  ofer  sse 
fiscum,  and  ofer  t^sem  fleogendum  fuglum,  and  ofer  eallum  5 
t^sem  nletenum  1Se  styriaS  ofer  eor(5an."  God  gesceawode 
^a  eall  his  weorc,  and  hie  wseron  swit5e  god.  And  se 
siexta  dseg  wear^  swa  ge^ndod. 

And  God  Sa  gefylde  on  'Ssem  seofo'San  daege  his  weorc 
•6e  he  worhte  on  wundorlicum  dihte,  and  hine^  'Sa  ger^ste,  ^^ 
and  ^one  dseg  gebletsode,  for-(5am-tSe  he  on  t5^m  seofot5an 
daege  geswac  his  weorces.'*  Nses  he  na  werig,  'Seah-Se  hit 
swa  awriten  sie;  ne  he  mid  ealle  ne  geswac  ^a  gesceafta 
to  edniwianne,^  ac  he  geswac  ^ses  dihtes*  Sees  deoplican 
crseftes,  swa  t^aet  he  seldcti^e  si^tSan  scieppan  nolde,  ac  ^5 
t5a  ilcan  geedniwian  o5  ^iide  Sisse  worulde,  swa-swa  ure 
Heelend  on  his  halgan  godspelle  gecwset^,^  Fater  me^is 
usque  modo  operatur,  et  ego  operor,  'Sset  is  on  Englisc, 
"Mm  Fseder  wyrcS  giet  o^  (5isne  andweardan  dseg,  and 
ic  eac  wyrce."  ^Ice  geare^  bi(5  orf  ac^nned,  and  m^nn-  20 
isce^  m^nn^  to  mannum  ac^nnede,  'Sa-Se  God  gewyrcS 
swa-swa  he  geworhte  Sa  eerran;  and  he  ne  sciep'S  nane 
sawle  butan  t^sem  cildum  anum,  and  eall  nietenu  nabbaS 
nane  sawle.^ 

1  In  Chaucer's  Sir  Thopas  we  ^  gee  184.  b. 

have:    "For   in    this   world    no  ^  gee  156.  A;.  ^  See  143^ 

womman   is  Worthy  to    be   my  ^  j^.  5.  17.  7  gee  176. 

wa^•e."     So  in  Spenser  (F.  Q.  3.  ^  Translate,  human 


11.  2):    "That  was  as  trew  in  ^  g^sed  upon  Basil  82,  where 

love  as  turtle  to  her  make.''''  he  is  combating   the   theory   of 

2  See  153.  a.  the  transmigration  of  souls. 


XIV. 


THE   SONG   OF   THE   OLEEMAK 

(Beowulf  89-100.) 

[Hrothgar,  King  of  the  Danes,  builds  a  spacious  hall  for  the  assembly  of 
his  retainers.  There,  from  time  to  time,  they  are  entertained  by  minstrelsy, 
—  sometimes  that  of  a  professional  gleeman,  and  sometimes  improvised  by 
one  of  the  warriors,  or  even  l)y  the  king  himself  (of.  Iliad  9.  1.S5-189). 

In  reading  the  poetry,  the  paragraph  of  the  Preface  relating  to  the 
retention  of  MS.  forms  should  be  borne  in  mind.] 

p^r  wses  hearpan  sweg, 
swiitol  sang  scopes.^       Saegde  se  ))e  cupe  [90] 

frumsceaft  flra       feorran  r^ccan, 
cw^'S^  ))get  se  ^Imihtiga^      eorcSan  worhte, 


1  For  the  accord  of  harp  and 
voice  see  p.  175, 1. 11,  and  Odyssey 
8.  266:  "Now  as  the  minstrel 
touched  the  lyre,  he  lifted  up  his 
voice  in  sweet  song." 

2  Thorkelin,  the  first  editor  of 
Beowulf,  already  noticed  the  re- 
semblance between  this  song  and 
that  of  lopas  in  Virgil  {JEn.  1. 
740-747),  though  this  is  Chris- 
tianized in  its  execution.  An 
earlier  sketch  of  the  same  con- 
ception v^as  that  in  the  Georgics 
(2.  475-482),   of  which   Coning- 


ton  says:  "Virgil  probably  had 
in  his  mind  here  not  only  Lucre- 
tius and  the  Greek  didactic  poets, 
such  as  Xenophanes,  Empedocles, 
and  Aratus,  but  the  legendary 
reputation  of  the  poetic  teachers 
of  early  Greece,  such  as  Orpheus 
and  Musaius.  11  is  own  notion  of 
an  ancient  bard  is  that  of  a  hiero- 
phant  of  nature.  .  .  .  The  con- 
ception belongs  not  to  Augustan 
Rome,  but  to  primitive  Greece, 
where  science  was  theological  and 
imaginative,  and  verse  the  natu- 


Cf.  p.  124,  1.  4 
200 


THE   SONG   OF   THE   GLEEMAN. 


201 


wlitebeorhtne  wang,       swa^  wseter  bebuge^^; 
ges^tte^  Sigehre|)ig       sunnan*  ond  monan* 
leoman  to  leohte       landbuendunij  [95] 

and  gefrsetwade       foldan  sceatas 
leomum^  ond  leafum;       lif  eac  gesceop 
cynna^  gehwylcum       )?ara  fe  cwice  hwyrfa]^/ 
Swa  ^a  drihtguman       dreamum  lifdon 
eadiglice.  [100] 


ral  vehicle  of  all  knowledge  and 
thought.  It  had,  however,  been 
partially  realized  by  Lucretius, 
whose  example  exercised  a  strong 
influence  on  Virgil's  imagina- 
tion." As  to  the  possibility  of 
an  Old  English  poet's  being  famil- 
iar with  Virgil,  compare  the  testi- 
mony of  Bede  (Eccl.  Hist.  4.  2) 
concerning  the  pupils  of  Theo- 
dore and  Hadrian :  "  Usque  hodie 
supersunt  de  eorum  discipulis 
qui  Latinam  Grsecamque  linguam 


seque  ut  propriam,  in  qua  nati 
sunt,  norunt." 

1  Almost  =  which.  In  archaic 
German  so  is  thus  used:  "Von 
alien,  so  da  kamen." 

2  This  phrase  is  found  again  in 
the  Andreas.     See  p.  21G,  1.  18. 

3Cf.p.l25,l.  12ff.    4  See  153.  6. 

5  See  lim,  and  174. 

6  Dependent  upon  gehwylcum 
(154.  6). 

■^  Here  ends  the  song.  The  rest 
refers  to  Hrothgar's  retainers. 


XV. 
THE   KOUT   OF  THE   ASSYRIANS. 

(From  the  Judith.) 

[Of  this  extract  Ten  Brink  has  said  {Early  English  Literature) :  "  To  a 
lucid,  well-constructed  narrative  are  joined  epic  profusion,  vigor,  and  ani- 
mation. In  the  highest  degree  effective  is  the  portrayal  of  Judith's  return 
to  Bethulia,  of  the  warlike  advance  of  the  Hebrews,  of  the  surprise  of  the 
Assyrian  camp,  the  terror  of  the  Assyrian  nobles,  who  dare  not  disturb 
their  lord  in  his  rest,  and  finally  of  the  disbandment  and  flight  of  the 
heathen  liost." 

The  portion  here  given  omits  the  discovery  of  Holofernes'  dead  body  by 
the  Assyrians.  It  is  based  upon  the  Apocryphal  book  of  Judith,  the  first 
few  verses  of  the  fifteenth  chapter,  especially  verses  2,  5,  7,  and  11.  For 
further  jiarticulars  see  my  edition  of  the  Judith. 

Attention  is  called  to  the  device  employed  for  indicating  parallel  or 
synonymous  expressions,  which  have  constituted  one  of  the  chief  diffi- 
culties of  OE.  poetry.  Tlie  device  consists  in  the  enclosure  between 
reference-letters  of  tlie  parallel  expressions,  the  synonyms  being  desig- 
nated by  the  same  letters.     For  an  example,  see  p.  204,  11.  5-7.] 

pa  wurdon  blit5e       burlisittende,^ 
syt5t5an  hi  gehyrdon^      hu  seo  halge^  sprsec      [i6o] 
ofer  heanne'*  weall.       H^re  wses  on  lustum, 
wi6  J)8es  fsestengeates  ^      folc  onette, 
5   weras  wif  somod^;       wornum  and  heapum, 
Sreatum^  and  Srymmum       ])rungon  and  urnon 
ongean  t5a  peodnes  msegtS       }>usendin8elum,         [165] 

1  See  28.  2  gee  19,  6  Here  almost  =  and.  Through- 

3  See  55.  *  See  58.  1.  out  the  following  poetry,  remem- 

5  Wiff  sometimes  governs  the       ber  25. 

genitive  ;  see  158.  "^  See  220. 

202 


THE   ROTJT   OF  THE   ASSYRIANS.  208 

ealde  ge  geonge;       segliwylcum^  weart5 

m^n  on  f5aere  medobyrig       mod^  areted,' 

sytS^an  hie  ongeaton       ]78et  wses*  ludith  cumen 

^ft  to  eSle/      and  t$a  ofostlice 
5   hie^  mid  ea^medum       in  forleton.  [170] 

pa  seo  gleawe^  het      golde  gefrsetewod^ 

hyre  'Sinenne^      pancolmode  ^ 

])dds  h^rew^^an       heafod^°  onwriSan, 

and  hyt"  to^^  behtSe^^      blodig^^  setywan 
10   l^am  burhleodum,"      M  hyre     set  beaduwe^^  ge-  [175] 
speow.^^ 

Sprsec^''  t5a  seo  seSele      to  eallum  J^am  folce:  — 

^^Her  ge  magon  sweotole,       sigerofe  hselet5/^ 

leoda  r^swan,^^      on  t^ses  la'Sestan 

heeSnes  heacSorinces       heafod  starian, 
15   Holofernus^^      unlyfigendes,^  [180] 

]>G  us  monna  msest^^       '^morSra'*  gefr^mede, 

1  Belongs  to  m^n.  i*  Construe,  and  aetywan  hyt, 

2  Subject.  blodig,   J>ain    burhleodum,   to 

3  What  is  the  normal  form  of       behSfe  ha  hyre,  etc. 

this  word  (113)?  ^^  Unusual  form  for  beadwe, 

4  Note  the  auxiliary:  ivascome,       from  beadu. 
not  had  come.  ^^  See  190. 

^  See  23.  ^'^  For  the  order  cf.  Tennyson's 

6  Ace.  sing.  line  from  the  song  in  The  Prin- 

■^  See  181.  cess :  "  Rose  a  nurse  of  ninety 

8  Modifies  gleawe.  years." 

9  Ace.  sing.  18  See  152. 

10  Object  of  onwriffan.  1^  Genitive. 

11  For  hit.  ^^  y  is  sometimes  found  for  i, 
"^^  =  as  a  sign.  as  well  as  for  ie  (19). 

13  Modifies  hyt.  21  Maest   seems   to   have    two 


204 


THE   ROUT   OF   THE   ASSYRIANS. 


sarra  "sorga*, 
yean*  wolde ; 
l^ngran  lifes,* 
^glan  moste^; 


and  |)9et  swy^or^  gyt^ 
ac  him  ne  ut5e^  God 
l^set  he  mid  IseSSum  us 
ic  him  eaklor^  o^prong'^ 


[■85] 


5    purh  Godes  fultum.       Nu  ic  ^gumena*'  gehwsene^ 
fyssa^  '^burgleoda^       biddan  wylle/ 
^randwiggendra^,       |)3et  ge  recene  eow® 
fysan^°  to  gefeohte;       sySSan  ^'frymtSa  God°, 
*=arf8est  Cyning^,       eastan  s^nde  [190] 

10  leohtne  leoman,       berat5  '^linde'^  forS, 
•^bord*^  for  breostum       and  byrnhomas, 
scire  helmas       in  scea^ena  gemong. 
fyllan^  ^folctogan®       fagum  sweordum, 
faege  *'fruraga^as^       Fynd*  syndon  eowere^^  [195] 

15    gedemed  to  deat5e       and  ge  *"dom^  agon,^- 
*'tTr*"  set  tohtan,       swa  eow  getacnod  hafaS^^ 
mihtig  Dryhten       }>urh  mine  hand." 
pa  wearS  ^snelra^  werod       snude  gegearewod, 


senses  and  two  constructions  in 
this  and  similar  passages.  In  one 
it  apparently  =  chiefest,  and  is 
construed  with  the  preceding  geni- 
tive ;  in  the  other  =  most  in  num- 
ber, and  is  construed  with  the  fol- 
lowing genitive.  Cf .  Andr.  1447 : 
"  \>aL  J>e  heardra  mSst  hearma  ge- 
fr^medan  "  ;  Beoio.  2G45  :  "for- 
ISam  he  manna  meest  meer^a 
gefr^mede"  ;  etc. 

1  See  above,  p.  203,  n.  20. 

2  See  19  ;  199.  1. 
8  See  129. 


4  See  159.  a. 
6  See  137. 

6  Neuter. 

7  See  142. 

8  LWS.  ace.  of  gehwa.  See 
154.  b. 

9  See  184.  b. 

10  Opt.  pres.  2  plur. 

11  Construe,  eowere  fynd 
syndon  gedemed,  etc. 

12  See  127.  What  two  words 
in  this  line  have  the  same  root? 
Which  is  the  derivative  ? 

13  Is  this  the  usual  form  ? 


THE    ROUT   OF   THE   ASSYRIANS. 


205 


^cenra^  to  campe;       stopon^  cynerofe  [200] 

s^cgas  and  gesit5as,       bseron  [sige])mfas, 

foron  to  gefeohte       fort5  on  gerihte, 

hseleS^  under  helmum       of^  «£ere  halgan  byrig 

5   on^  (58et  dsegred  sylf;       ^dynedan''  scildas, 

hltide  *hlummon^     paes  se  hlanca  gefeah^         [205] 
wulf  in  walde,^      and  se  wanna  hrefn, 
waelgifre  fugel:       wistan^  begen 
])3et  him^  ^a  j^eodguman       fohton^  tilian 

:o  fylle^^  on  fsegnm;       ac  him  fleah"  on  last 

earn  setes^^  georn,       tirigfet^era/^  [210] 

salowigpada^'*       sang  hildeleotS, 
hyrnedn^bba.       Stopon  ''hea^orincas^, 
^'beornas''  to  beadowe      ''bordum^^^  bet5eahte, 


1  See  st^ppan. 

2  Norn.  plur.     See  43.  9. 

3  =  from^  not  of. 

4  =  at. 

5  See  gef  eon. 

6  Is  this  the  usual  form  ? 
See  21. 

■^  Irregular  for  wiston  (126). 
8  Not  reflexive. 
^  See  iac^ncean. 

10  =  feast.  See  Iliad  22.  42 : 
"Then  quickly  would  dogs  and 
vultures  devour  him  on  the 
field." 

11  See  fleogan. 

12  See  155.  c. 

13  See  Shelley's  description  of 
the  rooks,  in  the  Lines  written 
among  the  Euganean  Hills :  — 


Gathering    round    with   wings    all 

hoar, 
Through  the  dewy  mist  they  soar. 

***** 
So  their  plumes  of  purple  grain, 
Starred  with  drops  of  golden  rain. 
Gleam,  etc. 

Perhaps  Milton  may  have  bor- 
rowed the  word  from  OE.  in  II 
Pens.  146 :  "  dewy-feathered 
sleep." 

1*  Note  the  three  similar  epi- 
thets of  the  earn. 

1^  Bord,  border.,  like  rand, 
same  meaning  (see  above,  p.  204, 
1.  7),  is  poetically  used  for  shield. 
So  Gr.  frus  (akin  to  Eng.  withe') 
meant  a)  a  circle  or  rim  made  of 
willow  ;  b)  the  outer  edge  or  rim 
of  the  shield  (like  Avtv^);  c)  the 


206  THE  ROUT   OF  THE  ASSYRIANS. 

''hwealfum  lindum*'/       fa  'Se  hwile^  ser 
^IfSeodigra^       ^edwlt*  foledon,  [215] 

hset^enra  ^hosp'^;       *'him^  fset  hearde  wear^ 
set  ^am  sescplegan*      eallum^  forgolden 

5    ^Assyrium^,       sySSan  Ebreas 
under  gu^fanum       gegan^  hsefdon^ 
to  ^am  fyrdwicum.       Hie  t5a  froralice  [220] 

leton  forS  fleogan      flana  scuras, 
•^hildensedran*^       of  hornbogan, 

10  '=strselas'=  st^dehearde ;       styrradon  hhlde 
grarae  guSfrecan,       garas''  s^ndon 
in  heardra  gemang.       ^Hddle^^  wseron  yrre,^     [225] 
^landbtiende**       lat^um  cynne, 
stopon  ^styrnmode^,       *^st^rcedferht5e*^ 

15   wr^hton  unsofte       ealdgenlt^lan^ 

round  shield  itself.     A  good  illus-       My  grained  ash  an  hundred  times 
tration  of  its  use  is  in  Euripides,  ^^^^^^  broke, 

Tro.  1196-97,  where   Hecuba  is       ^^^  '"^^^'^  ^^'^  °^°^^  ^^*^  '^^^- 

ters. 
speaking  of  Hector's  shield.  Pot- 
ter translates :  —  See  also  Iliad  22.  225  (where 
Yet  how  .sweet  to  trace  /*^^^^'  «^^'  ^^  ^^^^  ^^r  spear): 
The  mark  of  his  strong  grasp,  and  "  Stood  leaning  on  his  bronze- 
on  the  verge  pointed  (xaXKoy\d}xiPos,  like  the 
0/  thy  high  orb  (trvos)  the  sweat.  _  - ,        ^      t>-        7^     o-r^ox 

aergescod     of     Beowulf    2778) 

1  The  material  for  the  weapon,  ashen-spear."    For  ^scplega  cf. 
linden  for  shield.  c  sword-play.' 

2  Ace.  sing.:  for  a  time.  5  Agrees  with  him  (164.  h). 

3  Dependent  on  edwit.  e  Note  this  pluperfect,  formed 

4  On  ash  as  the  designation  of  ^^^;^  ^n  auxiliary. 

a  spear,  see  Shakespeare,  Coriol.  7  what  is  the  meaning  of  the 

3.  5.  112-115:  —  g^j._  jj^  jy[Q(j  j^jjg  g^j,^^  ^ 

Let  me  twine  ^ 

Mine  arms  about  that  body,  where 

against  »  Ace.  plur.  (168). 


THE  ROUT   OF  THE   ASSYRIANS. 


207 


medowerige  ^ ;       mundum^  brugdon 
scealcas  of  sceat^um      scirmseled  swyrd^ 
^cgum  gecoste/       slogon  eornoste 
Assiria^      *  oretmsecgas  ^, 
5   *nit5hycgende®,       nanne  ne  sparedon 
paes  ^h^refolces^      heanne®  ne  ricne 
^cwicera  manna*"      fe  hie  ofercuman  mihton. 
******** 

maegeneacen^  folc, 
10   ])8es  li^riges^*^  Iseg 
on  •gam  sigewonge, 
wulfum  to  willan/^ 
fuglum  to  frofre. 


[230] 


[235] 


Him^  mon^  feaht  on  last, 
ot$  se  mgesta  dsel 
hilde  gesseged 
sweordum^^  geheawen, 
and  eac  wselgifrum 
Flugon  Sa  t5e  lyfdon 
latSra  lindwiggendra.^^     Him  on  laste  for 
15    sweot  Ebrea^"^       ''sigor^^  geweorSod^ 

^dome  gedyrsod*^;       him^^  feng  '^Dryhten  God*' 
fsegre  on^^  fultum/^       ^Frea  gelmihtig*'. 
^HV  tSa  fromlice       fagnm  swyrdum 
•^liseleS  higerofe^       h^rpaS^^  worhton 

1  Ace.  plur. ;  agrees  with  eald-  1°  See  44.  2. 


[295] 


[300] 


genid'Iaii. 

2  See  174. 

3  Ace.     plur. ;     irregular    for 
sweord. 

^  Agrees    with    swyrd.       See 
174.  d. 

^  Gen.  plur. 

^  From  hean,  not  heah. 

7  The  Assyrians. 

8  See  89.  e. 

9  See  147. 


11  See  174.  c. 

12  —  (^as)  a  delight  to  wolves. 
See  161.  2. 

13  Depends  on  gPa. 
1*  Gen.  plur. 

15  Inst,  without  ending. 

16  The  Hebrews. 

^~  =  to  (their)  help.  For  the 
construction  see  164.  e. 

18  Irregular  for  h^repaS"  (for 
-psetS). 


208  THE   ROUT   OF   THE   ASSYRIANS. 

J)urh  la^ra  gemong,       linde  heowon, 

scildburh  scseron:       '^sceotend^  w^ron  [305] 

giiSe  gegr^mede,       *^gumaii  Ebreisce'^; 

fegnas  on  Sa  tid       ])earle  gelyste^ 
5   gargewinnes.     pser  on  greot  gefeoll 

se  hyhsta^'  d^l       heafodgerimes 

"Assiria*       ealdorduguSe,^  [310] 

*lat5an  cynnes*^:       lythwon  becom 

cwicera"*  to  cy^t5e.     Cirdon^  cynerofe, 
10   wiggend^  on  wiSertrod,       ^'waelsc^P  oninnan,^ 

''reocende  hriSw'';       rum^  wses  to  nimanne 

londbiiendum       on  Sam  '^laSestan*',  [315] 

hyra  ^ealdfeondum       unlyfigendum*^ 

heolfrig  h^rereaf, —       hyrsta^  scyne,^ 
15   bord  and  brad  swyrd,       brune  helmas, 

dyre^  madmas.       Hsefdon  domlTce 

on  Sam  folcst^de       fynd'-*  oferwunnen  [320] 

eSelweardas,^**       ealdli^ttende^ 

swyrdum  asw^fede'^;       hie  on  swaSe  r^ston, 
20   ))a  Se  him  to  life       laSost  wgeron 

cwicera  cynna.       Da  seo  cneoris  eall, 

1  See  190.            ^  gee  19.  for  the  natives  to  capture  from 

8  Either   dependent    upon,    or  the  most  hated  ones   (laffestan 

parallel  to,  heafodgerimes.  for  -um) . 

4  Dependent  on  lythwon.  ^  These  nouns  are  all  ace.  plur. 

5  For  ig  is  sometimes  found,  ^  Ace.  plur.  i*^  Nom.  plur. 
as  here,  igg.  What  does  this  "  Supply  haefdon.  With  a- 
signify  ?  sw^bban,  in  the  sense  of  '  slay/ 

6  Governs  waelsc^l  and  hraew;  cf.  the  similar  use  of  the  Lat. 
the  latter  is  an  ace.  plural.  sopire  and  the  Gr.  evvd^eiv  (the 

"'  Translate,  there  was  a  chance       latter  in  Sophocles). 


THE   ROUT   OF   THE   ASSYRIANS.  209 

mseg^a  m^rost,       anes  mont5es  fyrst/  [325] 

wlanc^  wundenlocc^       wagon  ^  and  laeddon^ 

to  tSsere  beorhtan  byrig       Bethuliam 

helmas  and  hupseax,*       hare  byrnan, 
5   giiSsceorp  gumena       golde  gefrsetewod, 

maerra^  madma       J)onne  mon  ^nig  [330] 

as^cgan  msege       searoj^oncelra^; 

eal  ]?8et  Sa  t5eodguman       j^rymme  geeodon, 

cene^  under  cumblum       on  compwige 
10   )mrh  Itidithe^       gleawe  lare 

msegS^  modigre.       ^Hi*  to  mede^  hyre  [335] 

of  •Sam  sT-Sfate^^       sylfre^^  brohton 

*eorlas  sescrofe*       Holof ernes  ^^ 

sweord  and  swatigne^^  helm,      swylce  eac  side  byrnan, 
15    gerenode  readum  golde,      and  eal  J)8et  se  rinca  baldor 

swiSmod"  sinces^^  ahte       o6t5e  sundoryrfes/^         [340] 

beaga^^  and  beorhtra  maSma,^^      hi  ]7set  J^sere  beorhtan 
idese 

ageafon  gearoj^oncolre. 

1  See  170.  ^  See  Mayhew,   OE.   Plionol- 

2  Agreeing  with  cneoris.  ogy^  §  365. 

3  See  wegan,  and  189.  2.  10  See  43.  2;    here  the   a  in- 
*  Ace.  plur.  trades  even  into  the  sing. 

5  Comp.  and  gen.  plur.;  see  60.  11  For  self  re  (166). 
2.     The  position  would  seem  to           12  Genitive. 

require  mterran  madmas.  ^^  Lit.   sweaty,   but   in   poetry 

6  Depends  on  senig.  swat  usually  =  blod. 

■^  Modifies,    or   is    parallel    to,  ^^  Agrees  with  baldor. 

ffeodguman.  ^  Gen.  sing.  i^  Dependent  on  eal. 


v^ 


XVI. 
SELECTIONS   FROM   THE  i^NDREAS. 

[Tlie  Andreas  is  a  poem  of  about  1722  lines  (the  numbering  differs 
according  to  the  edition).  Jacob  Grimm  considered  it  and  the  IJlene  to 
be  (Preface  to  his  edition,  p.  iv)  "  the  most  ancient  and  instructive  pro- 
ductions of  Old  English  poetry,  next  to  the  Beovralf."  With  the  help  of 
Thilo,  Grimm  discovered  (pp.  xvi  ff.)  its  source  to  be  the  Acts  of  Andrew 
and  Matthew,  written  in  Greek,  and  now  published  in  Tischendorf's  Acta 
Apostolornm  Apocrypha,  pp.  132-16().  Besides  this  poem,  there  is  a  prose 
version  which  may  be  profitably  consulted,  and  which  is  to  be  found  in 
Bright's  valuable  Anglo-Saxon  Reader,  pp.  113-128.  It  is  believed  by  many 
scholars  that  both  these  versions  were  made  from  a  Latin  translation  of 
the  Greek  original,  but  this  cannot  be  said  to  have  been  demonstrated, 
at  least  for  the  poem.  The  Greek  original  is  discussed  at  length  by  Lip- 
sius,  Die  apoknjphen  Apostelf/eschichten  und  Apostellegenden,  pp.  546  ff. 
A  portion  of  the  Greek,  corresponding  to  lines  235-349,  is  printed  in 
Appendix  III. 

According  to  Lipsius,  the  scene  of  the  poem  is  the  northern  coast  of 
the  Black  Sea;  though  the  Old  English  poet  had  Africa  in  mind  (cf.  1. 198), 
perhaps  because  the  region  about  Colchis  had  by  some  been  called  the 
inner  or  second  Ethiopia.  The  Marmedonia  (1.  30)  or  Mermedonia  of  our 
text  has  been  identified  with  Myrmecium,  Gr.  Mvp/xriKLov,  near  the  modern 
Yenikale,  in  the  Crimea.  Here  are  supposed  to  have  dwelt  the  Cimme- 
rians of  Homer,  and  here,  in  classic  times,  were  settled  various  Scythian 
tribes.  Of  the  Tauri  (Crimea  was  anciently  the  Tauric  Chersonesus) 
Herodotus  says  (4.  103) :  "  They  sacrifice  to  the  virgin  all  who  suffer 
shipwreck,  and  any  Greeks  they  meet  with  driven  on  their  coasts,  in  the 
following  manner:  having  performed  the  preparatory  ceremonies,  they 
strike  the  head  with  a  club ;  some  say  they  throw  the  body  down  from  a 
precipice.  .  .  .  The  Tauri  themselves  say  that  this  deity  to  whom  they 
sacrifice  is  Iphigenia,  daughter  of  Agamemnon"  (cf.  Euripides'  Iphigenia 
in  Tauris,  and  Goethe's  Iphigenie).  This  reputation  clung  to  the  region, 
for  Tertullian  says  {Adv.  Marcionem  1.  1) :  "Pontum  ferocissimas  gentes 
inhabitare,  parentum  cadavera  cum  pecudibus  casa  convivio  convorantes." 
Nor  was  the  evil  fame  of  the  district  diminished  by  the  fact  that  Huns 
were  settled  here  from  the  fourth  to  the  sixth  century,  then  Goths,  and 
afterward  Tartars. 

210 


SELECTIONS   FROM   THE   ANDREAS.  211 

The  story  of  the  poem,  up  to  the  beginning  of  our  extract,  is  briefly 
this :  St.  Matthew  was  in  imminent  danger  among  the  Mermedonians,  a 
race  of  cannibals.  In  this  extremity  God  appears  to  Andrew,  and  exhorts 
him  to  go  to  Matthew's  assistance,  which,  after  some  reluctance,  he  pre- 
pares to  do. 

Bits  of  translation  and  interesting  comments  (not  always  correct), 
embracing  much  of  our  extract,  are  given  by  Brooke,  Hist.  Early  Eng. 
Lit.  pp.  169  ff.,  413  ff.] 

Conversation  between  Andrew  and  the  Sea-Captain. 

Gewat^  him  ))a  *on  uhtan*      ^mid  serdaege*         [235] 
ofer  sandhleoSu       to  sses  faru^e 
})rTste  on  ge]>ance,       ond  his  fegnas  mid, 
gangan^  on  greote ;       garsecg^  hlynede,* 
5   beoton  brimstreamas.       Se  beorn  wses  on^  hyhte/ 
sy^San  he  on  warut5e       widfseSme^  scip  [240] 

modig  gemette.       pa  com  ^morgen  torht'', 
^beacna  beorhtost^,       ofer  breomo  sneowan, 
halig  of  heolstre ;       heofoncandeF  blac^ 

1  See  184.  a.            ^  See  199.  1.  chafe,  rage;  the  -ric  as  in  Ger. 

3  Sweet  {Engl.   Stud.  2.  314-  wuterich;  so  that  gasric  would 

316)  explains  this  word  as  being,  =  the  rager. 

not  a  compound  of  gar  and  s^cg  *  Brooke  translates  this  line  : 

(=  spear  +  man,   according  to  "  Trampled     o'er    the     shingle. 

Bos  worth,  as  if  a  personification  Thundered  loud  the  ocean." 

like  Neptune  with   his   trident;  ^  ^bsltIj  =  joyful,  rejoiced.   Gr. 

or  =  spear  +  sedge,  with  Leo,  '  rejoiced  with  very  great  joy.' 

the    tips    of    the    waves    being  6  Poetic  license ;    Gr,  '  a  little 

likened  to  spears),  but  as  aris-  ship.'    Cf.  the  Homeric  ko^Xt;  j't/Gs. 

ing  by  metathesis  from  the  Runic  "^  =  the  sun.     Of  '  candle '  the 

word  gasric  (cf.  the  name  of  the  New  Eng.  Diet,  says:    "One  of 

Vandal  king,   Gaisaricus),  as   if  the    Latin  words    introduced   at 

gas  +  ric.    The  gas-  would  cor-  the  English  Conversion,  and  long 

respond  to  Old  Norse  geisa,  to  associated  chiefly  with  religious 
8  See  blican. 


212  SELECTIONS    FROM   THE   ANDREAS. 

ofer  lagoflodas.       He  t58er  *'lidweardas'^ 
frymlice  ])ry       '^j^egnas*^  geseah/  [245] 

''modiglice  m^nn'^,       on  m^rebate 
sittan  siSfrome,       swylce  hie  ofer  see  comon.^ 
5   p8et^  wses  Drihten  sylf,       duge^a'*  Wealdend/ 
ece,  selmihtig,       mid  his  ^ngliim  twam. 
W^ron  '^hie'^  on  gescirphm       ^ scipf erendmn  ^,    [250] 
•^eorlas*^  onllce       *'ealItSendum*', 
])onne  hie  on  flodes  fae^m^       ofer  feorne  weg 

10  on  cald  wseter       ceolum^  hlcaS.^ 

Hie  t5a  gegrette       se  t5e  on  greote  stod, 
fiis^  on*  faro^e       fraegn,  reordade  : — '■  [255] 

"Hwanon  comon^  ge       ceoluin  iT^an, 
macraeftige  m^nn,       on  m^rej^issan 

15    ane'*'  tegflotan?       hwanon  eagorstream 
ofer  y^a  gewealc       eowic^^  brohte?" 
Him  )>a  ondsvvarode       ^Imihti^^  God,  [260] 

swa^"*  past  ne  wiste       se  'fie  })8es  wordes  bad," 

observances.   .   .   .      This   sacred  ^  =  expanse,  originally  embrac- 

character  of  the  word  bears  on  ing  arms^  embrace. 

the  OE.  poetic  compounds."     Cf,  ^  Not  keel,  but  ship. 

Bom.  and  Jul.  S.  5.  9.:  "Night's  "^  The  radical  meaning  is,  to 

candles    are    burnt    out."       See  move  in  any  swift  or  impetuous 

also   Shakespeare's  metaphorical  manner. 

sense  of  lamp,  and  cf.  the   Gr.  »  _  ready,    eager  for.      One 

XafMwds,    Lat.    lampas,    in    poet-  would  expect  the  ace.  farolff. 

ical  use.  9  See  200.  1 .           ^^  Inst.  sing. 

1  Not  in  MS.  11  See  81.  1.             12  gge  28. 

2  =  had  come.  1^  =  in  such  a  manner.     One 

3  What  is  the    antecedent   of  is  inclined  to  substitute  fSenh,  as 
}>8et  ?  making  better  sense. 

*  =  Lord  of  hosts.  1*  See  bidan,  and  156.  I. 


SELECTIONS   FROM   THE    ANDKEAS.  213 

hwaet  se  manna  wses       meSelhegendra,^ 
J)e  lie  f eer  on  waroSe       wif5]?ingo(ie :  — 
"We  of  Marmedonia       mgegtSe  syndon      ^ 

,    feorran  gef^rede;       us  mid  fiode  bser  [265] 

5   on  hranrade^       ^heahstefn^  naca*, 

''snellic  seemearh*'^        sntide^  bewunden,^ 
otS-fset  we  fissa  leoda      land  gesohton 
wsere^  bewrecene,       swa  us  wind  fordraf." 

■^   Him  ]?a  Andreas       eaSmod  oncw8et5 :  —     ^ "        [270] 
^10   "Wolde  ic  J)e  biddan,       feh''  ic  fe  ^'beaga^  lyt 
^sincweorSunga'^       syllan  meahte, 

''  pset  ]?u  us  gebrohte       ^brante^  ceole'^, 
•'hea  hornscipe*^      ofer  hwseles  eSel 
on  feere  msegtSe ;       bi^S^  t5e  meortS^^  wit5  God,     [275] 
-15   ))8et  ))u  us  on  lade      liSe  weorSe.'^ 
^-   Eft  him  ondswarode      seSelinga  Helm^^  /  ^"^  „  .. 

of^^  ytSlide,       ^ngla  Scippend :  — 
"Ne  magon  |?^r  gewunian      widferende,  ' 


1  Cf.  the  Homeric  /i^poi//  as  an  ^  =  encompassed  with 
epithet,  and  in  later  use  as  an  swift. 

equivalent,  of  men,  mortals  (so  ^  ^^  unusual  word  for  ocean. 

II.  2.  285),  and  see  p.  222,  1.  9.  ^  jn  this  poem,  ea  (ea)  not 

2  With  this  sense  of  rad,  road,  seldom  becomes  e  (e),  especially 
may  be  compared  the  Gr.  k4\€v6os,  before  palatal  consonants  (10). 
7r6/)os,  as  in  the  Homeric  IxOvSevra  ^  See  174.  a. 

K^Xevda  (Od.  3.  177),  fishy  roads  ;  ^  Future  sense,  as  frequently 

see  also  ^schylus'  irSpov  oluvQv  with  biff. 

(Prom.  281),  track  of  birds.  10  Anglian  form  for  WS.  ined, 

3  Cf .  the  Gr.  vxl/lirpiippos.  related  to  Gr.  fiiadbs   (Mayhew, 

4  Cf.  Od.  4.  708 :  "  Swift  ships,  OE.  Phon.  §  365). 

that  serve  men  for  horses  on  the  ^  Not  helmet,  but  protector. 

sea"  (a\6s  tTTTroi).    See  p.  226, 1. 2.  12  _  yv^m,  as  often. 


214  SELECTIONS    FROM   THE   ANDREAS. 

ne  ])£er  ^Ipeodige       eardes^  brucat5,  [280] 

\     ah  in  psere  ceastre       cwealm^  j^rowia^, 

J)a  Se  feorran  fyder       feorh^  gelseda])^; 

^nd  pa  wilnasf*  nu       ofer  widne  m^re, 
5    ])ddt  «u  on  ])a  f^egSe       ])ine  feore  spilde?^ 

Him  ))a  Andreas       agef  ondsware  :  — '  [285] 

"Usic  lust  hw^te(5^       on  ]>Si  leodmearce,   "^ 

mycel  modes  hiiit^       to  j^sere  meeran  byrig,  . 

peoden'  leofesta,       gif  ])u  us  jmie^  wilt      7 
10  on  m^refarot5e       miltse  gecySan." 

Him  ^ndswarode       ^ngla  peoden,  /  [290] 

/    IN^^regend'-'  fira,       of  nacan^''  stefne: —     ^ 

^^We  tSe  estlice       mid  us  willaS 

f^rigan^  freolice       ofer  fisces"  baeS'^ 
15   efne  to  ))am  lande,       }>8er^^  ]>e  lust  myne^     -v^aI 

to  ges^canne,       sy^8an^^  ge  eowre  [295] 

"gafulrsedenne*       agifen  habba^, 

"sceattas  gescrifene*;       swa  eow  scipweardas 

ara^*  ofer  yt5bord       unnan  willa^." 
20   Him^^  J)a  ofstlice       Andreas  wit5, 

winepearfende,       wordum  mselde :  —  [300] 

1  See  166.  e.  en  from  dryht ;  cf .  cyning,  with 

2  Ace.  a  different  ending,  from  cyn. 

3  Periphrastic  for  '  go.'  ^  Agrees  with  miltse. 

*  Elliptic,    like    Shakespeare's  ^  gee  18.                w  Gen.  sing. 

(M.  W.  3.  2.  88)  "I  will  to  my  n  Kenning  (215)  for  'ocean.' 

honest  knight."  1^  Almost  =  that.    Cf.  there  in 

5  A  following  verb  of  motion  Mod.  Eng.  thereto. 
understood.  i3  _  ^g  ^qq^^  ^g 

6  Here  =  bent.  "  MS.  aras.     See  156.  i. 

7  Formed  from  fSeod,  as  dryht-  1^  Governed  by  wifS. 


SELECTIONS    FROM   THE   ANDREAS.  215 

"Nsebbe  ic  fseted  gold       ne  feohgestreon, 

welan  ne  wiste/       ne  wira  gespann, 

landes^  ne   locenra  beaga,^  ^    ))8et   ic   fe   msege  *lust* 
ahw^ttan,  a/'.     •  *  • 

"willan*  in  worulde,       swa  M  worde  bee  wist.'*" 
5   Him  ))a  beorna  Breogo,       ])Sdv^  he  on  bolcan  sset,    [305] 

ofer  warot5a^  geweorp^       wit^j^ingode : -d    •  . 

"Hu  gewearS  ye  }>aes/v      wine  leofesta, 

t5aet  (5u  ssebeorgas       secan  woldes,^ 

m^restrearaa  gemet,       maSmum  bedeeled 
10  ofer  cald  cleofu^       ceoles^*'  neosan  ?  [310] 

Nafast  ])e  to  frofre       on  farotJstrsete 

hlafes  wiste       ne  hlutterne^^ 

drync  to  dugot5e^^?       Is  se  drohtatS  Strang 

)7am  ye  lagolade       lange^^  cunna]?." 
15    Da  him  Andreas       tSurh  ondsware  [315] 

1  Not  the  verb.  does  not  mean  wave.     I  would 

2  The  construction  suddenly  suggest  the  smiting  of  the  shores, 
changes  to  the  genitive,  as  if  perhaps  meaning  the  plunging  of 
some  word  like  aht,  aught,  had  the  breakers. 

been    introduced.     The    poet   is  '^  Anticipatory  of  the  relative 

apparently    trying    to    adapt    to  sentence,  )?aet  J>u,  etc. 

this  place  the  landes  and.  loc-  ^  On  the  omission  of  final  t, 

enra   beaga   of    Beowulf   2296,  see  95. 

there  a  partitive  genitive.  ^  See  cllf,  and  20. 

3  Now  only  existing  as  bee,  a  i"^  See  156.  m. 

nautical  term  for  a  ring  or  hoop  11  An  instance  of  an  originally 

of  metal.      See  New  Eng.  Diet.  long  vowel  rendered  short  by  the 

s.v.  Bee"^.  gemination  of  the  following  con- 

*  See  becweiSfan.  sonant. 

5  Nearly  =  from  where.  12  The    Greek    has    5iaTpo<pT^v, 

6  Kemble  translates,  the  dash-  sustenance  (p.  240). 
ing  of  the  waves;    but  waroiaf  i^  ^dj. 


216  SELECTIONS   FROM   THE  ANDREAS.  ^     j 

WIS  on  gewitte,       wordhord^  onleac^:  — 
fu,  "Ne  gedafena^^  pe,       nu  J^e  Dryhten  geaf^ 

welan  ond  wiste       ond  woruldspede, 
tSaet  Su  ond  s ware  ^       mid  oferhygdum, 
5   sece  sarcwide^;       selre  biS  geghwam  'v^—m,   ,    [320] 
]78et  he  eat5medum^       ^llorfusne 
oncnawe  cuSlice,       swa  J^set  Crist  behead,  ' 
peoden  j^rymfsest.       We  his  fegnas^  synd, 
gecoren  to  c^mpum.       He  is  Cyning  on®  riht,® 

10   Wealdend  ond  Wyrhta       wuldorj)rymmes,  [325] 

an  ece  God      eallra  gesceafta,  ,-^ 

swa  he  ealle  befeh^      anes^  ^crsefte*  ,  < 

hefon^^  ^nd  eorSan       *halgum  mihtum*, 
sigora  selost."      He  t5set  sylfa  cwse^, 

15   Faeder  folca^^  gehwaes,       ^nd  us  feran  het         [330] 
geond  ginne  grund       gasta^  streonan:  — 
^Fara^S"  nu  geond  ealle      eor^an  sceatas^ 
emne  swa  wide       swa  wseter  bebuget5/^ 

I,    ^    : 

1  That  is,  spoke.         2  gee  190.  ^^  One  is  inclined  to  substitute 

8  Translate,  hath  given.  s^Uend,  bestrncer,  which   occurs 

*  Ace.  sing.  three  times  with  sigora  in  the 

s  Inst,  sing.,  parallel  with  mid  poetry,  whereas  sigora  selost  is 

oferhygdum  (174).  otherwise  unknown. 

6  Perhaps  adv.  (72).  12  Dependent  on  gehwaes. 

7  When  did  the   word   thane  i^  See  156.  n ;  199.  1. 

cease  to  be   employed   in    liter-  i-*  An    interesting   parallel    to 

ature  ?  this  paraphrase  (a  free  one  even 

8  'Either = rightfully,  by  rights,  in  the  Greek  original)  of  Matt, 
or  perhaps  an  ad].  onriht  =  legiti-  10.  1  ff,  is  found  in  the  poem  of 
mate,  rightful.  Christ,  480-489. 

®  =  sole,  lit.  of  one  (alone).  ^^  MS.  sceattas. 

10  Unusual  for  heofon.  is  cf.  p.  201,  1.  1. 


SELECTIONS   FROM  THE  ANDREAS.  217 


o'S^e  st^dewangas       strsete^  gelicga}?^; 
bodia^  sefter  burgum       beorhtne  geleafan  [335] 

ofer  foldan  faeSm;       ic  eow  freotSo  healde.^ 
Ne  Surf  an*  ge  on  j^a  fore       frsetwe  Isedan/ 
5   gold  ne  seolfor;       ic  eow  goda  gehwses® 
on  eowerne  agenne  dom       est  ahw^tte/' 
Nu  •Sti  seolfa^  miht       slt5  userne^  [340] 

/  H       gehyran  hyge}?ancoP^ ;       ic  sceal  hrat5e  cunnan, 
hwset  Sti  us  to^^  duguSum^^       gedon  wille.'' 

10  Him  pa  ondswarode       ece^^  Dryhten:  — 

"Gif  ge  syndon  fegnas       fses^^  ]?e  J)rym  ahof 
ofer  middangeard,       swa  ge  me  s^cga]?,  [345] 

ond  ge  geheoldon"       pset  eow  se  Halga  bead, 
|)onne  ic  eow  mid  gefgan       f^rian  wille 

15   ofer  brimstreamasj       swa  ge  benan^^  sint." 
pa  in  ceol  stigon^^       collenfyrht5e/^ 
^llenrofe;       seghwylcum  wearS  [350] 

on  m^refarot5e       mod  geblissod. 
Da  ofer  ySa  geswing       Andreas  ongann 

20   m^reliSendum^^       miltsa^^  biddan^ 

I  Ace.  sing.  2  _  itorder.  fits;  Gr.  tt]v  (piXavOpojiriav,  {as  a) 
3  Future  sense.                                kindness.  ^^  MS.  ^ce. 

*  For  aCurfon  (131).  i^  _  of  that  one,  of  him. 

^  Not    lead,    but    carry  (Gr.           i*  Translate,    have    kept,    oh- 

jSao-rd^ere).  served. 

6  Dependent  on  est.  i^  =  petitioners. 

'^  =  supply;   not  the  normal  i^  So  in  Latin:  ascencZerenavem. 

sense  of  the  word.  i'^  -fyrhlSCe  irregular  for -ferhsaCe. 

8  See  self,  and  21.  ^^  =  for  the  seafarers. 

9  See  81. 1.  19  See  156.  h. 

10  Agrees  with  Sfa.  20  Biddan    here    takes    three 

II  =  for  (our)  benefit,  lit.  be7ie-       cases  after  it.     Explain. 


218  SELECTIONS   FROM  THE   ANDREAS. 

• 
wuldres  Aldor,       ond  ]7us  wordum  cwse'S  :  — 

"Forgife  J?e  ''Dryhten*       domweor^unga —        [355] 

willan  in  worulde,       ond  in  wuldre  bleed  — 

"Meotud  manncynnes ",       swa  «u  me  hafast^ 

5   on  Jjyssum  sl6f8ete       sybbe  gecyt5ed!" 

The  Voyage.  —  Storm  at  Sea. 

Gesset  him  J^a  se  halga      Holmwearde^  neah, 
setJele  be  ^t5elum.       ^fre  ic  ne  hyrde  [360] 

|)on^  cymlicor      ceol  gehladenne* 
heahgestreonum.       ^'HaeleS''  insgeton, 

10  ^peodnas**     frymfulle,       ^pegnas^  wlitige. 
Da  reordode       rice  peoden, 

ece,  aelmihtig,       heht''  his  ''^ngel*  gan,  [365] 

■mserne  magu|)egn*,       ^nd  m^te  syllan,^ 
frefran  feasceaftne^      ofer  flodes  wylm, 

15    ))8et  hie  )>e®  6aS^  mihton       ofer  yt5a  ge|>ring 
drohtaS  adreogan.       pa  ''gedrefed**  wearS, 
^'onhrered''  hwselm^re;       hornfisc  plegode,  [370] 

glcVP"  geond  garsecg,       ond  se  griSga  msew 

1  Is  this  the  normal  form  ?  Andreas  for  the  infinitive  of  Beo- 

2  Possibly     (with     Grein)     =       wulf.     The   former  construction 
guardian  of  the  tiller  or  helm ;       is  unusual. 

but  see  Vocabulary.  ^  Anglian  (probably  identical 

2  =  than  that,  inst.  of  ffaet.  with  the  original)  form  for  het 

*  This    sentence   seems  to  be  (HO). 

imitated  from  Beow.  38-39: —  ^  For  s^llan. 

Ne  hyrde  ic  cymlicor  ceol  gegyrwan  "^  Meaning  Andrew,  though  the 

hildewaepnum  and  hea^owjedum.  next  line  has  hie. 

Note  that  the  past  participle  is  »  For  fSy  (84) .          ^  j'or  ieff. 

substituted  in  the  passage  from  10  gee  glidan. 


SELECTIONS   FROM  THE  ANDREAS. 


219 


wselgifre^  wand;       wedercandel  swearc,^ 
windas  weoxon,^       wsegas  grundon, 
streamas  styredon,       str^ngas  gurron,* 
wsedo  gew^ette^;       wseter^gsa  stod^ 
preata  ))ry^um.       pegnas  wurdon 


[375] 


1  Agrees  with  maew. 

2  See  sweorcan. 

»  There  is  no  hint  of  any  ex- 
traordinary commotion,  much  less 
of  a  storm,  in  the  original.  Of  all 
this  long  description  there  is  noth- 
ing except,  "  They  were  troubled 
because  of  the  sea."  Brooke  says 
(p.  416):  "The  storm  is  now  de- 
scribed in  words  that  come,  one 
after  another,  short,  heavy,  and 
springing,  like  the  blows  of  the 
waves,  and  the  gusts  of  wind.  • 
We  know  as  we  read  that  the 
writer  had  seen  the  thing." 

*  See  georran. 

^  Part  of  Baskervill's  note,  in 
his  edition,  is :  "  waedo  gewaette, 
the  wet  weeds  (sails);  wet  with 
waters,  Kemble ;  loaves  swelled, 
Grein ;  replehatur  aquis,  vadum 
madefiehat,  Grimm ;  w^edo  ge- 
waette is  in  apposition  with 
strengas."  Wsedo  (with  short 
se)  might  be  nom.  (ace.)  plur.  of 
W86d,  sea.  But  the  phrase  is 
obscure. 

6  A  peculiar  use  of  standan, 
to  indicate  motion  rather  than 
rest.     In  Mod.  Eng.  this  general 


sense  is  represented  by  phrases 
like  *  stand  back,'  ♦  stand  off  from 
shore,'  'stand  up,'  'stand  out,' 
etc.  In  OE.  poetry,  standan 
is  frequently  used  with  ^ge  or 
^gesa  (similarly  in  ON.) ;  thus 
in  Ps.  104.  33  (105.  38),  cecidit 
timor  eo7^um  super  eos :  him  J^ter 
^gesa  .  .  .  stod,  where  the  King 
James  version  has,  the  fear  of 
them  fell  upon  them.  The  trans- 
formation of  this  idiom  into  stand 
in  awe  of  is  interesting.  Note 
that  the  dative  is  still  retained  in 
this  quotation,  of  about  a.d.  1380 
{Sir  Ferumbras  408) :  ' '  Of  whame 
7nen  stondeS  aye"  [i.e.  awe]. 
However,  men  being  eventually 
understood  as  nom.  in  such  a 
sentence  as  the  last  (cf,  Towneley 
3Iysteries,  305  [ab.  1460]:  "/ 
stand  great  aghe  " ) ,  in  was  sup- 
plied before  awe,  as  in  this  from 
Lydgate  (ab,  1413):  "Of  theyre 
lord  and  god  to  stande  in  awen." 
See  New  Eng.  Diet.  s.v.  awe. 
The  Scandinavian  influence  in 
Middle  English  confirmed  the 
idiom,  and  assisted  in  its  devel- 
opment. 


220  SELECTIONS   FROM   THE   ANDREAS. 

acolraode ;       senig  ^  ne  ^  wende/ 
fset  he  lifgende      land  begete, 
fara^  ]>e  mid  Andreas       on  eagorstream 
ceol  gesohte.       Naes'^  him  cut5  ]>a  gyt,  [380] 

5  hwa  ))am  sseflotan  sund^  wisode. 
Him  ]>Si  ''se  halga*  on  holmwege 
ofer  argeblond  ''Andreas*  pa  git, 
''Jjegn  feodenhold,''  ))anc  gessegde 
rTcum  E^sboran,       )>a  he  gereordod  wses  :  —     [385] 

10   "De  fissa  swaesenda^      ''sot^faest  Meotud^ 

''lifes  Leohtfruma**      lean  forgilde,  "' "^      > 

•'weoruda  Waldend,**      9nd  ]?e  wisf  gife 
heofonlicne  hlaf,       swa  t5u  '^hyldo''  wi^  me 
ofer  firigendstream^       "^freode*^  gecySdest!  [390] 

15   Nu  synt  ge|)reade       *^J)egnas  mine*^, 

^geonge  gut5rincas^;       ^garsecg^  hlymmetS,     >fl  '■=^' 
®geofon^  geotende^;       grund^^  is  onhrered/^ 
deope^^  gedrefed;       *'dugu'S^"  is  gesw^nced, 

1  Translate,  no  one.       ^  See  4.  syS^an  flod  ofsloh, 

3  Dependent  on  Snig.  S^^^^  geotende 

*  For  lines  4-14  the  Greek  has :  (=  streaming  sea  ;  rushing  sea, 

"  Andrew  answered  and  said  unto  Garnett ;  gurgling  currents,  Hall ; 

Jesus,  not  knowing  that  it  was  rushing  ocean,  Earle). 

Jesus,  The  Lord  give  thee  heav-  ^^  Probably  =  sea  ;  an  unusual 

enly  bread  from  his  kingdom."  sense.     Cf.  p.  223,  1.  1. 
^  =  either  oceaw  or  cowrse,  prob-  11  See  p.  218, 11.  16, 17. 

ably  the  latter ;  cf .  p.  226,  1.  2.  12  Adv. 

6  See  153.  e.  i^  Related  to  Ger.  tugend  (cf . 

7  =  as  food.  30),  OE.  dugan  (128),  and  Mod. 

8  For  firgenstream.  Eng.  doughty.    There  is  an  inter- 
^  MS.  heofon ;  but  this  seems  esting  OE.  phrase,  duguS'   and 

like  an  echo  of  5eoio.  1690-91 : —       geogulgf    (cf.    Beow.    160,    etc.). 


SELECTIONS  FROM  THE  ANDREAS.  221 

/     ^modigra  msegen*"      myclum^  gebysgod."  [395] 

2    Him  of  holme  ^  oncw8et5      hselet^a  Scyppend: —  / 

/    "Lset  nu  gef<^rian      "^flotan*  tise^ne 

/   *lid*  to  lande      ofer  lagufsesten,    ;i. 
9..  5   ond  })onne  gebldan^      beornas  |)Tne,   ^ 

aras  on  earde,       hwaenne''  pu  ^ft  cypae."  [400] 

Edre^  him  |)a  ^eorlas^  agefan^  ondsware, 
^fegnas  })rohthearde  ^ — Jjafigan'^  ne  woldon, 
tSaet  hie  forleton      set  lides  stefifaii^  - 

10  leofne  lareow,       Qnd  him^  land  curon  — 

"Hwider  hweorfat5  we      hlafordlease,  [405] 

geomormode,       Gode^*^  orfeorme, 
synnum"  wunde,       gif  we  swTcat5  fe^^? 
We^^  bio's  *^lat5e*'      on  landa  gehwam, 

15   f oleum  ''fracoSe'^,       fonne  fira  beam, 

^llenrofe,       aeht^''  besitta)?,  [410] 

which    almost    =    knights    and  trait  of  our  ancestors, —  loyalty  to 

squires.     The  word  is  worth  a  a  rightful  lord.      See  Gummere, 

little  study.  Germanic  Origins,  pp.  261-269 ; 

1  See  72.  to  the  citations  given  there  might 

2  Perhaps  mistaken  for  hel-  be  added  the  account  of  Cynewulf 
man,  the  helm  of  the  ship.  and  Cyneheard,  from  the  Saxon 

3  Construe,  laet  )>ine  beornas       Chronicle  for  755.     One  sentence 
gebidan.  from  it  will  illustrate:  "Ond  }>a 

4  Here  =  until.  cusedon  hie  >set  him  nsenig  mgeg 
°  For  eedre.  leofra  ngere  >onne  hiera  hlaford, 
6  For  ageafon.  "^  See  18.  Qud  hie  ngefre  his  banan  folgian 
8  See  stefna,  a  collateral  form  noldon." 

of  stefn.  1*  JEht  (sometimes  ealit)   is 

^  See  184.  a.          ^^  See  165.  1.  not  to  be  confounded  with  seht 

11  See  174.  d.          12  gee  164.  0.  (4);  aeht  besittan  =  sit  in  coun- 

13  This  reply  is  original  with  the  cil ;  here  almost  =  cowsmZ^,  dis- 

poet,  and  exhibits  a  characteristic  cuss,  debate. 


222  SELECTIONS  FROM  THE  ANDREAS. 

hwylc  hira  selost^       symle  gelseste  o^  > 
hlaforde^  set  hilde,  ,    J)onne  hand  ond  rond  , 

on  beaduwange       billum  forgrunden^ 
aet  niSplegan      nearu  frowedon."     /' 

Andrew  relates  Christ's  Stilling  of  the  Tempest. 

5   pa  reordade       ''rice  peoden",  [415] 

"wserfaest  Cining*       word  stunde"*  ahof:  — 
"Gif  ^u  |)egn  sie       frymsittendes 
Wuldorcyninges,       swa  M  worde  becwist,  ^'  '•♦^•'^ 
r^ce  |>a  gerynu,       hii  he  reordberend^ 
10   laerde  under  lyfte.       Lang  is  pes  siSfset  [420] 

ofer  fealuwne  flod:       frefra  Jjine 
maecgas  on  mode.       Mycel  is  nu  gena  '\ '  ''- 
lad  ofer  lagustream,       land  swiSe  feorr 
to  gesecanne^;       sand  is  geblonden/ 

1  Adv.  (76).  Lady   (^ Hlaf-dig,'  Benefactress, 

2  In  Carlyle's  Past  and  Present  'Loaf-giver ess,'  they  say  she  is, — 
(Bk.  3,  Chap.  10)  occurs  this  piece  blessings  on  her  beautiful  heart !) 
of  etymologizing :  "  Ironcutter,  at  was  there."  So  Ruskin,  in  Ses- 
the  end  of  the  campaign,  did  not  ame  and  Lilies  (Of  Queens'  Gar- 
turn  off  his  thousand  fighters,  but  dens)  :  "  Lady  means  '  bread- 
said  to  them:  'Noble  fighters,  this  giver'  or  '  loaf -giver,'  and  Lord 
is  the  land  we  have  gained  ;  be  I  means  '  maintainer  of  laws.'  " 
Lord  in  it,  —  what  we  will  call  Are  these  etymologies  correct  ? 
Law-ward^  maintainer  and  keeper           ^  MS.  foregrunden, 

of  Heaven's  Laws :    be   I  Law-  *  =  at  this  time,  now. 

ward,  or  in  brief  orthoepy  Lord  ^  Ace.  plur.  (43.  6).    Seep.  213, 

in    it,    and    be    ye    Loyal    Men  note  1. 

around  me  in  it.' "    Again  (Chap.  ^  Cf.  our  modern  '  far  to  seek.' 

13):  "  If  no  pious  Xai«-ioar(^  would  "^  Cf.  ^n.  1.  107:  "furit  sestus 

remember  it,  always  some  pious  harenis." 


SELECTIONS   FROM   THE   ANDREAS.  223 

grund^  wis  greote.       God  eat5e  mseg  [425] 

heaSolit5enduin  ^      helpe^  gefr^mman.*"    ^ 

Ongan  pa  gleawlTce      '^gingran  sine* 
•>u^)       *wuldorspedige  weras*      wordum  trymman  :  — 
5    "Ge  ])8et  gehogodon,       fa  ge  on  holm  stigon, 

pset  ge  on  fara^  folc       feorh^  gel^eddon,^  [430] 

ond  for  Dryhtnes  lufan''       deatS  ))r6wodon^ 

on  ^Imyrcna^       eSelrlce, 

sawle^^  gesealdon.^      Ic  j^set  sylfa  wat, 
10  J)8et  us  gescyldet5       Scyppend  ^ngla, 

weoruda  Dryhten.    1  Wseter^gesa  sceal,  /     [435] 

Y  w  ge(5yd^^  ond  geSreatod      ])urh  pryScining, 

^vc'    lagu  lacende      llSra  wyrSan.^^ 

Swa^^  gesgelde"  m,       Jjset  we  on  ssebate 
15   ofer  warut5gewinn       wseda^^  cunnedan 

faroSrIdende  :  frecne  |)uliton  [440] 

egle  ealada;       eagorstreamas 

beoton  bordstset^u;  brim  oft  oncwseS, 

yt5  oSerre.^^       Hwilum  uppastod 

1  Probably  =  sea.  Cf.  p.  220,  ^  Allmurk{y)  =  Ethiopians; 
note  10.  but  the  poet  is  here  mistaken. 

2  Perhaps  for  heahafo-,  in  the  See  the  prefatory  remarks,  p.  210. 
sense  of  the  high  sea;  cf.  Lat.  i'>  Here  =  Z(/e.  "  Cf.p.227,1.19. 
altU7n.               2  Ace.  sing.  12  yot  weor9'an. 

*  It  is  not   till  this    point   is  i^  Brooke  remarks  (p. 417):  "It 

reached,   in  the   Greek   original,  isahappy  situation  which  the  poet 

that  the  journey  is  begun  !  conceives,  for  Andrew,  not  know- 

s  From  fah  (43.  3).  ing  that  Christ  himself  is  seated 

6  Periphrastic,  something  like  beside  him  in  the  stern,  tells  Christ 
our  '  directed  your  steps.'  a  story  of  Christ."    Cf.  Mk,4. 36  ff. 

7  From  the  weak  lufe.  "  See  190.        is  See  156.  d. 

8  Optative.  is  Dat.  sing.     Cf.  Ps.  42.  7. 


224  SELECTIONS   FROM   THE   ANDREAS. 

of  brimes  bosme       on  bates  faetSm 

^gesa  ofer  y^lid.       ^Imihtig  )>8er,  [445] 

Meotud  mancynnes,       on  m^re|>yssan 

beorht  basnode.       Beornas  wurdon 
5   forhte  on  mode  ;       frizes  ^  wilnedon, 

miltsa^  to^  Mserum.^       pa  seo  m^nigo  ongan 

clypian  on  ceole;       Cyning  sona  ai^as,  [450] 

^ngla  Eadgifa       yt5um*  stilde, 

wseteres  waelmum;       windas  freade; 
10   s^  sessade,^       smylte  wurdon 

m^restreama  gemeotu.*'       Da  ure  mod  ahloh/ 

sySSan  we  gesegon^      under  swegles  gang         [455] 

windas  ond  wyegas       Qnd  wseterbrogan 

forhte  gewordne       for  Frean^  ^gesan. 
15   For-})an  ic  eow  to  soSe       s^cgan  wille, 

jjset  ntefre^^  forlaetetS       lifgende  God 

eorl  on  eort5an,       gif  his  ^llen  deah.""  [460] 

Swa  hleot5rode       halig  c^mpa 

^eawum'^  gejjancul;       |)egnas  laerde 
20   eadig  oreta/^       eorlas  trymede, 

o^-t5set  hie  s^mninga       slsep  ofereode 

1  See  156.  a.  ^  Anglian  form   of  gesawon 

2  Here  = /row.  (106). 

8  Meaning  Christ.                     '  9  See  153.  d. 

*  See  164.  i.  10  This    gnomic    sentence    re- 

5  This  word  does  not  otherwise  sembles  that  in  Blow.  572-573. 
occur,  but  the  meaning  is  obvi-  Perhaps  it  is  imitated  from  the 
ous.  There  is  a  noun  sess,  mean-  Latin  proverb,  "Fortune  favors 
ing  seat.  the  brave." 

6  See  geinet,  and  20.  "  See  128.               i'-^  See  174.  d. 

7  See  107.  i3  Usually  oretta.       .J'. ,, X 


SELECTIONS   FROM   THE   ANDREAS.  225 

meSe^  be  maeste.       M^re  sweoSerade,  [465] 

*yt$a  ongin*       ^ft  oncyrde, 
^^  *hreoh  holmj^racu  *.     pa  fam  halgan  wearS 
sefter  gryrehwile      gast  geblissod. 

Andrew  desires  Instruction  in  Seamanship. 

5   Ongan  ])a  reordigan       rsedum  snottor, 

WIS  on  gewitte       wordlocan  onspeonn  ^ :  —     [470] 
^'Nsefre  ic  s^elidan^       selran  mette, 
macrseftigran,       pses-t^e''  me  pyncetS, 
rowend  rofran,       rsedsnotterran, 

10  wordes  wisran.       Ic  wille  fe, 

eorl  unforcuS,       anre^  nu  gena  [475] 

bene  bidden:       J^eah  ic  Ipe  ^beaga*^  lyt, 
^sincweor^unga%       syllan  mihte/ 
''faetedsinces^       wolde  ic  freondscipe,^ 

15   J)eoden  J^rymfsest,       ])inne,  gif  ic  mehte/ 

begitan  godne.       paes^  M  gife  Meotest^*^        [480] 

haligne  hyht       on  heofonj^rymme, 

gif  ISu  lidwerigum       larna  ))inra 

este^^  wyr^est.       Wolde  ic  anes^^  to  t5e, 

20  ■  cynerof  haelet5,       crseftes  neosan,  — 

^8Bt  ^ti  me  getsehte,       nti  ]>e  tir^^  Cyning       [485] 
ond  miht  forgef,"      manna  Scyppend, 

1  Agrees  with  hie.  ^  Object  of  begitan. 

2  See  onspannan.  ^  =  for  that. 

3  Ace.  sing.  ^^  Future  sense. 

*  Here  =  so  far  as,  as  (157.  1).        "  See  165.         i^  See  156.  m. 

6Seel56..?).  e  gee  154.  a.        is  Ace.  sing. 

■^  Variants  of  meahte.  1*  Variant  of  forgeaf. 


226  SELECTIONS   FROM   THE   ANDREAS. 

hti  M  *w£egflotan*       waere  bestemdon/ 

*S8eh^ngeste*       sund^  wisige.       \ 

Ic  wees  on^  gifet5e^       In  9nd  nu 

syxtyne  siSum^       on  ssebate,  [490] 

5   ''m^re*'  hrerendum^       mundum^  freorig/ 

^eagorstreamas*' —      is  Sys^  ane^  ma — , 

swa^°  ic  £efre  ne  geseah       senigne  mann, 

)7rySbearn  hseleS,'^      Jje  gelicne 

steoran  ofer  stsefnan.  Streamwelm  hwiletS/^  [495] 
10  beatati  ^^  brimstseSo ;       is  )>es  bat  ful  scrid, 

fsereS  famig^eals       fugole'*  gelicost, 

glided  on  geofone.       Ic  georne  wat, 

pddt  ic  aefre  ne  geseah       ofer  y^lade/'' 

on  saeleodan^*       sylllcran'^  crseft.  [500] 

15   Is  ))on^®  geliccost,^^      swa'^  he-^  on  landsceape^ 

1  For  bestemdan,  the  (weak)  ^^  It  is  unusual  to  have  two 
past  part.,  according  to  Wiilker.       synonymous  nouns  thus  joined. 
It  would  then  agree  with  waeg-            ^^  gge  hwelan. 

flotan  (dat.  sing.).  i^  Unusual  ending  of  3  sing. 

2  See  p.  213,  note  4,  and  p.  220,  1*  Cf.  Odyssey  7.  36 :    "  Their 
1.  5.                       3  _  ^y  chance.          ships  are  swift  as  the  flight  of  a 

4  See  176.  1.  bird."      See  also  Od.  13.  86-87; 

^  Governs  m^re  (and  eagor-  11.  125. 
streamas),     and     agrees     with  ^^  Mg,    ySriafe,    which    would 

munduin.  ^  =  in  hands  ?  mean  saiid,  that  which  is  left  by 

■^  Agrees  with  Ic.  the  waves.        i^  See  sselida. 

8  For  aCis,  neut.  nom,  sing.  ^^  For    sel-,    contracted    from 

^  Weak;  agrees  with  ffy  8.  This  seld-,  the  root  of  seldom, 
makes  another  journey,  added  to  ^^  =  to  that. 

the  sixteen.    The  Greek  has,  "Be-  ^^  For  gelicost ;  see  1.  11. 

hold,   this   is  the   seventeenth."  ^  =  asif.     ^^  =  the  boat  (hsit). 

Brooke  (p.  414)  attributes  this  to  22  _  gij^piy  land;   the  Greek 

the  OE.  poet.        ^^  Almost  =  yet.  has:  iirl  ttjs  yr}s. 


SELECTIONS   FKOM  THE  ANDREAS.  227 

stille  stande,       fser  hine  *  storm''  ne  maeg, 
"wind"'  aw^cgan,       ne  waeterflodas 
brecan  br^ndstaefne ;      hw8et5ere  on  brim  sneowe'5^ 
snel  under 2  segle.^      Du  eart  seolfa  geong,  [505] 

5   wigendra  hleo,       nalas  wintrum  frod: 
hafast  ]?e  on  fyrhtSe,       faroSlacende,^ 
eorles  ondsware,       seghwylces"*  canst 
worda*  for^  worulde      wislic  andgit/" 

The  Pilot  recognizes  God^s  Presence  with  Andrew. 

Him  ondswarode       ece  Dry h ten: —  [510] 

10   "Oft  J)set  ges8elet5,       |>8et  we  on  sselade, 

^scipum'^  under  ^  scealcum,       J^onne  sceor®  cymeS, 

breca^^"  ofer  baetSweg      "brimh^ngestum*. 

Hwilum  us  on  ytSum      earfoSlice 

geseeleS  on  ssewe,"      )>eh^^  we  siSnesan  [515] 

15   frecne  geferan.       Flodwylm  ne  maeg 

manna  senigne      ofer^^^  Meotudes  est 

lungre  gel^ttan^^;       ab^^  him  llfes  ge weald 

se  ^e  brimu  binde'5,      brtine  yt5a 

^y^  and  ))reatat5.^^      He  ]?eodum  sceal  [520] 

20  racian  mid  rihte,       se  t5e  rodor  ahof 

1  MS.  snoweiJ.  «  See  18. 

2  So  yet,  under  sail.  i*^  Almost  =  break  away. 

8  See  152.  11  Irreg.  dat. ;  usually  sse. 

*  Dependent  on  andgit.  12  j^or  SS'eah.  i^  _  against. 

5  Dependent  on  seghwylces.  1*  Cf .  Hamlet  1.  4.  85:    "I'll 

6  Almost  =  in.  make  a  ghost  of  him  that  lets 

7  Object  of  canst  (130).  me." 

8  =  among  ;  but  this  half -line  i^  g^e  127 ;  here  reflexive. 
IS  a  little  obscure.  16  gee  note  13,  p.  226. 


228  SELECTIONS   FKOM  THE  ANDKEAS. 

9nd  gefaestnode      folmum^  sinum, 
worhte  and  wr^Sede,       wuldras^  fylde 
beorhtne  boldwelan;       swa  gebledsod  weartS 
engla  eSel      furh  his  anes  miht.  [5 25 J 

5  For-|)an  is  ^gesyne'',       sotJ^  *orgete% 
cu5  ''oncnawen^       j)8et  t5u  Cyninges  eart 
pegen  ge]?ungen      I)rymsittendes  *;  ^  :^ 

for-fan  pe  sona      ^s^eholm^  oncneow,  v'--   (" 
''garsecges  begang^,       fget  t5u  gife  haefdes*        [530] 

10  haliges  gastes.       ''Hsern*'  ^ft  onwand, 
''aryt^a  gebl^nd*^;       ^gesa  gestilde, 
widfeeSme  wseg;       wsedu  swsetJorodon 
seot5])an  hie  ongeton      ]>ddt  t5e  God  haefde 
weere^  bewunden/      se  tSe  wuldres  bleed  [535] 

15   gestat5olade      strangum  mihtum." 


Andrew  is  carried  to  the  City} 

pus  Andreas      Qndlangne  daeg® 
h^rede^^  hleot5orcwidum      Haliges  lare, 
o6-83et  hine  s^mninga      sleep  ofereode"  [820] 

on  hronrade       Heofoncyninge  neh.^^ 
20  pa  "gelaedan*  het^^      lifes  Brytta  ^ 

1  See  174.  7  MS.  bewunde. 

2  Perhaps  Anglian  genitive  ;  »  j^ote  the  break  here  (11.  537- 
used  for  the  inst.  after  fyide,  as  817).  The  interval  is  occupied  by 
in  the  poem  of  Christ,  11.  407-408.  discourses. 

3  Here  a  noun.  »  See  170.           10  MS.  berede. 
*  Agrees  with  Cyninges.  ^^  See  p.  224, 1.  21. 

fi  Original  form  (95).  12  por  neah. 

^  =  with  his  covenant.  i^  Goftstrue,  het  .  .  ,  sine  ^n- 


SELECTIONS   FROM   THE   ANDREAS.  229 

ofer  y^a  geprsec      ^nglas  sine, 
'    fseSmum  ''f^rigean'^       on  Feeder^  weere 

leofne  mid  lissum      ofer  lagufsesten.^  [825] 

******** 

Leton  ]7one  halgan       be  h^restryete 
5   swefan  on  sybbe      under  swegles  hleo, 

bMne*  bidan       burhwealle  neh/   '■-■ 

his  nit5h^tum,       nihtlangne  fyrst, 

otS-|?set  Dryhten  forlet       daegcandelle »'  [835] 

scire  scinan.       Sceadu  swetJerodon 
10  wonn  under  wolcnum.       pa  com  wederes  blsest,* 

hador  heofonleoma       ofer  hofu  blican. 

Onwoc  fa  wiges^  heard,       wang  sceawode; 

fore  burggeatum       ""beorgas^  steape,  [840] 

•"hleot^u*^  hlifodon;       ymbe  harne  stan 
15   tigelfagan  trafu,^      torras  stodon, 

windige  weallas.       pa  se  wis^  oncneow 

|78et  he  Marmedonia      msegSe  hsefde 

sit5e^"  gesohte,       swa  him  sylf  behead,  [845] 

fa"  him  foregescraf,       Feeder  mancynnes. 

glas  .  .  .  gelsedan  leofne  ...  ^  Is  construed  both  with  burh- 

ofer  lagufaesten  ...  on  Faeder  wealle  and  niafh^tum. 

wsere.  ^  Not  blast.                ^  See  155. 

1  Genitive.  "^  See  hliff,  and  20. 

2  Here  follow  four  lines  which  ^  See  47.  4. 

are   probably   corrupt,    and    are  ^  For  wisa  (55) . 

therefore  omitted.  1°  See  174.  a. 

3  =  kindly,  amiable.  ^i  MS.  ]»am.    Translate,  when. 


230  SELECTIONS   FROM   THE   ANDREAS. 

Andrew^ s  Disciples  relate  their  Adventure. 

Geseh^  he  ]7a  on  greote^       gingran'  sine, 
beornas  beadurofe,       biryhte*  him 
swefan  on  slgepe.       He  son  a  ongann 
wigend  "w^ccean,       ^nd  worde  cwse^: —  [850] 

5    "Ic  eow  slogan  maeg       soS^  orgete,^ 

])ddt  us  gystran-daege^       on  geofones  stream* 
ofer  arwelan       ae^eling  f^rede. 
In  pam  ceole  wses       cyninga  Wiildor,^ 
Waldend  wert5eode  ^"^ ;       ic  his  word  oncneow,    [855] 
10   peh  he  his  msegwlite       bemiSen  hsefde." 
Him  ))a  8et5elingas       ^ndsweorodon 
geonge  ■  gencwidum  *,       •gastgerynum'':  — 
"We  fe,  Andreas,       ea^e  gecy^a'S 
si3  userne,       ])set  t5u  sylfa  miht  [860] 

1  For  geseab.  herd'  by  Ovid  (A.  A.  1.  290);  and 

2  Gr.  'on  the  earth'  (iirl  tt^v  decus  is  used  by  Virgil(?)  almost 
yvv).  8  See  169.  exactly  as  here,  —  decus  Asterice 

*  The  only  occurrence  of  this  (Cul.  15)  for  decens  or  pulchra 
word ;  aetrihte,  similarly  formed,  Asteria,  like  cyninga  wuldor 
is  found  three  times  in  poetry.  for  wuldorlic  cyning.     An  in- 

*  Noun  in  ace.  teresting  mediaeval  parallel  is  the 
6  Agrees  with  soff.  line  by  Hilary,  a  disciple  of  Abe- 
■^  See  176.  lard,  and  probably  an  English- 
8  Cf.  the  '  stream  of  Oceanus,'  man,  cited  by  Lenient,  La  Satire 

Od.  11.  21,  and  often  in  Homer.  en  France  au  Moyen  Age,  p.  20, 

^  To   this   kenning   there    are  note :    ' '  Papa  summus,  paparum 

several  analogies  in  Greek  and  gloria."      So  he  apostrophizes  a 

Latin.    Thus  Ulysses  is  referred  girl  with  "Ave,  splendor  puel- 

to  as  '  great  glory  of  the  Achai-  larum  "  (Wright,  Biog.  Brit.  Lit., 

ans,'  II.  9.  673,  and  elsewhere;  Anglo-Norman  Period,  p.  93) . 

the  bull  is  called  the  'glory  of  the  ^^  MS.  weorffode. 


SELECTIONS   FROM   THE   ANDREAS. 


231 


ongitan  gleawlice       gastgehygdum. 
Us  saewerige      slsep  ofereode ; 
J7a  comon  earnas^       ofer  yt5a  wylm 
faran^  on  flyhte      fe'Serum  hremige,^ 
us  of  slsependum      sawle  abrugdon, 
mid  gefean  f^redon      flyhte'*  on  lyfte 
brehtmum  bllSe/       beorhte  ^  ond  li6e  ^ ; 
lissum''  lufodon       ond  in  lofe  wunedon, 
fser  wses  singal  sang       ond^  swegles  gong, 
wlitig  weoroda  heap^       ond  wuldres  ))reat. 
titan  ymbe  M^elne'^^      ^nglas  stodon, 
fegnas  ymb  peoden       ptisendmselum ; 
h^redon  on  heht5o       halgan  stefne 
dryhtna  Dryhten.^" 


[865] 


[870] 


1  Related  to  Gr.  6pvis,  a  bird. 

2  Not  in  MS.,  but  supplied  for 
the  verse  structure. 

3  See  174.  d.  Like  Gr.  yavpos ; 
Archilochus  has,  exulting  in  his 
curls.  *  Inst.  (174.  a). 

^  =  blithe,  joyful.  Note  the 
rime  and  assonance  in  these  lines. 

6  Nom.  plur. ;  or  possibly  ad- 
verbs. Will  the  last  consonants 
permit  of  associating  lifSe  with 
Germ,  gelind? 

7  How  may  this  contain  the 
stem  (liSP-)  of  the  last  word  (34)? 

8  Possibly  miswritten  for 
geond,  or  perhaps  the  rare  prepo- 
sition and  (  =  in,  in  presence  of) ; 
this  is  on  the  supposition  that 
swegles  gQng  means  revolution 


of  the  sky,  cf.  p.  224,  1.  12.  The 
music  of  the  spheres  is  even  sug- 
gested, though  hardly  in  the  poet's 
mind.  Swegel  may  sometimes 
mean  music,  and  possibly  so  here, 
but  then  one  hardly  knows  how 
to  translate  gQng. 

9  So  in  Shakespeare :  Bich. 
III.  2.  1.  53,  "Amongst  this 
princely  heap^\'  Jul.  Coes.  1.  3. 
23,  "There  were  drawn  Upon  a 
heap  a  hundred  ghastly  women." 

10  A  Hebraism ;  multitude  of 
glory,  nearly  =  glorious  mul- 
titude. 

11  Jesus,  according  to  the  orig- 
inal. 

12  Biblical  expression ;  see  Rev. 
17.14;  19.  16. 


j^-\-cX\.j^xJCl^  -  ^^ 


/  ir 


■/^  /'^-^    ^-  ./fi, /^  i; ^^--^    o.-'^^^-i? 


'  tk 


APPENDIXES. 


APPENDIX  I. 

SOME  USEFUL  BOOKS  FOR  THE  STUDY  OF  OLD  ENGLISH. 

I.   A  Selection  for  the  Beginner. 

Political  and  Social  History. 

Green,  8hort  History  of  the  English  People^  pp.  1-66, 
Freeman,  Old  English  History.    New  York,  1876. 

Religious  and  Cultural  History. 

LiNGARD,  The  Anglo-Saxon  Church.    London,  1858,  2  vols. 
Bright,  Early  English  Church  History.    2d  ed.    New  York,  1888. 
Turner,  History  of  the  Anglo-Saxons.    London,  1852,  3  vols. 
Giles,  Translation  of  Bede''s  Ecclesiastical  History  of  England^ 
and  the  Anglo- Saxon  Chronicle.     (Bolin  Library. ) 

Literary  History. 

Ten  Brink,  Early  English  Literature.    New  York,  1883.     (The 

best.) 
Brooke,  History  of  Early  English  Literature.    New  York,  1892. 

(Contains  several  pieces  of  translation   from  Old   English 

poetry.) 
MoRLEY,  English  Write7's,  Vol.  II.    New  York,  1888.     (Contains 

translations.) 
Brother  Azarias,  llie  Development  of  English  Literature :  The 

Old  English  Period.    New  York,  1879. 
Earle,  Anglo-Saxon  Literature.     London,  1884. 

Biography. 

AssER,  Life  of  Alfred.     (In  Six  Old  English  Chronicles,  Bohn 
Library.) 

Giles,  Life  of  Bede.     (As  above,  under  Religious  and  Cultural 
History.) 

235 


236  APPENDIX   I. 

Biography.     {Continued.) 

Bede,  Account  of  Ccedmon.     (In  Ecclesiastical  History^  Bk.  IV., 

Chap.  XXIV.) 
For  reference : 

Dictionary  of  Christian  Biography.    London,  1877-87,  4  vols. 
Dictionary  of  National  Biography:  A-0'Dugan.     London, 
1885-94,  41  vols. 

Translations. 

LuMSDEN,  Beowulf  an  Old  English  Poem,  translated  into  modern 
rhymes.    2d  ed.    London,  1883. 

Earle,  The  Deeds  of  Beowulf.    New  York,  1892. 

Garnett,  Beowulf  and  The  Fight  at  Finnshurg.  3d  ed.  Bos- 
ton, 1889.  (Nearly  literal ;  not  so  enjoyable  as  the  other 
two,  but  more  trustworthy  in  details.) 

Tennyson,  The  Battle  of  Brunanburh. 

Garnett,  Elene ;  Judith;  Athelstan,  or  the  Fight  at  Brunan- 
burh; and  Byrhtnoth,  or  the  Fight  at  Maldon.  Boston, 
1889.     (Nearly  literal.) 

[See  also  under  Literary  History  and  Poetical  Texts.] 

Readers. 

Sweet,  Anglo-Saxon  Beader.    7th  ed.    New  York  (Oxford),  1894. 
Bright,  Anglo-Saxon  Beader.     New  York,  1894. 
Zupitza-MacLean,  Old  and  Middle  English  Beader.    New  York, 
1893. 

Poetical  Texts. 

Cook,  Judith,  with  Introduction,  Translation,  Complete  Glossary 
and  various  Indexes,  and  an  Antotype  Facsimile.  2d  ed. 
Boston  (D.  C.  Heath  &  Co.),  1889.    (Pamphlet  edition,  1893.) 

Zupitza-Kent,  Elene.     Boston,  1889. 

Wyatt,  Beowulf     New  York,  1894. 

Prose  Texts. 

Bright,  Gospel  of  St.  Luke.     New  York  (Oxford),  1893. 
Sweet,  Selected  Homilies  of  ^Ifric.     New  York  (Oxford),  1885. 
,  Extracts  from  Alfred's  Orosius.     New  York  (Oxford),  1886. 


APPENDIX  I.  237 

Prose  Texts.     (^Continued.) 

Earle-Plummer,  Two  of  the  Saxon  Chronicles  Parallel.     New 

York  (Oxford),  1889.     (A  selection  only.) 
Cook,  Extracts  from  the  Anglo-Saxon  Laws.    New  York,  1880. 

History  of  the  English  Language. 

Emerson,  History  of  the  English  Language.    New  York,  1894. 
LouNSBURY,  History  of  the  English  Language.    Revised  ed.    New 
York,  1894. 

Champneys,  History  of  English.  New  York,  1893.  (Scarcely 
available  as  a  text-book.) 

Etymology. 

Skeat,  Principles  of  English  Etymology :  Series  /.,  The  Native 

Element.    New  York,  1887. 
[See  also  Dictionaries.] 

Grammar. 

SiEVERS-CooK,  Old  English  Grammar.    2d  ed.     Boston,  1887. 
Henry,  Short  Comparative  Grammar  of  English  and  German. 
New  York,  1894. 

Phonetics. 

Bell,  English  Visible  Speech  for  the  Million.  New  York  (Lon- 
don). 

,  Manual  of  Vocal  Physiology  and   Visible  Speech.     New 

York. 

Sweet,  Primer  of  Phonetics.    New  York  (Oxford),  1890. 

[Any  one  of  these  three.] 

Dictionaries. 

Hall,  Concise  Anglo-Saxon  Dictionary.    New  York,  1894. 
Murray  and  Bradley,  New  English  Dictionary :  A-Deceit,  E- 

Fang.    New  York  (Oxford),  1884-94.     (Cited  as  New  Eng. 

Diet.) 


238  APPENDIX   I. 

II.  A  Selection  for  the  Advanced  Student. 

Bibliography. 

WiJLKEK,  Grundriss  zur  Geschichte  der  angelsdchsischen  Litte- 

ratur.    Leipzig,  1885. 
KoRTiNG,    Grundriss  der  Geschichte  der  englischen  Litteratur. 

MUnsteri.  W.,  1893. 

Jahresbericht  .  .  .  der  germanischen  Philologie.  Berlin  (later 
Leipzig),  1879-.  (Section  XV.  (later  XVI.)  is  devoted  to 
English.) 

SoNNENSCHEiN,  The  Best  Books,  pp.  952-961.  2d  ed.  New  York, 
1891. 

Political  and  Social  History. 

Kemble,  The  Saxons  in  England.    London,  1876,  2  vols. 
Lappenberg,  History  of  England  under  the  Anglo-Saxon  Kings. 

2  vols.     (Bohn  Library.) 
Green,  The  Conquest  of  England.     New  York,  1884. 

,  The  Making  of  England.    New  York,  1883. 

Freeman,  History  of  the  Norman  Conquest,  Vol.  /.,  Chaps.  L- 

III.    New  York  (Oxford),  1873. 
Palgrave,  Bise  and  Progress  of  the  English  Commonwealth, 

Vol.  L     London,  1831. 
Stubbs,  Constitutional  History  of  England,   Vol.  I.,  Chaps.  L- 

VIII    New  York  (Oxford),  1875. 
Andrews,  The  Old  English  Manor.    Baltimore,  1892. 

liiterary  History. 

Ebert,  Allgemeine  Geschichte  der  Litteratur  des  Mittelalters  im 

Abendlande.     Leipzig,  1874-87,  3  vols.    (Especially  Vols.  I. 

andin.) 
Ten  Brink,  Altenglische  Literatur.      (In  Paul's  Grundriss  der 

germanischen  Fhilologie,  II.  1.  510-608.     Strassburg,  1893. 

Only  a  fragment  of  the  original  design.) 

Biography. 

Wright,  Biographia  Britannica  Literaria,  Vol.  I.    London,  1842. 
Montalembert,  Monks  of  the  West.    Edinburgh,  1861-79,  7  vols. 
(A  fascinating  work.) 


APPENDIX    I.  239 

Translations. 

Grein,  Bichtungen  der  Angelsachsen^  stabreimend  uhersetzt.    Got- 
tingen,  1857-59,  2  vols. 

Readers. 

Sweet,  Second  Anglo-Saxon  Beader.    New  York  (Oxford),  1887. 

(Archaic  and  dialectal ;  consists  largely  of  glosses.) 
Kluge,  Angelsdchsisches  Lesebuch.     Halle,  1888, 
KoRNER,  Angelsdchsische  Texte,  mit  Uebersetzung,  Anmerkungen, 

und  Glossar.     Heilbronn,  1880. 
KiEGER,  Alt-  und  angelsdchsisches  Lesebuch.    Giessen,  1861. 

Poetical  Texts.     [See  also  Prose  Texts.] 

Grein- WiJLKER,  Bibliothek  der  angelsdchsischen  Poesie.    Kassel, 

1881-94.    2  vols,  out  of  3  completed. 
GoLLANCz,   The  Exeter  Book,  Part  I.     London  (Early  English 

Text  Society),  1895. 
Thorpe,  Codex  Exoniensis.    London,  1842. 
ZupiTZA,  Beowulf^  Autotypes  of  the  unique  Cotton  MS.,  with  a 

Transliteration  and  Notes.    London  (E.  E.  T.  S.),  1882. 

Prose  Texts. 

Sweet,  Oldest  English  Texts.    London  (E.  E.  T.  S.),  1885. 
,  King  Alfred'' s  West  Saxon  Version  of  Gregory'' s  Pastoral 

Care.    London  (E.  E.  T.  S.),  1871-72. 

,  King  Alfred's  Orosius.    London  (E.  E.  T.  S.),  1883. 

Miller,  Old  English  Version  of  Bede's  Ecclesiastical  History  of 

the  English  People,  Part  I.    London  (E.  E.  T.  S.) ,  1890-91. 
Fox,  King  Alfred's  Anglo-Saxon  Version  of  Boethius  de  Conso- 

latione  Philosophice.     (Bohn  Library.) 
Thorpe,  Homilies  of  ^Ifric.    London  (JElfric  Society),  1844-46, 

2  vols. 

Morris,  Blickling  Homilies.     London  (E.  E.  T.  S.),  1874-80, 

3  vols,  in  1. 

Skeat,  ^Ifri&s  Metrical  Lives  of  Saints.     London  (E.  E.  T.  S.), 

1881-90,  3  vols. 
,  The  Gospels  in  Anglo-Saxon  and  Northumbnan  Versions. 

Cambridge,  1871-87. 


240  APPENDIX   I. 

Prose  Texts.     (Continued.) 

Earle,  Handbook  to  the  Land-Charters  and  other  Saxonic  Docu- 
ments.   New  York  (Oxford),  1888. 

Earle,  Two  of  the  Saxon  Chronicles  Parallel.  New  York  (Ox- 
ford), 1865,  (Vol.  I.  of  a  revision  by  Plummer  has  been 
published.  New  York,  1892.) 

ScHMiD,  Die  Gesetze  der  Angelsachse7i.  2d  ed.  Leipzig,  1858. 
(This  has  a  much  completer  apparatus  than  the  following.) 

Thorpe,  Ancient  Laws  and  Institutes  of  England.  London,  1840, 
2  vols. 

Napier,  Wtdfstan  [Homilies'].    Berlin,  1883. 

Cockayne,  Leechdoms,  Wortcunning,  and  Starcraft  of  Early  Eng- 
land.   London,  1804-06,  3  vols. 

Facsimiles  of  Manuscripts. 

Skeat,  Txcelve  Facsimiles  of  Old  English  [i.e.  Old  and  Middle 
English]  Manuscripts.,  with  Transcriptions  and  Introduction. 
New  York  (Oxford),  1892.  (From  Alfred's  trans,  of  the 
Pastoral   Care.,  the  poetical   Exodus^   and   the    Chronicle.) 

WiJLKER,  Codex  Vercellensis,  die  angelsdchsische  Handschrift  zu 
Vercelli  in  getreuer  Nachhildung.     Leipzig,  1894. 

[See  also  Zupitza's  Beowulf  Cook's  Judith.,  etc.] 

History  of  the  Englisli  Language. 

Kluge,  Geschichte  der  englischen  Sprache.  (In  Paul's  Grundriss 
der  germanischen  Philologie,  I.  780-930.)     Strassburg,  1891. 

Grammar. 

Matzner,  Englische  Grammatik.  3d  ed.  Berlin,  1885-89,  3  vols. 
(English  translation  by  C.  J.  Grece,  London,  1874.) 

Koch,  Historische  Grammatik  der  englischen  Sprache.     Cassel, 

1863-78,  3  vols. 
CosiJN,  Altwestsdchsische  Grammatik.     Hague,  1883-88. 
,  Kurzgefasste  altwestsdchsische  Grammatik.    2d  ed.    Leiden, 

1893. 
Sweet,  N'ew  English  Grammar,  Part  I.     New  York  (Oxford), 

1892. 


APPENDIX  I.  241 

Phonology. 

Sweet,  History  of  English  Sounds.    New  York  (Oxford),  1888. 
Mathew,  Synopsis  of  Old  English  Phonology. '  New  York  (Ox- 
ford), 1891. 

Cook,  Phonological  Investigation  of  Old  English.    Boston,  1888. 

Syntax. 

WiJLFiNG,  Die  Syntax  in  den  Werken  Alfreds  des  Grossen.  I.  Teil. 
Bonn,  1894.     (Contains  a  useful  bibliography.) 

Prosody. 

SiEVEKS,  Altgermanische  MetriTc,  pp.  120-149.    Halle,  1893. 
,  Angelsdchsische  Metrik.      (In  Paul's  Grundriss  der  ger- 

manischen  Philologie,  II.  1.  888-893  j  a  very  brief,  but  clear, 

sketch.) 

Dictionaries. 

BoswoRTH-ToLLER,  Auglo-Saxon  Dictionary :  A-Swi^rian.  New 
York,  1882-92. 

Grein,  Sprachschatz  der  angelsdchsischen  Dichter.  Gottingen, 
1861-64. 

Cook,  Glossary  of  the  Old  Northumbrian  Gospels.     Halle,  1894. 

Kluge,  Etymologisches  Worterbuch  der  deutschen  Sprache  (with 
Janssen's  Index).  5th  ed.,  Strassburg,  1894;  4th  ed.  trans- 
lated (Macmillan).  (For  comparison  of  Old  English  with 
German  words.) 

Periodicals. 

Anglia.    Halle,  1878-. 

Englische  Studien.    Heilbronn,  1878-. 

Beitrdge  zur  Geschichte  der  deutschen  Sprache  und  Litteratur  (ed. 
by  Paul  and  Braune).    Halle,  1874-. 

Transactions  and  Proceedings  of  the  Modern  Language  Associa- 
tion of  America.    Baltimore,  1886-. 

Modern  Language  Notes.    Baltimore,  1886-. 


242  APPENDIX   I. 

III.    Memoranda  of  Additional  Books. 


APPENDIX  I.  243 


244  APPENDIX   I. 


APPENDIX   II. 

CORRESPONDENCES   OF  OLD  ENGLISH  AND   MODERN 
GERMAN  VOWELS. 

Only  a  selection  of  the  more  regular  correspondences 
is  here  given.  The  student  must  not  be  surprised  at 
the  occurrence  of  correspondences  which  he  cannot 
reconcile  with  these ;  profounder  study  will  usually 
show  the  reason  for  the  discrepancy.  The  great 
majority  of  instances,  however,  will  be  found  to  fall 
under  the  following  heads.  The  graphic  representa- 
tions of  the  vowels,  not  their  sounds,  is  all  that  is 
here  considered,  but  this  will  be  found  of  much 
assistance  in  tracing  and  fixing  cognates. 


Old  English  Short  Vowels  and  Diphthongs. 


OE.  a  :  Ger.  a 
OE.  se  :  Ger.  a 

Sometimes  OE.  ae  :  Ger 
OE.  e  :  Ger.  e.  .  .  . 
OE.  ^  :  Ger.  e  (ee)  , 
OE.  i  :  Ger.  i  .  . 
OE.  o  :  Ger.  o    . 
OE.  u  :  Ger.  u  . 
OE.  y  :  Ger.  il   . 

Sometimes  OE 
OE.  ea  (20,  21)  :  Ger.  a 
OE.  eo  (20,  21)  :  Ger.  e 


y  :  Ger, 


.  baiS'ian  :  haden. 

.  craeft  :  Kraft. 

.  haerfest  :  Herhst. 

.  brecan  :  hrechen. 

.  b^dd  :  Bett;  h^re  :  Heer. 

.  fisc  :  Fisch. 

.  lof  :  Loh. 

.  burg  :  Burg. 

.  fyllan  :  fullen. 

.  hyldu  :  Huld. 

.  hearpe  :  Harfe. 

.  eorafe  :  Erde. 


245 


246  APPENDIX   II. 

Old  English  Long  Vowels  and  Diphthongs. 

OE.  a  :  Ger.  ei brad  :  hreit. 

Sometimes  OE.  a  :  Ger.  e  (ee)  .  .  .  ar  :  Ehre  ;  sawol  :  Seele. 
OE.  ie  :  Ger.  ei heel  :  Heil. 

Sometimes  OE.  ae  :  Ger.  a  or  Ger.  e .  i  If  **^  ''  ^^^^^'^ ' 

I  aerest  :  ei'st. 

OE.  e  :  Ger.  ii grene  :  grlln. 

OE.  i  :  Ger.  ei idel  :  eitel. 

OE.  o  :  Ger.  u fot  :  Fuss. 

OE.  5  :  Ger.  au hus  :  Hmis. 

OE.  ea  :  Ger.  au heafod  :  Haupt. 

Before  h,  and  dental  consonants 

(6),  OE.  ea  :  Ger.  o deaff  :  Tod. 

OE.  eo  :  Ger.  ie deor  :  Tier. 

In  tracing  back  the  history  of  these  vowels,  many 
correspondences  become  clearer.  Thus,  take  OE.  o : 
Ger.  u.  The  Old  High  German  correlative  of  6  is 
wo,  that  is,  the  one  long  vowel  is  diphthongized  into 
two  short  ones.  Of  these  it  is  the  u  which  has  sur- 
vived. If  noAV  we  consider  that  the  i-umlaut  of  6  is 
e,  and  of  Ger.  u  is  ii,  we  shall  better  understand 
such  a  pair  as  grene :  gi^iin. 

It  should  be  observed  that  Ger.  ei  corresponds  to 
OE.  a,  se,  and  i,  and  Ger.  au  to  OE.  u  and  ea ; 
similarly  Ger.  o  to  OE.  o  and  ea,  Ger.  u  to  OE.  u 
and  o,  etc.  Note,  too,  that  the  sound  of  the  vowel 
in  Ger.  eitel,  Haus,  corresponds  precisely  to  the  Mod. 
Eng.  sound  into  which  the  OE.  vowels  of  idel,  hus, 
have  respectively  developed. 

See  Kluge,  under  Dictionaries,  p.  241. 


APPENDIX  III, 

ANDREW'S  NEGOTIATIONS   WITH  THE   STEERSMAN. 

[This  extract  from  the  Greek  is  found  on  pp.  136-138  of  Tischendorf 's 
Acta  Apostolorum  Apocrypha,  and  corresponds  to  lines  235-349  of  the  Old 
English  Andi'eas.] 

*Avao-ra5  8e  *Av8peas  tw  TrpoA  iiropevero  em  rrjv  OdXaa-aav 
afJLa  Tots  fxaOrjTals  avTOv,  kol  KareXOiov  €7rt  rbv  alycakov  tSev . 
irXoiapiov  fxiKpbv  Koi  ctti  to  irXoiapiov  rpets  avS/oas  KaOe^o- 
fjiivov^ '  6  yap  KvpLo^  rrj  kavrov  Swd/xeL  KareorKevacrev  ttXolov, 
KOL  avTO'S  rjv  oxnrep  a.vOpo)Tro<;  Trpwpev<i  iv  ro)  TrXotcu '  kol  ela-yj- 
veyKCv  8vo  ayyiXov;  ovs  kiroirjaev  ws  dv6pu)TTOV<i  (fiav^vat,  kul 
^aav  iv  rcG  TrAoto)  Ka^e^o/aevoi.  6  ovv  'AvSpea?  OeacrdfJLCvo^  to 
TrXo7ov  KOLL  reus  rpcts  ovras  cv  avTw  ^X'^PV  X^P^^  p^eydX-qv 
(TffioSpa,      KOL      TTO/Dev^ets      7r/30S      avTOvs      etTrev      Xlot)      TropeveaOe, 

dSeXcfjOL,     piCTOL     TOV     TtXolOV      TOV      piiKpOV      TOVTOV  ',       KOL      d7rOKpL0€L<; 

6   KV/310S    etTrev   avrw    Ilopevo/xe^a    ev   tyJ    X^P^    '^^^    dvOp<x>7ro(jid- 

Then  Andrew  arose  early,  and  went  to  the  sea  with  his  dis- 
ciples, and,  when  he  had  gone  down  to  the  sea-shore,  he  saw  a 
little  boat,  and  in  the  boat  three  men  sitting.  For  the  Lord 
had  prepared  a  ship  by  his  own  power,  and  he  himself  was  as 
it  were  a  steersman  in  the  ship ;  and  he  brought  two  angels 
whom  he  made  to  seem  as  men,  and  they  were  seated  in  the 
ship.  Andrew,  therefore,  when  he  saw  the  ship  and  the  three 
men  in  it,  rejoiced  with  very  great  joy,  and,  coming  to  them, 
said,  Whither  go  ye,  brethren,  with  this  little  ship?  And  the 
Lord  answered  and  said  unto  him.  We  are  journeying  into  the 
country  of  the  man-eaters.      Now  Andrew,  when  he  saw  Jesus, 

247 


248  APPENDIX   III. 

yoiv.  6  Sk  'AvSpea?  6ea<Tdfxevo<i  rov  ^Irjaovv  ovk  irriyvo)  avrov ' 
rjv  yap  6  Ir]aov<s  Kpvij/a<i  rrjv  eavrov  OeorrjTa,  kol  rjv  <^atvo/x,€vos 
T<o  AvBpea  (OS  avOp(i)Tro<s  7rpo)pev<; '  6  Se  'It^ctovs  aKOvcras  tov 
AvSpiov  Aey ovTOs  ort  Kayw  eis  ttjv  ^tjipav  twv  dv^/awTro^aywv 
TTopevofxai,  Acyet  avrS  Has  avOp(i)7ro<s  (f>€vy€L  rrjv  ttoXlv  Ikuvt)v, 
KOL  TTWs  v/xets  TTOpeveaOe  €K£t  ;  Kat  aTroKpi^eis  'AvSpeas  etTrev 
IIpay/Aa  rt  puKpov  f.^op.ev  cKct  hiairpa^aa-OaL,  koX  Set  ^/xas 
CKTeAeaat  avTO  *  oAA'  ei  Suvacrai,  Trotrjaov  p.eO'  rjfiCjv  Tr]v  <f>i\av- 
BpiiiTTLOV  ravTrjv  tov  aTra^at  r}fxa<;  iv  rfj  X^P?-  "^^^  dvOp(D7ro(fidy<i)v, 
iv  rj  KOL  v/xct9  /xeAAere  TropeveaOat.  dTTOKpiOcis  Sk  6  'Iiycrovs  etTrev 
avTols  'AveXOare. 

Kat  ctTrev  'AvSpcas  ©e'Aw  (rot  rt  cf>av€p6v  Troirjarai,  veavtVKC, 
Trpo  TOV  T^/otas  (xi^eA^ctv  iv  t(S  TrAotoj  (rov.  6  0€  lrjaov<s  etTrei/ 
Aeyc  o  ftovXr).  6  Se  'AvS/aeas  cittci/  avT<3  Ntti)Aoi/  o^k  e)(oiX€v  crot 
irapaa-xi^lv,  dAA'  ovre  dpTov  €)(Ofxev  ets  8LaTpo(f)i^V'  kol  aTroKpt^ets 
6  'Ir^oroi;?  ctTrei/  at'T(i)  IIcos  ovi/  diripxecrOe  /jlt]  7rap€)(0VT€<;  rjiuv 
TOV  vavXov  fxy]Te  dprov  e)(ovTe<s  €ts  ^LaTpocjirjv ;  etTrev  Oc  Avopeas 
T(j)   'l77(rou  ''Akouctov,    dSeXcf)€ '    fxt]   voficcrrj'i   ort    Kara   Tvpavviav   ov 

knew  him  not,  for  Jesus  was  hiding  his  godhead,  and  appearing 
to  Andrew  as  a  steersman.  Jesus  hearing  Andrew  say,  I  also 
am  going  to  the  country  of  the  man-eaters,  saith  unto  him, 
Every  one  fleeth  from  that  city,  and  why  go  ye  thither?  Andrew 
answered  and  said.  We  have  a  certain  little  business  to  perform 
there,  and  must  needs  finish  it ;  if  thou  canst,  do  us  this  kindness 
to  carry  us  to  the  country  of  the  man-eaters,  to  which  ye  also  are 
bound.     Jesus  answered  and  said  unto  them.  Come. 

And  Andrew  said,  I  will  make  known  to  thee  somewhat,  young 
man,  before  we  enter  into  thy  ship.  Jesus  said.  Say  what  thou 
wilt.  Then  Andrew  said  unto  him,  We  have  no  passage-money  to 
give  thee,  neither  have  we  bread  for  food.  Jesus  answered  and  said 
unto  him.  Why  then  do  ye  depart,  seeing  that  ye  neither  give  us 
passage-money  nor  have  bread  for  food?    Andrew  said  unto  Jesus, 


APPENDIX   III.  249 

SiSofxiv  (TOL  rbv  vavXov  y/Jiiov,  dXA'  i^/xet?  fxadrjraL  Icr^iev  tov 
Kvpiov  rifxitiv  'It^ctov  X/atoroi)  rov  ayaOov  Oeov.  e^eAe^aro  yap 
T7/xa9  rovs  SwScKa,  kol  ^apeSwKci/  ^/juv  ivroXrjv  TOiavrrjv  Xiyoiv 
OTL  TTopevoixevoL  Kr)pv(T(rciv  p^r]  jSaaTa^cTe  apyvpiov  iv  rrj  68a) 
/xr/TC  dpTOV  pbrjTC  irripav  p.rJTe  VTroSypLara  pufjTe  pa/SSov  p.rjrc  Suo 
;j(tTaji/as.  d  ovv  Troiets  T-r]V  ^iXavOpoiTriav  p.eO'  t^/xcoj/,  aSeXcfie, 
eiTre  i^/xtv  crwTO/x,a)s  •  ei  ou  Troiei?,  ^ai/epwaov  ly/xtv,  Kat  iroptv- 
Oevres  $r)TT](ropev  iavrots  erepov  ttXolov.  aTvoKpiOel'i  8e  6  'It^ctov? 
eiTrev  ro)  'AvS/aea  Et  avTT^  ecrrtv  ly  ivToXr)  rjv  iXd/Scre  kol  r-qpelre 
avTYjV,  aveXOare  pLera  Tracrr;?  xapa^  iv  rw  irXom  pov.  dXr]0(o<i 
yap  /SovXopiaL  v/xas  TOv<i  p.aOr]Td<;  tov  Xeyop^ivov  'Irycrov  aveA- 
Beiv  iv  Tw  ttAoio)  ju,ou  tj  tovs  Trape^^ovras  /xot  ^pvacov  Kat  d/oyv- 
pt'ov  •  TrdvTws  ya^o  d^tos  ei/xt  tva  6  aTroaroXos  tov  Kvpcov  dviXOrj 
iv  TiJo  TrXoLio  p.ov.  ajTOKpidei^  8e  6  'Av8/oea9  etTrej/  ^vy)(0ipr)a-6v 
p,oi,  d^eX<f>€,  6  KvpLO<s  7rapd(T)(r)  aoL  tyjv  So^av  Kat  tyjv  ti/xt/v. 
Kat  dvrjXOev  'AvSpea?  /xera  rcoi/  avTOv  pLadrjTiov  eis   ro  TrAotov. 

Hearken,  brother;  think  not  that  because  of  arrogance  we  give 
thee  not  our  passage-money,  since  we  are  disciples  of  the  good 
God,  our  Lord  Jesus  Christ.  For  he  chose  us,  the  twelve,  and 
gave  us  this  commandment,  saying.  As  ye  go  to  preach,  carry 
neither  money  on  the  way,  neither  bread,  nor  scrip,  nor  shoes, 
nor  staff,  nor  two  coats.  If,  therefore,  thou  wilt  do  us  this  kind- 
ness, brother,  tell  us  plainly;  if  thou  wilt  not,  declare  it  unto 
us,  and  we  will  go  and  seek  for  om'selves  another  ship.  Jesus 
answered  and  said  unto  Andrew,  If  this  is  the  commandment 
which  ye  have  received  and  do  keep,  enter  with  all  joy  into  my 
ship;  for  verily  I  had  rather  that  ye,  the  disciples  of  him  who 
is  called  JesUvS,  should  enter  into  my  ship,  than  those  who  give 
me  gold  and  silver ;  for  I  am  certainly  worthy  that  the  apostle 
of  the  Lord  should  enter  into  my  ship.  Then  Andrew  answered 
and  said,  Agree  with  me,  brother,  and  the  Lord  give  thee  glory 
and  honor.     And  Andrew  entered  into  the  ship  with  his  disciples. 


APPENDIX   IV. 

SPECIMENS  OF  THE   DIALECTS. 

The  two  best  sources  of  information  on  the  OE. 
dialects  are  Sievers'  OE.  Grammar  and  Prof.  E.  M. 
Brown's  work  on  Mercian.  The  latter  is  in  two 
parts,  —  (Part  I.)  Die  Sprache  der  Rushworth  Glossen 
(Gottingen,  1891),  comprising  the  vowels,  and  (Part 
II.)  The  Language  of  the  Rushworth  Gloss  (Gottingen, 
1892),  comprising  a  continuation  of  the  vowels,  the 
consonants,  and  inflection. 

In  some  respects  the  non-West  Saxon  dialects 
agree.  These  common  features,  so  far  as  they  relate 
to  the  vowels,  liave  been  signalized  by  Sievers,  and 
are  here  extracted  from  §  150  of  my  edition  of  his 
Grammar :  — 

1.  In  place  of  the  West  Saxon  se  =  Germ,  e,  West 
Germ,  a,  stands  the  vowel  e. 

2.  The  WS.  ie,  ie  is  wanting,  and  hence  the  same 
is  true  of  the  unstable  y,  y  (i,  i)  (19). 

3.  The  sounds  ea,  eo  (io),  as  well  as  their  cor- 
responding long  diphthongs,  are  not  so  accurately 
discriminated  as  in  WS.  In  Northumbrian  especially 
there  is  great  confusion  between  ea  and  eo.  Kentish 
has  a  preference  for  ia  and  io,  the  former  standing 
as  well  for  WS.  ea  as  for  eo. 

4.  The  sound  oe  is  of  moi'e  extensive  occurrence. 

250 


appe:ndix  IV.  251 

I.   Northumbrian. 
1.   Caedmon's  Hymn. 

According  to  Sweet  (Oldest  English  Texts^  p.  148), 
''  The  hymn  of  Caedmon  is  written  at  the  top  of  the 
page  [i.e.  in  the  famous  Moore  MS.  of  Bede]  in  a 
smaller  hand  than  that  of  the  List  of  Kings  which 
follows  it.  It  is  not  impossible  that  the  hymn  may 
have  been  written  later  than  the  List  [which,  accord- 
ing to  Sweet,  was  written  'most  probably  in  737'], 
to  fill  the  blank  space.  But  the  hand  is  evidently 
contemporary." 

The  ae  is  not  always  joined  into  a  digraph,  and 
the  signs  of  length  and  of  i-umlaut  (^)  are  wanting. 
These  have  been  supplied,  together  with  the  punctua- 
tion and  the  division  into  lines;  in  other  respects  the 
manuscript  has  been  followed. 

The  translation  of  the  Hymn,  as  given  by  Bede 
(Hist.  Ecel.  IV.  24),  is  as  follows,  though  it  should 
be  observed  that  Bede  adds,  "  Hie  est  sensus,  non 
autem  ordo  ipse  verborum  quse  dormiens  ille  cane- 
bat":— 

"Nunc  laudare  debemus  auctorem  regni  cselestis, 
potentiam  creatoris  et  consilium  illius,  facta  patris 
glorise,  quomodo  ille,  cum  sit  seternus  deus,  omnium 
miraculorum  auctor  extitit;  qui  primo  filiis  hominum 
caelum  pro  culmine  tecti,  dehinc  terram  custos  humani 
generis  omnipotens  creavit." 

With  reference  to  the  words,  "lieben  til  lirofe,"  it 
is  interesting  that  Alcuin  (Anglia  VII.  7)  has,  "ut 
primum  Creator  niundum  quasi  domum  prsepararet,  et 
post  introduceret  habitatorem,  id  est,  dominum  domus"; 


252  APPENDIX   IV. 

cf.  "lacunar,  hushefen,  otftfe   heofenhrof"   (Wiilker- 
Wright,  Vocabularies,  432.  8). 

Variations  from  the  EWS.  norm  are  :  — 

1.  Final  -aes  instead  of  -es :  -ricaes,  metudaes,  -cynnaes. 

2.  Final  -i  for  -e :  maecti,  eci. 

3.  Final  -ae  for  -e :  ast^lidae,  tiadae. 

4.  Final  -aen,  -en  for  -on:  hefafin-,  heben. 

5.  Final  -un  for  -on :  scylun, 

6.  Final  -un  for  -an :  middun-. 

7.  Final -ur  for -er :  fadur. 

8.  Final  -ur  for  -or :  wuldur-. 

9.  Final  -ud  for  -od  :  metud-. 

10.  Final  -in  for  -en :  dryctin. 

11.  Final -ist  for -est:  aerist. 

12.  Final  -u  for  -an :  foldu. 

13.  Final  -eg  for  -ig :  haleg. 

14.  Final  -en  for  -end :  serpen. 

16.   aforea(ae):  all-,  uard,  barnum. 

16.  e  for  eo :  uerc,  heben,  hefaen-,  inetud-. 

17.  y  for  u:  scylun. 

18.  ^  for  a,  q:  ^nd. 

19.  ^li  for  eal :  ast^lidae. 

20.  ae  for  le :  Slda. 

21.  ae,  e,  ^  for  1,  ie :  maecti,  -mectig,  serpen. 

22.  laforeo:  tiadae. 

23.  a  for  ae :  -fadur. 

24.  e  for  a :  sue. 

25.  5  for  eo  (o):  scop. 

26.  gi-  for  ge- :  gihuaes. 

27.  dfor  iSr  (»:  -gidanc. 

28.  thfor  af  (>):  tha. 

29.  ct  for  ht :  dryctin,  maecti,  -mectig. 

30.  b  forf:  heben. 

31.  tUforto. 

Most  of  -  the  foregoing  variations  are  due  either  to 
the  age  of  the  document,  or  are  common  to  at  least 
two  of  the  non-West  Saxon  dialects.     The  only  ones 


APPENDIX   IV.  253 

that  seem  peculiarly  Northumbrian  are  17,  31,  and 
possibly  12.  Of  the  rest,  16  and  25  do  not  agree 
with  later  Northumbrian  (Lind.),  and  22  looks  not 
unlike  Kentish.  But  17  has  that  palatalization  of  u 
by  preceding  sc  which  we  find  in  scyur,  -scyade, 
scyldor,  scyiiiga,  scuia  (ui  as  in  druige  for  dryge), 
and  even  shya  (WS.  scua),  of  the  Lind.  Gospels. 
Til,  which  in  Old  Norse  replaces  OE.  to,  is  found 
here  and  in  Lind.  Matt.  26.  31,  besides  being  read 
in  the  Runic  inscription  on  the  Ruthwell  Cross. 
Foldu  resembles  the  eor3'u,  -o  of  Lind.  Matt.  15.  35, 
27.  45,  etc.,  which  is  the  regular  form  in  these 
Glosses. 

The  Hymn  is  as  follows :  —  - 

Nu  scylun  h^rgan       hefsenricaes  uard, 
metudses  raeecti       ^nd  his  modgidanc, 
uerc  uuldurfadur;       sue  he  uundra  gihuaes, 
eci  dryctin,       or  ast^lidse. 
5    He  Srist  scop       ^Ida  barnum 
hebeu  til  hrofe,       haleg  serpen. 
Tha  middungeard       moncynuses  uard, 
eci  dryctin,       sefter  tiadae, 
firum  foldu,       frea  allmectig. 


2.   Bede's  Death  Song. 

Of  this  Sweet  says :  "  Preserved  in  the  St.  Gall 
MS.  254,  of  the  ninth  century,  in  the  usual  conti- 
nental minuscule  hand,  evidently  an  accurate  copy  of 
an  Old  Northumbrian  original." 

As  translated  by  Cuthbert,  his  pupil,  it  runs :  — 


254  APPENDIX   TV. 

"Ante  necessarium  exitum  prudentior  quam  opus 
fuerit  nemo  existit,  ad  cogitandum  videlicet,  ante- 
quam  hinc  profiscatur  anima,  quid  boni  vel  mali 
egerit,  qualiter  post  exitum  judicanda  fuerit." 

Its  variations  from  E WS.  are  :  — 

1.  It  has  some  of  the  peculiarities  of  I.  1,  such  as  (1)  godses,  yflass, 

(2)  ni,  (3)  -faerae,  -hycgganiiiB,  -i^ngae,  gastae,  uueorthae, 
(8)  -snottur-,  (15)  tharf,  (28)  there,  uuiurthit,  thgnc-, 
than,  tharf,  aeththa,  deoth-,  uueorthae. 

2.  Final  -a  for  -e :    a'»>a. 

3.  Final  -it  for  -etS  (cf.  35) :    uuiurthit. 

4.  Final  -id  for  -ed :    doeniid. 

5.  ei  for  Te :    neid-. 
0.   e  for  ae  :    there. 

7.  iu  for  eo  (ie)  :    uuiurthit. 

8.  eo  for  ea :    deoth-. 
0.    ae  for  o :    aeththa. 

10.  <»  for  e  :    d<Kinid. 

11.  hin-  (otherwise  almost  always  poetical;. 

12.  egg  for  eg :    -liycggannae. 

13.  i  for  g  (ge)  :    -i9iigae. 

Of  the  foregoing  only  8  and  13  are  unmistakably 
Northumbrian.  With  deoth-  may  be  compared  eoro, 
Lind.  Lk.,  p.  8,  1.  15  (cf.  Jn.  18.  26);  eostro,  Lk.  22. 
1,  etc.  (15);  eoare,  Matt.  27.  64,  Lk.  14.  8  (cf.  Matt. 
10.  15)  ;  eoiing,  Matt.,  p.  22,  1.  15.  The  i<?ng  (for 
gQiig-  <  g-ang-)  is  simply  an  attempt  to  express  the 
palatal  g  (g-e) ;  g'eong  occurs  frequently  in  the  Lindis- 
farne  Gospels,  eight  times  uncompounded.  Rushworth 
has  iarw-,  but  not  i<?ng  (p.  253,  note  10).  At  least 
Anglian  (North.  Merc.)  is  (9)  seppa;  as  etftfa.  (eppa) 
it  occurs  in  Rush.  Matt.  5.  18,  and  in  the  Riddles 
ascribed  to  Cynewulf  (44.  17). 


APPENDIX   IV.  255 

The  text  is :  — 

Fore  there  neidfaerse       nsenig  ni  uuiurthit 
thoncsnotturra       than  him  tharf  sie, 
to  ymbhycggannae       ser  his  hiniongae 
huset  his  gastse       godses  seththa  yflaes 
5   sefter  deothdsege       dcemid  iiueorthse. 

3.  The  Day  of  Judgment. 

The  text  is  taken  from  Skeat's  edition  of  Matthew. 
As  far  as  practicable  the  readings  have  been  con- 
formed to  the  norms  of  the  Lindisfarne  Gospels 
(ca.  950).  But  as  there  is  often  great  variation  in  the 
spelling  and  endings  of  the  same  word,  normalizing 
has  not  been  attempted  in  all  cases.  Where  changes 
have  been  made,  the  MS.  reading  is  given  in  a  note. 
The  equivalent  for  Lat.  et  is  nearly  always  repre- 
sented by  a  contraction,  as  is  frequently  that  for  vel^ 
aut ;  these  have  been  rendered  by  the  usual  words, 
and,  oSrace.  The  second  of  two  alternative  glosses 
has  been  enclosed  in  square  brackets,  and  so  has 
occasionally  a  superfluous  word. 

Variations  from  EWS.  are  (only  the  more  important 
are  registered) :  — 

1.  Of  I.  1 :   (5,  but  not  regularly,  see  foot-notes),  (15)  alle,  -saldes, 

-saldon,    (21)  maeht,    (23)  fadores    (cf.  24,  suS);    of   I.  2  : 
(10)  gebloedsad. 

2.  Loss  of  final  -n  :    eatta,  drinca,  befora,  ff^nde. 

3.  Uncontracted   ind.   pres.  3   sing.    (cf.  I.  2.  3):    sittes,   sceades, 

s^tteS*,  etc. 

4.  Plurals  in  -as  (s),  as  well  as  -aS" :   byas,  agnigas,  gaas. 

5.  Change  of  gender:    -maehtes. 

6.  Plural  of  long  neuters  in  -o :  cynno. 


256 


APPENDIX    IV. 


7.  Plural    of    adjectives    and    past    participles    in    -o:     sofffaesto, 

awoergedo. 

8.  Weak  plurals  in  -o :    ilco. 

9.  Shortened  plurals  of  verbs  in  -o,  instead  of  -e :    sohto. 

10.  ea  (representing  eo)  for  e :   eatta. 

11.  OB  for  e  after  w  (denoted  by  u)  :    cuoeffas. 

12.  e  for  ea  before  palatals :    ec. 

13.  eg  for  aw :    segon. 

14.  e  for  y:    dedon. 

15.  i  for  y  before  palatals :    drihten. 

16.  Irregular  umlaut :    cymineS'. 

17.  Irregular  gemination  :   eatta,  cymmeaP,  untrymmig. 

18.  eg  for  CO :    ticgen-. 

19.  eg  for  g :    hyneg-. 

20.  d  for  t  (d  original) :    gebluedsad. 

21.  ff  for  t:    sesarel. 

22.  ff  for  d:    miff. 

23.  -ig  for  -ing:    cynig. 

24.  Inorganic  initial  h :   hriordadon. 

25.  Loss  of  final  -e :    ric. 

26.  The  form  biijon. 

27.  The  form  hia. 

Under  the  Northumbrian  is  printed  the  corresponding 
passage  from  the  Vulgate,  with  collations  of  the  Latin 
versions  on  which  the  Lindisfarne  and  Rushworth  glosses 
are  respectively  based.     The  text  is  :  — 

Mit5t5y  uut'^  cymes  Sunu  Monnes  in  mseht  liis,  and  alle 

^nglas^  mit5  him,  M  he  sittes  ofer  seSel  godcimdmaehtes^ 

his.      And  gesomnad  bitSon  befora  hine   alle   cynno/  and 

tosceades   hIa  betulh,   sua^  hiorde   tosceades^  scip^   from 

5   ticgeniim.     And  he  s^tteS  'Sa  scTp  ec  so(5  [uuf]  to  suiS- 

1  Abbreviation    of    uutedlice  ^  MS.  -as. 

(-tet-),  AVS.  witodlice.  ^  MS.  scipo ;  this  neuter  is  ex- 

2  MS.  engles.  *  eynne.  ceptional  in  its  preponderance  of 

3  MS.  -maeht.  ^  MS.  sua.       plur.  nom.  ace.  without  ending. 


APPENDIX   IV.  257 

rum  his,  '5a  ticgeno  soSlice  of  winstrum.  Donne  [he] 
cueSes  t5e^  cynig  t5^m  6a-t5e  to  smt5rum  his  bit5on  [hia], 
"CymmeS  gie,  gebloedsad  f adores  mines,  byas^  [agnigas^] 
gegearwad*  luh  ric  from  frymSo  middangeardes.  Ic  ge- 
hyncgerde  [ic  waes  hyncgrig^]  for-t5on,  and  ^u  gesaldes  5 
me  eatta;  ic  wses  ^yrstig,  and  gesaldon  me  drinca^;  g^st 
ic  waes,  and  gie  somnadon  mec^;  nacod,  and  gie  cleetSdon 
[gie  wrigon]  mec^;  untrymig,^  and  gie  sohton  mec^;  in 
carcern,^  and  gie  cuomon^^  to  me.  Da  ondueardas  [ond- 
sueriga'S]  him  soSfaesto,  cuoeSas,  Drihten,  huoenne  t5ec  we  10 
segon  hungrig  [hyngrende],  and  we  hriordadon^°  Sec? 
t^yrstende  [Syrstig],  and  we  saldon"  t5e  drinca^^?  huoen- 
ne ^^  uutetli'  'Sec  we  segon  g^stig,  and  we  somnadon  Sec, 
ot56e  nacod,  and  we  awrigon  t5ec?  huoenne  'Sec  we  gesegon 
untrymig  and  in  carcern,  and  we  cuomon^"  to  t5e?"  And  15 
geondweardetS  t5e  cynig,  cuoet5es  Sgem,  '^  SoSlice  ic  cuoeSo 
luh,  •g^nde  gie  dydon"  anum  of  t^isum  brotSrum  mlnum 
lytlum,  me  gie  dydon."  Da  cuoeSes^^  and  Sgem  Sa-Se  to 
winstrum  biSon,  "Ofstlga'S^^  gie  from  me,  awoergedo,  in 
fyr  ece,^^  se-'5e  foregegearuuad  is  dlwle  and  ^nghim  20 
[Segnum]  his.  Mec  gehyncgerde,  and  ne  saldo^^  gie  me 
eatta ;  mec  'Syrste,  and  ne  saldo  gie  me  drinca ;  g^st  ic 
waes,  and  ne  gesomnade  gie  mec;  nacod,  and  ne  awrigon 
gie  mec ;  untrymig  ^  and  in  carcern,  and  ne  sohto  gie 
mec."  Da  ondueardas  and  t5a  ilco  [hia],  cuoeSendo,  25 
"Drihten,  huoenne  tSec  we  segon  hyncgrende,^^  oSSe 
t$yrstende,^  o^^e  g^st,  otSSe  nacod,  ot5Se  untrymig,  oSSe  in 

1  Se  is  about  one-half       ^  ms_  hincgrig.         i^  jyf  g,  huonne. 
more  numerous  than  fSe.       ^  MS.  dringe.  1*  MS.  dyde. 

2  MS.  byes.  7  MS.  meh.  is  MS.  coegfes. 
^  MS.  agneges  ;    for        ^  MS.  untrymmig.    i^  MS.  -es. 

-igas,  etc.,  -as  and  -txtf  ^  MS.  carchern.  1^  MS.  ecce. 

are  frequently  found  in  10  mS.  -un.  is  mS.  sealdo. 

these  verbs.  n  MS.  sealdon.  i^  MS.  hyncgerende. 

*  MS.  gegearwaff.  12  mS.  fringe.  20  MS.  -a. 


258  APPENDIX    IV. 

carcern,  and  ne  ^mbehtadon  ^  we  «e  ?  "  Da  he  ondueardeS 
S^m,  cweSende,  "SoSlice  ic  cuet5o  luh,  Sa  hwile  ne  dyde 
gle  anum  of  lytlum  tSissum  [sua  long  gie  ne  dedon^  anum 
Sisra^  metdmaasta],  ne  me  gie  dydon.'*"  And  gaas^  Sas 
5   in  tintergo  ece,  sot^fsesto^  uut'  in  lif  ece. 

Cum  autem  venerit  Filius  hominis  in  majestate  sua,  et 
omnes  angeli  cum  eo,  tunc  sedebit  super  sedem  majestatis 
suae.  Et  congregabuntur  ante  eum  omnes  gentes,  et  sepa- 
rabit  eos  ab  invicem,  sicut  pastor  segregat  oves  ab  hsedis. 
Et  statuet  oves  quidem  a  dextris  suis,  haedos  autem  a 
sinistris.  Tunc  dicet  rex  his,  qui  a  dextris  ejus  erunt : 
"Venite,  benedicti  Patris  mei,  possidete  paratum^  vobis 
regnum  a  constitutione  mundi.  Esurivi  enim,  et  dedistis 
mihi  manducare ;  sitivi,  et  dedistis®  mihi  bibere;  hospes 
eram,  et  coUegistis  ^  me  ;  nudus,^*^  et  cooperuistis  ^^  me  ; 
infirmus,  et  visitastis  me  ;  in  carcere  eram,^  et  venistis 
ad  me."  Tunc  respondebunt  ei  justi,  dicentes :  "Domine, 
quando  te  vidimus  esurientem,  et  pavimus  te?  sitientem,^^ 
et  dedimus  tibi  potum  ?  quando  autem  te  vidimus  hos- 
pitem,  et  collegimus"  te,  aut  nudum  et  cooperuimus  te^^? 
aut  quando  te  vidimus  infirmum,  aut^^  in  carcere,  et  veni- 
mus  ad  te?"  Et  respondens  rex,  dicet  illis :  "Amen  dico 
vobis,  quamdiu  fecistis  uni^^  ex^®  his  fratribus  meis  mini- 
mis, mihi  fecistis."     Tunc  dicet  et^'-*  his,  qui  a^  sinistris ^^ 

1  MS.  embigto.  .  "  L.  operuistts. 

2  Less     common     form     for  ^^  l^  om. ;  R.  fiii. 
dydon.  ^^  R.  aut  sitientem. 

3  MS.  iSTassa.       ^  MS.  gaes.  "  L.  colleximus. 

4  MS.  dyde.         ^  MS.  -faeste.  ^^  L.  om.  le  l.  et. 

"^  R.  regnum  quod  vobis  para-  ^"^  R.  uni  ex  minimis  his  fra- 

turn  est  ab  origine  mundi.  tribus  meis. 

^Jj.dedisti.  is  L.  de.  ^^  R.  rex.' 

9  L.  collexistis.  ^  L.  ad. 

10  R.  nudus  eram.  ^i  r.  sinistris  ejus. 


APPENDIX   IV.  259 

erunt :  "  Discedite  ^  a  me,  maledicti,  in  ignem  seternum, 
qui  paratus^  est  diabolo  et  angelis  ejus.  Esurivi  enim, 
et  non  dedistis  mihi  manducare ;  sitivi,  et  non  dedistis 
mihi  potum^;  hospes  eram,  et  non  collegistis '^  me;  nudus, 
et  non  cooperuistis  ^  me ;  infirmus  et  in  carcere,  et  non 
visitastis  me."  Tunc  respondebunt  ei^  et  ipsi,  dicentes : 
"Domine,  quando  te  vidimus  esurientem,  aut  sitientem, 
aut  liospitem,  aut'  nudum/  aut  infirmum,  aut^  in  carcere, 
et  non  ministravimus  tibi  ? "  Tunc  respondebit  illis, 
dicens  :  "  Amen  dico  vobis,  quamdiu  non  fecistis  uni  de 
minoribus  his,  nee  mihi  fecistis."  Et  ibunt  hi  in  sup- 
plicium  seternum,  justi  autem  in  vitam  seternam. 

1 L.  discendite.  ^  R.  hibere.  ^  L.  om. 

"^  Jj.  prceparatus ;    R.  quern  ^  li.  collexistis.  "^  R.  om. 

prceparavit  pater  meus  diabolo.  ^  L.  operuistis.  ^  L.  vel. 


II.   Mercian. 

Mercian  has  been  thus  characterized  by  Brown  (ut 
supra,  Part  I.,  p.  81,  with  which  should  be  compared 
his  Part  II.,  p.  91) :  — 

"There  is  naturally  much  general  agreement  with 
Northumbrian,  since  both  are  Anglian.  Variations 
from  North,  are  in  some  cases  approximations  to  WS., 
but  not  in  all.  In  certain  respects  Mercian  stands 
quite  by  itself;  in  particular  — 

"1.  OE.  stable  e  [i.e.  not  ^]  is  usually  retained 
in  Mercian,  yet  is  more  or  less  frequently  changed 
to  se. 

"  2.  The  o-umlaut  of  a  scarcely  occurs  in  WS.,  and 
not  at  all  in  either  Kentish  or  Northumbrian,  but  is 
well  developed  in  Mercian. 


260  APPENDIX   IV. 

"3.    The  U-,  o-umlaut  of  e  to  eo,  and  of  i  to  io,  eo, 

occurs  at  least  more  regularly  in  Mercian  than  in  WS. 
and  the  other  dialects. 

"  It  is  true  that  these  peculiarities  give  no  sharp  out- 
lines to  Mercian,  yet  they  sufficiently  characterize  it  as 
a  dialect,  and  not  merely  as  Northumbrian  modified  by 
West  Saxon  scribes,  or  the  reverse." 


1.    The  Day  of  Judgment. 

The  text  is  from  Skeat's  edition  of  Matthew,  normal- 
ized like  the  last.  There  is  a  difference  of  opinion  about 
the  date  of  the  Gloss.  Skeat  says  (ed.  of  Mark,  p.  xii) 
that  it  may  be  referred  to  the  latter  half  of  the  tenth 
century.  Brown  (Part  I.,  p.  83)  would  date  it  just  before 
the  decay  of  Latin  studies  to  which  Alfred  testifies ;  the 
latter  also  infers  that  its  origin  was  not  near  the  Kentish 
border.  The  phonological  and  inflectional  points  of  dif- 
ference from  both  West  Saxon  and  Northumbrian  should 
be  noted. 

The  passage  is  as  follows :  — 


And^  mit5-|>y^  cyme})  j^onne  Simii'^  Monnes  in  '(Srymme 
his,  and  alle''  ^nglas  mi?i  hine,  ponne^  gesite))^  on  sedle'' 
his    ])rymmes.      And    gesomnade^  beo(S   beforan   him   alle'* 

1  Represented  in  MS.  only  by  *  MS.  ealle;  a  is  more  common 
the  abbreviation  ;  and  occurs  but  before  1  +  cons.,  though  eall  and 
once  in  the  Gospel,  and  is  accord-  healf  are  somewhat  exceptional, 
ingly  restored  here ;  a,  too,  is  more  ^  ]7onne  is  much  commoner, 
likely  to  occur  in  proclitics.  and  so  o  before  nasals  in  general. 

2  Both  miS"  and  mid  are  found ;  ^  MS.  gesitae>. 

here  the  following  }>  may  have  ^  This  word  has  >  and  t  (tt), 

influenced.  as  well  as  d. 

3  MS.  sune.        »  »  MS.  gesomnedc. 


APPENDIX   IV.  261 

j)eode,  and  gesceade]?^  hise  in  twa,^  swa  Morde^  asceade]?* 
seep  from  ticnum.  And  s^te}>  ]>a  scep^  on  J)a*^  swl^ran 
halfe/  his  tieeen  ponne  on  ]?a  winstran  JialfeJ  ponne 
cwsej)^  se  Cyning  J)^m  pe  on  pa  swij^ran  lialfe  his  beon, 
"Cumap,^  gebletsade  mines  Fseder,  gesittatS  rice  ^te  eow 
geiarwad^*^  waes  from  s^tnisse  middangeardes.  For-pon-t^e 
mec^^  yngrade/^  and  ge  saldun  me  etan;  mec  pyrste,  and 
ge  saldun  ^'^  me  drincan;  cuma  ic  waes,  and  ge  feormadun 
mec";  nacud  ic  wses,  and  ge  wrigun^'*  mec;  untruni/^  and 
ge  neosadun  mm;  in  carcerne^^  ic  wses,  and  ge  cwomun^^ 
to  me."  ponne  andswarigap  ^^  him^^  [p£em]  sopfseste,^ 
cwsepende/^  "  Dryhten,  hwonne  ^^  gesegun  ^  we  t5e  hyng- 
rende,  and  we  fceddun^'^  pe?  oppe  pyrstigne,  and  we  pe 
drincan  saldun?  hwanne^^  ponne  gesegun^  we  pe"  cuman, 
and  gef  eormadun  •6e "  ?  oppe  nacudne,  and  we  pec " 
wrigun^'*?  opt5e  hwonne^  we  pe"  segun  untrymne^^  opt^e 
in  cwarterne,^  and  we  cwomun  ^^  to  pe  ? "  And  and- 
swarade  se  Cyning,  cwsep  to  heom/*^  "Sop  ic  saecge  eow, 
swa  longe  swa  ge  dydun  anum  pe^^  leesesta^^  para  bropre^^ 

1  MS.  gesceadi)>.  wreogan,  but  this  verb   is  ex- 

2  MS.  tu,  but  less  common.  ceptional. 

8  heorde  also  occurs.  ^^  With  i-umlaut,  and  without. 

*  MS.  ascade>.  ^®  MS.  carkaern. 

5  MS.  scaep.  ^^  MS.  coman. 

6  Lat.  omits  suis.  ^^  MS.  andswaerigaj?. 

7  MS.  healfe.  ^^  Sing.  Mm,  plur.  heom. 

8  Usual  form  for  pres.,  as  well  ^o  .faeste  rather  more  common, 
as  pret. ;  pres.  also  cwe]>.  21  cwae]?ende  nearly  as  com- 

9  MS.  cyme}>.  mon  as  cwe)>ende. 

10  Less  common  than  gegear-  22  hwanne  and  hwonne  about 
wad.  equal. 

11  mec,  larec  rather  commoner  23  jyfg  gesagun. 
in  ace.  24  MS.  foeddan. 

12  Loss  of  initial  h  exceptional.  25  ]yi;g  quartern. 

13  MS.  salden.  26  Here  nom. ;    Jie  occasional 
1*  MS.    forms    are    wriogan,       for  se. 


15 


262 


APPENDIX  IV. 


mine/  ge  me  dydun.^ "  ponne  cwaej)  se  Cyning  ec  to  ]>8em 
fa-fe  on  fsem  winstran  halfe  beo}>an,  "Gewita]?  from  me, 
awsergde,^  in  ece*  fyr,  ^te  waes  geiarwad^  Feeder^  min^ 
deofle  and  his  ^nglum/  For-fon-pe  mec^  hyngrede,  and 
5  ge  ne  saldun  me  etan;  mec^  Syrste,  and  ge  ne  saldun  me 
drincan;  cuma^  ic  wa3S,  and  ge  ne  feormadun  mec*^;  nacud, 
and  ge  ne  wrigun^^  mec^;  untrum"  and  in  carcerne/^  and 
ge  ne  neosadun  min."  ponne  andswarigaS  hise  sw^elce/^ 
cwael^ende/^  "  Dry h ten,  hwanne^  gesegun^^  we  ^e^  hyng- 

10  rende,  o]>\)e  J^yrstigne,  oppe  cuman,  opSe  mntrum,^^  oppe 
in  carcerne,^''  and  we  ne  ))egnadun  ^^  fe  ?  "  ponne  and- 
swara|>^^  heom,^  cwej^ende,"  "SoJ>  ic  ssecge  eow,  swa  longe 
swa  ge  ne  dydun  anum  meodumra-^  ))issa,  ne  me  ge  ne 
dydun.'^      And  g'^])^  hiae  in  sece^  tintergu,^  ))a  so}>feste^'' 

IS   ponne  in  sece*  llf. 


1  See  p.  253,  note  26. 

2  MS.  dydon. 

8  MS.  awaBrgede. 

*  8Bce  rather  more  common. 
^  MS.  geiarvvard. 

6  Cf.  the  Latin  of  this  text. 

'  MS.  englas. 

8  See  p.  253,  note  11. 

*  MS.  cuman. 

10  See  p.  253,  note  14. 

11  See  p.  253,  note  15. 

12  MS.  carkern. 

13  MS.  swilce ;  the  only  other 
instance  in  the  Gospel  is  swaelce. 


1*  See  p.  253,  note  21. 

15  See  p.  253,  note  22. 

16  See  p.  253,  note  23. 
1'^  MS.  carcraennae. 
18  MS.  J?egnedun. 
1^  MS.  andswarej>. 

20  See  p.  253,  note  18. 

21  MS.  meoduma. 

22  More    common   than 
influence  of  the  sing.? 

23  Only  instance  of  u  in  plur. 
of  disyllabic  neuters ;  cf .  ticcen, 
above. 

2*  See  p.  253,  note  20. 


gaff; 


2.  Psalm  XX.  (XXI.) 

The  Psalm  is  taken  from  the  Vespasian  Psalter  as 
printed  in  Sweet's  Oldest  English  Texts,  This  was 
formerly  regarded   as    Kentish,  and   even   yet   Brown 


APPENDIX   IV.  263 

(Part  I.,  p.  82)  is  inclined  to  think  that  its  Mercian 
is  that  of  the  region  adjoining  Kent.  Sweet  (p.  184) 
refers  the  gloss  to  the  first  half  of  the  ninth  century. 
The  forms  are  less  varied  than  in  the  last.  The  Latin 
is  the  Vulgate  version,  collated  with  that  on  which  the 
gloss  is  based. 
The  text  is :  — 

Dryhten,  in  megne  ^inum  bitS  geblissad  cyning;  ond 
ofer  hselu  ^ine  gef  16  ^  swit^lice !  Lust  sawle  his  ^u  saldes 
him,  ond  willan  weolera  his  ^u  ne  bisc^redes  hine.  For- 
Son  tSu  forecwome  hine  in  bledsunge^  swcetnisse^;  M 
s^ttes  heafde  his  beg  of  stane  deorwyrSmn.^  Llf  bed,  5 
ond  M  saldes  him  l^ngu  dsega^  in  weoruld  weorulde. 
Micel  is  Avuldur  his  in  li^lu  tSinre;  wuldur  ond  micelne 
wlite  •Sti  ons^tes  ofer  hine.  For-(5on  6u  shiest  hine  in 
bledsunge  in  weoruld  weorulde ;  tSu  geblissas  hine  in 
gef  Ian  mid  ondwleotan^  {^Tnum.  For-'Son  cyning  gehyhte6  10 
in  Dryhtne,  and  in  mildheortnisse  ^es  hestan  ne  biS 
onstyred.  Sle  [biS]  gimoeted  hond  Sin  allum  feondum 
•Sinum ;  sTe  swiSre  (5m  gemoetetS  alle  Sa-'Se  6ec  ^  flgaS. 
Du  s^tes  hie  swe-swe  ofen  fyres  in  tid  ondwleotan^ 
twines;  Dryhten  in  eorre  his  gedroefeS  hie,  ond  forswilgeS  15 
hie  fyr.  Westem  heara  of  eorSan  Su  forspildes,  and  sed 
heara  from  bearnum  monna.  For-tSon  hie  onh^ldun^  in 
•5e  yfel ;  t5ohtun  geSseht  Saet  hie  ne  msehtun  gesteat^ul- 
festian.  For-Son  ^u  s^tes  hie  bee,  in  lafum  Sinum  Su 
gearwas  ondwleotan  heara.  H^fe  up,  Dryhten,  in  megne  20 
t5inum;   we  singa'S  and  singaS  megen  15m. 

1  MS.  geflhS".  6  111  this  word  io  is  commoner ; 

2  We  should  expect  bloedsunge.     but  the  rule  is  eo. 

3  MS.  swetnisse.  ^  MS.  fSe. 

*  MS.  deorwyrafem.  8  MS.  Qndwliotan ;  see  note  5. 

5  MS.  d^ga.  »  MS.  onhaeldou. 


264  APPENDIX   IV. 

Domine,  in  virtute  tua  laetabitur  rex;  et  super  salutare 
tuum  exiiltabit  vehementer.  Desiderium  cordis^  ejus 
tribuisti  ei,  et  voluntate  labiorum  ejus  non  fraudasti 
eum.  Quoniam  prsevenisti  eum  in  benedictionibus  dul- 
cedinis ;  posuisti  in  capite  ejus  coronani  de  lapide  pre- 
tioso.  Vitani  petiit^  a^  te,^  et  tribuisti  ei  longitudinem 
dierum  in  saeculum,  et  in  ssecuhim  sseculi.  Magna  est 
gloria  ejus  in  salutari  tuo;  gloriam  et  magnum  decorem 
impones  super  eum.  Quoniam  dabis  eum  in  benedictionem 
in  saeculum  sfcculi ;  liietiticabis  eum  in  gaudio  cum  vultu 
tuo.  (Quoniam  rex  sperat^  in  Domino,  et  in  misericordia 
Altissimi  non  coiiimovebitur.  Inveniatur  manus  tua  omni- 
bus inimicis  tuis ;  dextera  tua  inveniat''  omnes  qui  te 
oderunt.  Tones  eos  ut  clibanum  ignis  in  tempore  vultus 
tui;  Dominus  in  ira,sua  contiu'babit  eos,  et  devorabit  eos 
ignis.  Fructum  eorum  de  terra  perdes ;  et  semen  eorum 
a  filiis  liominum.  Quoniam  declinaverunt  in  te  mala ; 
cogitaverunt  consilia,^  (pue^  non  potuerunt  stabilire.  Quo- 
niam pones  eos  dorsum^;  in  reliquis  tuis  praeparabis 
vultum  eorum.  Exaltare,  Domine,  in  virtute  tua ;  can- 
tabimus  et  psallemus  virtutes  tuas. 

1  MS.  animce.  ^  MS.  sperabit.  ^  MS.  quod. 

2  MS.  jyetit.  ^  MS.  inveniit.  "^  MS.  deorsum. 

5  MS.  consilium. 


III.    Kentish. 

The  preference  for  the  e-sound  (both  long  and  short) 
is,  according  to  Zupitza  (^Hawpfs  Zeitschrift^  XXI.  4), 
characteristic  of  the  Kentish  dialect.  Sievers  remarks 
(§  154)  that  a  distinctive  characteristic  of  Kentish  is 
the  substitution  of  e,  e,  for  y,  y,  and  to  some  extent  the 
converse. 


APPENDIX   IV.  265 

In  our  reproduction  of  the  following  pieces,  ^  is 
employed  only  where  it  is  found  in  the  MSS.,  in  order 
to  avoid  confusion  between  the  theoretical  and  the 
MS.  ^. 

1.   liufa's  Confirmation  of  her  Bequest. 

The  will  of  which  this  is  the  concluding  portion 
dates  from  832.  It  is  printed  by  Sweet  in  his  Oldest 
English  Texts,  pp.  446-447,  and  by  Earle,  Land  Charters, 
pp.  165-166.  Earle  adds :  "  This  piece  is  given  in 
Thorpe's  Analecta  as  a  specimen  of  East  Anglian ; 
but  Kemble  remarked  that  Mundlingham  is  in  Kent." 

Note  the  e  (e)  for  se  (se),  ia  (la)  for  eo  (eo) ; 
b  for  f  is  of  course  not  peculiar  to  Kentish  (I.  1.  30). 

The  text  is  as  follows:  — 

*i*  Ic  Luba,  ea'Smod  Godes  t^Iwen,  t5as  forecwedenan  god, 
and  Sas  elmessan,  gesette  and  gefestnie,  ob  mlnem  erfe- 
lande  et  Mmidlingham,  t$em  hiiuni  to  Cristes  cirican;  and 
ic  bidde,  and  an  Godes  libgendes  naman  beblade,  t5tem 
men  ^e  6is  land  and  Sis  erbe  hebbe  et  Mundlingham,  Set 
he  tJas  god  forSleste  56  wiaralde  ende.  Se  man,  se  Sis 
healdan  wille,  and  lestan  Set  ic  beboden  hebbe  an  Sisem 
gewrite,  se  him  seald  and  gehealden  sla  hiabenlice 
bledsung ;  se  his  ferwerne,  oSSe  hit  agele,  se  him  seald 
and  gehealden  helle  wite,  biite  he  to  fulre  bote  gecerran 
wille,  Gode  and  mannum.  Uene  ualete. 
*i*  Lufe  })incggewrit. 

2.   The  Kentish  Hymn. 

The  Hymn  is  No.  8  of  Grein's  Bihliothek  (II.  290- 
291).  The  text  is  conformed  to  that  of  Kluge  in  his 
Lesehuch,  pp.  111-112. 


266  APPENDIX  IV. 

To  be  noted  are  the  io,  ia  for  eo  (hiofen,  hiafen), 
lo  for  eo,  e  for  ae  (fegere,  Feder,  lieleara,  -fest),  se  for 
e,  i.e.  oe  (blsetsiaSC,  hrsemig)  and  for  ie  (geflaemdest), 

and  especially  the  e  for  y  (senna,  gefelled),  and  e  for 
y  (ales,  gerena).  Standard  West  Saxon  vowels  are 
also  found,  and  perhaps  indicate  a  West  Saxon  scribe. 

With  respect  to  consonants,  the  omission  of  the  mid- 
dle one  of  three  is  noted  by  Zupitza  as  characteristic 
(senium).  The  loss  of  final  d  (walden)  is  found 
elsewhere  in  Kentish  (Zupitza,  p.  11) ;  but  see  also 
I.  1.  14.  Nc  (ngc,  ncg)  for  ng  (cyninc,  cyningc ;  cf. 
Jjincg-,  p.  257,  1.  12)  is  another  mark  (Zupitza,  p.  13). 

The  Hymn  is  as  follows:  — 

Wilton  wuldrian       weorada  Dryhten, 

halgan  lilloSorcwiduni       hiofenrices  Weard, 

liifian  iTofwendiim       llf^s  Agend, 

and  him  simle  sTo       sigef^st  wuldor 
5   uppe  mid  aenluin       and  on  eorSan  sibb  [5] 

gumena  gehwilcuin       goodes  willan  ! 

We  t5e  heriatS       hrdgum  stefnum, 

and  ])e  blaetsiaS       ])iie\vitne  F^der, 

and  Se  pancia^,       ])Toda  Walden, 
10  •8Tnes  weoiiSlTcan       wuldordreames  [10] 

and  'Sare  miclan       msegena  gerena, 

t5e  M  God  Dryhten       gastes  msehtum 

hafest  on  gewealdum       hiofen  and  eorSan, 

an  ece  F^der,       selmehtig  God! 
15    Du  eart  cyninga  Cyningc       cwicera  gehwilces;      [15] 

^11  eart  sigefest  Sunn       and  sot5  H^lend 

ofer  ealle  gesc^ft       angla  and  manna! 

Du  Dryhten  God       on  dreamum  wunast 

on  t5£ere  upplican      se^elan  ceastre, 
20  Frea  folca  gehwaes,       swa  Su  set  fruman  weere      [20] 


APPENDIX   TV.  267 

efeneadig  Beam       agenum  I'ybcler  ! 

Du  eart  heofenlic  lioht       and  t^aet  halige  lamb, 

t5e  (5u^  manscilde       middangeardes 

for  |)inre  arf^stnesse       ealle  towurpe, 
5   fiond  geflaemdest,       folic  gene  redes,  [25] 

blode  gebohtest       beam  Israela 

t5a  ^u  ahofe       t5urh  t^set  halige  triow 

Sinre  Srowunga       ^rlostre  senna, 

])ddt  'Su  on  hgeahsetle       heafena  rices 
10   sitest  sigelirsemig       on  t5a  swi'Sran  hand  [30] 

•Sinum  God-Fa^der       gasta  gemyndig. 

Mildsa  nil  meahtig       manna  cynne, 

and  of  leahtriim  ales       'Sine  t5a  liofan  gesc^ft, 

and  us  hale  gedo,       heleSa  Sceppend, 
15   niSa  Nergend,       for  Sines  naman  are !  [35] 

Du  eart  soSlice       simle  halig, 

and  t5u  eart  ana       sece  Dryhten, 

and  •Sti  ana  bist       eallra  Dema 

cwucra  ge  deadra,       Crist  Nergend, 
20  for-^San  t5u  on  Srymme  ricsast       and  on  tSrmesse   [40] 

and  on  annesse,       ealles  Waldend, 

hiofena  heahcyninc,       Halige s  Gastes 

fegere  gefelled      in  Feeder  wuldre ! 

1  MS.  ffy. 


APPENDIX  V. 

I-UMLAUT  ILLUSTRATED   FROM   GOTHIC. 

The  earliest  Germanic  language  represented  by  exist- 
ing specimens  is  the  Gothic.  Much  the  most  consider- 
able part  of  these  specimens  consist  of  fragments  of  a 
translation  of  the  Bible,  or  rather  of  the  Bible  with 
the  exception  of  the  Books  of  Kings,  made  by  Wulfila 
(less  correctly,  Ulphilas),  a  Goth  of  the  fourth  century. 
While  it  would  be  a  serious  error  to  regard  Gothic  as  the 
parent  of  the  other  Germanic  tongues,  it  is  undoubtedly 
true  that  in  many  respects  it  most  nearly  represents 
what  we  may  conceive  to  have  been  the  character  of  the 
Primitive  Germanic  language.  In  particular,  the  origi- 
nal vowels  of  stem-endings  and  inflectional  terminations 
are  often  extant  in  Gothic,  while  by  the  time  of  Old 
English  they  are  either  lost,  or  exist  in  a  modified  form. 

From  what  has  been  said,  it  is  manifest  that  a  compari- 
son of  Gothic  forms  with  those  of  Old  English  is  often 
very  instructive.  The  phenomenon  known  as  i-umlaut, 
for  example,  becomes  much  more  intelligible  through  such 
a  comparison,  as  a  few  illustrations  will  render  evident. 

In  the  revised  version  of  2  Cor.  10.  12,  the  marginal 
reading  is,  "For  we  are  not  bold  to  judge  ourselves 
among  .  .  .  certain  of  them  that  commend  themselves." 
The  Gothic  has,  "  Unte  ni  gadaursum  domjan  unsis 
silbans,"  etc.      Here  the  English  word  judge  is  repre- 

268 


APPENDIX   V.  269 

sented  by  the  Gothic  domjan  (pronounced  domyan)^  to 
which  corresponds  the  OE.  deman.  Again,  for  OE. 
sec(e)an  (114),  n^rian  (116),  the  Gothic  has  sokjan, 
nasjan  (s  changing  to  r),  as  in  Lk.  19.  10 :  "  Qam  auk 
sunus  mans  sokjan  jah  nasjan  pans  fralusanans." 

According  to  103,  the  ind.  pres.  3  sing,  of  forbeodan 
is  forbiet  or  forbiett.  The  corresponding  Gothic  form 
occurs  in  Lk.  8.  25 :  "  Hwas  siai  sa,  ei  jah  windam 
faurhiudip  jah  watnam  ? "  (Who  then  is  this,  that 
he  commandeth  even  the  winds  and  the  water(s)?) 
The  stem  of  the  Gothic  verb  faurhiudi/>  is  Mud-,  which 
in  OE.  is  represented  by  beod-.  Umlaut  is  caused  by 
the  -^-  of  the  ending  -i/^,  which  is  sometimes  retained  in 
OE.  as  -(e)ar,  but  frequently  disappears,  according  to  23 
and  34.  Similarly  Gothic  fraliusi/^  is  represented  in 
OE.  by  forliest,  as  in  Lk.  15.  8,  where,  for  the  "if  she 
lose  one  piece  "  of  the  English,  the  Gothic  has,  "  jabai 
fraliusifi  drakmin  ainamma."  Again,  take  the  OE. 
hatau,  of  which  the  ind.  pres.  3  sing,  is  li8et(t).  Here 
the  Gothic  infinitive  is  haitan,  and  the  ind.  pres.  3  sing. 
haiti/).  Thus,  in  Lk.  15.  9,  '-'- gahaitip  frijondjos  "  (call- 
eth  together  her  friends). 

In  Mk.  1.  16,  where  our  version  has  net,  the  OE.  has 
n^tt,  and  the  Gothic  nati:  "  wairpandans  nati  in  marein." 
The  doubling  of  t  is  to  be  accounted  for  according  to  36, 
as  the  Gothic  stem-ending  was  -ja.  For  OE.  cyna  the 
Gothic  has  kuni,  as  in  Mk.  8. 12 :  "  Hwa  })ata  kuni  taikn 
sokeip?"  (What  would  be  the  OE.  representatives  of 
taikn  and  sokei/^f)  In  Mk.  7.  35,  where  the  OE.  has 
"tungan  b^nd,"  the  Gothic  has  ^'■bandi  tuggons." 

Many  more  illustrations  might  be  given,  but  these  will 
no  doubt  suffice  to  render  the  principle  clear. 


VOCABULARY. 


VOCABULARY. 


[The  vowel  ae  follows  ad,  and  fS  follows  t.  The  main  or  typical  forms 
of  words  are  those  of  Early  West  Saxon,  the  dialectic  or  late  forms  of  the 
poetry  and  of  Appendix  IV.  being  referred  to  that  as  the  standard.  Actual 
forms,  when  different  from  the  type,  are  enclosed  in  parenthesis.  Figures 
in  parenthesis  refer  to  paragraphs  (and  subdivisions)  of  the  Grammar. 
Semicolons  are  employed  to  separate  different  groups  of  meanings;  defi- 
nitions separated  by  commas  are  more  nearly  synonymous.  The  sign  < 
indicates  derivation  from.  Modern  English  words  cited  in  brackets,  and 
not  preceded  bye/.,  are  direct  derivatives ;^  cognates  thus  cited  are  directly 
derived  from  the  common  ancestral  form;  where  the  relationship  is  more 
remote,  or  only  a  part  of  the  word  corresponds,  cf.  precedes.  Old  English 
words  preceded  by  cf.  or  see  are  parallel  or  related  forms.  Direct  deriva- 
tives included  among  the  definitions  are  not  repeated  in  brackets.  The 
asterisk  before  a  word  indicates  a  theoretical  form ;  for  the  manner  in 
which  such  are  framed  see  my  Phonological  Investigation  of  Old  English 
(Ginn  &  Co.).  The  ending  -llc(e)  is  assigned  to  adjectives  and  adverbs 
employed  in  the  poetry;  -lic(e)  to  those  in  prose.] 


A. 


a,  ahcays  ;  repeated  for  emphasis, 
a  a  a,  for  ever  and  ever.  [Cf . 
Mod.  Eng.  ay,  from  an  allied 
root ;  in  MP],  our  word  appears 
as  0,  00,  —  so  in  Chaucer,  TV. 
and  Cress.  2.  1034:  'for  ay 
and  00.'''] 

a-  (142). 

a-belgan    (III. 
cense. 

a-beodan    (II, 
communicate. 

a-beran  (IV.  105),  carry,  convey; 
sustain. 

a-blawan  (R.  109),  blow. 


104),    anger,    in- 
103),    announce, 


a-bregdan  (III.  104,  28),  liberate, 
disengage.  [Cf .  Spenser's  abrade, 
abrayd,  abraid,  e.g.  F.Q.^.W.  8.] 

a-butan,  about,  around. 

ac  (ah)  (4),  but. 

a-c^nnan  (113),  produce,  beget, 
bring  forth. 

acol-mod  (58,  146),  frightened, 
terrified. 

adesa  (53),  adze,  hatchet. 

adl  (51.  6),  disease. 

a-drgedan  (R.  110), /ear. 

a-dreogan  (IT.  103),  endure. 

a-drifan  (I.  102) ,  expel. 

a-dan(e) ,  down.  [<  of  done ;  see 
dun.] 

sece,  see  ece. 


273 


274 


VOCABULARY. 


aBcer  (43),  field.  [Cf.  Mod.  Eng. 
broad  acres,  God''s  Acre,  the 
latter  as  in  Longfellow's  poem; 
Ger.  Acker.  Cognate  with  Lat. 
ager,  Gr.  dypds.^ 

sedre  (edre),  straightway,  imme- 
diately, at  once. 

sefen  (47.  7),  evening  (but  evening 
itself  is  from  the  derivative  sefn- 
ung).     [Ger.  Abend.'] 

^fen-gloinung  (51.  3),  evening 
twilight.  [Cf .  Mod.  Eng.  gloam- 
ing.] 

aefestfull  (146),  envious,  [aefest 
is  compounded  of  aef-,  a  parallel 
form  of  of,  and  est,  q.v.] 

sefestian  (118),  envy,  be  envious 
at. 

sefestig  (146),  envious. 

aefre,  ever,  always;  5efre  ne, 
never.  [^afterward. 

aefter,  afler ;  according  to ;  about ; 

iefter-8'on-9'e,  after. 

fg-  (142). 

aeg-flota  (53),  sea-Jloater,  ship. 

aeg-hwa  (88),  every  one;  neut. 
every  thing. 

^g-hwanan  (75),  from  all  sides, 
on  all  sides. 

aeg-hwilc  (-hwylc)  (89),  every 
{one),  any  {one). 

«gffer  ge  .  .  .  ge  (202),  both  .  .  . 
and. 

aeht  (51.  b),  council. 

seht  (51.  1),  possession;  plur. 
goods.     [Cf.  agan.] 

sel  (51.  b),  awl.     [Ger.  Ahle.] 

selc  (89.  a),  each,  every,  all. 
[Mod.  Eng.  each.] 

selde,  see  ielde. 

aelmesse  (el-)  (53.  1),  alms. 
[See  Xe^ij  Eng.  Diet.  s.v.  alms.] 

ael-inihtig  (-mihti)  (57.  3),  al- 
mighty.    [Ger.  allmdchtig.] 


.^l-myrcan  (53),  plur.  Ethiopians. 

semetta  (53),  leisure.  [Cf. 
aemtig.] 

gemtig  (57.  3;  146),  empty,  void. 
[Cf.  aemetta.] 

«eiie,  once. 

eenig  (89.  a;  154.  a;  146),  any 
{one).     [<aii;  Ger.  einig.] 

aeppel-biere  (59,  l^Q) ,  fruit-bear- 
ing. 

ger  (47),  copper.  [See  ar,  cojyper  ; 
cf.  the  Ger.  adj.  ehern.] 

ser,  adv.,  before,  formerly,  afore- 
time, ago  ;  frequently  to  be 
regarded  as  a  mere  sign  of  the 
pluperfect  tense. 

ser,  prep.,  before.    [Mod.  Eng.  ere.] 

8er-daeg  (43.  2),  dawn,  break  of 
day. 

aerend-wreca  (53),  ambassador, 
envoy.  [Cf.  Mod.  Eng.  errand; 
OE.  wrecan  has  a  sense  =  re- 
late.] 

serest,  first,  at  first,  in  the  first 
place.  (Mod.  Eng.  erst;  Ger. 
erst.] 

ser-ge-don  (62),  previously  done, 
former,     [ier  +  don.] 

aern  (47),  edifice. 

serra  (67,  GO),  former. 

«er-i5'am-i5'e,  before. 

ser-wacol     (57,     146),     wakeful, 


aesc-plega    (53,    147),    ash-play, 

spear-play. 
aesc-rof  (58,  147),  spear-valiant, 

valiant  with  the  spear. 
set  (47), /ood.     [Cf.  etan.] 
aet  (4),  at;  from;  to  {New  Eng. 

Diet.  s.v.  at,  I.  11,  12). 
set-  (142). 

aet-berstan  (III.  104),  escape. 
at-bregdan  (HI.  104,   162,    28), 

withdraw,  take  away. 


VOCABULARY. 


275 


aet-eowlan  (118),  appear.  [Cf. 
aetlewan.  ] 

aet-foran,  before. 

aet-gaedere,  together;  strengthen- 
ing samod,  —  samod  aetgaed- 
ere  =  Lat.  simul. 

aet-iewan  (113),  reveal^  display. 
[Cf.  aeteowian.] 

aet  niehstan,  see  iiiehstan. 

aetyrv^an,  see  aetiewan. 

aeffel-boren  (62 ;  57. 3  ;  147),  high- 
horn^  patrician. 

aeafel-borennes  (51.5;  147),  noble 
birth,  rank,  station. 

SBiaPele  (59),  noble,  gentle,  illustri- 
ous. [Cf.  Ethel,  Athel-,  and 
Ger.  edel.^ 

aeiaCeling  (43,  143),  noble  one, 
hero,  man. 

adfSfSa,  see  offfSe. 

sex  (51.  b),  ax.  [Cf.  Gr.  d^ivv, 
Lat.  ascia  (?),  Ger.  Axt  (the  t  a 
late  addition).] 

a-faeran  (113),  frighten,  terrifj. 

a-feaUan  (R.  109),  fall. 

a-fedan  (113),  nourish,  support. 

a-fierran  (113),  remove,  banish, 
put  away.     [<feorr,  by  16.] 

a-fiersian  (118),  drive  aivay,  ban- 
ish. 

a-flieman  (113),  put  to  flight,  ex- 
pel. 

a-gselan  (-gelan)  (113),  neglect. 

agan  (127),  own,  possess,  have. 
[Cf.  Mod.  Eng.  ought,  and  see 
Schmidt's  Shakespeare  Lexicon, 
s.v.  owe,  2.] 

a-gan  (141),  depart. 

a-gean,  back.  [<  ongean.  Dis- 
tinguish the  meaning  of  this 
word  from  that  of  baecling.  ] 

agen  (57.  3),  own.  [Fast  part,  of 
agan ;  Ger.  eigen.^ 

agend  (43.  6),  owner,  possessor. 


a-geotan  (II.  103),  j?OMr  out,  dis- 
sipate, destroy. 

a-giefan  (V.  106),  give,  pay. 

a-ginnan  (III.  104),  begin.  [Cf. 
Ger.  -ginnen.'] 

agnian  (118),  appropriate.  [Cf. 
agan  ;  Ger.  eignen.  ] 

a-growan  (R.  109),  grow  up,  grow 
over. 

ah,  see  ac. 

a-h^bban  (VI.  107),  raise  (i.e. 
utter) ;  exalt ;  endure,  suffer, 
undergo.     [Ger.  erheben.'] 

a-hierdan  (113),  harden  (em- 
bolden?).    [Gqv.  erhdrten.'] 

a-hliehhan  (VI.  107),  rejoice.  [Cf. 
Mod.  Eng.  laugh,  Ger.  lachen.~\ 

ahof,  see  ah^bban. 

a-hreosan  (II.  lQZ),fall. 

aht  (olit)  (47;  89.  b),  something. 

a-hw^ttan  (113),  excite,  whet; 
supply,  fulfil.  [Cf.  Mod.  Eng. 
whet,  Ger.  wetzen.'] 

a-laetan  (R.  110),  give  up.  [Ger. 
erlassen']. 

aldor,  see  ealdor. 

a-l^cgean  (115,  note),  deposit. 

a-liefan  (113),  permit,  allow. 
[<  leaf,  leave;  Ger.  erlauben.'] 

a-liehtan  (113),  illuminate,  give 
light  to.  [<  leoht ;  Ger.  er- 
leuchten.~\ 

a-liesan  (-lesan)  (113),  deliver. 
[Ger.  erlosen.'] 

a-liesend  (43.  6),  redeemer. 

an  (79),  one,  a,  a  single,  alone; 
wk.  ana,  alone;  on  an,  anon, 
at  once;  anra  gehwilc,  every 
one.     [Ger.  ein.'\ 

and  (Qnd),  and. 

and-  (142). 

and-giet  (-git)  (47),  sense,  mean- 
ing, understanding.  [Cf.  gle- 
tan.] 


276 


VOCABULARY. 


and-gletfullice  (76),  clearly,  in- 
telligibly. 

and-lang  (gndlang)  (58),  live- 
long, whole,  all  .  .  .  long.  [Cf. 
Ger.  entlang  and  the  Chaucerian 
endelong  (Knight's  Tale  1820).] 

an(d)-licnes  (51.  5),  image.  [Cf. 
Mod.  Eng.  likeness,  Ger.  Gleich- 
niss,  for  (ge)leichniss.^ 

and-lifau  (51.  b),  sustenance. 

and-swarian  (gndswarian,  ynd- 
sweorian)  (118),  answer. 

and-swaru  (yndswaru)  (51.  a), 
answer. 

and-weard  (58,  l^Q),  presoit. 

and-weardan  (ynd-)  (113),  an- 
swer. 

and-wlita  {bZ),  countenance,  face; 
also  in  the  sense  of  '  angry  coun- 
tenance,' 'anger,'  Lat.  vultus. 
[Cf.  Ger.  Antlitz.~\ 

and-wyrdan  (113),  answer.  [Cf. 
Ger.  antworten.'] 

an-feald  (58),  plain,  simple.  [Cf. 
Ger.  Einfalt,  einfCdtig .'] 

angel  (43.  4),  hook.  [Mod.  Eng. 
angle,  Ger.  Angel.'] 

an-ginn  (ongin)  (47),  beginning ; 
vehemence,  impetiwsity ,  violence. 

an-grislic  (58),  fierce,  raging. 
[Cf.  Mod.  Eng.  grisly. ~\ 

an-lic  (on-)  (58),  like,  similar. 

anlicnes,  see  andlicnes. 

an-nes  (51.  5),  oneness,  unity. 

an-rsednes  (51.  5),  boldness,  con- 
fidence, assurance. 

an-sien  (51.  6),  countenance. 

an-timber  (47),  material,  sub- 
stance. 

an-weald  (43) ,  power,  rule,  juris- 
diction.    [Ger.  Anwalt.'] 

ar  (43),  messenger. 

ar  (51.  b),  honor  ;  dignity,  station. 
[Ger.  Uhre.^ 


sir  (^7),  copper.  [See  ser,  copper ; 
Mod.  Eng.  o?'e.] 

a-rfcecean  (114),  reach.  [Ger. 
erreichen.  ] 

a-raefnian  (118),  endure,  stand. 

a-raeran  (113),  lift.  [Cf.  Mod. 
Eng.  rear.] 

a-readian  (118),  redden,  blush. 
[Cf.  Ger.  errothen.] 

a-r^ccean  (114 ;  164.  b),  relate, 
narrate,  say. 

a-redian  (IIS),  find,  choose. 

a-retan  (113),  gladden. 

ar-faest  (58,  146),  gracious,  lov- 
ing;  glorious;  often  translates 
Lat.  pius.     [See  ar,  honor.] 

ar-faestnes  (51.  ^i) ,  kindness  ;  com- 
passion. 

ar-ge-bland  (-bl^nd)  (47),  ming- 
ling of  oars,  oar-disturbed  or 
oar-blending  sea.  [Cf.,  in  Rich- 
ard Garnett's  The  Mermaid  of 
Padstoiu,  the  line,  '  By  the  skirt 
of  the  oared  sea.'] 

a-risan  (I.  102),  arise. 

arodlice,  immediately,  forthwith. 

ar-wela  (53),  oar-riches,  i.e.  sea. 

ar-wierffe  (59,  146),  venerable. 
[Cf.  Ger.  ehrwnrdig.'] 

ar-wierffnes  (51.  5),  reverence. 

ar-yiS"  (51.  b),  oar-billow,  wave. 

a-seeadan  (R.  110),  divide. 

ascian  (axian)  (118 ;  159.  b;  32), 
ask.  [Ger.  heischen,  properly 
eischen.~\ 

a-s^cgean  (123),  say,  relate. 

a-s^ndan  (113),  send. 

a-s^ttan  {\1Z),  place,  deposit. 

assa  (53),  ass. 

a-stsenan  (113),  adorn,  set. 
[<stan,  by  16.] 

a-st^Uan  (114),  establish. 

ei-stigan:{l.l02),ascend,  go  aboard; 
descend.    [Ger.  ersteigeii.'] 


VOCABULARY. 


277 


a-str^ccean  (114) ,  prostrate.    [Cf. 

Mod.  Eng.  stretch.'] 
a-styrian  (118),  foMc/i.    [Cf.Mod. 

Eng.  stir.] 
a-8w^bban  (115.  a),  put  to  sleep, 

i.e.  slmj. 
a-syndrian  (118),  separate.,  sever., 

divide.      [Cf.    Mod.    Eng.    sun- 
der.] 
a-teon  (II.  103),  draw;  inhale. 
a-teorian  (118), /az7,  give  out. 
a-iaf^nnan  (115.  a),  apply,  direct. 

[Cf.  Ger.  dehnen.] 
a-ffindan  (III.  104,  62,  m),  swell. 
ad'um    (43),    son-in-law.      [Ger. 

Eidam.  ] 
atS'undnan,  see  aS'indan. 
a-w^ccean  (114),  awaken,  arouse, 

[Ger.  ei'wecken.] 
a-w^cgean  (115.  a),  move. 
a-w^ndaii    (113),    change,    shift, 

transform. 
a-w^ndednes  (51.  5),  translation, 

version. 
a-wiergan     (113),     curse;    past 

part.,  accursed. 
a-wiht  (89.  h),  aught,  a  hit ;  almost 

as  an  adv.,  at  all.     [Mod.  Eng. 
-aught.] 
a-wreon  (I.  102),  clothe. 
a-writan    (I.    102),   write.      [Cf. 

Ger.  reissen,  ritzen.] 
a-wyrcean    (114),    perform,    do. 

[Ger.  erwirken.] 
axiau  (32),  see  ascian.     [Mod. 

Eng.  dial,  axe.] 


base,  hack. 

baecling,     hack;     on    baecling, 

hack. 
bae»  (47.  4),  hath.     [Ger.  Bad.] 
baeaC-st^de  (44,  147),  gymnasium. 


baeff-weg    (43,    215),    hath-way, 

hath-road. 
baldor,  see  bealdor. 
ban  (47,  24),  bone.     [Ger.  Bein, 

{Elfen)hein.] 
bana     (53),     slayer,     murderer. 

[Mod.  Eng.  hane.] 
basnian    (118),   wait,  hide  one''s 

time. 
bat  (43),  hoat. 
baafian     (118),      hathe.        [Ger. 

haden.] 
be,  near;  concerning;  according 

to;  on.     [See  New  Eng.  Diet. 

s.v.  by.] 
be-  (142). 

beacen  (47,  24),  portent  9  stand- 
ard f     [Mod.  Eng.  beacon.] 
beadu  (51.  a),  battle,  war. 
beadu-rof  (58),  valiant  in  war. 
beadu-wang    (43),    battle-plain, 

field  of  battle. 
beag  (43),  torque,  armilla,  bracelet, 

collar,  crown.    [Cf .  bugan,  103.] 
beald  (24),  bold.     [Ger.  bald.] 
bealdor  (baldor)  (43),  ruler,  king. 

[See  beald.] 
bearn  (47,  38) ,  son,  child.    [Scotch 

bairn;  cf.  beran.] 
beatan    (R.     109),    heat,    smite, 

strike. 
be-beodan  (II.   103),   command, 

hid;  commend. 
be-bugan  (II.  103),  encircle,  en- 
compass, surround;  extend. 
be-byrgan  (113),  bury,  inter. 
be-clysan  (113),  enclose,  shut  up. 

[<Lat.  clusus,  by  16.] 
bec-raeding  (51.  3),  reading. 
be-cuman  (IV.  105),  C07ne,  befall, 

arrive,   attain,  fall.     [Ger.    he- 

kommen.] 
be-cweSfan  (V.  106),  say,  declare. 

[Mod.  Eng.  bequeathe.] 


278 


VOCABULARY. 


be-daelan  (113,  177),  deprive. 

b^dd  (47),  bed^  couch.  [Ger. 
Belt.'] 

beeodon,  see  began. 

be-faestan  (113),  commit.,  give 
over. 

be-fon  (R.  110),  embrace^  grasp, 
comprehend. 

be  foran,  before. 

be-gan  (141),  practise,  pursue, 
ply. 

be-gang  (43),  circuit,  compass. 

be-gangan  (R.  109),  practise;  ply. 

begen  (79),  both. 

be-gietaii  (-gitan)  (V.  106),  ac- 
quire, obtain,  reach. 

be-gyrdan  (113),  begird.  [Ger. 
-g'lh'ten.] 

be-hatan  (R.  110  ;  164.  a),  prom- 
ise. 

be-healdan  (R.  109),  behold. 

be-hefe  (59,  165),  useful. 

behlj  (51.  b),  sign,  proof. 

be-hygdig  (57),  shrewd,  saga- 
cious. 

b^lg  (43),  bellows. 

be-limpaii  (III.  104),  belong,  per- 
tain. 

be-lucan  (II.  103),  belock  [Shak.], 
enclose. 

be-misaCan  (I.  102),  conceal,  dis- 
guise.    [Ger.  -meiden.'] 

ben  (51.  6),  prayer,  petition,  en- 
treaty, supj)lication.  [See  bena, 
and  cf.  Mod.  Eng.  boon.'] 

bena  (53),  petitioner,  suppliant. 
[See  ben.] 

be-nseman  (113,  Vtt),  deprive,  strip. 

be-neoffan,  beneath. 

beod  (43),  table. 

beodan  (II.  103),  offer  ;  command. 
[Ger.  bieten.'] 

beon,  see  wesan. 

beorg   (21,  24),    hill,   mountain. 


[Ger.  berg,  and  Mod.  Eng.  (ice)- 

berg.] 
beorht  (58,  64,  21),  bright,  fair, 

brilliant,      radiant,      glorious. 

[Mod.    Eng.    bright  is    due    to 

metathesis  (31).] 
beorhte,  brightly. 
beorhtnes  (51.  5),  brightness. 
beorn    (43,   21),    warrior,    hero, 

man. 
beor-scipe  (44.  1 ;  143),  banquet, 

feast. 
bera  (53),  bear. 
beran  (IV.  105;  184.  a),bear,  carry; 

bereude,  productive  (155.   b). 
be-reafian  (118),  despoil.     [Mod. 

Eng.  bereave,  Ger.  berauben.] 
be-scierian     (bi-scerian)     (116), 

withhold. 
be-seon  (V.  106,  101),  look  (often 

almost  turn).    [Ger.  besehen.] 
be-sittan  (V.  106),  sit  in,  hold. 

[Ger.  besitzen.] 
be-8orgian  (118,  142),  grieve  for, 

he  concerned  about;   translates 

Lat.  dolere.     [Ger.  besorgen.] 
be-stieman  (-steman)  (113),  wet, 

moiMen. 
be-SAvican  (I.  102),  deceive. 
be-swician  (118),  escape. 
b^t,  adj.,  better. 
b^t,  adv.  (77),  better. 
be-taecean  (114),  assign. 
b^tst  (66),  best. 
be-tweoh,  among. 
be-tweon,  toward. 
be-tweonan,  among ;  betweonan 

him,  towards  one  another. 
be-tweox,  among,  between. 
be-tyrnan  (113),  revolve. 
be-af^ccean  (114),  cover,  protect. 

[Ger.  bedecken.'] 
be-waefan    (113),    clothe.      [See 

waefels.] 


VOCABULARY. 


279 


be-w^ndan  (113;  184.  ?)),  mm. 
[Ger.  bewenden.] 

be-windan  (III.  104),  encompass. 
[Ger,  bewinden.'] 

be-wrecan  (V.  106),  surround 
(lit,  beat  around). 

bibliotheca  (Lat,),  library. 

bidan  (I.  102;  156,  0^  await, 
wait. 

biddan  (V.  106;  156.  b;  159.  &), 
as^*,  request.!  implore.,  beseech ; 
bid;  seek.     [Ger,  bitten.'] 

biegan  (113),  bow,  bend.  [Caus- 
ative of  bugan  (103),  from 
beag,  pret.  sing.,  by  16;  cf. 
Ger.  beugen.'] 

biema  (53),  trumpet,  clarion. 
■  [Cf.  Chaucer,  Niui's  PriesVs 
Tale  57S.] 

big-leofa  (53,  20),  food,  suste- 
nance.    [Cf.  libban.] 

bile- wit  (57),  merciful.  [See  JVew 
Eng.  Diet.  s.v.  bilewhit.'] 

bill  (47),  broadsword,  falchion. 
[Ger.  bille.'] 

bindan  (III.  104),  bind.  [Ger. 
binden.'] 

binnan,  ivithin.     [Ger.  binnen.'] 

bioS",  see  wesan. 

bi-rihte  (-ryhte),  beside. 

bisceop  (43),  bishop.  [<  Lat. 
episcopus,  Gr.  iiria- kotos,  from 
iiTL,  upon,  and  a-K^TTTOfiaL,  look; 
cf.  Ger.  Bischof.  A  Continental 
borrowing,  ca.  a.d.  400.] 

biscerian,  see  bescierian. 

bisgian  (118),  occupy,  engross. 
[See  bisig.] 

bisgu  (51.  a),  concern,  trouble. 
[See  bisig.] 

bisig  (57),  busy. 

bitan  (I.  \Q2),bite.  [Ger.  beissen.'] 

biter  (57),  bitter,  baneful,  griev- 
ous.    [Ger.  bitter ;  cf.  bitan.] 


bi9',  see  wesan. 

blsec  (57.  2),  black. 

bl^ean  (113),  bleach,  fade.    [Mod. 

Eng.  bleach.] 
blsed    (43),    breath;    abundance, 

blessedness.     [Cf.  blawan.] 
blaest  (43),  flame.    [Cf.  blawan.] 
blawan    (R.    109),    blow.      [Cf. 

Ger.  bldhen,  Lat.  y?are.] 
bletsian     (118,    33),    bless.      [< 

blod] 
bletsung  (51.  3;  144;  33),  bless- 
ing, benediction. 
blewQ",  see  blowan. 
bllcan    (I.     102),    shine.      [Ger. 

-bleichen.] 
blinnan   (III.   104),   cease.     [See 

Spenser,  F.  Q.  3.  5.  22.] 
bliss  (51.  b  ;  34),  joy.    [<  bliafe.] 
blisse-sang    (43,    147),    song    of 


blissian      (118,       34),       rejoice. 

[<  bliss.] 

bli^e  (59,  24),  blithe,  merry,  jo- 
vial, joyous,  gladsome. 

hlifSe  (70),  joyously. 

blod  (47,  24),  blood.  [Ger. 
Blut.] 

blodig  (57. 3  ;  U6),  bloody.  [Ger. 
bltitig.] 

blostma  (53),  blossom.  [Cf. 
blowan,  and  Lat.  Jlos.] 

blowan  (R.  109,  24),  blossom, 
bloom.  [Mod.  Eng.  blow;  cf. 
Ger.  blilhen,  Lat.  florere.] 

boc  (52,  24),  book.     [Ger.  Buch.] 

boc-craeft  (43,  147),  literature. 

Boc-laeden  (47),  Latin.  [<  OE. 
boc  +  Lat.  Latinus.] 

boc-Iand  (47,  147),  freehold  es- 
tate. 

bodian  (118),  proclaim,  preach. 
[Mod.  Eng.  bode.] 

bolca  (53),  gangway. 


280 


VOCABULARY. 


bold-wela  (53,  215),  Eden,  Para- 
dise (lit.  house-wealth). 
bord  (47),  shield. 
bord-staeff  (47.  4),  shore,  strand. 

[Cf.  Ger.  Gestade.'] 
bosm    (43,    24),    bosom,    surface 

(cf.  Shakespeare,  Tr.  and  Cress. 

1.  3.  112).     [Ger.  Busen.^ 
bot   (61.   &),   repentance,  amend- 
ment. 
brad    (58,   24),    broad,   spacious. 

[Ger.  breit.']  [face. 

bradnes  (51. 5),  breadth,  face,  sur- 
br^dan    (113 ;    184.    6),   spread, 

dilate,    expand.      [<  brad,    by 

16 ;  Ger.  breiten.'] 
brand-stefn   (brQiid-stfefn)   (43), 

lofty-provjed     (reading    brant- 

stef n ;     cf .    heahstefn    iiaca, 

Andr.  265,  brante  ceole,  Andr. 

278). 
brant  (58),  high,  lofty. 
breahtm   (brelitm)    (43;    21.  a), 

beat, pulsation, stroke  (of  wings). 
brecan   (IV.  105),  break;   break 

away,  burst  away,  hurry,  speed. 

[Ger.  brechen.] 
bregdan  (III.  104),  draio.    [Mod. 

Eng.  braid.'} 
breogo  (brego)   (45,  20),  leader, 

king. 
brehtm,  see  breahtm. 
breomo,  see  brim, 
breost  (47,  24),  breast. 
Breoton  (5^,20),  Britain  ;  Briton. 
brim     (47,     20),    billow,    ocean, 

deep. 
brim-li^ngest    (43),    wave-steed, 

sea-horse,   i.e.  ship.     [Cf.   Ger. 

Hengst,    and    the    OE.    proper 

name  H^ngist,  associated  with 

Horsa.'] 
brim-staeaf  (47.  4;  147),  shore  of 

the  sea.     [Cf,  Ger.  Gestade.} 


brim-stream    (43,    147),    ocean- 
stream,  current. 
bringan  (114),  bring,  carry,  take. 
[Ger.  bringen.} 

brQndstaefn,  see  brandstefn. 

broQ'or  (46.  1  ;  24),  brother.  [Ger. 
Bruder.} 

brucan  (II.  103;  156.  e;  17), 
hold,  possess,  enjoy,  make  use 
of.  [Mod.  Eng.  brook,  Ger. 
bratichen.} 

brun  (58,  24),  burnished,  glisten- 
ing;  dusky.  [Ger.  braun  ;  see 
New  Eng.  Diet.  s.v.  broion.} 

l>rycg  (51.  b;  24),  bridge.  [Ger. 
Brikke.} 

brytta  (53),  dispenser. 

Bryttas  (43),  phir.,  Britons. 

bufan,  above.     [<  be  +  iifan.] 

bar  (43,  24),  dining-room;  pri- 
vate apartment,  boudoir,  bower. 
[Mod.  Eng.  bower.] 

burg  (52.  1 ;  24),  city.  [Mod. 
Eng.  borough,  Ger.  Burg.} 

burg-geat  (47,  147),  city-gate. 

burg-leode  (44.  4;  147),  city- 
people,  citizens. 

burh-sittende  (61,  28),  city- 
dwellei's,  citizens. 

burh-weall  (43,  28),  city-wall. 

batan,  prep.  (24),  without,  outside 
of,  except,  besides.  [<  be  + 
utan  ;  cf .  the  Scotch  '  but  and 
ben.'] 

batan,  conj.,  except. 

bycgean  (114),  buy. 

byrd  (51.  b),  birth,  extraction. 

byrig,  see  burg. 

byrne  (53) ,  hauberk,  corslet,  mail- 
coat. 

byrn-hama  (-hQma)  (53),  hau- 
berk, corslet. 

bysen  (51.  b),  example,  illustra- 
tion; suggestion. 


VOCABULAKY. 


281 


c. 


cald,  see  ceald. 

camp    (43),  fight,    battle.     [Ger. 

Kampf.'] 
campian   (118),   strive,  struggle, 

fight.     [<  camp.] 
camp-wig    (CQnip-)     (47),    com- 
bat. 
carcern    (47),    prison.      [<Lat. 

career,      under      influence      of 

aern.] 
casere   (44.   1),  emperor,  Ccesar. 

[Lat.  Ccesar.l 
ceald   (cald)    (58;    21.   a),    cold. 

[Ger.  kalt.^ 
ceaster  (51. 4),  city.    [Lat.  castra  ; 

Mod.  Eng.  Chester,  -caster,  -ces- 

ter.'] 
ceaster- (ge)-waraii    (53),    plur., 

citizens. 
ceder-beam   (43),  cedar-tree,   ce- 
dar.    [<  Lat.  cedrus  +  beam.] 
c^mpa  (bZ),  soldier.     [<camp.] 
cene  (59),  valiant.     [Ger.  kuhn. 

Mod.  Eng.  keen.~\ 
ceol  (43),  ship. 
ceorl   (43,   24),   layman.     [Mod. 

Eng.    churl,     Ger.     Kerl ;     cf. 

Chaucer,  KnighVs  Tale  1601.] 
ceosan    (IL    103;    184.   a;    37), 

choose,     seek.      [Archaic     Ger. 

kiesen ;    cf.  Chaucer,    KnighVs 

Tale  737.] 
ciegan  (113),  call. 
ciele  (44,  18),  cold.     [Mod.  Eng. 

chill;  cf.  Ger.  Kilhle.'] 
ciepan    (113),    sell.      [Cf.    Ger. 

-kaufen.'] 
cierran    (cirran)    (113 ;    184.   a ; 

18),  turn;  turn  back. 
cild  (50,  38,  24),  child. 
cild-had  (43,  143),  childhood. 
cining,  see  cyning. 


cirice  (53.  1),  church.  [Ger. 
Kirche  ;  see  Phil.  Soc.  Diet.  s.v. 
church.'] 

cirran,  see  cierran. 

cist  (51.  b),  chest.  [<  Lat.  cista, 
OE.  orig.  cest,  then  ciest  (18), 
cist.] 

cisene  (57,  24),  pure.  [Mod.  Eng. 
clean,  Ger.  klein.  The  Ger. 
word  has  come  to  its  present 
meaning  through  the  series 
'pure,'  'clean,'  'neat,'  'deli- 
cate,' 'fine,'  'tiny,'  'small.'] 

cleennes  (51.  5),  chastity. 

cleofu  (20),  see  clif. 

cleopian  (clypian)  (118,  20),  call. 
[Cf.  our  poetical  clepe,  yclept, 
and  Haml.  1.  4.  19.] 

clif  (47,  20),  cliff.  [Cf.  Ger. 
Klippe.'] 

clifer-fete  (59),  claw-footed. 

clypian,  see  cleopian. 

cnapa  (53),  boy,  lad.  [Cf.  Ger. 
Knabe.] 

cneo  (47.  3;  27),  knee.  [Ger. 
Knie ;  cf .  Lat.  genu.'] 

cneoris  (like  51.  5) ,  tribe,  nation. 

cniht  (43),  young  man,  youth. 
[Ger.  Knecht,  Mod.  Eng.  knight.] 

cnyssan  (115.  a),  smite. 

collen-ferha"  (-fyrh«)  (58),  in- 
spirited, elated. 

com,  see  cuman. 

cQmpwig,  see  campwig. 

costnung  (51.  3;  144),  tempta- 
tion. 

craeft  (43),  power;  skill,  clever- 
ness; art,  trade,  occupation. 
[Mod.  Eng.  craft,  Ger.  Kraft.] 

creopan  (II.  103),  creep,  crawl. 

Crist  (43) ,  Christ.  [<  Lat.  Christ- 
us.] 

cucu  (27  ;  in  this  form  irregular, 
according  to  the  declensions  of 


282 


VOCABULARY. 


this  book;  see  also  cwic),  liv- 
ing, live,  alive. 

culter  (43?),  coulter.  [<  Lat. 
cuUer.] 

ouiiia  (53),  stranger,  visitant, 
guest. 

cuman  (IV.  105),  come.  [Cf.  Ger. 
kommen.'\ 

cuinbol  (47),  banner,  standard. 

c'unnau  (130),  know,  know  how, 
can.     [Ger.  kdn7ien.^ 

cunuiau  (118;  156.  d),  make 
trial  of. 

cuts  (58),  known,  manifest;  the 
combination  of  cuS'  and  on- 
cnawen,  Andr.  527,  presents  a 
difficulty  —  perhaps  for  caffe, 
adv.     [Cf.  130.] 

cuiariice  (70),  certainly. 

cwaea"  (pret.),  see  ewdSfan. 

cwealm  (43),  death.  [Mod.  Eng. 
qualm;  cf.  cw^Uan.] 

cweart-ern  (47),  prison.  [Per- 
haps modified  from  Lat.  career, 
under  the  influence  of  aern.] 

cw^llan  (114),  kill. 

cwen  (51.  1 ;  24),  queen,  princess. 

cweaCan  (V.  106,  37),  say,  speak. 
[Cf.  Mod.  Eng.  quoth.'] 

cwic  (57,  27),  alive,  living.  [See 
cucu.  Cf.  Mod.  Eng.  '  quick 
and  dead,'  '  cut  to  the  quick.''] 

cvvic-susl  (51.  h),  hell-torment  (lit. 
living  torment'). 

cwide  (44),  remark. 

cwuc,  see  cwic. 

cymlice  (IQ),  finely,  beautifully. 

cyne-helm  (43),  crown. 

cynelic  (57,  146),  royal. 

cyne-rice  (48,  145),  kingdom. 

cyne-rof  (58),  royally  brave. 

cyne-setl  (47),  throne. 

cyning  (cining)  (43,  143,  24), 
king.     [Ger.  K'onig.'] 


cynn   (47),   kind;   tribe,   nation, 

people. 
cyn-ren  (47),  generation. 
Cyrenisc  (57),  of  Cyrene. 
Cyrenense,  Cyrene. 
cyssau  (113),  kiss.    [Ger.  kussen.] 
cyffan  (113,  30),  announce,  make 

known,  show.     [<  caiaf,  by  16  ; 

Ger.  -kunden.'] 
cyUlffu  (51.  a;  144),  native  land. 

D. 

died  {b\.\),  deed,  act;  middaede, 
indeed,  in  fact. 

da?g  (43.  2  ;  24),  day.    [Ger.  Tag.] 

dsBg-candel  (51.  6;  215),  candle 
of  day. 

daeges  (74),  by  day. 

daeg-hvv^mlice  (70),  daily,  day 
by  day. 

dseg-red  (47),  daivn. 

dSl(43;  78.4;  2^), part;  amount, 
quantity,  number.     [Ger.  Teil.] 

dSlan  (113;  164.  a),  distribute, 
dispense,  bestow.  [Ger.  teilen, 
Mod.  Eng.  deal.] 

dael-leas  (58  ;  155.  a  ;  146),  des- 
titute, devoid. 

dagiing  (51.  8),  davm. 

dead  (58,  24),  dead.     [Ger.  tot.] 

deaiaf  (43),  death.     [Ger.  Tod.] 

deaff-dag  (deoth-)  (43.  2),  death- 
day. 

dema  (53) ,  judge. 

deman  (113,  90,  17),  doom,  con- 
demn. [Cf.  Chaucer,  KnighVs 
Tale  1023.] 

deofol  (43,  24),  devil,  demon. 
[<  Lat.  diabolos  ;  so  Ger.  Teu- 
feh] 

deop  (58,  24),  deep.    [Ger.  tief] 

deope  (70),  deeply.  [Cf.  Chaucer, 
K.  T.  1782. 


VOCABULARY. 


283 


deoplic  (57),  profound. 

deor  (47),  heast^  animal.  [Ger. 
Tier.'] 

deor-cynn  (47),  kind  {race)  of 
animals. 

deor-wieriye  (59,  146),  precious. 

deor-wuraf  (58,  146),  preao?<s. 

dorian  (116),  harm,  injure.  [Cf. 
Chaucer,  K.  T.  964.] 

die  (43),  dike. 

dician  (118,  90),  ditch.,  dike. 

diegelnes  (51.  5),  retreat. 

diere  (dyre)  (59),  precious^  valu- 
able.    [Ger.  teuer.'] 

diht  (47),  plan.,  design.  [<Lat. 
dictum.'] 

dohtor  (52.  2),  daughter.  [Ger. 
Tochter.] 

dom  (43,  17),  judgment;  reputa- 
tion, glory  ;  choice,  decision. 

domlice  (70),  gloriously. 

dom-weorafungX^l  3),  honor. 

don  (140),  do;  make;  put.  [Ger, 
thun.] 

dream  (43),  joy,  bliss.  [Ger, 
Traum,  Mod.  Eng,  dream,  but 
in  different  sense.]  . 

dr^nc  (43),  dririk. 

dreorig  (57),  headlong?  melan- 
choly 9 

drlhten,  see  dryhten. 

drihtguma,  see  dryhtguma. 

drinc  (drync)  (43),  dri7ik. 

drincan  (III.  104),  drink.  [Ger, 
trinken.] 

drohtaa?  (43),  (mode,  way  of) 
life. 

drygnes  (51.  5),  dryness,  dry  land. 

dryhten  (43.  4.  c;  154.  d),  lord. 

dryhtenlic  (57),  lordly,  of  the 
lord. 

dryht-guma  (driht-)  (53),  re- 
tainer, vassal. 

drync,  see  drinc. 


dugan  (128),  avail.  [Ger.  taugen.] 
dugulSr     (dugo«)     (51.     b),    host, 

band;  sustenance;  benefit.  [Ger. 

Tugend.] 
dun  (51.  b),  mountain,  hill. 
dust  (47),  dust.     [Ger.  Dunst.] 
dynuan  (115.  a),  clash. 
dyre,  see  diere. 
dyrstig    (57),    rash,    headstrong. 

[Cf.  durran,  132.] 
dyrstignes  (51.  5),  presumption., 

temerity. 

E. 

ea  (52),  river. 

eac,  also,  likewise;  eac  swilce, 
also;  swilce  eac,  also,  more- 
over, as  also,  likewise ;  siva  eac, 
also.   [Ger.  auch.  Mod.  Eng.  eke.] 

ead-giefa  (-gifa)  (53),  bliss-giver, 
happiness- giver. 

eadig  (57.  3  ;  146),  happy,  blessed. 

eadiglice  (70),  blissfully,  in  bliss. 

eadignes  (51.  5),  bliss. 

cage  (53.  2) ,  eye.     [Ger.  Auge.] 

eagor-streani  (43),  ocean-stream. 

eag-iSyrel  (47),  window.  [iSTyr- 
<iarurh,  by  16  and  29.] 

eahta  (78 ;  154.  c ;  21),  eight.  [Ger. 
acht.] 

eala,  0. 

ea-Iad  (51.  b),  ocean-way. 

eald  (65,  58,  21,  19,  17),  old. 

eald-feond  (46.  3),  ancient  foe. 

eald-geniS'la  (53),  ancient,  invet- 
erate enemy. 

eald-h^ttend  (43.  6),  ancient  en- 
emy. 

ealdor  (aider)  (43. 4:),  chief ;  king. 

ealdor  (47),  life. 

ealdor-dom  (43),  primacy,  su- 
premacy, chief  place. 

ealdor-dugufiP  (51.  &),  nobility, 
leaders. 


284 


VOCABULARY. 


ealdor-mann  (46),  leader,  head,  1 
prince,  noble. 

ealdor-scipe  (44.  1 ;  143),  pri- 
macy, supremacy,  chief  place. 

ea-liffende  (61  ;  or  43.  6  ?),  ocean- 
traversing. 

eall  (58,  35,  24),  all,  every ;  call 
swa,  just  as,  also  ;  ealne  weg, 
always;  mid  ealle  (175),  com- 
pletely ;  afurh  ealle,  entirely. 

ealles  (71),  in  all. 

eal-swa,  also,  as.     [Ger.  also.'] 

eard  (43),  country. 

eardian  (118),  dwell. 

earfo9'lice  (70),  distressfully, 
hard.     [Cf.  Ger.  Arbeit.'] 

earfoSfnes  (51.  5),  hardship. 

earfoff-rinie  (59),  diffi,cult  to  num- 
ber. 

earg  (58),  cowardly.     [Ger.  arg.] 

earm  (58,  21),  poor,  loretched. 
[Ger.  arm.] 

earmlic  (57),  humble,  lowly. 
[Cf.  Ger.  drmlich.] 

earmlice  (70),  miserably. 

earn  (43),  eagle. 

earnung  (51.  3),  merit,  desert. 

eastan  (75) ,  from  the  east. 

East-^ngle  (44.  4),  plur.,  East 
Angles,  i.e.  East  Anglia. 

east-norfferne     (59),     northeast- 

_  erly. 

Kastron  (53,  irregular),  Easter. 
[Ger.  Ostern.] 

east-sae  (43  ;  51.  &),  sea  on  the 
east. 

east-snaf-dSl  (43),  southeast 
quarter. 

eaSPe  (77),  easily,  unhesitatingly ; 
comp.  ieff,  irreg.  ea^". 

eaff-medu  (51.  a),  reverence; 
humility,  kindness. 

ea9'-inod  (58, 146),  humble,  lowly. 

eaff-modlice  (70),  humbly. 


eaiaf-modnes    (51.    5),    humility, 

_  reverence. 

Ebreas     (54),     plur.,     Hebrews. 

_  [<Lat.  Hebrceus.] 

Ebreisc  (57,  146),  Hebrew. 

ece  (59),  everlasting,  eternal. 

^cg  (51.  b),  edge. 

ed-  (142). 

ed-niwian  (118),  renew. 

edre,  see  Sdre. 

ed-wit  (47),  abuse,  insolence. 
[Cf.  wite,  and  Mod.  Eng.  twit.] 

efen-eadig  (57),  co- blessed, 
equally  blessed.  [Among  mod- 
erns, Bishop  Ken  seems  most  to 
have  employed  such  compounds 
as  these.] 

efiie  (e'mne),  behold;  just. 

^ft,  again,  once  more;  afterward; 
back. 

<jft-hweorfan  (III.  104),  return. 

^gesa  (53),  dread,  fear,  terror; 
peril.  [Related  to  ON.  agi, 
from  which  Mod.  Eng.  awe.] 

^geslic  (57),  dreadful,  terrible. 
[See  ^gesa.] 

^glan  (IIZ),  plague,  harass,  afflict. 
[Mod.  Eng.  ail.] 

^gle  (59),  grievous,  hateful.  [See 
^glan.] 

Egypta  (54),  plur.,  Egyptians. 

ehtan  {\\Z),  pursue. 

^Icung  (51.  3),  delay,  postpone- 
ment. 

^le  (44),  oil.     [<Lat.  oleum.] 

^llen  (47),  courage. 

^llen-rof  (58),  strenuotts  in  cour- 
age, of  undaunted  courage. 

^Iles  (71),  eZse.     [^\-  =  other.] 

^Uor-fas  (58,  30),  bound  else- 
whither.    [^1-  =  other.] 

elmesse,  see  aelmesse. 

elp  (43),  elephant.  [<Lat.  ele- 
phas.  ] 


VOCABULARY. 


285 


^l-ffeodig  (57.  3),  foreign.   [From 

^1-  =  other^  and  ffeod,  q.v.] 
emne,  see  efne. 

eniniht  (52,  but  no  visible  um- 
laut), equinox.  [<  efen-niht ; 
cf.  emne  for  efne.] 

^nde  (44),  end.     [Ger.  Ende.~\ 

^ndian  (118,  90),  end. 

^ngel  (43.  4;  23;  10),  angel. 
[<  Lat.  angelusy  Gr.  AyyeXos.'] 

!^ngle  (44.  4),  the  Angles.,  Eng- 
lish. [Of  the  invaders  of  Brit- 
ain Bede  says  (Hist.  Eccl.  1. 15)  : 
"Advenerant  autem  de  tribus 
Germaniee  populis  fortioribus, 
id  est,  Saxonibus,  Anglis,  Jutis. 
.  .  .  Porro  de  Anglis,  hoc  est, 
de  ilia  patria  quae  Angulus  dici- 
tur,  et  ab  eo  tempore  usque 
hodie  manere  desertus  inter  pro- 
vincias  Jutarum  et  Saxonum 
perhibetur,  Orientales  Angli, 
Mediterranei  Angli,  Merci,  tota 
Nordanhymbrorum  progenies,  id 
est,  illarum  gentium  quse  ad 
Boream  Humbri  fluminis  inhabi- 
tant cseterique  Anglorum  populi 
sunt  orti."  Cf.  also  the  pun  of 
Pope  Gregory  the  Great  (Hist. 
Eccl.  II.  1)  :  "  Rursus  ergo  in- 
terrogavit,  quod  esset  vocabulum 
gentis  illius.  Responsum  est, 
quod  Angli  vocarentur.  At  ille, 
'  Bene,'  inquit ;  '  nam  et  angeli- 
cam  habent  faciem,  et  tales  an- 
gelorum  in  cselis  decet  esse 
coheredes.'  "] 

Ignglisc  (57),  English.  [Note 
that  any  term  corresponding  to 
'Anglo-Saxon,'  as  the  designa- 
tion of  a  language,  does  not 
exist  in  Old  English.  See  the 
Phil.  Soc.  Diet.  s.vv.  Anglo- 
Saxon    and   English ;    Bailey's 


Dictionary  (1783)  is  the  first 
authority  given  for  the  English 
term  '  Anglo-Saxon '  in  its  appli- 
cation to  the  tongue.] 

code,  see  gan. 

eorl  (43),  hero.,  man.  [Not  to  be 
translated  '  earl '  in  these  texts.] 

eornoste  (70),  sharply.,  vehe- 
mently. [Cf.  Mod.  Eng.  ear- 
nest, Ger.  Ernst.'] 

eornostlice  (70),  then,  accord- 
ingly, thus. 

eorre,  see  ierre. 

eorSfe  (53.  1),  earth;  ground; 
land.     [Ger.  Erde.] 

eoraflic  (57,  146),  earthly. 

eor9'-til9'  (51.  6 ;  147),  agriculture. 
[Cf.  Mod.  Eng.  tilth.] 

eoraf-waran  (53),  plur.,  dwellers 
071  earth. 

eorff-weall  (43),  rampart  of  earth, 
earthwork,  [weall  =  Lat.  val- 
lum ;  one  of  the  oldest  Germanic 
words  borrowed  from  Latin.] 

eower  (81,  83),  your,  of  you. 

erbe(-),  erfe(-),  see  ierfe(-). 

est  (51. 1 ;  165  ;  43  ;  30),  provision  ; 
consent,  will.  [Cf.  unnan,  aef- 
estfull,  and  Ger.  Gunst.] 

este  (59,  165),  bountiful.  [Cf. 
est.] 

estlice  (70),  willingly.    [Cf.  est.] 

etan  (V.  106),  eat.     [Ger.  essen.] 

effel  (43.  4.  a),  country,  native 
land,  home. 

effel-rice  (^8) ,  fatherland. 

effel-weard  (43),  guardian  of  his 
country. 


faec  (47),  time,  period,  interval^ 

space.     [Ger.  Each.] 
faeder  (43.  8  ;  24),  father.     [Ger. 

Vater.] 


286 


VOCABULARY. 


fsege  (59),  fated^  death-doomed. 
[Scotch /e?/,  Gqv.  feige.'] 

faBger  (b7),fair,  beautiful,  agree- 
able, lovely. 

faegernes  (51.  5),  beauty.  [Cf. 
Chaucer,  Knighfs  Tale  240.] 

fgegre  (70  ;  vowel  long  in  poetry) , 
fairly. 

faegtf  (51.  6),  certam  death{?) 

fSmne  (53),  virgin,  maiden, 
damsel. 

fSringa  (70),  suddenly,  on  a 
sudden. 

fwrlice  (70),  suddenly.  [Cf. 
afSred,  and  Mod.  Eng. /ear.] 

faest  (58),  fixed,  stable.  [Ger. 
fest,  properly /as?.] 

faesten  (47),  fortification.  [Cf. 
Mod.  l^ng.  fastness.'\ 

faesten-geat  (47),  fortress-gate. 

faest-hafol  (57;  155.  d),  tena- 
cious, [hafol  from  the  root  of 
habbaii.] 

faestnes  (51.  b),  firmament. 

faestnung  (51.  •']),  hold,  stay,  sup- 
port. 

faet  (47.  4),  utensil,  implement. 

ffceted  (57),  beaten? ;  fieted  gold, 
gold  leaf? 

f  aeted-sinc  (47) ,  treasure  of  plated 
articles  ? 

faetS'in  (43),  embracing  arms; 
body  ;  expanse,  surface.  [Mod. 
Eng.  fathom.'\ 

fag  (58),  gleaming,  glittering. 

fah  (58  ;  but  used  as  noun),  foe, 
enemy.     [Mod.  Eng.  foe.'] 

famig-heals  (58),  foamy-necked, 
foamy-throated.  [Cf.  Ger.  Hals.] 

faran  (VI.  107;  184.  a),  go. 

faroiflf  (farulS)  (43),  shore;  more 
generally,  as  in  the  next  three 
words,  it  appears  to  mean  surge 
(and  so,  possibly,  p.  212,  1.  12). 


faroff-lacende  (61,  215),  surge- 
swimming.     [See  lacan.  ] 

faroS'-ridende  (61,  215),  surge- 
riding. 

farod-straet  (51.  b  ;  215),  surge- 
street,  street  over  the  billows. 
[straet  <  Lat.  strata.] 

faru  (51.  a),  adventure. 

feallan  (R.  109),  fall.  [Ger. 
fallen.] 

fealu  (57.  5),  dxisky  (as  often 
translated ;  but  perhaps  rather 
its  literal  signification),  yellow 
(as  Tennyson  applies  it,  Geraint 
and  Enid  829,  '  And  white  sails 
flying  on  the  yellow  sea ' ;  but 
Tennyson,  in  The  Battle  of 
Brunanburh,  translates  fealone 
flod  by  'fallow  flood').  [Cf. 
Ger.  fahl,  falb,  and  our  'fallow 
deer.'] 

fea-sceaft  (58),  destitute. 

feawe  (58),  plur., /eio. 

f^ccean  (119,  irreg.),/e?c^. 

fedan  (113),  feed,  nourish,  sup- 
port.    [<fod-,  by  16.] 

fela  (indecl.  adj.;  154.  a),  much; 
7Uimerous,  many  (things). 

feoh-ge-streon  (47),  riches.  [See 
gestreon,  and  Mod.  Eng. /ee.] 

feohtan  (III.  104,  21),  fight. 
[Ger.  fechten.] 

feon  (113),  hate. 

feond  (143;  46.  8;  24),  foe,  en- 
emy.  [Mod.  Eng.  fiend,  Ger. 
Feind;  see  feon.] 

feore,  see  feorh. 

feorh  (43,  47,  29),  life,  soul. 

feorh-n^ru  (51.  a),  sustenance. 
[Cf.  nQrian.] 

feormian  (118),  take  in,  entertain. 

feor(r)  (67;  35.  a),  far,  distant. 
[Mod.  Eng.  far.] 

feorr,  far,  from  (to)  a  distance. 


VOCABULARY. 


287 


feorran  (75),  from  afar,  from  of 
old.     [Cf.  Ger. /mi.] 

f eoriaCa  (78) ,  fourth.    [Ger.  vierte.'] 

feower  (78),/o?w.     [Ger.  vier.'] 

feower-tiene  (78),  fourteen. 
[Ger.  vierzehn.^ 

fer-,  see  for-. 

feran  (113),  go,  journey.  [Cf. 
Ger.  fuhren.  ] 

ferhff  (fyrh«)  (43,  47),  mind. 

f^rian  (-ig(e)an)  (116),  ferry, 
carry. 

feSCa  (53),  troop. 

feffer  (51.  h ;  24),  wing,  pin- 
ion. [Ger.  Feder,  Mod.  Eng. 
feather. ~\ 

fiellan  (fyllan)  (113),  fell,  slay. 
[Ger.  fallen.  Mod.  Eng./e?Z.] 

fierd  (51.  1),  expedition,  cam- 
paign.   [Ger.  Fahrt ;  cf .  faran.] 

fierding  (51.  h),  warfare. 

fierd-wic  (fyrd-)  (47),  plur., 
camp. 

fierst  (fyrst)  (43),  period,  space, 
interval.     [Ger.  Frist.'] 

fifta  (78,  30),  fifth.  [Ger.  funfte, 
Gr.  Tre/xTTTos.] 

figalS,  see  feon. 

findan  (III.  104),  find,  devise; 
encounter.     [Guv.  finden.~\ 

firas  (43,  29),  plur.,  men. 

firgeii- stream  (firigend-)  (43), 
mountain-stream,  i.e.  ocean- 
stream. 

firinamentum  {Jjdit.^,  firmament. 

fisc  (43,  24),  fish.  [Ger.  Fisch, 
Lat.  piscis.  ] 

fisc-cynn  (47),  sort  offish. 

flscere  (44,  143),  fisher  (man). 
[Ger.  Fischer.] 

fiscnoS"  {^Z),  fishing. 

fia'er-fete  (52) ,  four-footed. 

filSTru  (47),  plur.,  wings.  [Cf. 
feS'er,  and  Ger.  Gefieder.] 


flsesc  .  (47,  24),  flesh.  [Ger. 
Fleisch.  ] 

flan  (43),  arrow. 

flax-fete  (59),  web-footed. 

fleogan  (II.  103),  fly.  [Ger. 
fliegen.] 

fleon  (II.  103),  flee.  [Ger. 
fliehen.] 

flocc  (43),  company. 

aod  i'iZ),  flood.     [Ger.  Flut.] 

flod-wielm  (-wylm)  (43),  seeth- 
ing of  the  flood. 

flota  (53),  vessel  (lit.  float). 

flowan  (R.  109),  flovj. 

flyht  m),  flight. 

fneest  (43),  breath. 

foda  {bZ),food. 

fodor  (^),  fodder.    [Ger.  Futter.] 

folc  (47),  /oZA;,  people,  nation. 
[Ger.  FoZA:.] 

folc-st^de  (44),  folkstead,  battle- 
ground. 

folc-toga  (53),  leader  of  the  peo- 
ple, commander,  [toga  <  same 
root  as  teon ;  cf.  Ger.  Herzog, 
OE.  h^retoga,  and  the  meaning 
of  Lat.  dux.  ] 

folde  (53),  earth. 

folgian  (118;  164.  /),  attend, 
serve.    [Ger.  folgen ;  cf .  fylgan.] 

folm  (51.  b),  hand.  [Cognate 
with  Lat.  palma.] 

fon  (R.  110),  catch;  reach  forth. 

for  (51.  b),  journey. 

for,  see  faran. 

for  (166,  175,  4), /or;  before;  of; 
on;  in  (Fr.  selon). 

for-  (142). 

for-baernan  (113),  scorch,  parch. 

for-dilgian  {\l%),  destroy.  [Ger. 
vertilgen.] 

for-don  (142),  dostroy.     [Shak.] 

for-drifan  (I.  102),  drive,  impel. 
[Ger.  vertreiben.] 


288 


VOCABULARY. 


fore,  before, 

fore-  (142). 

fore-cuman  (IV.  105),  anticipate, 
forestall,  prevent. 

fore-cweden  (62),  aforesaid. 

fore-ge-gearwian  (118),  prepare. 

fore-ge-scrifan  (I.  102),  pre- 
scribe. [Ger.  vorschreiben  ;  Lat. 
scribe  underlies  both.] 

fore-saed  (62),  aforesaid.  [Past 
part,  of  fores^cgean.] 

fore-see avvung  (51.  3),  provi- 
dence.    [Cf.  Ger.  Vorsehiing.~\ 

fore-s^ttan  (113),  close  in.  [Ger. 
vorsetzen.^ 

fore-sprecen  (62),  aforesaid. 
[Past  part,  of  foresprecan.] 

fore-tynan  (113),  cut  off.  [Cf. 
tun,  and  16.] 

for-giefan  (V.  106,  18),  give, 
grant.  [See  giefan  ;  Ger. 
vergeJ)('n.'\ 

for-gieldan  (-gildan)  (III.  104; 
24;  18;  164.  h),  requite,  recom- 
pense; pay,  give.  [Ger.  ver- 
gelten.'] 

for-gietan  (V.  106,  18),  forget. 
[Ger.  vorgessen.'] 

for-grindan  (III.  104),  wear  out 
(like  Lat.  conterere). 

forht  (58),  afraid,  terrified. 

forhtian  (118),  tremble. 

for  h^von,  why. 

for  hAvy,  why. 

for-ierinan  (113),  ruin,  reduce  to 
poverty.  [<earm,  by  16;  cf. 
Ger,  verarynen.] 

for-lsetan  (R.  110),  let,  allow; 
let  go;  lay  down;  leave,  leave 
off;  abandon,  forsake;  lose. 
[Ger.  verlassen."] 

for-leosan  (II.  103),  lose.  [Cf. 
Mod.  Eng.  forlorn,  and  Ger.  ver- 
lieren.'] 


for-liden  (62),  shipwrecked.  [Past 
part,  of  forlisaCan.] 

for-lidennes  (51.   5),   shipwreck. 

forma  (60,  68,  tS),  first. 

for-niman  (IV.  105),  waste,  deso- 
late, consume  ;  fornumen  been, 
perish,  decay. 

for-spildan  (113),  destroy. 

for-swelgan  (III.  104),  devour. 

for-swigian  (118),  keep  secret, 
conceal.     [Ger.  verschweigen.'] 

for-tredan  (V.  106),  tread  down, 
tread  under  foot.  [Ger.  ver- 
treten.] 

forff,  forth. 

for-fSaitx,  because,  for  this  reason, 
therefore. 

for-ffam-lflfe,  because. 

for-8'an,  wherefore. 

forff-a-teon  (II.  103),  bnng 
forth. 

forff-bringan  (114),  bring  forth. 

fora'-faran  (VI.  107),  j^ass  away, 
depart;  forfffaren,  deceased, 
dead.     {Gqy.  fortfahren.^ 

fovfS-fov  (51.  b),  departure. 

forar-ge-leoran  (113),  pass  away, 
die. 

foraf-liestan  (-lestan)  (113),  con- 
tinue, supply. 

for-ffon  (-9'e),/or,  because ;  there- 
fore;  wherefore. 

foi-af-teon  (II.  103),  perform,  rep- 
resent, exhibit;  bring  forth. 

forff-weard,  advanced. 

for-wandian  (118),  reverence; 
hesitate  ;  forwandiende,  defer- 
ential, diffident. 

for-weoriaran  (III.  104),  perish. 

for-wiernan  (113  ;  156.  j),  refuse, 
deny. 

for-witan  (126),  know  in  advance. 
j  for-wyrcean  {l\^),  forfeit.  [Ger. 
'     verwirken.  ] 


VOCABULARY. 


289 


fot  (46),  foot.     [Ger.  Fuss.'] 

fracoS"  (57,  165),  odious^  abomi- 
nable. [<*fra-cn9',  cf.  May- 
hew,  OK  Phon.  §  160.] 

frsegn,  see  frignan. 

frsetwa  (-we)  (51.  «),  plur.,  or- 
7iaments. 

fraetwian  (118),  adorn,  bedeck. 

frsetwung  (51.  3),  array. 

fram,  from  ;  by ;  of ;  from 
among. 

fram-gan  (141),  make  headway. 

framlice  (fr^m-)  (70),  promptly, 
bravely. 

frea  (53),  lord. 

frecne  (59),  perilous,  fearful, 
direful,  terrible. 

frecne  (70),  fearlessly,  daunt- 
lessly,  valiantly. 

frecnes  (51.  5  ;  1^),  danger,  peril. 

frefran  (115.  b),  comfort,  cheer. 

fr^inde  (59) ,  foreign,  alien.  [Ger. 
fremd.  ] 

fr^mman  (115.  a;  117;  164.  e), 
benefit,  profit.  [Cf.  the  fram- 
(16)  m  framgan.  ] 

freo  (irreg.  plur.  frige) ,  free. 

freod  (51.  b),  good-will,  kind- 
ness. 

freolice  (70),  freely.  [Ger.  frei- 
lich.  ] 

freond  (46.  3),  friend.  [Ger. 
Freund,  Goth,  frijonds,  pres. 
part,  of  frijon,  to  love ;  cf. 
feond.] 

freond-scipe  (44.  1  ;  l^Z),  friend- 
ship. [Cf.  Ger.  Freundschaft, 
with  a  different  ending.] 

freorjg  (57;  174.  d),  cold,  be- 
numbed. 

freoffu  (freo'So)  (51.  a),  defense. 
[Ger.  Friede.] 

frige,  see  freo. 

frignan  (III.  104),  ask,  inquire. 


frits  (47),  countenance,  support, 
aid,  protection.  [Cf.  freolffu, 
and  Mod.  Eng.  Fredeirick).] 

frod  (58),  old. 

frofor  (51.  b),  comfort,  consola- 
tion ;  sustenance. 

frQHilice,  see  framlice. 

fruina  (53),  beginning ,  first. 

frum-gar  (43),  primipile,  captain, 
chief.     [Cf.  fruma.] 

frum-sceaft  (51.  b),  creation. 
[Cf.  frama.] 

frym9'(u)  (51, 144),  creation.  [Cf. 
fruma,  and  16.  ] 

fugol  (43.  4),  bird.  [Ger.  Vogel, 
Mod.  'Eng.  fowl.] 

fugol-cynn  (47),  kind  of  birds. 

ful  (58),  vile,  foul.  [Ger.  faul; 
more  remotely  related  are  Lat. 
pus,  puteo.~\ 

full  (58),  full.     [Ger.  voll] 

ful(l),  Sidy.,  full. 

full-fr^mman  (115.  a;  117),  fin- 
ish. 

fultum  (43),  help,  aid,  assistance, 
support. 

fultumian  (118,  90),  assist. 

furaCra  (67),  first  (lit.  former). 

fursafum,  even;  whatever. 

fas  (58,  30),  ready. 

fylgan  (113),  follow.  [Cf.  folg- 
ian,  and  Gev.  folgen.] 

fyllan  (113),  ^Z^.  [<  full,  by  16; 
Ger.  fiillen.  ] 

fyllan,  see  fiellan. 

fyllu  (51.  a),  fill,  feast. 

fyr  (4.1),  fire.     [Ger.  Feuer.] 

fyrdwic,  see  fierdwic. 

fyrliS',  see  ferhS". 

fyrmest  (78.  1 ;  69),  first. 

fyr-spearca  (53),  spark. 

fyrst,  see  fierst. 

fysan  (113  ;  184.  b),  hasten. 
[<fus.] 


290 


VOCABULARY. 


G. 


gad  (51.  6),  goad. 

gasrs  (47,  31),  herb^  grass.     [Ger. 

Gras.  ] 
gaful-raeden  (51.  5;  144),/a7'e. 
gagates  (Lat.),  jei.- 
galnes    (51.    5),    lust,    lewdness. 

[Cf.  Ger.  GeiKJieit).^ 
gan  (141),  go.     [Ger.  geken.^ 
gang  (gQng)  (43),  course ;  circuit., 

revolution. 
gangan  (K.  109),  go. 
gar  (43),  spear,  javelin.    [Cf.  Mod. 

Eng.  garlicl 
gar-ge-winn  (47),  battle  of  spears. 

[See  gewinn.] 
garsecg  (43),  ocean.    [See  p.  211, 

note  3.] 
gast  (43),    spirit,    ghost.      [Ger. 

Geist.^ 
gast-ge-hygd  (47),  thought  of  the 

mind. 
gast-ge-ryiie  (48,  215),  secret  of 

the  soul,  thought  of  the  heart(?). 

[See  geryne.  ] 
gat  (52),  goat.     [Ger.  Geiss.] 
ge  (18). 
ge  .  .  .  and,  ge  .  .  .  ge  (202),  both 

.  .  .  and. 
ge-_(142). 

ge-aemetgian  (118),  release,  dis- 
engage.      [Cf.     iemetta,     «ni- 

tig.] 
ge-agnian  (118),  inherit,  occupy, 

take  possession    of.      [See  ag- 

nian.] 
ge-and-weard  (58),7)resewi.   [See 

andweard.] 
ge-and-weardan    (-Qnd-)    (113), 

answer.     [See  andweardan.] 
gear  (47,  18),  year.     [Ger.  Jahr.'] 
geara,  formerly,  of  yore. 
geare  (70),  well.     [See  yare(ly) 


in  Shakespeare,  Temp.  1.  1,  and 

elsewhere.] 
gearlic     (57),     yearly,     annual 

[Ger.  jlihrlich.'] 
geani-iafancol  (gearo'S^ncol)  (57), 

rendy-viitted.      [See  geare,  ge- 

15'ancol,  afancolmod.] 
gearwian    (118),    prejmre.    [See 

geare.  ] 
geat  (47.  4  ;  18),  gate. 
ge-axian    (118),   learn,  discover. 

[See  ascian.] 
ge-bed  (47,  142),  prayer.     [Ger. 

Gebet ;  cf.  biddan.] 
ge-beorg    (47),    defense,    protec- 
tion; outlook  (on). 
ge-beorscipe    (44.    1),    banquet, 

feast.     [See  beorscipe.] 
ge-beran  (IV.  105),   bear.     [See 

beran.] 
ge-bidan    (I.    102),    axoait,  wait. 

[See  bidan.] 
ge-biddan  (V.  106),  pray.     [See 

biddan.] 
ge-biegan     (113),     bend,    curve. 

[See  biegan.] 
ge-bierhtan  (113),    grow  bright, 

shine.     [<beorht,  by  16.] 
ge-bilod  (57),  billed. 
ge-bisgian  (-bysgian)    (118),  fa- 
tigue,    vjeary,    exhaust.      [See 

bisig.] 
ge-bland  (-blQnd)  (47),  mingling, 

mixture,  confusion. 
ge-blandan  (-bl^ndan)  (R.  110), 

tningle. 
ge-bledsian,  see  gebletsian. 
ge-bleod  (58),  hued,  colored. 
ge-bletsian      (-bledsian)     (118), 

bless.     [See  New  Eng.  Diet.  s.v. 

bless.l 
ge-blissian    (118),    rejoice,    make 

joyful;  geblissod  wesan,  joy. 

[See  blissian.] 


VOCABULARY. 


291 


gcblQnd(aii),  see  gebland(an). 

ge-bl6wan  (H.  109),  blow.  [See 
blowan.  ] 

ge-brec  (47),  uproar^  din.  [Cf. 
brecan.  ] 

ge-bringan  (114),  waft^  carry ^ 
convey.     [See  bringan.] 

ge-bycgean  (114),  buy;  redeem. 
[See  bycgean.] 

ge-byrd  (51.  6),  hirth^  extraction^ 
lineage.  [Ger.  Gehurt;  see 
byrd.J 

gebysgian,  see  gebisgian. 

ge-ceosan  (II.  103),  choose^  select. 

ge-ciegan  (113),  call.  [See  eiegan.] 

ge-cierran  (113, 18),  turn ;  return. 
[See  cierran.] 

ge-cneordnes  (51.  5),  accomplish- 
ment. 

ge-cost  (59;  174.  d),  tried,  trusty. 

ge-cweman  (113),  please. 

ge-cweme  (59),  pleasing,  accept- 
able. 

ge-cwemlice  (70),  acceptably, 
agreeably. 

ge-cwe9'an  (V.  106),  say,  speak. 
[See  ewes' an.] 

ge-ey9'an(113 ;  164.  b),  announce  ; 
prove,  evince,  show,  exhibit,  dis- 
play;  designate.     [See  eyiaCan.] 

ge-dselan  (113),  divide,  separate. 
[See  dselan.] 

ge-dafenian  (118  ;  164.  k),  befit. 

ge-dafenlic  (57),  fitting,  suitable. 

ge-deorf  (47),  labor,  toil. 

ge-dieian  (118),  construct.  [<  die ; 
see  dieian.] 

ge-diersian  (-dyrsian)  (118,  90), 
exalt,  magnify,  celebrate.  [< 
diere.] 

ge-don  (140),  do,  perform;  make. 
[See  don.] 

ge-drefan  (113),  disturb,  agitate, 
trouble.     [Cf.  Ger.  truben.'] 


gedyrsian,  see  gediersian. 

ge-eaenian  (118),  increase,  aug- 
ment.    [<  eac.] 

ge-earnian  (118),  merit.  [See 
earnung.] 

ge-ed-niwian  (118),  renew;.  [See 
edniwian.  ] 

ge-^nde-byrdan  (113),  order,  ar- 
range. 

ge-^ndian  (118),  end,  come  to  an 
end.     [<^nde;  see  ^ndian.] 

ge-^ndung  (51.  3),  end,  close. 

ge-faestnian  (118),  fasten,  con- 
firm, establish. 

ge-faran  (VI.  107),  experience, 
suffer.  [See  faran,  and  142, 
ge-(2).] 

ge-fea  (53),  pleasure,  joy,  delight, 
gladness. 

ge-feallan  (R.  109),  fall,  chance. 
[See  feallan.] 

ge-feoht  (47),  battle. 

ge-feohtan  (III.  104) ,  fight.  [See 
feohtan.] 

ge-feon  (V.  106;  156.  c;  29),  re- 
joice. 

ge-feormian  (118),  take  in,  enter- 
tain.    [See  feormian.] 

ge-fera  (53,  142),  companion,  fel- 
low. 

geferan  (113),  undertake,  experi- 
ence.    [See  feran.] 

ge-f(grian  (116),  /erry,  carry,  bear. 
[See  f^rian.] 

ge-fer-rseden  (51.  5;  144),  com- 
pany, fellowship,  society. 

ge-fer-seipe  (44.  1;  143),  attend- 
ance, companionship;  retinue. 

geflieman  (-flgeman)  (113),  put  to 
flight. 

ge-flit  (47),  strife,  dispute.  [Cf. 
Ger.  Fleiss.'] 

ge-frsetwian  (118),  adorn.  [See 
fraetwian.] 


292 


VOCABULARY. 


ge-frefran  (115.  6),  console,  cheer. 
[See  frefran.] 

ge-fr^mman  (115.  a),  effect,  per- 
form, work,  perpetrate.  [See 
fr^mman.] 

ge-fultumian  (118),  assist,  help. 
[See  fultumian.] 

ge-fyllan  (113, 156),  Jill;  end,  fin- 
ish, accomplish.     [See  fyllan.] 

ge-fyrn,  adv.,  a  long  time  ago. 

ge-gada  (53),  associate,  compan- 
ion. 

ge-gaderian  (118),  gather. 

ge-gaderung  (51.  3),  gathering 
together,  assembly,  congrega- 
tion. 

ge-gan  (141),  go;  win,  obtain. 
[See  gan.] 

ge-gearcian  (118),  prepare.  [Cf. 
geare.] 

ge-gearwian  (118), prepare.  [See 
gearwian,  and  cf.  gegierwan.] 

ge-gierela  (53),  garment;  rai- 
ment, apparel. 

ge-gierwan  (-gyrwan)  (113), 
prepare.     [Cf.  gegearwian.] 

ge-gl^ngan  (113),  adorn.  [< 
gl^ng.] 

ge-godian  (118), enn'c^.  [<god.] 

ge-gr^mman  (115.  a),  irritate,  en- 
rage.    [See  gr^mian.  ] 

ge-gretan  (113),  <7ree^  salute. 

ge-gyrwan,  see  gegierwan. 

ge-hal  (58),  whole,  intact.  [See 
hal.] 

ge-halgian  (118) ,  hallow.  [<  ha- 
lig.] 

ge-hatan  (R.  110),  promise, 
pledge  ;  call.     [See  hatan.] 

ge-healdan  (R.  109),  observe, 
keep;  reserve;  maintain,  sus- 
tain.    [See  healdan.] 

ge-heawan  (R.  109),  cut  doicn, 
slay.     [See  heawan.] 


ge-h^rian   (116),    glorify.      [See 

h^rian.] 
ge-hieran  (113),  hear.    [See  hier- 

an.] 
ge-hiersum  (57,  146),  obedient. 
ge-hiersumian     (118;     164.   /), 

obey. 
ge-hiersumnes  (51.  5),  obedience. 
ge-hladan  (VI.  107),  lade,  load, 

freight. 
ge-hogian    (118),  consider,   have 

in  mind. 
ge-hrman  (I.  102),  attack. 
ge-hu,   in  every  direction.     [See 

ha.] 
ge-hwa    (89.    c;     154.    b),    each 

(one).     [See  hvva.] 
ge-hwllc  (-hwylc)  (89.  a ;  154.  b), 

each  (one),  every  (one) ;  anra 

gehwilc,     eve^-y   (one).      [See 

hwilc] 
ge-hyhtan     (113),     hope,     trust. 

[<hyht.] 
ge-hyran,  see  gehieran. 
ge-innian    (118),      give,     bestoio 

(on). 
ge-ln-seglian  (118), sea^    [<Lat. 

sigillum.] 
ge-laeccean    (114),    catch,    seize. 

[Cf.  Shak.,  Macb.  4.  3.  195.] 
ge-laedan     (113),     bring,    carry. 

[See  Isedan.] 
ge-l8ered  (62),  taught,   educated, 

trained,  skilled,  skilful.     [Past 

part,  of  Iseran.] 
ge-ltestan  (113),  stand  by,  assist. 

[See  Isestan.] 
gelatfian     (118),     invite.       [See 

laafian] 
ge-leafa  (5Z) ,  faith.     [Ger.  G(e)- 

laube.^ 
ge-leornian    (118),    learn.     [See 

leornian] 
ge-l^ttan    (113),    hinder,      [Ger. 


VOCABULARY. 


293 


-letzen  ;  cf.  Shak.,  Haml.  1. 4.  85, 

and  (Auth.  Vers.)  Rom.  1.  13.] 
ge-lic    (68,    163),    like.      [<lic, 

body  ;  cf .  Ger.  gleich.'] 
ge-lica  (53),  like^i  equal. 
ge-lice  (70),  similarly.,  likewise. 
ge-licgan  (V.  106),  border.     [See 

licgan.] 
ge-licnes  (51.  5),  likeness.     [Ger. 

Gleichniss.'] 
ge-lTefan    (113;    156.  g),  believe. 

[Ger.  g{e')lauben.'] 
ge-lif-faestan   (113),   make  alive., 

endow  with  life.     [See  lif.] 
ge-limp  (47),  adventure,  misfor- 
tune. 
ge-limpan    (III.    104),     happen, 

befall. 
ge-limplic  (57),  adapted. 
ge-logian  (118),p?ace,  set. 
ge-lomlice  {'tQ) .,  frequently . 
ge-lufian  (118),  love.     [See  luf- 

ian.] 
ge-lystan  (113, 190),  desire.    [See 

lystan,  and  Ger.  gelilsten.'] 
ge-maca  (53) ,  mate,  companion. 
ge-maeccea   (53),   mate,  consort, 

spouse. 
ge-in^ene  (59),  common,  universal. 
gemienelice  (70) ,  in  common. 
ge-mfcere  (48),  boundary,  end. 
ge-mang    (-mgng)     (47),    troop, 

phalanx. 
ge-manig-fieldan  (113),  multiply. 
ge-m^ngan  (113  ;  184.  b),  mingle, 

associate. 
ge-meotu,  see  gemet. 
ge-met  (47,  20),  boundary ;  sort; 

effect;  law. 
ge-metan   (113),  find,  encounter. 

[See  metan.] 
ge-miltsian    (118;    164.  g ;    33), 

pity,      have      compassion      on. 

[<  milts.] 


ge-miltsiend  (43.  6),  pitier. 
genriQng,  see  gemang. 

ge-munan    (134),    remember,    be 

mindful. 
ge-myndig  (57),  mindful. 
ge-inyngian    (118),   recount,    re- 
late. 
gena,  see  giena. 
ge-nacodian    (118,     162),    strip. 

[<  nacod.] 
gen-cwide  (44,  28),  rei:)ly.     [See 

cwide.] 
ge-neahhe  (70),  often,  frequently. 
ge-nea-lfcecan     (113),     approach, 

draw  nigh.     [See  nealiecan.] 
ge-n^mnan  (115.  b),  name.     [See 

n^mnan.] 
ge-neosian    (118),     visit.       [See 

neosian.] 
ge-n^rian  (116),  save. 
ge-niman    (IV.  105),  take,  seize. 

[See  niman.] 
ge-nyhtsum  (57,  146),  abundant. 

[Cf.  iiugan  (136),  GQY.genugen.^ 

and  Mod.  Eng,  enough.'] 
ge-nyhtsumian     (118;     164.    e), 

avail,  suffice,  be  sufficient  for,  be 

of  use. 
geofon  (47),  ocean. 
geoguac  (51.  6;  18),  youth.    [Ger. 

J2igend.~\ 
geomor-mod  (58,  18),  sorrowful- 
minded.     [Cf.  Ger.  Jammer.] 
geond      (18),      along,      through, 

throughout,    over.      [Cf.    Mod. 

Eng.  beyond.] 
geong  (58,  65,  18),  young.     [Ger. 

jung.] 
ge-openian  (118),  open.   [<  open  ; 

cf.  Ger.  offnen.] 
georn  (58;  155.  e;  21.  6),  eager. 

[See  giernan.] 
georne     (70),    surely,    certainly. 

[Ger.  gem.] 


294 


VOCABULARY. 


georn-full  (58),  busied,  occupied. 

georu-fulnes  (51.  5),  piety,  zeal. 

geornlice  (70),  assiduously,  zeal- 
ously. 

georran  (III.  104),  rattle. 

geotan  (II.  103),  stream.  [Ger. 
giessen.^ 

ge-rjedan  (113),  I'ead ;  gersed  is, 
reads.  [Cf.  Ger.  rathen ;  see 
raedan.] 

ge-r^ccean  (114),  interpret,  ex- 
pound.    [See  r^ccean.] 

ge-reuian  (118,  28),  adorn. 

ge-reord  (47),  repast. 

ge-reordian  (118,  90),  feed,  re- 
fresh. 

ge-r^stan  (113;  184.  b),  rest,  re- 
pose.    [<  r^st.] 

ge-retan  (113),  refresh,  invigor- 
ate, cheer.     [<  rot,  glad.^ 

ge-riht  (47),  direct  way.  [See 
riht] 

ge-riin-craeft     (43),     arithmetic, 

•  chronology. 

ge-ryne  (48),  mystery.  [<  run, 
by  16.] 

ge-saegan  (113),  lay  low. 

ge-sielaii  (113,  190),  happen,  be- 
fall, chance. 

ge-saelig  (57.  3),  delightful.  [Cf. 
Ger.  selig.'\ 

ge-samnian  (-SQmnian)  (118), 
gather. 

ge-sceadan  (R.  110),  separate. 

ge-sceaft  (51.  6),  creature,  crea- 
tion. 

ge-sceawian  (118),  behold.  [See 
sceawian.] 

ge-scieldan  (-scyldan)  (113),  de- 
fend, protect.     [Cf.  scield.] 

ge-scieldnes  (51.  5),  defense,  pro- 
tection. 

ge-scieppan  (VI.  107),  create. 
[See  scieppan.] 


ge-scierpan  (113),  clothe,  apparel. 

ge-scierpla  (-scirpla)  (53),  rai- 
ment, apparel. 

ge-screpe  (59),  suitable,  adapted. 

ge-scrifen  (62),  prescribed,  fixed, 
regular,  customary.  [Past  part. 
of  gescrifan  <  Lat.  scribo.'] 

ge-scrydan  (113, 16),  clothe.  [See 
scrydan.] 

ge-scyldan,  see  gescieldan. 

ge-secean  (114),  visit,  gain,  touch, 
attain.     [See  secean.] 

ge-s^cgean  (123),  say;  give 
(thanks').     [See  s^cgean.] 

ge-s^llan  (114),  give.  [See  s^ll- 
an.] 

ge-s^ndan  (113),  send,  throw. 
[See  s^ndan.] 

ge-seon  (V.  106),  see;  gesegen 
is,  seems,  Lat.  videtur. 

ge-setennes  (51.  6),  institute,  or- 
dinance. 

ge-s^tnes  (51.  5),  narrative. 

ge-s^ttan  (113),  set,  place;  oc- 
cupy; appoint,  settle;  compose. 
[See  s^ttan.] 

ge-sewenlic  (57),  visible. 

ge-sTene  (-syne)  (59),  visible. 

ge-sihsac  (61.  1),  countenance. 

ge-sittan  (V.  106),  sit;  possess, 
inherit.     [See  sittan.] 

ge-silSr  (43),  companion.  [Cf. 
sW,  and  Ger.  Gesinde.'] 

ge-slean  (VI.  107),  smite,  strike. 
[See  slean.] 

ge-smierwan  (113),  anoint. 

ge-smyltan  (113,  17),  calm. 
[<smolt,  serene;  cf.  sniylte.] 

gesQmnian,  see.gesamnian. 

ge-spann  (47),  clasp,  network. 

ge-spowan  (R.  109,  190),  suc- 
ceed. 

ge-sprec  (47) ,  conversation.  [Ger. 
Gesprdch;  cf.  sprecan.] 


VOCABULARY. 


295 


ge-standan     (VI.     107),     assail. 

[See  standan.] 
ge-staffelian    (-sta^olian)    (118), 

establish^  render  steadfast;  re- 
store. 
ge-staafolfaestian       (-stea'Sulfes- 

tiau)  (118),  establish^  perform. 
ge-stigan    (I.    102),    ascend    to. 

[See  stigan.] 
ge-stillan     (113),     still.,    pacify^ 

qniet ;  subside.     [See  stillan.] 
ge-strangian    (118),    strengthen. 

[<  Strang] 
ge-stregdan  (III.  104),  sprinkle. 
ge-streon  (47),  profit.,  gain.     [Cf. 

streonan.] 
ge-streowian  (118),  strew. 
ge-sund    (58),    icell.     [Ger.    ge- 

sund.'\ 
ge-sw^ncaii  (113),  torment.,  vex., 

wear  out.     [See  sw^ncan.] 
ge-sw^ngan  (113),  swinge.,  toss. 
ge-sweotolian    (118),    manifest; 

bewray.,    expose.,   discover.      [< 

sweotol.] 
ge-sw^rian     (VI.     107),     swear. 

[See  sw^rian.] 
ge-swican  (1. 102  ;  156.  k) ,  cease  ; 

fail.     [See  swican.] 
ge-swiiic  (47),  toil,   effort.     [Cf. 

swincan.] 
ge-swing   (47),   rolling,   undula- 
tion.    [Cf.  swingan.] 
ge-syndig  (57.  3),  fair,  favoring, 

propitious.    [<  gesund,  by  16.] 
gesyne,  see  gesiene. 
ge-syngian  (118),  sin.     [Cf.  syn- 

full.] 
getacnian  (118),  signify,  indicate. 

[See  tacnian.] 
ge-tacnung   (51.    3),    sign.      [< 

tacen,] 
ge-tsecean  (114) ,  point  out,  direct ; 

appoint ;  teach.     [See  teecean.] 


ge-tael  (47),  reckoning. 

ge-teon  (II.  103),  bring  up  ;  play. 
[See  teon.] 

ge-tinibran  (115.  b),  furnish,  sup- 
ply (lit,  construct). 

ge-tryimnan  (115.  a),  fortify. 
[See  trymman.] 

ge-iafanc  (47),  thought,  mind. 

ge-ljancol  (-'Sancul)  (57),  consid- 
erate. [See  ffancolmod,  gearo- 
laFancol.] 

ge-afeaht  (47),  counsel,  advice. 

ge-Qfeahtend  (43.  6),  counsellor. 

ge-igf^ncean {l\^) , remember.  [See 
iSr^ncean.] 

ge-ffraec  (47),  commingling,  tur- 
bulence, tumult. 

ge-ffrSstan  (113),  afflict. 

ge-afrean  (113),  dismay.  [See 
iSrean.] 

ge-afreatian  (118),  rebuke.  [See 
ffreatian.] 

ge-aCring  (47),  throng,  rush. 

ge-iaCungen  (62),  excellent.  [< 
syeon,  thrive.'] 

ge-aCwSrian  (118),  agree. 

ge-ffwaernes  (51.  5),  concord, 
agreement. 

ge-ffyn  (113),  restrain. 

ge-Sfyncean  (114),  seem,  appear ; 
geafnlit  is,  seems.  [See  ffync- 
ean.] 

ge-un-trumian  (118),  enfeeble,  de- 
bilitate, prostrate;  geuntrumod, 
sick,  Lat.  infirmus.  [<  iintrum.] 

ge-wSgan  (113),  plague,  molest. 

ge-w^tan  (113),  wet,  moisten. 

ge-wealc  (47),  welter. 

ge-weald  (47),  control,  rule,  do- 
minion. [Ger.  Gevmlt;  see 
wealdend.] 

ge-w^ndan  (113),  turn;  return, 
depart,  go;  translate.  [See 
w^ndan.] 


296 


VOCABULARY. 


ge-weorc      (47),      work.        [See 

weorc] 
ge-weorp  (47),  smiting. 
ge-weorffan    (III.  104),    become., 

he;    make;     happen;     convert. 

[See  weorffan.] 
ge-weoriafian    (118),    distinguish. 

[See  weorlS'lan.] 
ge-wieldan  (113),  rule,  have  do- 
minion over.     [<geweald,  by 

16 ;  see  Mod.  Eng.  loield.'] 
ge-wiht  (47),  weight.     [Ger.  Ge- 

wicht.'] 
ge-wilnian  (118;  156.  a),  desire. 

[See  wilnian.] 
ge-winn  (47),  labor.,  toil;  hard- 
ship., distress.     [See  winnan.] 
ge->viiina     (53),     enemy.       [See 

-winnan.] 
ge-winnfullic     (57),      laborious, 

toilsome  J  fatiguing. 
ge-wislice      (70,      76),      oj-ienltj, 

plainly. 
ge-\vissian  (118),  guide.,  direct. 
ge-witan   (126),  find  out.,   learn. 

[See  witan.] 
ge-witan  (I.  102;  184.  a),  depart., 

go. 
ge-witt  (47),  understanding. 
ge-writ      (47) ,     writing,      writ  ; 

letter  ;    document,    instrument, 

will. 
ge-writan  (I.  102),  ibrite. 
ge-wiina  (53),  custom,  wont. 
ge-\vunian  (118),   be  wont,  use; 

dwell.     [See  -\vunian.] 
ge-wyrcean   (114),   make,  build. 

[See  wyrcean.] 
giefan  (gifan)   (V.  106,  18),  give. 

[Ger.  geben.} 
giefeaCe  (gife'Se)  (48),  chance. 
giefu  (gifu)  (51.  a),  gift;  boon. 
gieman  (113;  156./),  7'ule  over. 
giena  (gena),  yet. 


giernan  (113),  desire ;  solicit  {the 
hand  of),  woo.  [<georn,  by 
16] 

giest-hus  (47),  i7in.  [Cf.  Mod. 
Eng.  guest-chamber.'] 

giestran-daeg  (gystran-)  (43), 
yesterday. 

giet  (git,  gyt),  yet;  still;  as  yet, 
hitherto. 

gif,  if     [Not  related  to  giefan.] 

gifeiffe,  see  giefe6>. 

gifu,  see  giefu. 

gim-cynn  (47),  gems  of  every 
kind. 

gimm  (43),  gem,  precious  stone. 
[Borrowed  from  Lat.  gemma  be- 
fore ca.  650.] 

ginn  (58),  spacious,  ample. 

gingra  (65,  53),  disciple. 

gio,  formerly,  long  ago,  once  upon 
a  time.     [See  iu.] 

git,  see  giet. 

gla^s  (47),  glass. 

gleaw  (58),  prudent,  loise. 

gleawlice  (70),  shrewdly,  judi- 
ciously, wisely.  [lishment. 

gl^ng  (51.  b),  adornment,  embel- 

glidan  (L  102),  glide.  [Ger. 
gleiten.] 

god  (58,  5,  4),  good.     [Ger.  gut.] 

god  (47; ,  prosperity  ;  plur. ,  goods, 
good  things,  property ;  benefac- 
tions. 

God  (43,  5,  4),  God.  {(^er.Gott; 
according  to  Kluge,  the  'Being 
invoked.'] 

god-cund  {b%),  divine,     [godhead. 

god-cundnes    (51.    5),    divinity, 

godcundmiht  (-mseht)  (51.  1), 
majesty.  [Divine  Father. 

God-Fseder  (43.  8),  God-Father, 

god-spell  (47),  gospel. 

god-w^bb  (^1),  purple. 

gold  (47),  gold. 


VOCABULARY. 


297 


gold-frsetwa  (51.  a),  plur.,  golden 

ornaments. 
gold-hord  (47),  treasure. 
gold-leaf  (47),  gold  leaf. 
gQng,  see  gang, 
graeg  (58),  gray.     [Ger.  grau.'] 
gram  (57),  fierce.,  raging. 
gr^mman  (115.  a),  enrage.     [< 

gram,  by  16.] 
grene  (59),  green.     [Ger.  grun.'] 
greot  (47),  du^t ;  shingle.     [Ger. 

Griess.'] 
gretan  (113),  greet.,  salute;  take 

leave  of.     [Ger.  grllssen.'] 
grewS",  see  growan. 
grindan  (III.  104),  whirl.     [Mod. 

Eng.  grind.'] 
growan  (R.  109),  grow. 
grand  (43),   earth;   bottom;  sea 

(perhaps  orig.  shallow.,  shoal). 

[Ger.  Grund,  Mod.  Eng.  ground.] 
gryre-hwil    (51.    &),    period    of 

terror. 
gurron,  see  georran. 
guma  (53),    man,   hero.      [Mod. 

Eng.  (bride) groom.] 
guS'  (51.  b;  30),  war.    [Ger.  -gund, 

in  Hildegund,  e.g.;  cf.  Gondibert.] 
ga9'-fana    (53),  gonfalon,   stand- 
ard.    [See  Mod,  Eng.  gonfalon  ; 

cf.  Ger.  Fahne,  Mod.  Eng.  vane.] 
gn9'-freca  (53),  warrior. 
gulSf-rinc  (43),  vmrrior. 
gu9'-sceorp  (47),  war-trappings. 
gyden  (51.  b  ;  17),  goddess. 
gylden  (146,  17),  golden. 
gystran-daeg,  see  giestran-daeg. 
gyt,  see  giet. 


H. 


habban  (121,  188),  have;  pos- 
sess ;  accept,  keep ;  receive. 
[Ger.  haben;  cf.  Lat.  habere.] 


had  (43),  sex. 

hador  (57),  bright,  serene.  [Ger. 
heiter.] 

heel  (47),  salvation;  rescue,  es- 
cape.    [Ger.  Ileil.] 

Haelend  (43.  6),  Saviour,  Jesus. 
[Ger.  Heiland.] 

haelea"  (43.  9),  hero,  man.  [Ger. 
Held.] 

hselu  (51.  a),  salvation;  rescue. 

hierfest  (43),  harvest.  [Ger. 
Herbst;    cf.    Lat.   carpere,    Gr. 

/CapTTOS.] 

haern  (51.  b),  ocean. 
htes  (51.  b),  order,  direction,  com- 
mand.    [Cf.  Mod.  Eng.  behest, 

Ger.  Geheiss.] 
hsetu  (51.  a),  heat,    [hat,  by  16.] 
hseffen  (57.  3) .  heathen.    [Cf .  Ger. 

Heide,  and  Mod.  Eng.  heath  ;  so 

Lat.  paganus  <  pagus.] 
hal  (58),  vjhole,  hale  ;  hal  gedon, 

save.     [Ger.  heil.] 
halig(57.3;  1^6),  holy.    [<hal; 

Ger.  heilig.] 
halsian   (118),   conjure,   implore., 

entreat.     [<  hal.] 
ham  (74,  24),  home.     [Ger.  heim.] 
hand  (51. 1. 3),  hand.  [Ger.  Hand.] 
har  (58),  hoar(y),  gray. 
hat (b^), hot, fervent.   [Ger.  heiss.] 
hatan  (R.  110),  call;  command; 

hatte,    is,    was   called.      [Ger. 

heissen;  cf.  archaic  Eng.  hight.] 
he  (81). 
hea,  see  heah. 
hea-clif  (47),  lofty  cliff. 
hea-deor    (47),    high-deer.      [Cf. 

Ger.  Hochwild;  without  a  prefix, 

OE.  deor  rarely,  if  ever,  means 

'deer.'] 
heafod     (47.    1,    6;     23),    head. 

[Ger.    Haupt,    Lat.    caput,    for 

*cauput.] 


298 


VOCABULARY. 


heafod-ge-rim    (47),  number  by 

heads,  poll. 
heah  (hea)  (65;  58.  1 ;  17),  high; 

great.     [Ger.  hoch.'] 
heah-cyning  (43),  high  king. 
heah-gc-streon  (47),  sumptuous, 

superb  treasure.   [See  gestreon.] 
heah-setl  (lueah-)  (47),  throne. 
heah-stefn  (58),  lofty -prowed. 
healdan  (R.  109),  hold;  observe, 

maintain;  keep,  reserve.     [Ger. 

halten.'] 
healf  (51.  &),  hand,  i.e.  side. 
healf  (58),  half.     [Ger.  halb.'] 
healic  (57,  146),  lofty. 
heall  (51.  b),  hall.     [Ger.  Halle.'] 
hean  (58),  lowly,  sei-vile,  of  loiv 

degree;  poor. 
heanes    (51.   5),    height,    highest 

point. 
heanne,  see  heah. 
heap  (43),  crowd,  swarm,  throng, 

assemblage.     [Ger.  Ikmfe.~\ 
heard  (58;  21.  a;  24),  brave,  in- 
trepid.    [Ger.  hart.] 
hearde(70),  painfully,  grievously. 
hearin  (43;  21.  a),  injury.     [Ger. 

Harm.] 
hearpe  (53.  1  ;  21.  a),  harp,  lyre. 

[Ger.  Harfe.] 
hearpe-naegl  (43),  plectritm. 
hearpe-str^ng  (43),  harpstring. 
hearpian    (118,    90),    harp,   play 

the  harp.     [Ger.  harfen.] 
heaiSu-liffend    (hea«o-)    (43.  6), 

seafarer. 
heal5ii-rinc    (hea«o-)     (43,    21), 

warnor. 
heaS'u-wfced  (51.  b),  icarlike  gar- 
ment, martial  weed. 
hea-wan  (U.  109),  hew,  cleave. 
h^bban  (VI.   107),  elevate,  lift; 

h^bban  up,  be  exalted. 
hefon,  see  heofon. 


h^fig  (57),  grievous,  irksome. 

h^figian  (118),  become  worse. 

h^fignes  (51.  5),  burden. 

hehlSo,  see  hiehd'u. 

helan  (IV.  105),  conceal.  [Cf. 
Chaucer,  Nun'^s  FriesVs  Tale 
235 ;  Ger.  hehlen.] 

h^ll  (51.  &),  hell.     [Ger.  Holle.] 

helm  (43),  helmet;  protector. 
[Ger.  Helm.] 

help  (51.  5;  5),  help.  [Cf.  Ger. 
Hilfe.] 

heo  (81). 

heof  (43),  mourning,  weeping. 

heofon  (43.  4.  d ;  20),  heaven. 

heofon-candel  (51.  6;  215),  can- 
dle of  heaven. 

heofon-cyning  (43),  king  of 
heaven. 

heofoiie  (53.  3),  heaveji. 

heofon-fyr  (47),  celestial  fire,  Jire 
from  heaven. 

heofon-Ieoma  (53),  radiance  of 
heaven. 

heofonlic  (57),  heavenly,  celes- 
tial, of  heaven. 

heofonlice  (70) ,  from  heaven. 

heofon-rice  (48),  kingdom  of 
heaven,  heavenly  kingdom. 

heofon- ffry mm  (43),  glory  of 
heaven. 

heolfrig  (57),  gory. 

heolstor  (47),  darkness. 

heonan  (75),  hence. 

heorte  (53.  1;  24;  21.  6),  heart. 
[Ger.  Herz.] 

her  (75,  24),  here.     [Ger.  her.] 

her-aefter,  hereafter. 

h<2re  (44.  2;  18),  army,  host. 
[Ger.  Heer ;  cf .  Mod.  Eng.  har- 
bor, heriot.] 

h^re-folc  (47),  army. 

h^re-paeS?  (h^rpa^)  (43),  highway. 
[Cf.  Ger.  Heerstrasse.] 


VOCABULARY. 


299 


h^re-reaf  (47),  plunder,  spoil. 

h^re-striet  (51.  b),  highway,  lit. 
military  road.  [Ger.  Heer- 
strasse.] 

h^re-waeiafa  (53),  warrior. 

h^rgian  (118),  harry,  ravage,  lay 
waste.     [Ger.  {ver)heeren.'] 

h^rian  {WQ) ,  praise. 

h^riges,  see  h^re. 

h^rpaiy,  see  h^repaegr. 

het,  see  hatan. 

hi  (81). 

hider  (75),  hither. 

hiehsta,  see  heah. 

hiehlSu  (heli'So)  (51.  a),  height, 
high. 

hienan  (113),  insult,  oppress. 
[<hean,  by  16.] 

hienac  (51.  6),  injury,  harm. 
[<hean,  by  16.] 

hieran  (hyran)  (113,  117),  hear. 

hiera.  Mere  (81,  83). 

hiernes  (51.  5),  obedience. 

higerof,  see  hygerof. 

hiht,  see  hyht. 

hiium,  see  hiwan. 

hild  (51. 5) ,  conflict,  battle.  [Orig. 
Hild,  goddess  of  war.] 

hilde-leoS"  (47),  battle-lay. 

hilde-ntedre  (53.  1 ;  215),  battle- 
adder,  arrow.  [See  Neio  Eng. 
Diet.  s.v.  adder.'] 

hilde-wsepen  (47.  1),  battle- 
weapon. 

him,  hine,  his,  hit  (81,  83). 

hin-gang  (-i^ng)  (43),  departure. 
[Ger.  Hingang.'] 

hiw  (47),  kind;  color.  [Cf. 
Spenser,  F.  Q.  3.  6.  33,  35.] 

hiwan  (53),  plur.  brethren, 
brotherhood,  conventual  house- 
hold, chapter. 

hlsefdige  (53.  1),  lady.  [Cf.  p. 
222,  note  2.] 


hlaest  (47),  plur.,  wares,  merchan- 
dise, cargo.  [Ger.  Last;  cf. 
hladan.] 

hlaf  (43),  bread  ;  food.  [Archaic 
Ger.  Laib  ;  Mod.  Eng.  loaf.] 

hlaford  (43),  lord.  [<  hlaf  + 
weard.] 

hiaford-leas  (58),  lordless,  with- 
out a  leader. 

hlaford-scipe  (44.  1),  lordship, 
ride. 

hlanc  (68),  lank,  gaunt. 

hleo  (47.  3),  shelter;  protector. 
[Mod.  Eng.  lee.] 

hleotan  (II.  103),  obtain,  gain. 
[Cf.  Ger.  Loos,  Mod.  Eng.  lot.] 

hleoffor-cwide  (44),  narrative, 
story;  hymn. 

hleoS'rian  (118), speak;  proclaim. 

hleoffu,  see  hliS". 

hlifian  (118),  tower. 

hlimman  (hlymman)  (III.  104), 
resoimd. 

hliff  (47,  20),  hill. 

hlod'ian  (118),  pillage,  2)lunder. 

hlude  (70),  loudly. 

hlutor  (hlutter)  (57),  pwre,  clear. 

hlymman,  see  hlimman. 

hlynnan  (115.  a),  roar,  boom. 

hoc  (43),  hook. 

YLofi^t),  building,  dwelling,  abode. 

holm  (43),  ocea7i,  sea. 

holm-igfracu  (51.  a),  tossing  of  the 
sea,  boisterous  sea. 

holm-weard  (43),  warden  of  the 
sea. 

holm-weg  (43),  path  of  the  ocean. 

holt  (47),  grove,  forest.  [Ger. 
Holz  ;  cf.  Chaucer,  Prol.  6.] 

holunga  (70),  in  vain. 

horig  (57),  squalid. 

horn-boga  (53),  bow  of  horn. 

horn-fisc  (43),  sword-fish  ? 

horu-scip  (47) ,  beaked  ship. 


300 


VOCABULARY. 


hors  (47,  31),  ^orse.    [Ger.  i^oss.] 

hosp  (43?),  reproach^  abuse. 

hraedlice  (70),  with  speed;  imme- 
diately. 

hrtednes  (51.  5),  celerity. 

hraefn  (hrefn)  (43),  mve^z.  [Ger. 
Babe.'] 

hraew  (47),  corpse. 

hran  (43),  whale. 

hrau-rad  (hrgn-)  (51.  b),path  of 
the  whale. 

hm'Se  (70),  quickly. 

href II,  see  hraefn. 

hreinig  (57;  174.  d),  exulting. 

hreoh  (58),  rough,  fierce,  rude. 

lireohiios  (51.  5),  tempest. 

hreosaii  (II.  lOZ),  fall. 

hreran  (113),  agitate,  toss.  [Ger. 
ri'ihren.'] 

bring  (43),  ri7ig.     [Ger.  Bing.'] 

hrof  (43,  24),  roof 

hrQnrSd,  see  hranrad. 

hryiafcr  (47),  plur.,  cattle. 

hii,  how. 

blind  (78,  79),  hundred. 

hund-seofontig  (78),  seventy. 

biind-teontig  (78),  a  hundred- 
(fold). 

bunger  (43),  famine,  starvation. 
[Ger.  Hunger.'] 

hungrig  (57),  hungry,  an  hun- 
gered.    [Ger.  hungrig.] 

hup-seax  (47),  hip-dagger. 

bus  (47),  house.     [Ger.  Haus.] 

hwa  (88;  89.  c),  who;  any  one. 

hwiel  (43.  2),  whale.  [Cf.  Ger. 
Wall(fisch).-] 

bwsel-m^re  (44),  whale-mere, 
whale-sea. 

bwaenne,  see  bwonne. 

bwaer  (75),  where. 

bwset,  what. 

bwaet-bwega  (-hwugu)  (89.  b ; 
154.  b),  something. 


hwaetlice  (70,  76) ,  quickly. 

bwaeS'er,  whether. 

bwaeafre  (-ere),  yet,  still,  never- 
theless. 

hwanan  (hwanon)  (75),  whence. 

bwa!3'erian  (118),  rage. 

hwealf  (58),  vaulted,  hollow. 

hwelan  (IV\  105),  roar,  thunder. 

bweol  (47),  wheel.  [Cognate 
with  Gr.  k6kXos,  Mod.  Eng.  cycle, 
{bi)cycle.] 

bweorfan  (liwyrfan)  (III.  104), 
return ;  turn  ;  move. 

bw^ttan  (113),  incite. 

bwider  (75),  whither. 

bwil  (51.  b),  while,  time;  SJa 
bwile  "Se,  the  while  that, 
while. 

bwilc  (hwylc)  (88;  89.  a),  which, 
what;  any. 

bwilum  (12),  sometimes  ;  awhile. 
[Mod.  Eng.  whilom  ;  cf .  Chaucer, 
KnighVs  Tale  1.] 

b>von,  somewhat,  a  little. 

bwone,  see  bwa. 

bwonne  (hwienne,  hwcenne), 
vihen;  until. 

bwylc,  see  bwilc. 

bwyrfan,  see  bweorfan. 

byge-rof  (hige-)  (58),  valiant- 
souled. 

byge-iSrancol  (57),  thoughtful- 
minded. 

bybsta,  see  biebsta. 

hybt  (hiht)  (43)  hope;  joy,  glad- 
ness, bliss;  bent. 

byldu  (hyldo)  (51.  a),  kindness. 
[Cf.  Ger.  Huld.] 

byngran  (115.  b ;  190),  hunger. 

byran,  see  bieran. 

byre,  see  biere. 

byrned-n^bb  (58,  17),  horny- 
beaked. 

byrst  (51.  b),  ornament. 


VOCABULARY. 


301 


I. 

ic  (81). 

idel  (57),  empty ^  void,  Lat,  inanis 
(Auth.  Vers,  'without  form'). 
[Ger.  eitel;  of.  Shak.,  0th.  1.  3. 
140,  'deserts  idle.'] 

idelnes  (51.  6),  idleness,  indo- 
lence. 

ides  (51.&),  maid,  nymph,  woman. 
[From  tlie  Norse  mythology  we 
learn  that  this  Germanic  word 
signified  'demi-goddess,'  or  per- 
haps '  female  guardian-angel, ' 
as  well  as  '  maid '  ;  it  was  ap- 
plied to  giantesses  and  Norns, 
to  heroic  women,  resembling  the 
Valkyries,  such  as  Brunhild  and 
Gudrun,  and  to  goddesses,  such 
as  Freyja.  Cf.  the  remarks  of 
Tacitus,  Germania  8:  "They 
even  believe  that  the  sex  has  a 
certain  sa,nctity  and  prescience, 
and  they  do  not  despise  their 
counsels,  or  make  light  of  their 
answers.  In  Vespasian's  days 
we  saw  Veleda,  long  regarded 
by  many  as  a  divinity."] 

ie,  see  ea. 

lecan  (yean)  (113,  33),  augment, 
aggravate.     [<  eac] 

ielde  (Side)  (44.  4),  plur.  men. 

ieldra,  see  eald. 

ieldu(51.a;  19;  Vt),age.  [Mod. 
Eng.  eld;  see  Cliaucer,  K.  T.  1589.] 

ielfete  (53.  1),  swan. 

ierfe  (48),  inheritance. 

ierfe-land  (47),  heritable  land, 
inheritance. 

ierman  (113),  afflict.  [<  earm, 
by  16.] 

ievm.tSn{bl. a), poverty.  [<earm; 
see  144.] 

iernan  (III.  104,  31),  rrm ;  revolve. 

ierre  (eorre)  (48),  wrath. 


ierre  (59),  wrathful. 

ierQ"  (51.  h),  field  of  corn,  crop. 

ierS'ling  (43,  l^Z),  plowman,  hus- 
bandman, farmer. 

ieiSf,  see  eaS'e. 

ig-land  (47),  island. 

ilea  (86),  same.  [Cf.  Chaucer, 
Prol.  64.] 

in,  prep.,  in;  into;  by;  through. 

in,  adv.,  iii. 

in-beran  (IV.  105),  carry  in. 

in-gan  (141),  enter. 

in-gangan  (R.  109),  enter. 

in-ge-bringan  (114),  bring  in. 

innan,  within. 

inne  (69),  loithin,  inside. 

in-segel  (47),  seal.  [Borrowed 
from  Lat.  sigillum,  ca,  a.d. 
500 ;  the  form  sigil  is  earlier, 
ca.  400.] 

in-sittan  (V.  106),  sit  within. 

intinga  (53),  cause;  account. 

in-to,  into. 

in-weardlice  (70),  fervently,  ar- 
dently. 

isern  (47),  iron.     [Ger.  Eisen.'] 

isern  (57),  iron. 

iu  (see  gio) ,  of  old,  formerly. 


L. 

la,  indeed,  0. 

lac  (^7) ,  present,  gift. 

lacan  (R.  110),  bound,  leap,  toss ; 

sail. 
lad  (51.  b),  way,  journey. 
Isece-craeft  (43),  remedy.     [Mod. 

Eng.    leechcraft;    cf.    Spenser, 

F.  Q.  3.  3.  18.] 
l^dan  (113),   lead,   bring,    take; 

carry  ;  produce.     [Ger.  leiten.'] 
Laeden  (47),  Latin. 
laeran  (113,  17),  teach,  direct. 
liering-mseden  (47) ,  pupil. 


802 


VOCABULARY. 


laes  (51.  b,  but  irregular;  the  ter- 
mination -we  as  in  beadu, 
51.  a),  pasture.  [Archaic  Mod. 
Eng.  leasow.'] 

lies,  lSs(es)t,  see  lytel,  and  ffy- 

iss-iare. 

Install  (113),  carry  o\U^  perform, 

do.      [Ger.    leisten,   Mod.   Eng. 

last.^ 
L^stinga  ea,  Lastingham  (near 

Whitby). 
l^tan  (R.  110),  let,  alloio.     [Ger. 

lassen.~\ 
lee^'SfSu  (51.  a) ,  affliction.    [<  lal5, 

by  16.] 
laf  (51.  />),  remnant ;  to  lafe,  Ze/iC. 
lago-,  see  lagu-. 
lagu  (45),  ocean,  sea. 
lagu-faesten  (47),  ocean,  deep. 
lagu-flod  (lago-)  (43),  sea-flood. 
lagu-lad   (lago-)   (51.  b),   ocean- 
journey. 
lagu-stream  (43),  ocean-stream. 
lam.  (43),  dust  (lit.  loam).     [Ger. 

Lehm ;  more  remotely  cognate 

(ablaut  relation)  with  Lat.  li- 

mus.'] 
lamb  (50),  lamb. 
land  (47,  24),  land,  country;  her 

on    lande,     in    this    country. 

[Ger.    Land,    and    cf.    hier   zu 

Lande.'] 
land-bfiend      (iQud-^      (43.      6), 

dweller  in  the  land. 
land-ge-maere  (48),  border. 
land-sceap  (47),  land. 
lang  (58,  65),  long.     [Ger.  lang.] 
lange  (70,  77),  long  (of  time). 
lang-sweored  (57),   long-necked. 

[Cf.  Koch,  Gram.  III.  71  ;  Matz- 

ner,  I.  470.] 
lar    (51.   6),    study;    instruction, 

teaching;     counsel,     guidance. 

[Ger.  Lehre,  Mod.  Eng.  lore.] 


lareow    (43),    teacher,    master ; 

learned  man.    [<  lar  +  iffeow.] 
last  (43),  track,  footprint.    [Mod. 

Eng.  last  (for  shoes),  Ger.  Leist- 

e(n).] 
latteowdom  (43,  14),  guidance. 

[Cf.  the  etymology  of  lareow.] 
laiac  (58),  hostile;  hateful. 
lalS'ian    (118),    summon.      [Ger. 

{ein^laden.] 
lead  (47),  lead.     [Ger.  Lot.] 
leaf   (51.    b),    leave,   permission. 

[Ger.  ( Ur)laub,  (Er)laub(niss).] 
leaf  (47),  leaf     [Ger.  Laub.] 
leahtor  (43),  sin,  iniquity. 
lean    (43),    reward,    recompense. 

[Ger.  Lohn.] 
l^cgean  (115,   note),  place,  put, 

set.      [From    the    second   stem 

(92)    of    licgan,   by    16;    Ger. 

legen,  Mod.  Eng.  lay.] 
l^nctenlic  (57),  vernal. 
l^ncten-tid  (51.  1),  spring.     [Cf. 

Ger.  Lenz,  Mod.  Eng.  Lent.] 
l^ng,  see  lange. 
l^ngra,  see  lang. 
l^ngu  (51.  a),  length. 
leo  (Lat.),  lion. 
leoda  (leode)  (44. 4),  plur.,  peopZe. 

[Ger.  Leute.] 
leod-mearc  (51.  b),  region.     [Cf. 

Mod."  Eng.  margrave,  Marches, 

marquis.] 
leof  (58,    64,    165),   dear,    well- 
beloved;  sb.  sir,  master ;  comp. 

dearer,  preferable.     [Ger.   lieb, 

Mod.  Eng.  lief,  lieve  ;  cf .  Spenser, 

F.  Q.  3.  2.  33.] 
leofa,  see  libban. 
leofw^^nde  (59),  friendly ;  leof- 

w^ndum,  ardently,  fervently. 
leoht  (47),  light.  [Ger.  Licht.] 
leoht  (58) ,  bright,  radiant.    [Ger. 

licht.] 


VOCABULARY. 


303 


leoht-fruma  (53) ,  author  of  light ; 
for  lifes    leohtfruma    cf.   Jn. 

8.  12,  Acts  3.  15.     [Cf.  fruma.] 
leoma     (53),     lights      radiance,, 

brightness. 
leomu,  see  lim. 
leornian  (118),  learn.    [Ger,  lern- 

en.'] 
leornung  (51.  3),    study.     [Mod. 

Eng.  learning.'] 
leoiJ    (47),  poetry,  verse.     [Ger. 

Lied.] 
let,  see  Isetan. 

libban  (122),  live.     [Ger.  lehen.] 
licgan  (V.  106),  lie;  rest.     [Ger. 

liegen.] 
lic-hama  (53),  body,     [hama  = 

shape.,    cover;    cf.    Ger.   Leich- 

nam.] 
lic-ham-leas  (58,  146),  bodiless, 

incorporeal. 
lic-hamlic  (57),  bodily. 
lician  (118  ;  164.  A:),p/ease.  [Mod. 

Eng.  like;   cf.  Spenser,    F.   Q. 

2.  7.  27.] 
lid  (47),  vessel,  craft,  bark.     [Cf. 

ITS' an.] 
lid-weard  (43),  shipmaster. 
lid-werig  (57),  weary  with  voyag- 

i7ig. 
liefan  (113),   allow,  permit.    [< 

leaf;  Ger.  (er)lauben.'] 
lieg  (43),  thunderbolt,  levin. 
lieget  (47.  7),  lightning. 
liehting  (51.  3),  lighting,  illumi- 
nation.    [<leoht,  by  16.] 
lif  (47),  Zi/e.     [Ger.  Zej&.] 
lifde,  lifgende,  see  libban. 
liflic  (57) ,  of  life.     [Ger.  leiblich  ; 

cf.  Spenser,  F.  Q.  2.  7.  20.] 
lim  (47,  20),  limb,  bough,  branch. 
lind  (51.  6),  linden  shield, ^shield. 
lind-wigend  (-wiggend)   (43.  6), 

shield-warrior. 


liss  (51.  6),  gentleness,  tenderness; 
(mid)  lissum,  gently,  tenderly. 
lilS'an  (1. 102),  set  out ;  sail,  cruise. 
liffe    (59,    30),    good,    obliging, 

friendly;  gentle,  mild.      [Ger. 
(ge)li7id ;    cf.  Spenser,  VirgiVs 
Gnat  221.] 
liffe  (70),  gently. 
loc  (47),  lock. 
locen,  see  Incan. 
locian  (118),  look. 
lof  (43),  honor,  praise;  in  lofe, 

praising.     [Ger.  Lob.] 
loft  (47),  air,  sky. 
iQnd-,  see  land-, 
lor    (47),    destruction;    to    lore 

weoriyan,  perish. 
lacan    (II.    103),    link 9    weave? 

close  ? 
lufe  (53.  1),  love. 
lufian  (118,  119),  love. 
lufiend  (43.  6),  lover. 
lufiendlic  (57),  loving. 
luflice  (70),  dear. 
lufu  (51.  a;  53.3;  24),  love. 
lungre,  speedily. 
lust   (43),  joy,    desire,    longing. 

[Ger.  Lust;  cf.  Spenser,  F.  Q. 

4.  4.  44.] 
lyfdon,  see  libban. 
lyft  (47 ;  51.  b),  air;  under  lyfte, 

cf.  our   'under  the  sun.'     [Cf. 

Ger.  Luft.] 
lyre    (44),    loss.      [Stem    formed 

from  that  of  the  third  stem  of 

leosan,  lose,  by  16.] 
lystan  (113),  list,  like,  cause  en- 
joyment.     [<  lust,  by  16 ;   cf. 

Spenser,  F.  Q.  2.  7.  18,  19.] 
lyt  (58),  (but)  few. 
lyt,  adv.,  (but)  little. 
lytel  (57, 66),  little;  comp.  less(er), 

smaller  ;  superl.  least. 
lyt-hwon  (58) ,  (but)  few. 


304 


VOCABULARY. 


M. 

ma  (77),  more,  further ;  rather. 

ma-craeftig  (57),  ve7-y  expert? 
expert  in  seamanship  f  [In 
favor  of  the  latter  may  be  quoted 
Grimm's  note  in  his  edition  of 
Andreas  unci  Elene,  p.  103 : 
"257.  macraftig,  und  nochmals 
A.  472  der  comparativ  macriift- 
igra.  daher  es  selbst  unpassend 
aus  dem  comparativ  ma,  magis 
gedeutet  wiirde,  der  sonst  nir- 
gends  und  in  keinem  andern 
dialect  bei  zusammensetzungen 
verstJirkt.  Auch  scheint  der 
sinn  etwas  bestininiteres  zu  for- 
dern,  ein  des  meeres,  der  schif- 
fahrt  kundig ;  ich  -vermute  ein 
altes  subst.  ma,  synonym  und 
wurzel  von  mere,  macraftig  = 
merecrilftig."] 

madm,  see  inaiS'm. 

maecg,  see  m^cg. 

in^eden  (47,  38,  28),  girl,  maiden, 
damsel. 

maig,  see  mugan. 

maegen  (47.  1),  po^cer,  strength; 
virtue;  force,  hand. 

msegen-eacen  (57),  abundant  in 
might,  powerf^il. 

ma'gen-iS'rymin  (43),  glonj,  maj- 
esty. 

maegen-iafrynines  (51.  5),  glory, 
majesty. 

maegiaf  (51.  h),  tribe,  nation,  prov- 
ince. 

mseglS'  (52),  maid,  maiden.  [Ger. 
Magd.'] 

msegiy-had  (43,  143),  virgin- 
ity. 

mseg-wlite  (44),  appearance,  as- 
pect.    [Cf.  andwlita.] 

mselan  (113),  speak. 


msere  (59),  renowned;  splendid; 

great. 
mS&r'Su     (51.     a),     achievement, 

famous  exploit.     [Cf.  maere.] 
maesling  (47),  b7'ass. 
maesse-preost         (43),        priest. 

[inaesse  <  Lat.    missa,    mass; 

Itreost  <  presbyter,   from  what 

Greek  word  ?] 
maest  (43),  mast. 
maist,  see  niicel. 
mSiJ  (51.  b),  ability,  capacity. 
maeffel-liegende    (meSel-)     (61), 

speecli-uttering ,    council-attend- 
ing. 
iniew  (43),  gull,  sea-mew.     [Ger. 

Mowe.^ 
magan,  see  mugan. 
magu-9'egn  (43),  vassal,  retainer. 
man  (89.  e),  one. 
man-full  (58.  2),  wicked,  evil. 
mangere     (44,     143),     merchant. 

[Mod.  Eng.  -monger.'] 
manian  (118),  admonish. 
manig  (57),  many. 
manig-feald  (58,  146),  manifold. 
mann  (niQun)   (46,  35,  17),  man. 

[Ger.  3Iann ;  cf.  Tacitus,   Ger- 

mania,  Ch.  II.,  and  the  proper 

name  Manu.] 
manna  (53;  cf.  53.  3),  man. 
mann-cynn    (man-)    (47),    man- 
kind. 
man-scyld  (-scild)   (51.  b),   sin, 

iniquity. 
mara,  see  micel. 
marman-stan  (43),  marble. 
maS'm  (43),  ti^ea sure,  jewel. 
meahte,  see  mugan. 
meahtig,  see  mihtig. 
m^cg  (maecg)   (43),  disciple  (lit. 

man). 
med  (51.  6),  meed,  reward.     [Cf. 

meorlS.] 


VOCABULARY. 


305 


med-micel  (57),  short. 

medome  (meodume)  (59),  little^ 
least. 

medu-bnrg  (medo-)  (52),  mead- 
city.     [Cf.  Ger.  Met.'] 

medu-werig  (medo-)  (51),  mead- 
weary,  drunken  vnth  mead. 

m^nigu  (51.  a),  company,  num- 
ber. [Ger.  Ilenge ;  cf.  Spenser, 
F.  q.  1.  12.  9.] 

m^nnisc  (57,  146),  human. 
[<  mann,  by  16 ;  cf .  Ger. 
Mensch.] 

meodume,  see  medome. 

meorid"  (51.  6),  reward.  [Cf. 
med.] 

meotud  (43),  creator.  [As  it 
were,  the  '  Meter,'  '  Appor- 
tioner,'  'Fixer  of  Bounds.'] 

m^re  (44),  mere,  sea.  [Ger.  Meer  ; 
cf.  Mod.  Eng.  mermaid.'] 

m^re-l>at  (43),  sea-boat,  vessel. 

m^re-faro9'  (43),  sea-waves  (sea- 
voyage  ?) . 

meregreote  (53),  pearl. 

m^re-lii5'end  (43.  6)    seafarer. 

m^re-stream  (43),  ocean-stream. 

mi^re-swin  (47),  dolphin. 

m^re-9'issa  (-'Syssa)  (53),  ocean- 
scourer,  rusher  through  the  deep. 

m^rgen  (43),  morning. 

metan  (113),  meet;  find;  find 
out. 

m^te  (44),  food.  [Mod.  Eng. 
meat.] 

meiaCe  (59),  fatigued,  weary.  [Ger. 
miide.] 

melSfel-,  see  maeafel-. 

micel  (mycel)  (57),  much,  great, 
large;  long ;  loud.  [Cf.  Scotch 
micJde,  Eng.  much,  and  Spenser, 
Shep.  C'al,  Feb.  109.] 

miclum  (myclum)  (72),  greatly. 

mid  (57;  166.  1),  middle. 


mid  (168;  172.  1;  177),  with; 
mid  ealle  (175),  completely. 

middan-geard  (43),  world.  [Cf. 
Cleasby  and  Vigfusson's  Ice- 
landic-English Dictionary,  s.v. 
miS-gartSr :  "The  earth  (Mrs- 
gar's),  the  abode  of  men,  is 
seated  in  the  middle  of  the  uni- 
verse, bordered  by  mountains 
and  surrounded  by  the  great  sea 
(uthaf )  ;  on  the  other  side  of 
this  sea  is  tlie  tit-gar's  (out- 
yard),  the  abode  of  giants;  the 
Mi'Sgar'S  is  defended  by  the 
'  yard  '  or  '  burgh  '  As-garS  (the 
burgh  of  the  gods),  lying  in  the 
middle  (the  heaven  being  con- 
ceived as  rising  above  the  earth). 
Thus  the  earth  and  mankind  are 
represented  as  a  stronghold  be- 
sieged by  the  powers  of  evil  from 
without,  defended  by  the  gods 
from  above  and  from  within."] 

mid-9'am-9'e,  lohen. 

mid-d'y,  when,  while. 

mid-'Sy  ffe,  when,  while. 

miht  (51. 1),  power,  ynight.  [Ger. 
Macht.] 

miht,  see  mugan. 

mihtig  (57) ,  mighty.    [Ger.  mdcht- 

mild-heortnes  (51.  5),  mercy, 
compassion,  loving-kindness. 

milts  (51. 5),  plur.  as  sing.,  mercy, 
loving -kindness.  [<  mild,  mild, 
by  33.] 

miltsian  (mildsian)  (118),  have 
mercy  upon. 

min  (83,  81),  my. 

mis-  (142). 

mislic  (57),  various. 

mislice  (70),  variously,  in  differ- 
ent ways;  miisliee  gebleod, 
variegated. 


306 


VOCABULARY. 


mis-lician  (118),  di^lease. 
missenlic    (57),    various    (kinds 

of). 

mis-ffyncean  (114;  164.  l)^  mis- 
judge ;  ffe  mis9'ync9',  Lat.  male 
suspicaris.  [Cf.  Milton,  P.  L. 
9.  289,  Shak.,  3  Hen.  VI.  2.  5. 
108,  A7iL  and  Cleop.  5.  2.  176.] 

mod  (47,  146),  heart,  soul,  mind; 
courage.     [Ger.  Mut.] 

mod-ge-iaranc  (43),  thought  of 
the  heart,  counsel.  [Cf.  Ger. 
Gedanke.'] 

modig  (57),  noble-minded,  mag- 
nanimous, courageous.  [Ger. 
mutig.] 

niodiglic  (57),  high-souled. 

modigues  (51.  5),  pride,  arro- 
gance. 

modor  (52.  2),  mother.  [Ger. 
Mutter,  Lat.  matey;.'] 

mona  (53),  moon.  [Cf.  Ger. 
Mond,  where  (^  is  a  late  ad- 
dition.] 

monad'  (43),  month.  [Ger.  Mo- 
nat.] 

mQii(ii),  see  man(n). 

morgen  (43),  morning.  [Ger. 
Morgen,  Mod.  Eng.  morn.'] 

morgen-giefu  (51.  a) ,  dowry,  mar- 
riage portion. 

marls' or  (47),  deadly  injury. 
[Mod.  Eng.  murder.] 

motan  (137),  wa?/.  [Cf.  Spenser, 
F.  Q.  1.  9.  27.] 

miigan  (135),  can,  he  able. 

miind  (51.  5),  hand. 

munt  (43),  mountain.  [Lat. 
mont{em).] 

munuc  (43),  monk.  [Ger. 
3r6nch.] 

murcnung  (51.  &;  144),  sorrow, 
unhappiness,  lamentation. 

muscule  (Lat.),  mussel. 


mycel,  see  micel. 
myclum,  see  miclum. 
myngian    (118),    admonish,    ad- 
jure. 
mynian  (118),  direct,  inspire. 
mynster  (47),  monastery. 

N. 

na  (no),  not  even,  by  no  means, 

not  at  all ;  no. 
nabban  (121,  29),  have  not. 
naca  (53),  hark.     [Ger.  Nachen.] 
nacod  (57),  naked;  clothed  in  a 

tunic  only  (p.  168). 
n^dl  (51.  b),  needle.  [Ger.  Nadel.] 
naedre,  naeddre  (53.  1),  serpent. 
naefre,  never. 
nxnig  (89.  a),  no  one. 
ntere,  ii«ron,  naes,  see  138. 
naht  (noht)  (47 ;  89. 6 ;  27),  naught, 

nothing. 
na-hwser,  nowhere. 
na-hwider,  nowhither. 
nalaes  (nalas),  not  at  all. 
nama  (53,  24),  name.     [Ger.  Na- 

men.] 
nan  (89.  a;  154.  6),  no  {one). 
nat,  see  126. 
nates-hwon,  not  at  all. 
ne  (ni),  not. 
ne,  nor;  ne  .  . .  ne  (202),  neither 

.  .  .  nor. 
neah  (58,  67,  60),  nigh,  near;  ast 

niehstan,  at  length,  finally. 
neah,  adv.,  near,  nigh  at  hand; 

superl.  nearly. 
neah  (neh),  prep.,  near. 
nea-laecan  (113),  approach. 
nearunes    (nearo-)    (51.   5),    an- 
guish, agony. 
nearu  (51.  a),  difficulty;  nearu 

aCrowian,    be  in  straits.      [Cf. 

Mod.  Eng.  narroio.} 


VOCABULARY. 


307 


neat  (47),  cattle.  [Cf.  Mod.  Eng. 
'neatherd,'  'neat's-foot  oil,' 
'neat  cattle.'  Shakespeare  has 
(  Wint.  T.1.2. 124)  :  '  The  steer, 
the  heifer,  and  the  calf  Are  all 
called  neat;  Cijmb.  1.  1.  148: 
'  Would  I  were  A  neatherd'' s 
daughter.'] 

nefne,  except. 

neh,  see  neah,  prep. 

nellan  (139),  will  not.  [See 
Chaucer,  Prol.  650,  Spenser, 
F.  q.  1.  6.  17;  1.  9.  15,  Shak., 
Haml.  5.  1.  19.] 

n^mnan  (115.  &),  mean  (lit. 
name). 

neosian  (neosan)  (118 ;  156.  m), 
seek,  look  for. 

neowolnes  (51.  6),  abyss,  deep. 
[Orig.  from  nihol-,  *nihold-, 
*nihald-,  sloping.'] 

n^riend  (n^regend)  (43.  6),  Sa- 
vior. 

Died  (51.  6),  need,  necessity ;  use. 

nied-faru  (neid-)  (51.  a),  needful 
journey. 

nied-aCearflic  (57),  needful,  neces- 
sary. 

niehst,  see  neah,  adv. 

niehsta,  see  neah,  adj. 

nieten  (47.  1),  creature,  beast, 
cattle.     [<neat,  by  16.] 

nieten-cynn  (47),  kind  of  cattle. 

niht  (52),  night. 

nihtes  (74),  by  night. 

niht-lang  (58),  night-long,  of  a 
night,  one  night. 

nihtlic  (57),  night. 

niman  (IV.  105),  take;  seize; 
capture,  catch  ;  pluck  up.  [Ger. 
nehmen  ;  cf .  a  character  in  Shak., 
M.W.'] 

nis,  see  138. 

niff  (43),  man. 


niiSerlic  (57),  low-lying.  [Cf. 
Ger.  nieder.] 

maC-h^te  (44),  malignant  foe. 

maf-hycgende  (61),  evil-scheming. 

niiar-plega  (53),  hostile  play,  mar- 
tial game. 

no,  see  na. 

noht,  see  naht. 

noldon,  see  nellan. 

nora"  (69),  northward. 

norS'an,  from  the  north. 

noraf-dgel  (43),  northern  part, 
north. 

notian  (118;  164.  o),  use. 

nu,  now;  yet. 

nyste,  see  nytan. 

nytan  (126),  know  not.  [See 
Chaucer,  Prol.  284.] 


of-  (142). 

of,  of;  from ;  out  of;  by. 

ofen  (43),  oven. 

ofer,  over;  across;  upon;  in. 

ofer-  (142).     [Ger.  iiber-.] 

ofer-breedan  (113),  suffuse. 

ofer-cuman  (IV.  105),  overcome, 
overthrow. 

ofer-gan  (141),  overcome,  come 
upon. 

ofer-hygd  (51.  b),  pride,  arro- 
gance; mid  oferhygdum,  ar- 
rogantly, haughtily,  supercili- 
ously. 

ofer-rsedan  (113),  read  through. 

ofer-swiiafan  (113),  overcome, 
conquer. 

ofer-igr^ceean  (114),  cover  over. 

ofer-winnan  (III.  104),  conquer, 
subdue,  overthrow. 

ofer-wreon  (I,  102),  cover  over. 

ofestlice  (ofost-,  ofst-)  (70), 
quickly,  forthwith. 


308 


VOCABULARY. 


ofet  {^1),  fruit.  (Ger.  Obst,  prop- 
erly 06s.] 

ofostlice,  see  ofestlice. 

of-slean  (VI.  107),  slay,  kill. 

of-stigan  (I.  102),  descend. 

ofstlice,  see  ofestlice. 

oft,  often.,  frequently. 

of-tredan  (V.  106),  tread  down, 
trample  upon.     [Ger.  ahtreten.'] 

of-aCyncean  (114),  offend,  grieve, 
vex. 

oht,  see  aht. 

olfend  (43),  camel.  [<Lat.  eZe- 
phantem  ?] 

on,  on,  upon  ;  in  ;  into  /  with  ;  on 
an,  see  an. 

on-  (142). 

on-^lau  (113),  inflame. 

on-cierran  (-cyrraii)  (113),  turn. 

on-cnawan  (R.  109),  know ;  per- 
ceive; recognize  ;  acknoicledge. 

on-cweffan  (V.  106),  address,  call 
unto. 

Qnd(-),  see  and(-). 

on-draedan  (K.  110  ;  159.  a),  fear. 

onettan  (113),  hasten,  hurry. 

on-fangennes  (51.  5),  reception. 

on-fon  (R.  110;  164.  j),  receive, 
accept. 

on-gean,  adv.,  again,  back. 

on-gean,  prep.,  against;  toward; 
opposite.  [Cf.  Ger.  entgegen, 
for  engegen.'] 

on-ge-slean  (VI.  107),  slay. 

on-gierwan  (113),  divest,  strip. 
[Cf.  geare.] 

on-gietan  (gitan)  (V.  106,  18), 
perceive,  learn,  understand.  [Cf. 
andgiet.] 

ongin,  see  anginn. 

on-glnnan  (III.  104),  begin. 

ongitan,  see  ongietan. 

on-hieldan  (-hEeldan)  (113),  in- 
tend. 


on-hreosan  (II.  103),  fall  upon. 

on-hreran  (113),  stir  up,  agitate. 

on-lnnan,  into,  among. 

onlic,  see  anlic. 

oii-lielitan  (113),  light,  illumi- 
nate.    [<  leoht,  by  16.] 

on-liesan  (113),  release. 

on-lucan  (II.  103),  unlock. 

on-s^ndan  (113),  send. 

on-s^ttan  (113),  lay. 

on-spannan  (R.  109),  opew. 

on-styrian  (116),  move. 

ou-tynan  (113),  open.  [<tun, 
by  16.] 

on-wacan  (VI.  107),  awake. 

on-weg,  away. 

on-windan  (III.  104),  retreat. 
[Cf.  Ger.  entwinden.'\ 

on-winnan  (III.  104),  assail. 

ou-wriiafan  (I.  102),  uncover,  dis- 
close. 

on-wunian  (118),  inhabit. 

open  (57),  ojMn.     [Ger.  offen.'] 

or  (47),  beginning. 

or-  (142). 

ora  (53),  vein  ?  ore? 

oreta,  see  oretta. 

oret-m^cg  (-m?Bcg)  (43),  imrrior. 

oretta  (53),  combatant. 

orf  (47),  cattle. 

or-feorme  (59),  deprived,  aban- 
doned, forsaken. 

organa  (Lat.),  plur.,  organs. 

or-giete  (-gete)  (59),  manifest. 

or-mtete  (59),  boundless;  enor- 
mous. 

or-modnes  (51.  5),  despair,  des- 
peration. 

OToiS  (47.  6),  breath. 

ort-geard  (43),  garden  {or- 
chard?). 

orlSrian  (118),  breathe.    [<  oroS".] 

olSr,  until. 

oH-  (142). 


VOCABULARY. 


309 


offer  (80;  89.  a;  24),  other;  sec- 
ond ;  rest  of. 

off-ffaet,  until. 

ofSfSe  (se'S'Sa),  or. 

off-ffringan  (III.  104),  wrest 
away. 


P. 


paell  (43),  purple  garment. 

pard  (Lat.),  panther. 

pining  (43),  penny  (but  this  does 
not  represent  the  Latin,  which 
has  sestertia,  not  sestertios  ;  the 
latter  would  represent  four  cents 
each,  the  former  about  forty- 
three  dollars  each).  [Cf.  Ger, 
Pfand.'] 

Piht  (43),  Pict. 

pleg^,  (53),  game,  play. 

plegiau  (\\%),  play ;  act. 

pliht  (43),  peril,  risk.  [Ger. 
PJlicht,  Mod.  Eng.  plight.'] 

pund  (47),  pound,  Lat.  talentum, 
pondus.     [<  Lat.  pondus.'] 

purpre  (53.  1),  purple  garment. 
[<  Lat.  purpura.'] 


R. 

racian  (118 ;  164.  i),  rule,  govern, 
sway. 

rsed  (43),  counsel,  advice;  or- 
der (s) ;  benefit.  [Ger.  Pat; 
archaic  Mod.  Eng.  rede;  cf. 
Shak.,  Ha7nl.  1.  3.  51.] 

rsedan  (113),  read.  [Cf.  Ger. 
(er)raten.] 

rsed-snottor  (57),  discreet  in 
counsel. 

raes-bora  (53),  counselor. 

raeswa  (53),  chief,  leader. 

rah-deor  (47),  roebuck. 

rand  (rgnd)  (43),  shield. 


rand-wigend  (-wiggend)  (43.  6), 
shield-icarrior. 

read  (58),  red.     [Ger.  rot.] 

reaf  (47) ,  raiment,  apparel.  [Ger. 
Baub,  Mod.  Eng.  robe,  through 
Fr.  robe  ;  cf .  Ital.  roba.] 

reaf-lac  (47),  rapine,  plunder. 

r^ccean  (114),  relate,  narrate; 
expound. 

rece-leasian  (118,  156),  despise. 

recene,  straightivay. 

regii  (ren)  (43),  rain;  shower. 
[Ger.  Begen.] 

regoUic  (57),  regular.  [<  Lat. 
regula;  cf.  Ger.  regel(recht).] 

ren,  see  regn. 

reocan  (II.  103),  reek.  [Ger. 
riechen.] 

reord-berend  (43.  6),  man  gifted 
with  speech  (lit.  speech-bearer). 

reordian  (-igan)  (118),  speak. 

r^st  (51.  b),  couch,  bed.  [Cf.  Ger. 
Bast.] 

r^stan  (113),  rest. 

reffe  (59),  fierce,  violent. 

replies  (51.  5),  violence. 

ribb  (47),  rib. 

rice  (48. 1),  kingdom.  [Ger.  Beich, 
Mod.  Eng.  (Frederick,  {Hen)ry, 
(bishop)ric ;  cf.  Lat.  rex.] 

rice  (59),  powerful,  noble.  [Ger. 
reich.  Mod.  Eng.  rich.] 

ricsian  (118),  bear  rule,  have  do- 
minion.    [<  rice.] 

riht  (47),  right.     [Ger.  Becht.] 

riht  (58),  right;  direct.  [Ger. 
recht.] 

rihtlice  (70),  accurately,  correctly. 

riht- wis  (58,  146),  righteous. 

riht-wisnes  (51.  5),  righteous- 
ness. 

rinan  (113,  161),  rain. 

rinc  (43),  warrior,  man. 

ripe  (59),  ripe.     [Ger.  reif] 


310 


VOCABULARY. 


rod  (51.  b),  cross.  [Ger.  Bute, 
Mod.  Eng.  rod,  rood;  cf.  rood- 
loft,  Holyrood,  Haml.  3.  4.  14.] 

rodor  (43),  firmament,  heaven. 

rof  (59),  stout. 

Romanise  (57,  146),  Boman. 

Romane  (Lat.),  plur.,  Bomans. 

FQnd,  see  rand. 

rose  (53.  1),  rose.     [Lat.  rosa.'] 

rowan  (R.  109),  row. 

rowend  (43.  6),  rower. 

rownes  (51.  5),  rowing. 

rudu  (51.  a),  redness. 

rum  (43),  room,  opportunity. 
[Ger.  Baum.'\ 

rawe  (53.  1),  tapestry? 


S. 

saeerd  (51.  b),  priestess.  [<Lat. 
sacerdos.^ 

88B  (43;  51.  6),  sea.  [Ger. 
See ;  cf .  note,  p.  324. 

sse-bat  (43),  sea-boat,  vessel. 

sse-beorg  (43),  sea-cliff. 

8£ed  (47),  seed.     [Ger.  Saat.^ 

saed-tima  (53),  seedtime. 

8se-flota  (53),  sea-floater. 

see-h^ngest  (43),  sea-steed.  [Cf. 
Ger.  Ilengst,  Eng,  Hengist.'] 

sse-holm  (43),  sea  (swelling  sea?). 

sae-lad  (51.  b),  sea-voyage. 

sseleoda,  see  saelida. 

8«lic  (57),  marine,  of  the  sea. 

sse-llda  (-leoda)  (53),  seaman, 
sailor,  mariner.     [Cf.  liiafan.] 

sse-mearh  (43),  sea-steed.  [Cf. 
Jebb,  Classical  Greek  Poetry, 
pp.  91-92:  "Homer  speaks  of 
*  swift  ships,  which  are  the  horses 
of  the  sea  for  men '  ;  Hesiod 
would  not  have  scrupled  to  use 
the  phrase  '  horses  of  the  sea ' 
as  a  substitute   for  the   word 


'ships,'  leaving  his  meaning  to 
be  guessed."] 

sse-werig  (57),  sea-weary. 

sse-wiht  (51.  b),  sea-animal. 

salowig-pad  (58),  dark-coated. 

samninga  (70),  all  at  once,  sud- 
denly.    [Cf.  samninga.] 

samod  (sgmod),  together. 

sand  (47),  sand.     [Ger.  Sand.^ 

sand-hliS"  (47,  20),  sand-hill. 

sang  (43),  son^.    [Ger.  {Ge)sang.'] 

sar  (47),  sorrow. 

sar  (58) ,  grievous,  sore.  [Cf .  Ger. 
sehr,  (ver)sehren.'] 

sar-ewide  (44),  taunt,  gibe,  rail- 
lery, sarcasm. 

sarlic  (57),  doleful. 

sarlice  (70),  lamentably,  mourn- 
fully. 

sarnes  (51.  6),  grief,  unhappiness. 

8aw(o)l  (51.  4),  soul;  life.  [Ger. 
Seele.'] 

sawol-Ieas  (58,  146),  soulless. 

sceadii  (51.  a;  18),  shadow.  [Cf. 
Ger.  Schatten.'] 

sceal,  see  seulan. 

scealc  (43,  18),  man. 

sceam-faest  (58,  18),  modest. 
[Mod.  Eng.  shamefast ;  see 
Spenser,  F.  Q.  5.  5.  25.] 

sceamu  (51.  a;  18),  shame.  [Ger. 
Scham.l 

sceap  (47,  18),  sheep.  [Ger. 
Schaf^ 

seeap-hierde  (44) ,  shepherd. 
[Ger.  Schafhirt.'] 

seearpe  (70,  18),  sharp.  [Ger. 
scharf.'] 

seeat  (43),  corner,  region,  quar- 
ter. [Ger.  Schooss ;  in  the 
sense  of  Lat.  angulus,  plaga, 
as  Isa.  11.  12,  Rev.  7.  1.] 

sceatt  .(43,  18),  coin.  [Ger. 
Schatz.'] 


VOCABULARY. 


311 


sceaO*  (51.6;  IS)  ^  sheath.  [Ger. 
Scheide.'] 

scead'a  (53,  18),  enemy.  [Cf.  Ger. 
iSchade,  Schddiger,  Mod.  Eng. 
scathe.l 

sceawian  (llS),  watch;  behold, 
see.  [Ger.  schauen,  Mod.  Eng. 
show  (with  changed  meaning).] 

sc^ncan  (113),  pour  out,  give  to 
drink.  [Ger.  {ein)schenken,  ar- 
chaic Mod.  Eng.  skink;  cf. 
Shak.,  1  Hen.  IV.  2.  4.  26.] 

sceolde,  see  sculan. 

sceor  (18),  see  sour. 

sceort  (58,  65,  18),  short. 

sceotend  (43.  6),  shooter,  marks- 
man. 

sceo-wyrhta  (53,  18),  shoemaker. 

seiccels  (43),  cloak,  mantle. 

scield  (scild)  (43,  18),  shield. 

scield-burh  (scild-)  (52,  28),  tes- 
tudo,  roof  of  shields,  shield- 
roofed  phalanx. 

sciene  (scyne)  (59,  IB),  beautiful. 
[Ger.  schoji ;  cf .  Chaucer,  K.  T. 
210,  Spenser,  i?'.  §.  2.  1.  10.] 

scieppan  (VI.  107,  18),  create. 
[Ger.  schopfen.'] 

scieppend  (scippend,  scyppend) 
(43.  0;  18),  creator. 

scieran  (IV.  105,  18),  cut,  cleave. 
[Ger.  scheren.  Mod,  Eng.  shear.'] 

sciertra,  see  sceort. 

sciete  (53.  1),  sheet,  linen  cloth. 
[<  sceat.] 

scild,  see  scield. 

scinan  (I.  102),  shine.  [Ger. 
scheinen.'] 

scip  (47),  ship.     [Ger.  Schiff.] 

scip-ferend  (43.  6  ;  147),  sailor. 

scip-h^re  (44.  2;  147),  naval 
force,  fleet. 

scippend,  see  scieppend. 

scip-weard  (43),  shipmaster. 


scir  (58),  bright,  gleaming.     [Cf. 

Spenser,  F.  Q.  3.  2.  44,   Shak., 

liich.  II.  5.  3.  61.] 
scire  (70),  dazzlingly,  radiantly. 
scir-mseled       (57),       splendidly 

marked,  splendidly  decorated. 
scop  (43),  minstrel. 
Scottas  (43),  plur.,  Scots. 
scrid  (57),  Jleet?  (Grimm,  rigged). 
scrud     (47),     clothing,    raiment, 

attire.     [Mod.  Eng.  shroud.] 
scrydan  (113),  clothe,  array. 
scucca  (53),  the  devil,  Satan. 
scafan  (II.  103) ,  thrust. 
sculan  (133,   188),  ought,  must; 

shall.     [Cf.  Ger.  sollen.] 
scnr     (sceor)    (43,    18),    storm; 

shower.     [Ger.  Schauer.] 
scyne,  see  scTene. 
scyppend,  see  scieppend. 
se  (84;  87;  154.6). 
sealm     (43),     psalm.       [<  Lat. 

psalmus.] 
sealt-sea^"  (43),  salt-spring. 
seamere  (44. 1 ;  143),  tailor.    [Cf. 

Ger,  Saum,  Mod.  Eng.  seam.] 
searu  (49),  device,  contrivance. 
searu-lgFancol  (searo-^gncol)  (57), 

discerning,  sagacious. 
secean  (secan)   (114),  seek;  seek 

out ;  visit.     [Ger.  suchen.] 
s^cg  (43),  man,  hero. 
s^cgean  (slogan)  (123,  36),  say ; 

speak;  tell. 
sedl,  see  setl. 

segl  (47  ?) ,  sail.     [Ger.  Segel.] 
seld-cuS"  (58),  strange,  novel,  out 

of  the  way.     [Cf.  F.  Q.  4.  8.  14.] 
s^len  (51.  6),  bounty,  bestowal. 
self  (seolf,  sylf)  (86),   (my,  him) 

self;  own;  same;   very.     [Ger. 

selb{er).] 
s^llan    (syllan)    (114,    36),    give; 

give  to  be  ;  sell. 


312 


VOCABULARY. 


[See 


[Ger. 


selest  (selost)  (66),  best. 

sellic  (syllic)  (57),  strange,  queer 

remarkable.     [<  seldic] 
selost  (76),  best. 
selra  (53,  66),  better. 
s^mninga   (70),    suddenly 

sainninga.] 
s^ndan  (113),  send;  hurl. 
seo,  see  se. 
seofon    (78,    20),    seven. 

siebe?!.^ 
seofon-feald  (58,  146),  seven-fold. 
seofotSu  (78,  80),  seventh. 
seol,  see  seolh. 
seolh  (43.  3;  21),  seal. 
seolf,  see  self, 
seolfor   (47,    20),   silve7\      [Ger. 

Silber,  Goth,  silubr.'] 
seolfren  (57),  silver.     [Ger.  silb- 

eni.] 
seoS'3'an,  see  sid'd'an. 
sessian  (118),  subside. 
setl    (sedl)     (47),    seat;    throne. 

[Ger.  Sessel ;  Mod.  Eng.  settle.^ 
s^tnes  (51.  5),  foundation. 
s^ttan  (113),  set,  set  down  ;  place  ; 

make  ;  make  to  turn.    [Formed, 

by  16,  from  the  second  stem  of 

sittan  (cf.  l^cgan);  Ger.  setzen.'] 
sibb  (51.  6),  peace;   love.      [Cf. 

Mod.  Eng.  gossip.'] 
sid  (58),  roomy,  ample. 
side  (53.  \),silk.    [<  Lat. seta ;  cf. 

Ger.  Seide.] 
sie(n),  see  wesan. 
siexta  (78,  80),  sixth. 
siextiene  (syxtyne)  (78),  sixteen. 

[Ger.  sechszehn.'] 
sige  (44),  victory.     [Ger.  Sieg.] 
sige-faest    (58,    146),    victorious, 

triumphant,  [ulting  in  victory. 
sige-hremig  (-hriemig)  (57),  ex- 
sige-hreiyig    (57),    radiant    with 

victory. 


sige-rof  (58),  of  victorious  en- 
ergy. 

sige-iaCuf  (43),  triumphal  banner. 
[tfnt  <  Lat.  tufa.] 

sige-wang  (-wgng)  (43),  field 
of  victory. 

sigor  (43),  victory,  triumph. 

slmle,  always. 

sin  (83),  his. 

sine  (47),  treasure,  riches. 

sinc-weorffung  (51.  3),  gift  of 
treasure,  costly  gift. 

sind,  see  wesan. 

sin-gal  (58),  constant,  never- 
ceasing. 

singan  (III.  104,  22),  sing  ;  praise. 
[Ger.  syngen.] 

sittan  (V.  106),  sit.    [Ger.  siY^ew.] 

sis'  (43,  30),  journey ;  adventure; 
plan,  errand;  time.  [Cf.  Ger. 
Gesinde,  Chaucer,  Frol.  485, 
Spenser,  F.  Q.  3.  10.  33.] 

siiS-faet  (43.  2),  journey  ;  passage. 

siaC-fram  (-fr^m)  (57),  ready  for 
(their)  journey. 

siiJ-nese  (53.  1),  prosperous  voy- 
age. 

siSffan  (seo'SSan,  sy««an)  (84.3), 
when  ;  after ;  as  soon  as  ;  after- 
ivard.  [Ger.  seitdem ;  cf.  Chau- 
cer, KnighVs  Tale  1244,  Shak., 
Cor.  3,  1.  47.] 

slaecan  (113),  defer,  delay.  [Mod. 
Eng.  slack^en).] 

slsep  (43) ,  sleep.     [Ger.  Schlaf] 

sl^pan  (R.  110),  sleep.  [Ger. 
schlaf  en.] 

slean  (VI.  107,  37),  smite,  strike; 
strike  down,  slay.  [Ger.  schlag- 
en;  cf.  Chaucer,  Prol.  661.] 

sl^cg  (51.  6),  hammer,  sledge. 
[Cf.  slean.] 

sinean  (113),  consider,  inquire 
into. 


VOCABULARY. 


313 


smeaung  (51.  3),  meditation;  in- 
vestigation. 

smercian  (118),  smile.  [Mod. 
Eng.  smirk.'] 

smiff  (43),  blacksmith.  [Ger. 
Schmied.'] 

smUSrafe  (53.  1),  smithy. 

smylte  (59),  calm^  smooth^  un- 
ruffled. 

smyltnes  (51.  5),  serenity.,  calm. 

snel(l)  (58;  35.  a),  active,  swift, 
fleet.  [Ger.  schnell,  Scotcli  snell.] 

snellic  (57),  swift. 

snelnes  (51.  5),  agility,  celerity. 

sneowan  (II.  103),  hasten,  speed. 

snottor  (57),  wise. 

snud  (43?),  speed. 

snude  (70),  quickly. 

SQinod,  see  samod. 

sona,  soon  ;  immediately  ;  at  once  ; 
as  soon  ;  when. 

sorg  (51.  &),  distress;  anxiety, 
trouble.     [Mod.  Eng.  sorrow.] 

sorgian  (118),  be  anxious.  [Mod. 
Eng.  sorrow,  Ger.  sorgen.] 

soff  (47),  truth.  [Mod.  Eng. 
sooth;  cf.  forsooth,  soothsayer.] 

sotf  (58),  true. 

sots,  adv.,  verily.  [Cf.  Spenser, 
F.  q.  3.  3.  13.] 

soff-faest  (58),  just  and  true; 
righteous.  [Mod.  Eng.  sooth- 
fast.] 

soff-faestnes  (51.  5),  truth.  [Cf. 
Chaucer,  Nwi's  PriesVs  Tale 
508.] 

soaciice  (70),  indeed,  truly.  [Cf. 
soothly,  Spenser,  F.  Q.  5.  10.  8.] 

sparian  (118),  spare.  [Ger. 
sparen.] 

spell  (47),  account. 

spillan  (113),  fling  away.  [Cf. 
Shak.,  Haml.  4.  5.  20.] 


spr^c  (51.  &),  speech;  language; 

tale.  [Ger.  Sprache.]  [sprechen. 
sprecan  (V.  106),  speak.  [Ger. 
springan  (III.  104),  spread.   [Ger. 

springen.  Mod.  Eng.  spring.] 
spryttan  (113),  bring  forth.    [Cf. 

Ger.  spriessen,  Eng.  sprout.] 
staefna,  see  stefna. 
stienen  (57),  stone.     [<  stan,  by 

16 ;  Ger.  steinen.] 
staeppan  (VI.  107),  step,  march. 
Stan  (43),  stone.     [Ger.  Stein.] 
standan  (VI.  107),  stand;  stand 

still ;  fall  upon. 
starian  (118),  gaze.     [Mod.  Eng. 

stare.] 
steap    (58),   lofty.      [Mod.  Eng. 

steep.] 
st^de  (44) ,  place,  position.    [Mod. 

Eng.    stead;     cf.    Ger.     Statt., 

Stdtte.] 
st^de-heard  (58),  firm,  strong. 
st^de-wang  (43),  plain. 
stef n  (51.  b),  voice.   [Ger.  Stimme  ; 

cf.  Chaucer,  KnighVs  Tale  1704, 

Spenser,  Shep.  Cal.y  Sept.  224.] 
stefn  (43),  prow.    [Cf .  '  from  stem 

to  stern.'] 
stefna  (stsef na)  (53) ,  prow. 
steoran,  see  stieran. 
steorra  (53) ,  star.    [Cf .  Ger.  Stern, 

Lat.  Stella,  Gr.  aar-f^p.] 
st^rced-ferha"       (58),      resolute- 

souled,  stout-hearted. 
stieran    (steoran)     (113),     steer. 

[Cf.  Ger.  steuern;    and  cf.  Gr. 

crravpSs  ?] 
stiern-mod    (styrn-)    (58),   stern 

of  mood. 
stig   (51.    b),   road,   course,    line. 

[Cf.   Mod.    Eng.  stile,    stirrup, 

stair.] 
stigan  (I.  102,  28),  ascend,  enter, 

go  aboard  ;  go  down  (cf .  Ps.  107. 


314 


VOCABULARY. 


23).  [Ger.  steigen,  Gr.  areixeLv ; 
cf.  Spenser,  F.  Q.  4.  9.  33.] 

stillan  (113;  164.  i),  calm,  ap- 
pease, hush.     [Ger.  stillen.'] 

stille  (59),  still;  quiet,  silent. 
[Ger.  stille.'] 

stilnes  (51.  5),  calm,  quietness. 

storm  (43),  storm.  [Cf.  Ger. 
Sturm.] 

stow  (51.  6),  place.  [Cf.  Mod. 
Eng.  stow.] 

strael  (43),  arroiv.    [Ger.  Strahl.] 

street  (51.  b),  street;  public  place. 
[<  Lat.  strata  ;  Ger.  Strasse.] 

strand  (43),  strand,  sea-shore. 
[Ger.  Strand.] 

Strang  (58,  65),  strong;  power- 
ful; violent;  hard,  severe, 
arduous.     [Cf.  Ger.  streng.] 

strangung  (51.  3),  invigoration, 
quickening. 

stream  (43),  stream,  cmrent. 
[Ger.  Strom.] 

stream-wielm  (-welm)  (43) , 
whirlpool,  maelstrom. 

string  (43),  rope;  plur.  cordage, 
rigging,  tackle.  [Cf.  Mod.  Eng. 
string.] 

str^ngre,  see  Strang. 

str^nglju  (51.  a;  144),  strength. 

streonan,  see  strienan. 

strienan  (streonan)  (113),  win 
over,  gain  over,  convert.  [See 
gestreon.] 

stund  (51.  6),  while;  stunde 
(176),  now.  [Ger.  Stunde,  ar- 
chaic Mod.  Eng.  stound,  as  in 
Chaucer,  KnighVs  Tale  354, 
Spenser,  F.Q.l.  8.  25,  38.] 

stycce-maelum  (72),  gradually, 
little  by  little.  [Cf.  Ger.  stuck- 
weise.] 

styrian  (118),  move;  flow,  roll. 
[Mod.  Eng.  stir.] 


styriendlic    (57),    moving,    that 

moves. 
styrman  (113),  storm.  [<  storm, 

17 ;  Ger.  stiirmen.] 
styrnmod,  see  stiernmod. 
sulh-scear  (43  ?) ,  plowshare.  [Cf . 

Lat.  sulcus.] 
sum  (89.  a;  151),  some^one);  (a) 

certain;    one.      [Cf.     Chaucer, 

KnighVs  Tale  397,  399.] 
sumer   (43.   5),   summer.      [Ger. 

Sommer.] 
sund  (47),  swimming  ;  course. 
sundor-ierfe  (-yrfe)  (44),  private 

X>roperty. 
sunne  (53. 1),  sun.    [Ger.  Sonne.] 
sunu  (45),  son.     [Ger.  Sohn.] 
suff-dsel     (43),     southern    part; 

south. 
suff-westerne  (59),  southwestern. 

[Cf.  Ger.  sudwest] 
swa,  so;  as;  yet;  since;  such; 

which  ;  call  swa,  see  eall ;  swa 

(swa)  .  .  .  swa  (202),  so  .  .  . 

as,   as  ...  as;    the  .  .  .  the; 

inasmuch  as ;  whether  .  .  .  or. 
sw^sendu    (47),    plur.,    viands, 

food.     [For  the  plural,  cf.  Lat. 

epulce.] 
swaefforian,  see  sw^e(o)i5'erian. 
swa-hwael5'er  (89.  a),  whichever. 
swa-hwast-swa  (89.  d),  what(so)- 

ever. 
swan  (43),  swan.    [Ger.  Schwan.] 
swa-swa,  like  ;  as  ;  just  as  ;  as  if. 
swatig      (47),     bloody.       [Ger. 

schweissig.] 
swa-SSeah,  nevertheless. 
swaicFu  (51.  a)-,  track,  footprint. 
swefan  (V.  106),  sleep. 
sw^efel     (43),     sulphur.       [Ger. 

Schwefel.] 
sweg  (43),  music. 
sweg-craeft  (43),  music. 


VOCABCTLARY. 


315 


swegel  (47),  sky,  heaven. 
SAveging  (51.  3),  noise. 
sw^ncan    (113),   weary,  fatigue, 

wear  out.      [Formed  from   the 

second  stem  of  swincan,  by  16.] 
sweora  (53),  neck. 
sweorcan  (III.  104),  grow  dark, 

become  overoast. 
sweord  (swyrd)  (47),  sword. 
sweot  (47),  troop,  army. 
sweotol  (swutol)  (57),  clear. 
sweotole  (70),  clearly,  plainly. 
sweotoUice  (yO),  plainly,  clearly. 
sw^rian  (VI.  107),  swear.     [Ger. 

schworen.'] 
swete  (59),  siveet.    [Ger.  sitss  ;  cf. 

Lat.  suavis,  Gr.  7?5i/s.] 
swetnes  (51.5;  144),  siveetness ; 

goodness. 
swe(o)9'erian  (118),  depart,  melt 

away,  vanish;  subside. 
swican  (I.  102 ;  164.  w) ,  desert. 
swift  (58),  swift,  fleet. 
swiftnes  (51.  6;  144),  swiftness, 

celerity. 
swige  (53.  1),  silence. 
swigian    (118),    be    silent,    keep 

silence. 
swilc    (89.   a),    such,    this    sort. 

[<  *swalic  <  swsi  +  lie;    cf. 

swich,  Chaucer,  Prol.  3,] 
swilce,  adv.,  likewise. 
swilce  (swylce),  conj.,  as  if;  eac 

swilce,  swilce  eac,  see  eac. 
sw^imman  (III.  104),  swim.    [Ger. 

schwimmen.^ 
swincan    (III.    104),   ivork   with 

effort.     [Cf.  swincan,  and  ar- 
chaic Mod.   Eng.  swink,   as  in 

Chaucer,  Prol.  186,  Milton,  Com. 

293.] 
sw^ingan  (III.  104) ,  whip  9  throw  9 
swiiaP  (58,  64,  30),  strong;  comp. 

right.     [Cf.  Ger.  geschwind.~\ 


swiS'e  (swy'Se)  (70),  much, 
greatly,  very;  comp.  rather, 
more. 

swiijlice  (70) ,  exceedingly,  greatly. 

swil^-mod.  (58),  vehement- souled. 

swutol,  see  sweotol. 

swylce,  see  swilee. 

sw^yrd,  see  sw^eord. 

SAvy3'e,  see  swiiSre. 

sybb,  see  sibb. 

sylf,  see  self. 

syllan,  see  s^llan. 

syllic,  see  sellic. 

syn(n)  (51.  b),  sin.  [Cf.  Ger. 
Sunde.^ 

synderlic  (57,  146),  separate,  in- 
dividual.    [Cf.  Ger.  sonderlich.'] 

syndon,  see  wesan. 

syn-fuU  (58),  sinful. 

sySfffan,  see  si9'9'an. 

syxtyne,  see  siextlene. 


T. 

tacen  (47),  sign,  signal.  [Ger. 
Zeichen,  Mod.  Eng.  token.^ 

tacen-bora  (53),  groomsman  (lit. 
standard-bearer) . 

tacnian  (118),  signify,  betoken, 
indicate. 

tiecean  (114),  teach. 

tselan  (113),  blame,  censure. 

tal  (51.  6),  censure;  to  tale,  cen- 
surable, blameworthy. 

tear  (43),  tear.  [Cf.  Ger.  Zdhre 
and  Gr.  MKpv.'] 

t^lg  (43),  dye. 

tempel  (47),  temple.  [<  Lat. 
templum.'] 

teon  (II.  lQZ),pull,  bring.  [Ger. 
ziehen.'\ 

teon  (tian)  (113),  arrange,  or- 
dain. 

ticcen  (47),  goat.     [Ger.  ZicA:e.] 


316 


VOCABULARY. 


tid  (51.  1),  time,  season;  while; 
day;  hour.  [Ger.  Zeit,  Mod. 
Eng.  tide  in  Christmastide, 
Whitsuntide.'] 

tigel-fag  (58),  variegated  with 
tiles,     [tigel  <  Lat.  tegula.] 

tigris  (Lat.),  tiger. 

til,  to.  [Mod.  Eng.  till;  cf.  Ger. 
Ziel.] 

tllian  (118),  gain,  obtain,  pro- 
vide. [Ger.  zielen,  Mod.  Eng. 
till.'] 

tilung  (51.  3),  acquisition,  pro- 
curing. 

tima  (53),  time. 

tlmbran  (115.  &),  huild,  construct. 
[Ger.  zimmern.] 

tin  (47),  tin.     [Ger.  Zinn.] 

tinterg  (^1),  punishment. 

tir  (43),  glory,  fame.    [Ger.  Zier.] 

tiS"  (51.  b  ;  28),  6oo?i. 

til^ian  (118;  159.  a;  28),  (/raw«, 
bestow.     [Cf.  tiiS".] 

to,  prep.,  to;  for;  according  to; 
the  sign  of  the  gerund,  and  gov- 
erning the  following  infinitive 
as  a  noun  in  the  dative.  [Ger. 
zu.] 

to,  adv.,  too.     [Ger.  zu.] 

to-  (142).  [Cf.  Spenser,  F.  Q.  4. 
7.  8  ;  5.  9.  10.] 

to-berstan  (IIL  104),  break  up, 
go  to  pieces.  [Cf.  Chaucer, 
EnighVs  Tale  1753,  1833,  1899.] 

to-brecan  (IV.  105),  break  in 
pieces,  shatter.  [Ger.  zer- 
brechen.] 

to-daeg,  to-day.  [Cf.  Ger.  heut 
zu  Tage.] 

to-dselan  (113),  divide,  part  asun- 
der, separate,  disperse.  [Ger. 
zertheilen.] 

to-don  (140),  separate. 

to-driefan     (113),     drive    away. 


[drgefan  <  second  stem  of 
drifan  (102),  by  16.] 

to-foran,  before. 

to-gaedere,  together. 

to-geanes,  towards,  to  meet. 

to-ge-iecan  (113),  add. 

to-ge-lSdan  (113),  bring. 

to-glidan  (I.  102).,  glide  away^ 
slip  away. 

to-hopa  (53),  hope.  [Cf.  Ger. 
hoffen.] 

to-lireosan  (II.  103),  fall  away. 

tolite  (53.  1),  conflict. 

to  liwon,  why. 

to-nilddes,  amidst,  in  the  midst 
of 

top  (43),  top?  ball?    [Ger.  Zopf.] 

torht  (58),  resplendent. 

torr  (43),  tower;  watch-tower; 
crag.     [<  Lat.  turris.] 

to-sceacan  (VI.  107),  depart,  pass 
away. 

to-sceadan  (R.  110),  separate, 
divide. 

to-slitan  (I.  102),  rend,  tear,  de- 
stroy, [rupt. 

to-twaeman  (113),  divide ;  inter- 

to-weorpan  (III.  104),  blot  out, 
forgive  (lit.  break  in  pieces) ; 
quell,  compose,  Lat.  dissolvere. 

trsef  (47.  4),  building. 

tree  (47.  3),  tree. 

treow-cynn  (47),  sort  of  tree. 

treownes  (51.  5  ;  144),  trust. 

treow-wyrhta  (53,  147),  carpen- 
ter.    [Cf.  wyrhta.] 

trum  (57),  secure,  strong. 

trymman  (115.  a),  confirm,  es- 
tablish, strengthen.  [<  trum, 
hy  16.] 

tungol  (47.  6),  star,  heavenly 
body. 

tusc  (43),  tusk. 

twa,  see  twegen. 


VOCABULARY. 


317 


twegen  (78,  79),  two.    [Mod.  Eng. 

twain,  Chaucerian  tweye  {Prol. 

704),  archaic  Ger.  zween.'] 
tw^lf    (78,    24),    twelve.      [Ger. 

zwolf.^ 
twentig     (78),     twenty.        [Ger. 

zwanzig.'] 
tweonian  (118  ;  159.  6),  doubt. 
Tyrisc  (57),  Tyrian. 
tyrnan     (113),     revolve.      [Mod. 

Eng.  turn.'] 


e. 


ara,  pron. ;  see  84,  87.     [Cf .  Chau- 
cer, Prol.  498.] 
SI'S    (84.   1),    the^i.,   when;    there., 

where.     [Ger.  da;  archaic  Mod. 

Eng.  tho.,  as  in  Chaucer,  Knighfs 

Tale  135,  Spenser,  F.  Q.   1.   1. 

18.] 
ffaece  (53.  1),  roof.     [Ger.  Dach, 

Mod.  Eng.  thatch.] 
lafgem,  see  84. 
iSaer    (75),    there,    ivhere.       [Cf. 

Chaucer,  Prol.  34,  172,  547.] 
laCaera,  Sfaere,  see  84. 
Bfaer-on,  therein. 
S'aer-to-eacan,  besides,  in  addition 

to  that. 
iaCaes,  see  84. 
iSfaes-iye,  see  157.  1. 
)Sf«t,  see  84  ;  189.  3. 
9" set,  conj.,  ^/laJ. 
iaraette  (34),  that;  to  iafon  iSfaette, 

so  that.     [<a'aet-8'e.] 
13'afian     (-igan)     (118),     permit, 

allow. 
ffa-hwaeSfre,  yet. 
iaCa-hwile-lJe,  while,  so   long  as. 

[Cf.  Ger.  dieweil.] 
Q'am,  see  84. 
ffanan   (i^e)    (75),    thence,   from 

there;  whence ;  from  which;  of 


which;  by  which.  \_Ger.  dannen; 
cf.  Mod.  Eng.  thence.] 

ffanc  (43),  thank(s).  [Ger.  Dank.] 

ijanciaii  (118;  159.  a),  thank. 
[Ger.  danken.] 

iS'ancoI-inod.  (58),  discreet,  heed- 
ful, attentive. 

aPanc-snottor  ('Sgnc-snottur)  (57), 
wise  of  thought. 

i9'ara,  see  84. 

afas,  see  85. 

aPa-afa,  when;  aPa-afa  . . .  ffa  (202), 
when  .  .  .  (then). 

afa-aPe,  afe,  see  87. 

are  .  .  .  aCe     (202),     whether  .  .  . 


aCeah   (^eh),    though,    although; 

yet;     aTeah  .  .  .  afeah     (202), 

though  .  .  .  yet.     [Ger.  doch.] 
'Seah-hwsaifre,  nevertheless. 
ffeah-afe,  though, although;  afeah- 

afe  .  .  .  hwaeaCre,  a^eah  afe  .  .  . 

swa-afeah    (202),    though  .  .  . 

yet. 
afearf  (51.  b  ;  21.  a),  need  ;  profit, 

benefit.     [Cf.  aPurfan.] 
ffearfa  (53;   21.  a),  needy  {one), 

poor.     [Cf.  afurfan.] 
afearfendlic  (57),  poor. 
afearle    (70),    greatly,   very,   very 

much,  exceedingly. 
aPearlice  (70),  violently. 
aCeaw  (43) ,  conduct ;  plur.  morals, 

virtues.    [Cf.  Spenser,  F.Q.I.  1. 

33.] 
afegn  (43,  28,  24),  vassal,  retainer, 

thane.      [Archaic   Ger.  Beg  en  ; 

cf.   Gr.  T^KVOV.] 

afeh,  see  aTeah. 

af^ncean    (114),    think,   consider, 

reflect;  devise.     [Ger.  denken.] 
ar^nden  ("S^nde),  inasmuch  as. 
afenian  (118;  164.  e;  28),  serve, 

minister  to. 


318 


VOCABULARY. 


ffenung  (51.  3  ;  28),  ministration, 

service  ;  first  course. 
iSFeod  (51.  &),  people,  nation;  re- 
gion,  country,   province.      [Cf. 

Ger.  Deutsch.'] 
tSPeoden  (43),  lord.    [<  iSeo6. ;  cf. 

dryhten  <  dryht,     cyning  < 

cynn.] 
iflfeoden-hold  (56) ,  faithful  to  his 

lord. 
saCeod-guma    (53),    man    of    the 

people. 
iJeod-scipe    (44.   1 ;    144),    disci- 
pline. 
saCeos,  see  85. 

ffeow  (58),  bond,  unfree,  serving. 
ffeow-dom  (43),  service. 
ffes,  see  85. 
»ider     (Syder)      (75),      thither; 

wherever. 
ffiestru    ("Srlostru)     (47),     plur., 

darkness.    [Cf.  Ger.  duster,  and, 

for  the  plural,  Lat.  tenehrce.'] 
ffin    (83,    81),   thy,   thine.     [Ger. 

dein.'] 
ffinen    (51.   5),   handmaid.     [Cf. 

ffegn.] 
iflfing   (47),   thing;  sake;   aenlge 

fSinga,,    in    any    way,    by   any 

means. 
ffing-gewrit  (47),  document. 
fSis,  ffisne,  ffissa,  saTisse,  iS'isses, 

iS'lssum,  see  85. 
ffiwen  (51.  5),  handmaid. 
iafolian  (118),  endure,  experience. 

[Scotch  thole ;  cf.  Ger.  dulden."] 
iSon,  see   84,  175  ff. ;    sometimes 

for    iSTsem,    SSam,    through    the 

shortened  d'am,  saCan. 
ffone,  see  84. 
!9oiine,  then;  when;  since;  than 

(with  comparatives) ;  iSounQ  .  .  . 

9onne  (202),  when  .  .  .  {then). 
iSofSoT  (43),  ball 


ffrean  (113),  rebuke. 

aCreat  (43),  band,  crowd,  multi- 
tude. 

a^reatian  (118),  reprove,  chide. 
[Cf.  Mod.  Eng.  threaten.^ 

larridda  (78),  third.     [Ger.  dritte.^ 

tSrie  («ry)  (78,  79),  three.  [Ger. 
drei.l 

ffrines  (51.  5  ;  144),  trinity. 

ffringan  (111.1(A),  press  forward. 
[Ger.  dringen;  cf.  Mod.  Eng. 
throng.'] 

ffriostrii,  .see  iJiestru.        [dreist.'] 

ffriste  (59),  bold,  confident.     [Ger. 

iff ri tig  (78),  thirty. 

saCrilffcyning,  see  S'ryS'cyning. 

(ffroht-heard  (58),  patient,  much- 
enduring. 

iflCrowian  (118),  suffer,  endure. 

ffrowung  (51.  3),  passion. 

iffry,  see  saCrie. 

a'rym(m)  (43),  force;  troop; 
glory. 

ffrym-faest  (58,  146),  glorious. 

ffrym-full  (58,  146),  glorious. 

iffrymlic  (57),  glorious. 

afrym-sittende  (61),  sitting  in 
glory. 

iSryfS  (51.  &),  might;  the  transla- 
tion of  J>reata  J^rylffuin,  p.  219, 
1.  3,  is  doubtful. 

iffryiaC-bearn  (47,  38),  mighty  son, 
i.e.  mighty  youth. 

ffryff-cyning  («rl«-)  (43),  king 
of  might. 

iffu,  see  81. 

(ffahton,  see  iffyiicean. 

iffurfaii  (131),  need.  [Ger.  (be)- 
diirfen.] 

sffurh,  through;  throughout;  in; 
by;  by  means  of;  iaFurh  eall, 
see  eall.  [Mod.  Eng,  th{o)r- 
ough;  Chaucer  has  thurghf 
KnighVs  Tale  362.] 


VOCABULARY. 


319 


ffurstig      (57),      thirsty.       [Ger. 

durstigJ] 
aCus,  thus  (always  with  a  verb  of 

utterance  in  these  texts) . 
ffusend  (78,  79),  thousand. 
i0Fnsend-maelum    (72),    by    thou- 


ffweal  (47),  hath. 

ffwieres  (^weores)  (71),  trans- 
versely. 

ffy,  see  84,  175  ff. 

ffys,  see  85. 

ffyder,  see  Sfider. 

afy-laes-aPe,  lest.  [Cf.  Lat.  quo- 
minus.'] 

afyllic  (89.  a),  such  like,  this 
kind. 

fSyn  (113),  coerce,  restrain. 

lafyncean  (114  ;  164.  l),  seem. 
[Ger.  dunken,  Mod.  Eng.  (me)- 
thi7iks.] 

ffyrel  (47),  hole.  [<  *ffurliil 
(16).  Cf.  Chaucer,  Knight's 
Tale  1852;  Spenser,  F.  Q.  1.  11. 
20,  22.] 

ffyrstan  (113,  190),  thirst.  [Ger. 
dursten,  Mod.  Eng.  thirst.] 

Sfyssum,  see  85. 


U. 

ufan-weard  (58;  166.  1),  upper, 
above. 

Ohte  (53.  1),  dawn,  daybreak. 

un-aesacele  {b9),  plebeian,  simple. 

un-a-s^cgende  (61),  unspeakable, 
ineffable. 

un-a-swundenlice  (70),  forth- 
with, without  delay. 

un-cuff  (58,  30),  unknown.  [Mod. 
Eng.  uncouth;  see  Chaucer, 
Knight's  Tale  1639,  Spenser, 
ii^.  ^.  1.  11.  20,  Shak.,  Tit.  And. 
2.  3.  211.] 


I  un-cystig  (57,  146),  wicked. 

under,  under;  among.  [Ger. 
unter.] 

under-fon  (R.  110),  assume;  re- 
ceive, take  in,  entertain. 

under-standan  (VI.  107),  under- 
stand. 

under- afeodnes  (51.  5;  144),  sub- 
mission.    [See  underSfiedan.] 

under-gfiedan  (113),  subjoin,  add. 
[<  ffeod,  by  16.] 

un-easaTe,  with  difficulty,  hardly. 
[Cf.  unieiafe,  and  F.  Q.2.1.  27.] 

un-for-culS  (58),  excellent.  [Cf. 
fracoS".] 

un-f  or-wandiendlice  (70) ,  boldly, 
saucily,  forwardly. 

un-ge-cnawen  (62,  109),  un- 
known. 

un-ge-l£ered  (62),  untaught,  un- 
learned, uneducated.  [See  Iser- 
an.] 

un-ge-limp  (47),  mishap,  ill-luck. 

un-ge-rydelice  (70),  suddenly,  on 
a  sudden. 

un-ge-sewenlic  (57),  invisible. 

un-ge-iaranc-full  (58,  146),  un- 
thankful, luigrateful. 

un-ge-ffweernes  (51.  5;  144), 
wickedness,  depravity. 

un-ge-wened  (63) ,  unexpected. 
[See  wenan.] 

un-ge-werged  (62) ,  unwearied. 
[See  werig.] 

un-ge-wunelic  (57, 146),  unusual. 
[See  wunian]. 

un-iesare  (59),  difficult.  [See 
uneaSfe.] 

un-lifiende  (-lyfigende)  (61),  un- 
living,  dead.     [Cf.  libban.] 

unnan  (129;  159.  a),  grant,  allow. 
[See  est.] 

un-nyt  (57,  155),  devoid,  desti- 
tute. 


320 


VOCABULARY. 


un-riht-wis  (58,  146),  unright- 
eous. 

un-riht-wisnes  (51.  5;  144),  un- 
righteousness. 

un-rim  (47;  154.  a;  142),  multi- 
tude. 

un-rot  (58),  son-oicful,  dejected. 

un-sc^afiffig  (57,  146),  innocent. 

un-scrydan  (113,  162),  divest. 
[See  scrydan.] 

un-softe  (70),  harshly,  cruelly. 
[Cf.  Ger.  unsa7ift.] 

un-stille  (59),  unquiet,  restless. 

un-stilnes  (51.  5;  144),  disorder, 
confusion. 

un-trum  (57),  sick. 

un-trymnes  (51.  5;  144),  ilbiess, 
disease,  infirmity.    [<  untrum.] 

up,  up. 

up-a-hiefednes  (51.  5;  144),;)nV?e, 
arrogance.    [Cf.  upah^bban.] 

up-a-h^bban  (VI.  107),  lift  up. 
[Cf.  Chaucer,  KnighVs  Tale 
1570.] 

upji-standan  (upp-)  (VI.  107), 
rise  up.     [Cf.  Ger.  a%iferstehen.'\ 

up-a-stigan  (I.  102),  rise,  as- 
cend. 

up-gan  (141),  go  up.  [Ger.  auf- 
gehen.'] 

up-gang  (43),  rising. 

nplic  (57,  146),  upper,  above. 

uppan,  upo7i,  on  top  of. 

uppe,  up. 

Ore  (user)  (83),  our,  ours.  [Ger. 
unser.] 

nrig-feiJere  (59),  dewy-feathered. 

iirnon,  see  iernaii, 

user,  see  Ore. 

ut,  out. 

ut-a-blawan  (R.  109),  blow  out, 
breathe  out,  exhale. 

utan,  about,  externally,  on  the  out- 
side,    [Ger.  aussen.'] 


ate  (69),  outside. 
ut-gan  (141),  go  out. 
ut-gangan  (K.  109),  go  out. 
uton  (wuton),  let  us. 

W. 

-w^eccen  (51.  b),  vigil. 

waid  (47),  water,  billow,  flood. 

wfced  (51.  6),  garment.  [Cf. 
Chaucer,  Knight's  Tale  148, 
Spenser,  F.  Q.  2.  3.  21,  Shak., 
Son7i.  76.  G,  and  our  'widow's 
weeds.'] 

wSdla  (53),  poor  man,  destitute 
one. 

waBfels  (43),  cloak,  mantle. 

wSg  (43),  billow,  flood.  [Cf. 
Chaucer,  K.  T.  1100,  Spenser, 
F.  Q.  2.  12.  4.] 

■wSg-flota  (53),  water-floater,  ship. 

wael  (47),  slaughter.  [Cf.  Wal- 
halla,  Walkyrie.~\ 

wael-gifre  (59),  greedy  for  slaugh- 
ter. 

wael-grim  (57),  fierce,  cruel,  safi- 
guinary. 

wael-hreow  (58),  cruel. 

wael-hreownes  (61.  5;  144),  cru- 
elty. 

W£elm,  see  wielm. 

wael-scel  (47 '0?  carnage. 

waepen  (47.  1),  weapon;  plur. 
arms. 

WaBr  (47),  ocean. 

wfcer  (51.  &),  covenant ;  protection, 
care,  safe-keeping. 

Avter-faest  (58,  146),  covenant- 
keeping,  faithful. 

wiestm  (43),  growth,  size  ;  fruit. 
[Cf.  weaxan,  and  Ger.  Wachs- 
tum  ;  Mod.  Eng.  waist.'] 

waeter  (47.  1,  6),  water*  [Ger. 
Wasser.] 


VOCABULARY. 


321 


waeter-broga  (53),  water  terror, 
terrible  waters. 

wseter-^gesa  (-^gsa)  (63),  dread 
of  the  waters,  dreadful  loaters. 

waeter-flod  (43),  water-flood. 

waeter-scipe  (44.  1),  body  of 
water. 

wafian  (118),  weaver. 

wald,  see  weald. 

waldend,  see  wealdend. 

wana  (158),  wanting,  lacking. 

wang  (43),  field,  mead. 

wann  (wQnn)  (58),  dark,  black. 
[Mod.  Eng.  wan.'] 

waroS",  waruij,  see  wearoS". 

wat,  see  witan. 

wea  (53),  woe.     [Cf.  Ger.  Weh.~\ 

weald  (wald)  (43),  weald,  for- 
est. 

■wealdend  (waldend)  (43.  Q),  ruler, 
lord. 

wealh-stod  (43),  interpreter,  trans- 
lator. 

weall  (43) ,  wall,  rampart.  [<  Lat. 
vallum.'] 

weallan  (R.  109),  seethe,  foam. 
[See  wielm.] 

weard  (43),  guardian,  warden. 
[Ger.  -wart.] 

wearoff  (waro'S,  waru'S)  (43), 
strand,  shore,  beach. 

wearo9'-gewinn  (waru'S-)  (47), 
strife  of  the  shore,  i.e.  surf, 
breakers. 

w^earS",  see  weoriafan. 

weax  (47),  wax.     [Ger.  'Wachs.] 

weaxan  (K.  109,24),  grow,  be  fruit- 
ful, increase.  [Ger.  wachsen; 
cf.  Shak.,  M.  N.  D.  2.  1.  56, 
Haml.  1.  3.  12.] 

w^ccean  (114),  wake. 

w^cg  (43),  metal.  [Mod.  Eng. 
wedge;  cf.  Shak.,  Bich.  III.  1. 
4.  26.] 


weder  (47),  weather.  [Ger.  Wet- 
ter.] 

weder-candel  (51.  5),  weather- 
candle,  i.e.  the  sun. 

weg  (43,  24),  way.     [Ger.  Weg.] 

wegan  (V.  106),  carry. 

wel,  well. 

wela  (53),  wealth,  riches,  weal. 
[Cf.  Chaucer,  Knight's  Tale  37.] 

welig  (57,  146),  rich,  ivealthy, 
abounding.  [Cf.  our  'well  off,' 
'  well  to  do.'] 

wel-willende  (61),  benevolent, 
kind-hearted,  generous. 

wel-willendlice  (70),  lovingly. 

w^el-willendnes  (51.  5;  144),  gen- 
erosity, liberality. 

wen  (51.  1),  expectation,  prospect, 
chance;  -wen  is  iSfset,  perhaps, 
perchance.     [Ger.  Wahn.] 

wenan  (113;  156.  9^),  expect,  look 
for;  think,  supjjose,  imagine. 
[Ger.  wdhyien,  Mod.  Eng.  ween; 
cf.  Shak.,  1  Hen.  VI.  2.  5.  88.] 

w^^ndan  (113),  turn;  return; 
translate.  [Ger.  wenden;  cf. 
Mod.  Eng.  wend,  went.] 

winding  (51.  3),  rotation. 

w^nian  (116),  accustom,  train. 

weoloc  (43,  20),  cockle,  whelk. 

weoloc-read  (58),  scarlet. 

weoloc-sciell  (51.  b),  cockle-shell. 

weolor  (-ur)  (51.  b;  20),  lip. 

weorc  (47;  21.  &),  work;  exer- 
cise; deed;  energy.   [Ger.  TFe?-^.] 

weorod  (weorud,  werod)  (47,  20), 
host.     [<  wer.] 

weoriafan  (wyr'San)  (104;  187; 
21.  b),  become;  be;  weoriaran 
to  sometimes  nearly  ^weorlJan. 
[Ger.  werden ;  cf .  our  '  woe 
worth  the  day.'] 

weorffian  (118;  21.  b),  honor,  ex- 
alt.   [Cf.  Shak.,  Lear  2.  2.  128.] 


322 


VOCABULARY. 


weoriJ-full  (58,  146),  honorable. 

weorlJlic  (-lie)  (57,  146),  honor- 
able; exalted. 

■weorfflice  (70),  worthily ^  honor- 
ably. 

weoraf-mynt  (43  —  orig.  51.  b  — 
144;  34),  dignity.  [<*weoraf- 
inundij>a.] 

weoriaf-scipe  (44.  1;  143),  honor., 
dignity.  [Mod.  Eng.  worship; 
cf!  Shak.,  W.  T.  1.  2.  314,  Lear 
1.  4.  288.] 

weoruld,  see  woruld. 

wepan  (R.  109),  iceep.  [<  wop, 
by  16.] 

wer  (43),  man,  husband.  [Cf. 
Lat.  vir-l 

wer-had  (43),  male  sex.  [Cf. 
had.] 

werig  (57,  146),  weary. 

■werod,  see  weorod. 

wer-ffeod  (51.  b),  nation. 

wesan  (138,  187),  be. 

westan,  from  the  icest. 

west-sse  (43;  51.  &),  sea  on  the 
west. 

wic  (47),  dwelling.  [Cf.  Mod. 
Eng.  bailiwick;  cognate  with 
Lat.  vicusy  Gr.  okos.] 

-wiclan  (118),  visiY,  lodge,  sojourn. 
[<  wic] 

wid  (58),  wide.     [Ger.  weit.'] 

wide  (70),  loidely,  far. 

wid-fereude  (61),  traveling  (trav- 
eler) from  a  distance. 

wid-faeiaCine  (59),  capacious,  ex- 
tensive.    [See  faeaCm.] 

wTd-gill  {b%)  y  extensive  ;  spacious. 

wid-gilnes  (51.  5;  144),  extent, 
compass. 

wielm  (wylm,  wselm)  (43),  boil- 
ing, swelling,  surging.  [See 
weallan,  and  Mod.  Eng.  whelm.'] 

wierdan  (113),  mar,  injure. 


wif  (47,  38),  wife  ;  woman.  [Ger. 
Weib ;  cf.  Chaucer,  Prol.  445, 
Shak.,  T.  N.  5.  139.] 

wif-had  (43),  female  sex. 

wig  (47),  war. 

wigend  (wiggend)  (43.  6),  war- 
rior. 

wig-hus  (47),  icar-house,  tower. 

wiht  (47;  cf.  89.  b),  whit. 

wild  (58),  tcild.     [Ger.  wild.'] 

wildeor  (47,  dS),wild  animal,  wild 
beast. 

willa  (53),  will;  request;  desire; 
delight.     [Ger.  Wille.] 

willan  (wyllan)  (139,  188),  will, 
wish,  desire.  [Cf.  Ger.  wollen, 
Lat.  velle.] 

wilnian  (118),  desire.  [See  Chau- 
cer, Knight's  Tale  751.] 

win  (47),  wine.  [<Lat.  ??mwm; 
Ger.  Wein.] 

wind  (43),  wind.     [Ger.  Wi7id.] 

windan  (III.  104),^?/  about.  [Ger. 
winden.  Mod.  Eng.  wind.] 

windig  (57,  146),  windy.  [Ger. 
windig.] 

wine  (44.  2,  4),  friend. 

wine-iS'earfende  (61),  needing  a 
friend.     [Cf.  ffearf.] 

wTn-geard  (43),  vineyard. 

winnan  (III.  104),  struggle,  toil. 

winstre  (60),  left. 

winter    (43.    5),    winter    {year) ; 

.    storm.     [Ger.  Winter.] 

winterlic  (57,  146),  winter,  win- 
try.    [Ger.  winterlich.] 

wir  (43),  wire. 

wis  (58;  155.  e),  wise.  [Ger. 
weise.] 

wisian  (118),  point  out.  [Ger. 
weisen.] 

wislic  (57,  146),  wise,  true. 

wist  (51.  b),  provisions,  food. 
[Cf.  wesan.] 


VOCABULARY. 


323 


witan  (126),  know.  [Mod.  Eng. 
to  wit.,  Ger.  wissen  ;  cf .  Chaucer, 
K.  T.  402,  Spenser,  F.  Q.  1.  3. 6.] 

witan  (I.  102),  blame,  censure. 
[Cf/ Spenser,  F.  Q.  2.  12.  16.] 

wite  (48),  punishment,  penalty, 
torture.     [Cf.  witan.] 

witga  (53),  prophet  (psalmist  9). 

witodlice  (uutedlice)  (70),  in- 
deed, truly. 

wiff,  with  (hostility)  ;  against; 
toward;  in  return  for.  [Not 
to  be  confounded  with  mid ;  cf . 
withstand.'] 

wiSfer-  (142). 

wiiafer-trod  (47),  retreat. 

wiiSFer-wiiina  (53),  adversary. 

wiff-innan,  within. 

wiiar-sacan  (VI.  107;  164.  w),  re- 
nounce. 

wiff-standan  (VI.  107),  with- 
stand. 

wiiar-iafingian  (118),  talk  with, 
speak  to.  [Cf.  Mod.  Eng.  hust- 
ings. ] 

wlanc  (58),  proud,  lordly. 

wl^ncu  (51.  a),  pomp,  splendor. 
[<  wlanc,  by  16.] 

wlite  (44),  beauty.  [Cf.  and- 
w^lita.] 

wlite-beorht  (58),  beautiful. 

wlitig  (57, 146),  beautiful,  comely. 

wolcen  (47),  cloud.  [Cf.  Ger. 
Wolke,  Mod.  Eng.  welkin.] 

w^olde,  see  willan. 

wQnn,  see  w^ann. 

Avop  (43),  weeping  (tears). 

word  (47),  loord.     [Ger.  Wort.] 

word-hord  (47,  147),  treasury  of 
words.     [Cf.  Ger.  Hort.] 

word-loca  (53,  147),  coffer  of 
words. 

w^orhte,  see  wyrcean. 

w^orn  (43),  multitude. 


woruld  (51. 1,  3;  26;  20),  world; 

in  woruld  worulde,  for  ever 

and  ever. 
w^oruld-bisgu    (51.    a),    worldly 

occupation. 
woruld-craeft  (43),  secular  art, 

secular  occupation. 
woruld-ge-(5'yng9'  (51.  6),  worldly 

honor,  worldly  dignity. 
woruld-lif  (47) ,  worldly  life. 
woruld-sped  (51.  6),  worldly  suc- 
cess. 
wr^ccean  (114),  awake,  arouse. 
wreon  (I.  102),  clothe. 
wr^lSian  (118),  support,  uphold. 
w^rigon,  see  w^reon. 
wudu  (45),  forest,  wood. 
wudu-bearu  (-bearo)  (43,  7),  for- 
est, grove. 
wuldor  (47),  glory,  splendor. 
w^uldor-cyning     (43),     king    of 

glory,    king    of  majesty.      [Cf. 

Ps.  24.  7.] 
wuldor-dream  (43),  heavenly  joy, 

heavenly  rapture  (lit.  glory-joy). 
wuldor- feeder  (43.  8),  father  of 

glory. 
wuldor-spedig  (57,  l^Q),  glorious. 
wuldor-9'rym(m)   (43),  glorious 

majesty. 
wuldrian  (118),  glorify,  magnify, 

celebrate. 
wulf  (43,  24),  wolf     [Ger.  Wolf] 
wund  (58),  wounded,  sore.    [Ger. 

wund.] 
wundenlocc  (58),  curly-haired. 
wundor  (47.  1),  wonder.     [Ger. 

Wunder.] 
wundorlic  (57,  146),  wonderful. 

[Ger,  wunderlich.] 
wundorlice     (70) ,     wondrously. 

[Cf.  Chaucer,  Prol.  84.] 
wundrian  (118),  wonder.     [Ger. 

wundern.] 


324 


VOCABULARY. 


wunian  (118),  dwell,  remain,  live. 
[Ger.  wohnen  ;  cf.  Chaucer,  Prol. 
388,  Spenser,  F.  ^.  2.  1.  51.] 

wunung  (51.  S),  dwelling.  [Ger. 
Wohnung ;  cf.  Chaucer,  Prol. 
606,  Spenser,  F.  Q.  6.  5.  13.] 

wurdon,  see  weorffan. 

'wuton,  see  uton. 

wylian,  see  willan. 

wylm,  see  wielm. 

wyn-sum  (57,  146),  winsome, 
pleasant.     [Ger.  iconnesam.} 

wyn-sumlice  (70),  winsomely. 

wyrcean  (114;  161;  184.  a), 
work ;  do ;  construct,  make, 
build;  yield.  [Cf.  Ger.  wirken, 
and  Chaucer,  KnighVs  Tale 
1901.] 

wyrhta  (53),  craftsman,  work- 
man, maker.  [Cf.  wyrcean ; 
Mod.  Eng.  -Wright  (see  Chaucer, 
Prol.  614).] 

wyrm  (43),  loorm.    [Ger.  Wtirm.l 

wyrm-cynn  (47),  ki7id  of  worms. 

wyrt  (51.  1),  herb.  [Mod.  Eng. 
wort;  cf.  Ger.  Wurz,  Wurzel, 
Gewiirz,  and  Chaucer,  Nun'^s 
Priest's  Tale  401.] 

wyrt-ge-mang  (47),  spice. 


wyrt-ge-m^ngnes  (51.  6;    147), 

spice. 
wyscan  (113),  wish.     [Ger.  wiin- 

schen.] 


yean,  see  iecan.  {_ubel.'] 

yfel  (57),  evil,  wicked,  bad.    [Ger. 

yfel  (47),  evil. 

yfele  (70),  evil,  wrongly. 

ynib(e),  about. 

ymb-  (142). 

ynib-clyppan  (113),  embrace. 

ymb-hon  (R.  110),  surround. 

ymb-hwyrft  (43),  compass,  cir- 
cuit; orbit. 

ymb-hycgean  (124),  consider. 

ymb-s^llan  (114),  envelop;  beset. 

ynib-sittan  (V.  106,  142),  sit 
around. 

ymb-trymman  (115.  a),  sur- 
round. 

ymb-utan,  about,  around. 

yrre,  see  ierre. 

yS"  (51.  6  ;  30),  wave,  billow,  flood. 
[Cf.  Lat.  unda,  and  30.] 

ygf-bord  (47),  ship  ? 

yaf-Iad  (51.  &;  215),  billow-road. 

yaf-lid  (47,  215),  ship. 


Note.  — The  EWS.  forms  of  sae  (p.  310)  are:  sing.  nom.  sse,  gen. 
8868,  dat.  sse,  ace.  sse.  Other  forms  are :  sing.  gen.  dat.  ssewe ;  plur. 
nom.  ace.  sses,  see,  dat.  seeum,  stewum. 


„^  14  DAY  USE 

RETUKN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

MNEWAIS  ONIY-TEI.  NO.  642^05 

nils  book  IS  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below  or 

Renewed  books  are  subjea  to  immedUte  tecaU 


_  RECErVED 


tOANDEen 


-  MAR  4     mi  ^ 


_     |«;(IB.JM  8  77 


_  RECCId  AU62  0  '8a 


--4AAB-JL^ 


--JfJXM/L. 


LD  21A-40to-2,'69 
(J6057sl0)476 — A-32 


(6889sl0)476B 


,  General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


Uni 


of  California 
rkeley 


X 


\ 


^^ 


YB  37757 fe, 


?^  .  luc.(^  "5  /  '^:  '^  I      >'    ti-lv  .> 


•4  (__  - 


■*  /■  >^A. 


